Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
31B-179 (5)
LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 16700 COMPUTER CABLING SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT'S A The General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Cable and condut system for fixture computer system. 1.03 INTENT A Raceway sleeve and pull strings from outlet location to point above ceiling for cable extension to future computer head end equipment. B. Outlet box location to be installed as indicated on drawings. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings for the following: Connectors Coordinate with Smith College standards. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Recessed,outlet box shall be 2"x4". B. Concealed conduit shall be minimum 3/4"EMT. C. Wall plates shall be brushed stainless steel and be equipped with RJ-45 connector. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 BOXES AND CONDUIT A Install conduit concealed in wall from outlet box to a point above ceiling. Terminate conduit with fiber bushings. B. In existing construction,extend WM#700 exposed on wall from surface outlet box to a point above the new corridor ceilings. C. Extension through wall shall be in min.3/4"EMT. Provide all required fittings,connections,etc. END OF SECTION 16700 APRIL 1995 16700.1 COMPUTER CABLING SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.04 MATERIALS-EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. In existing construction,furnish surface WM boxes,fastened to existing wall surface. B. Raceway shall be surface Wiremold#700. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide a separate 120 volt duplex receptacle mounted on the telephone backboard,wired to 20A Ip dedicated ckt.to serve cable T.V.equipment. B. In new construction,install conduit concealed in wall from outlet box to a point above ceiling. Terminate conduit with fiber bushings. END OF SECTION 16501 Nk APRIL 1995 16501-2 PROVISIONS FOR CABLE TV SERVICE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 16501 PROVISIONS FOR CABLE T.V. SERVICE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required for this section. 1.03 DESCRIP'T'ION OF WORK A. The provisions shall include: Exterior underground service conduit Backboard(same as tel.) Wall boxes and conduit drops and cabling 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. The service entrance television cable shall be furnished and installed by the local cable T.V. •* . franchiser. B. Excavation and backfill shall be by General Contractor. C. NOTICE: All interior T.V.cabling shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor under Section 16501. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CABLE T.V. SERVICE A. Furnish and install the underground 4"PVC conduit,from the location of the telephone backboard in the building. B. Refer to drawings for service and outlet locations. 2.02 CABLE T.V.EQUIPMENT BACKBOARD A. The cable T.V.underground service conduit shall terminate at the telephone equipment backboard. See Section 16500 for backboard. 2.03 MATERIALS A Recessed,outlet box shall be 2"x4". B. Concealed conduit shall be minimum 3/4"EMT. APRIL 1995 16501-1 PROVISIONS FOR CABLE TV SERVICE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION C. Terminate conduits with fiber bushings(both ends). 2.04 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes shall be as described in Wiring Materials and Methods Section of the specification. B. The size of the boxes shall be 4"x 4" (2 gang). END OF SECTION 16500 `E APRIL 1995 16500-2 COMM.TEL. SERVICE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 16500 PROVISIONS FOR COMMERCIAL TELEPHONE SERVICE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None required for this section. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The provisions shall include: 1. Underground telephone service conduit 2. Telephone backboard 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. The multiconductor service entrance telephone cable shall be fuuished and installed by the New England Telephone Co. (NYNEX) B. Notice: All interior telephone cabling and telephone equipment shall be furnished and installed • by this Contractor under Section 16500. PART 2&3 -PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2.01 NEW TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Furnish and install the new 4"underground PVC conduit,as shown on drawing E-1,to the location of the telephone service backboard. B. Leave nylon pullwire in empty conduit. C. Refer to Drawings for routing. 2.02 TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT BACKBOARD A. Telephone equipment backboard shall be minimum 4'x8'x3/4" plywood finished in 2 coats fire retardant paint. B. Provide a 120 volt double duplex receptacle mounted on new backboard,wired to 20A ip dedicated ckt. 2.03 TELEPHONE OUTLET CONDUITS A. Conduit materials shall be as required by Wiring Materials and Methods Section of the specification. B. The size of the conduits shall be as shown,3/4"EMT min.. APRIL 1995 16500-1 COMM.TEL. SERVICE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS A. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72H by the contractor in the presence of the owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshall. Upon completion of a successful test,the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor. 3.03 WARRANTY A. The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equipment to be free form inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one(1)year from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of the first beneficial use. B. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract proposal to provide a minimum to two(2)inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72H guidelines. END OF SECTION 16300 APRIL 1995 16300-8 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS detector circuits. To facilitate installation,the detector shall be nonpoloarized. By using a furnished wire jumper,it shall be possible to check circuit loop continuity prior to installing the detector head. Voltage , and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed to minimize false alarms. A smoke signal verification circuit shall be used for additional detector stability. E. Provide a Simplex Type 2098-9807 Remote Test/Alarm Station with each duct detector. 2.09 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A Sprinkler Alarm Water Flow Detectors(that sound the building alarm signals)and Pressure Loss Detectors shall be furnished and installed under the Fire Protection Section of these specifications by the Sprinkler Contractor and all wiring of the devices shall be done by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. B. Sprinkler OS&Y Valve Supervisory Switches(that cause supervisory signals to sound when not in the normally open and ready condition)shall be furnished and installed under the Fire Protection Section of these specifications by the Sprinkler Contractor and all wiring of the devices shall be done by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. 2.10 AUDIO VISUAL ALARM SIGNALS A. Furnish and install Simplex ADA Speaker 2902-9734, Strobe 4904-9105, A/V Base 4903-9501 Combination Audio Visual Alarm Assemblies,mounted on a red Texan frame. Fire indicating lights shall be shock-mounted under a common red lexan flame. The unit shall be UL listed as an approved audio appliance for fire alarm signaling. The word"Fire" shall be screened in red on both sides of the lens. 2.11 STROBE SIGNALS A. Furnish and install Simplex Type SL-5 exterior strobe signals as shown on the plans. Flash rate shall be 80 flashes per minute, rated for 24VDC operation. Strobe light shall be equipped with red lens. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications,all applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC-Article 760 A and C,Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labelled"Fire Alarm". Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. B. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. C. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation. D. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide onsite supervision of installation. 3.02 TESTING APRIL 1995 16300-7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS A. Simplex type 2099-9754 Single Action semi-flush, non-coded,break rod stations shall be furnished where shown on the plans. A downward pull of the lever shall actuate a positive snap-action switch. Station shall remain actuated until the station is reset by means of a key furnished with each station. Manual fire alarm stations shall be keyed alike with the fire alarm control panel. 2.06 THERMAL DETECTORS Furnish and install where shown the following thermal detectors: Simplex 2098-9439 - 135 degrees F Rate of Rise Fixed Temperature Type Simplex 2098-9442 - 200 degrees F Fixed Temperature Type 2.07 SYSTEM PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS A. Furnish and install,where indicated on the plans, Simplex Type 2098-9201 Photoelectric Detectors. They shall be listed by Underwriter Laboratories under UL 268 for the purposes of are fire detection. B. The detector shall respond to a wide range of both flaming and smouldering fires. The detectors shall be interchangeable and compatible with ionization detectors using the same type bases. Their light source shall be a pulsed infrared LED for low power consumption under standby conditions at 24VDC. Internal detector circuits shall be shielded against electrical interferences. It shall be resistant to transient, "noise" and RF interference. Regardless of sensitivity,the detector's stability shall be unaffected by high air velocity. The detector shall contain a test feature in order to test the detector without the need of generating smoke. C. Provide a Simplex Type 2098-9211 Base with each photoelectric detector,except for locations requiring auxiliary functions. 2.08 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS A. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans, Simplex Type 2098-9649 duct housing and 2098-9201 Photoelectric smoke detectors. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from the supervisory current in the fire alarm detection loop. The operating voltage shall be nominally 24VDC. The combination detector head and twist-lock base shall be UL Listed an compatible with the fire alarm panel. Detectors shall be listed for the purpose by Underwriters Laboratories. The detector shall have a flashing status indicating LED for visual supervision. When the detector is actuated,the flashing LED will latch on steady and at full brilliance. B. Detectors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering photodiode principle. Detectors shall be factory set to detect smoke at nominal 1.4"light obscuration per foot regardless of the rate of combustion,the distance between the detector and the fire source,the combustible material and the temperature or velocity of the smoke. To minimize nuisance alarms,detectors shall be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set alarm point. No radioactive material shall be used. C. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control panel. Detector design shall provide full solid state construction and compatible with other normally open fire alarm detection loop devices. The vandal resistant,security locking feature shall be used in these areas as indicated on the drawings. The locking feature shall be field removable when not required. D. It-shall be possible to perform a functional test of the detectors without the need of generating smoke. The test method must simulate effects of products of combustion in the chamber to ensure testing of all APRIL 1995 16300-6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS B. A central audio control module shall be provided for the necessary alarm message/tone generation,main and remote microphone connections,music inputs and mixer/pre-amplifier circuits. Continuous supervision shall be provided. Audio outputs shall have individual gain control. C. A hand-held,push-to-talk microphone shall be provided recessed within a protective panel- mounted enclosure. The microphone shall be a dynamic communication type with a frequency range of 200 Hz to 4000 Hz and shall be equipped with a self-winding five foot coiled cable. An LED indicator shall be provided to indicate microphone push-to-talk button has been pressed and speaker circuits are ready for transmission. Microphone shall be supervised form disconnection. D. An audio control switch module shall be furnished to provide manual to the audio functions. These switches and associated LID indicators shall be supervised from disarrangement or failure. E. Audio power amplifiers shall be furnished with self-contained filtered 24VDC power supply, transformer,and amplifier monitor circuits. Amplifiers shall provide a 25 VRMS output with a frequency response of 120 Hz to 12,000 Hz. Provide a sufficient quantity of amplifiers to operate all system speakers simultaneously plus ten(10)percent space capacity. F. In addition provide at least one back-up amplifier capable of automatically replacing any failed amplifier. G. Speaker circuits shall be supplied which are capable of supplying audio signals at 25 VRMS supplied by the system amplifiers. Supervision for open,short or ground fault conditions shall be provided. Individual and distinct trouble indications shall be provided for each fault. Provide one circuit for each zone or area of distinct communication. K Tones Digitized tones for alarm or auxiliary requirements shall be available. Tone requirements are as follows. K 1 The Slow Whoop shall be a slowly ascending tone from 200 to 830 Hz in 2.5 seconds. H.2 The Wail shall ascend and descend from 600 to 940 Hz. H.3 The Beep shall be a 470 Hz tone. The time duration shall be 0.7 seconds on and 0.7 seconds off. K4 The Horn shall be a continuous 470 Hz tone. H.5 The Stutter shall be a 470 Hz tone which is on for 100 milliseconds and off for 100 milliseconds. K6 The Chime shall be a 700 Hz tone with a 1.5 second delay time. H.7 The Q.Aed Horn shall be a 470 Hz tone designed specifically for use on a coded system. H.8 The Hi/Lo shall be a free running tone with a high frequency of 544 Hz and a low frequency of 440 Hz. The"on time"(Hi)shall be 100 milliseconds while the"off time"(Lo)is 400 milliseconds. I. Alarm Signals Provide Speaker/Visual Units with Flush Trims and Backboxes for all wall mount speaker/ visual unit locations as shown on the plans. 2.05 MANUAL STATIONS APRIL 1995 16300-5 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS 1.06 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. The control panel shall receive 120 VAC power(as noted on the plans)via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery rapacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of sixty(60)hours with ten(10) minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. C. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. The existing Control Panel is to be reused. Relocate as indicated on drawings. 2.02 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Where shown on the plans,provide and install Simplex Model 4603-9101 LCD annunciator. The annunciator shall have a beige enamel finish. The annunciator shall communicate to the control panel over one twisted pair of wire and operating power shall be 24VDC and be fused at the control panel. Point-wired annunciators will not be considered as equal. B. The serial annunciator shall provide a common alarm and trouble circuit consisting of- B. 1 Control pushbutton switches-for,alarm silence, trouble silence, system reset and manual evacuation duplicating the control panel switches. A key"enable"switch shall be provided to activate or deactivate the control switches. B.2 Tone Alert-Duplicates the control panel tone alert during alarm and trouble conditions. B.3 System trouble LED. B.4 Power on LED. B.5 To accommodate and facilitate job site changes the control switches shall have the capability to be programmed on site to provide for manual switch input operation other than their standard purpose. C. Manual Control Switches shall be provided for the following functions: C.l System Reset C.2 Alarm Silence C.3 Trouble Silence CA Manual Evacuation 2.03 ONE-WAY VOICE COMMUNICATION A. Provide one-way voice communication and tone generating capabilities. APRIL 1995 16300-4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector,the system shall precess the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute the system shall resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by zone. E.1 The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times(tally)a zone has gone into a verification mode. Should this smoke verification tally reach a pre-programmed number, a trouble condition shall occur. F. The control panel shall have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a dedicated supervisory service acknowledge switch. F.1 The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve supervisory(tamper)switch shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control panel and the remote annunciator. Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens and grounds on the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. F.2 Pressing the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Key will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory Service LED "on"indicating the off-normal condition. F.3 Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the Supervisory Service LED to extinguish, indicating restoration to normal. 1.05 SUPERVISION A. The system shall contain select#16 Class'A'independently supervised initiating device circuits. The alarm activation of an initiation circuits shall not prevent the sub Y � p Sequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. B. There shall be supervisory service initiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler valve supervisory(tamper). Device activation shall cause a supervisory alarm at the control panel. C. There shall be eight(8)independently supervised and independently fused indicating appliance circuits for alarm speakers and flashing alarm lamps. Disarrangement conditions of any circuits shall not affect the operation of other circuits. D. Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an"off normal"position of any switch shall cause an "off normal"system trouble. E. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete LCD readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. F. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel(and the remote annunciator). A green"power on"LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. G. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel(and the remote annunciator). H. The System Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound. L The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or - testing purposes. APRIL 1995 16300-3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS B. Resident software shall allow for full configuration of initiating circuits so that additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate changes in,for instance,sensing of normally open contact devices to sensing of normally closed contact devices,or from sensing of normally open contact devices to sensing a combination of current limited and non-current limited devices on the same circuit and being able to differentiate between the two,or changing from a non-verification circuit to a verification circuit or vice- versa. C. Resident software shall also allow for configuration of indicating appliance and control circuits so that additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate changes in,for instance changing a non-coded indication appliance circuit to a coded circuit,or from a slow march time(20 BPM)to a fast march time (120 BPM). D. The system shall have the capability of recalling alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. F. If equipment of another manufacturer is submitted for approval,the contractor shall state how much is to be deducted from his base bid for the substitution,and also shall state what,if any, specific points of system operation differ from the specified points of the system operation. This differentiation report must reference every paragraph of this specification. 1.04 OPERATION A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station,automatic detection device,or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows: A.1 All audible alarm indicating appliances shall sound a continuous fire alarm signal until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel. A-2 All visible alarm indicating appliances shall flash continuously until the system is reset. A.3 The audible alarms shall be inhibited from being silenced for a period of 5 minutes after commencing operation. A.4 Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate the alarm indicating appliances. B. The alarm system shall be displayed on an 80 character LCD display. The top line of 40 characters shall be the point label and the second line shall be the device type identifier. The system alarm LED shall flash on the control panel(and the remote annunciator)until the alarm has been acknowledged. Once acknowledged,this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the control panel(and remote annunciator). The LCD display shall show the new alarm information. C. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel until the event has been acknowledged. D. The alarm activation of any elevator lobby smoke detector shall,in addition to the operations listed above, cause the elevator cabs to be recalled according to the following sequence: D.1 If the alarmed detector is on any floor other than the main level of egress,the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the main level of egress. D.2 If the alarmed detector is on the main egress level,the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. E. The activation of any smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. if,within one(1)minute after APRIL 1995 16300-2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16300 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE&RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor,equipment, materials, and performance of all operations associated with the installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawing and as herein specified. B. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions,and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. C. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72,NFPA-71,Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760. D. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with the related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc. (UL),and shall bear the "U.L."label. All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall not be acceptable. AMK B. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL864 requirements. C. Where Fire Alarm circuits leave the building,additional transient protection must be provided for each circuit. Devices must be UL listed under standard#497B. D. In addition to the UL-UOJZ requirement mentioned above,the system controls shall be UL listed for Power Limited Application and all circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760-23. 1.03 GENERAL A. Furnish and install a complete Simplex Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected,and left in first class operating condition. Include sufficient control panel(s), annunciator(s),manual stations,automatic fire detectors,smoke detectors,alarm indicating appliances, wiring terminations,electrical boxes,and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. Note: the existing Simplex Fire Alarm Control Panel and Radionics dialer are to be reused. Relocate as indicated on drawings. The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system shall be capable of on site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. Full flexibility for selective input/output control function based on anding,oring,noting,timing, and special coded operations shall also be incorporated in the resident software programming of the system. APRIL 1995 16300-1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS E. All ceiling fixtures shall be independently supported from structure above.The ceiling shall not be acceptable as sole fixture support.Provide all hangers,cables,chains,etc. required. If Aak applicable refer to seismic requirements in sections 15000 and/or 16000. F. Provide and install all new lamps,clean fixture if required,and verify that the assembly is in proper working order. G. All fixtures with aiming adjustment capabilities shall be adjusted at night or in a dark environment. Final positioning of these units must be acceptable to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 16200 APRIL 1995 16200-4 LIGHTING FIXTURES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS D. Ballasts for HID lighting shall be of the constant wattage auto transformer type where available for the type H.I.D. lamp used,or as recommended by manufacturer. E. All ballasts shall be CBM,ETL certified with the UL Label. Ballasts shall be manufactured by General Electric,Universal,Advance,or Jefferson. 2.03 UALITY A. All luminaires shall be undamaged and of first quality workmanship,free from misaligned joints, imperfect welds,etc. B. The finish shall be smooth and free of unground welds, sags,runs,chips,contaminants,etc. Luminaires judged to be of defective workmanship by the engineer shall be replaced at no cost to the contract C. Sockets and lamp holders shall be of proper type for lamp specified All mounting hardware, supports,frames guards,reflectors,lenses,etc. shall be included and be of proper type for lighting fixture specified and scheduled. 2.04 LAMPS A. Lamp type shall be as described in Fixture Schedule. B. Incandescent lamps shall be furnished as inside frosted, 130 volt extended service type,2000 hour min. life. Fluorescent lamps shall be furnished in rapid start reduced wattage energy- saving type,deluxe cool white. All H.I.D. lamps shall be deluxe color,coated type. Furnish lamps in G.E., Sylvania or Phillips or Osram. „MMK PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install, at every lighting fixture outlet symbol on the floor plans,the proper fixture type described in the schedule. If no fixture type appears on the floor plan adjacent to the lighting fixture outlet symbol, Contractor shall notify the Engineer,prior to bidding,for a clarification. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of providing,at no additional cost to the Owner,the proper fixture as directed by the Engineer during Construction. B. Locations of all lighting fixtures shall be determined from actual job conditions, and as per Architect's reflected ceiling plans and elevations and as to provide even levels of illumination throughout area. C. All luminaires shall be installed plumb and true,in undamaged condition and without light leaks or gaps. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the compatibility of the fixture with the type of ceiling construction. Provide as part of the contract all supports,frames,plaster frames,etc. required for the proper and complete installation of all luminaires,whether specified or not. APRIL 1995 16200-3 LIGHTING FDCI URES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type, quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.07 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 16000. 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all luminaires in quantities as called for in the General Requirements. Shop drawings shall include the following data for all fixtures: Manufacturers name and address Fixture designation as scheduled Catalog number of unit Ballast data indicating manufacturer,type and rating Lamp data indicating type,wattage and manufacturer Operating voltage Construction materials-housing and lens Options Finish and color(furnish color chart for selection by Architect) Photometric,Isolux, CU table Pole MPH rating for units supplied UL listing B. Where options required for the complete specification of the luminaire are not indicated in the plans or specifications,the shop drawings shall be clearly marked to request the engineer to designate the proper selection. Where contractor selected options are not acceptable to the engineer the luminaires in question shall be removed and replaced with acceptable units at no additional cost to this contract. C. Shop drawings shall be submitted for Emergency Battery Units and lighting fixtures. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 LENSES A. All plastic lenses shall be 100%virgin light stable acrylic. All glass lenses shall be of heat resistant glass. Impact resistant lenses shall be as called for in fixture description. 2.02 BALLASTS A. Ballasts for fluorescent lighting shall be the energy saving type,Class P, "A" sound rated, CBM certified,designed for operation with full output or reduced wattage lamps. Furnish- 20°F.rated ballasts for exterior fluorescent light fixtures. B. Electronic ballasts,where called for,shall be as approved by the utility company for acceptability in use within their incentive program. , C. Ballasts for compact fluorescent lighting shall be of the high power factor type. APRIL 1995 16200-2 LIGHTING FIXTURES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16200 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the paragraph following"Shop Drawings". 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Work included in this section includes,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: Lighting Fixtures-Interior and Exterior 1.04 TYPES A. All luminaires,materials and equipment shall be as specified in the schedule or approved equal as to design,finish,appearance,quality,and photometric performance. Awk B. Emergency lighting fixtures and battery units shall be as called for on the drawings. C. The Contractor shall carefully compare the descriptions in the schedule and specifications with the catalog numbers given in the schedule,and all omissions or discrepancies brought to the Engineer's attention prior to bidding. 1.05 INTENT A. The specifications in conjunction with the lighting layout and the fixture schedule indicate the designed lighting system for the project,the level of performance anticipated,and the quality of fixtures acceptable to the Architect and Engineer. The Architect/Engineer retain final judgement on the acceptability of proposed brands of equipment,other than specified, submitted for use on this project. B. All proposals for substitution of luminaires shall include cuts,detailed photometric data,etc., as called for in"Shop Drawings",below. C. The Contractor shall,upon request of the Architect or Engineer,provide samples of all proposed substitute luminaires for comparison. 1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Division 1 specifications. APRIL 1995 16200-1 LIGHTING FIXTURES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16105 WIRING TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. None are rewired for this section. PART 2 -PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2.01 MOTORS A. Furnish and install all safety disconnect switches as required by NEC and as shown on the drawings. B. Furnish and install all manual and magnetic motor starters and varialble speed motor controllers,except those provided as an integral part of equipment provided by other Divisions. C. Furnish and install all power wiring from source of supply through disconnect switches and motor starters to motor terminals including final connections. 2.02 TEMPERATURE CONTROL EOUIPMENT A. Temperature control equipment mounted on heating,ventilating and air conditioning equipment shall be installed by Division 15. B. This Division shall furnish and install all 120V 1 phase power wiring for the temperature control equipment,and make connections thereto. All temperature control wiring shall be by Division 15. 2.03 WIRING FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT A. Furnish and install feeder wiring from panel to HVAC equipment as indicated on drawings. Wiring shall be run in EMT or rigid galvanized steel to exterior equipment. B. Furnish and install at unit,a disconnect switch suitable for padlocking(W.P. type- outdoors). Extend wiring to unit connection point terminal block. Motor starters are furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. C. All temperature control wiring shall be under Division 15. This Contractor shall provide power to temperature control panels(120 volt, 1 phase). Verify all locations of equipment with mechanical drawings. END OF SECTION 16105 APRIL 1995 16105-1 WIRING TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION WIRING A. All interior feeder and branch circuit raceways shall be run concealed where possible. Exposed conduits shall only be allowed where construction does not permit their concealment. All exposed conduits shall be run parallel or at right angles to all exposed structural members,or walls in a manner described herein or shown on plans and as approved by the Architect. All conduit shall be supported as required by N.E. C. Include all costs of drilling steel,concrete or masonry work for installation of proper support. B. Furnish and install all power wiring complete to all motors including all fans,heating and ventilating equipment,etc.,unit heaters,pumps,etc. Provide for each outlet a safety disconnect or thermal switch where outlets have a permanent connection. Where equipment is connected through a polarized receptacle,this receptacle can serve as the disconnect. END OF SECTION 16104 Awk APRIL 1995 16104-2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE&DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16104 ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for the following: New secondary distribution switchboard 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Division 1 specifications. B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.04 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 16000, 1.05 DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRIC SERVICE A. The secondary distribution system shall extend from the existing main switchboard to new panels throughout the. The secondary service shall be 120/208 volt 3 phase 4 wire. PART 2-PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2.01 GROUNDING A. Provide grounding for all electrical equipment and devices in accordance with the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code and IEEE standards. B. Bonding jumpers shall be installed at all locations required by the National Electrical Code. Bond enclosure and solid neutral bus of main service disconnect switch together extend an insulated conductor in a galvanized steel conduit to both the main water service(on street side of water meter)and to an effectively grounded steel building member. Bond both wire and conduit using NEC and UL approved devices. C. A separate insulated green ground conductor(of proper size)shall be installed and connected with the branch circuit and feeder conductors to maintain an electrically continuous grounding path. Connections to the equipment may be bolted or screwed using corrosion resistant bolts or screws. APRIL 1995 16104-1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE&DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ,wR. A. General: Coordinate the location of all device outlets indicated on electrical floor plans with the mechanical and architectural drawings before installation of same. Contractor shall relocate any switches,receptacles or lighting fixture outlets a distance of five(5)feet from the location shown on the electrical plans at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Interior Devices: Wall Switches In general,mount in the vertical position with their centerlines 48 inches above floor.Mount 4"from door casing on strike side. Standard Wall Receptacles In general,mount in the vertical position with their centerline 18 inches above floor. Where located at counter,install to clear backsplash with plate. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting Wall Receptacles Mount in the vertical position with their centerlines at the heights shown. Coordinate with Architect. C. Exterior Devices: Outdoor Weatherproof Receptacles Mount in vertical position with their center line 24 inches above sill height,unless noted otherwise. END OF SECTION 16103 APRIL 1995 16103-3 WIRING DEVICES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS Wall plates for interior recessed outlet boxes shall be brushed stainless steel. Provide a single,multi-gang plate where multiple devices can be ganged at one location. Device plates shall be Bryant,Hubbell 8000 series. B. Standard Wall Receptacles: Standard wall receptacles shall be NEMA config-5-20R, specification grade, ivory,be rated 20 amperes, 125 volt,have parallel slots,NEMA grounding slots,back and side wiring, break off terminals for connecting to two circuits,hex grounding screw, and self grounding strap at mounting screws. Duplex Receptacle-Bryant-5352-I,Hubbell-5252-I Single Receptacle-Bryant-53514,Hubbell-5251-I Duplex Receptacle-Hubbell 6352I Wall plates for interior recessed outlet boxes shall be brushed stainless steel.Provide a single,multi-gang plate where multiple devices can be ganged at one location.Device plates shall be Bryant,Hubbell 8000 series. C. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting Wall Receptacles: Ground fault circuit interrupting wall receptacles shall be duplex, ivory,be rated 20 amperes, 125 volt,have parallel slots,NEMA grounding slot,and ground fault interrupting trip set at 5 mA with test/reset button.Bryant GFR53FT-I,Hubbell GF-5362I. Device plates for ground fault circuit interrupting wall receptacles shall be especially designed for the receptacle and location. Brushed stainless steel. Interior-Bryant T1-S,Hubbell S-26 Exterior-Bryant GFR-WPV,Hubbell-WP-26 2.02 WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES A. Weatherproof receptacles shall be ground fault circuit interrupting type as described above. Receptacles shall utilize a cast aluminum outlet box with appropriate cast aluminum coverplate. B. Coverplate shall have individual gasketed doors with spring activated closures. Coverplates shall be equal to Bryant GFRWP Series,Hubbell WP. 2.03 SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLES A. Special purpose receptacles shall be provided to match plug furnished with the equipment. Verify NEMA configuration,voltage,phase,and number of wires with equipment supplier prior to start of work. B. Provide with weatherproof boxes and hinged coverplate,where exposed to moisture. The assembly shall be listed as weatherproof while in use. 2.04 DIIvI1AER SWITCHES A. 1500 watt incandescent I pole, 125 volt,Lutron#N-1500. Slide to"off dimmer,finished in ivory. APRIL 1995 16103-2 WIRING DEVICES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16103 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A The General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A Submit shop drawings for the following: All wiring devices Multi-outlet system Dimmer switches Special purpose services 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Division 1 specifications. B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.04 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 16000. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A Devices shall be furnished in Bryant or Hubbell manufacture as identified following. Substitution in Arrow-Hart shall be considered in accordance with requirements of 16000. Specialty items identified herein shall be furnished in make and models as specified. 2.02 INTERIOR DEVICES A. Wall Switches: Wall switches shall be specification grade AC type, slow make,slow break,rated 20 amperes, 120/277 volts,shall have ivory toggle operator and have a plastic cup. Single Pole-Bryant-4901-I-Hubbell- 1220-1 Three-Way-Bryant-4903-I,Hubbell-1223-1 Four-Way-Bryant-4904-I,Hubbell-1224-I Key Switch-Bryant-4901-L,Hubbell-122 1-L Single Pole/Pilot Light-Bryant 4901-PLR120,Hubbell-1221-PL Occupancy Sensing Switch- .. APRIL 1995 16103-1 WIRING DEVICES "H�AI LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS A. Install motor controllers adjacent to the load served unless otherwise noted, in such a way that their contacts will not be vibrated open. B. Label each motor controller with load it serves,per Section 16100. C. Remotely located motor control devices("Start-Stop", "On-Off",etc.)shall be flush mounted in finished areas,surface mounted in unfinished locations. END OF SECTION 16102 APRIL 1995 16102.5 SWITCHING&PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt 3 restarts after controller fault or on return of power to the system following an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Provide for restarting during deceleration without damage to the controller, motor,or load. Power Interruption Protection: Prevent motor reenergizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped. Operation and maintenance features shall include: Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators to indicate power on, run, overvoltage, line fault, overcurrent,and external fault. Elapsed Time Meter. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer. Current-Voltage-Frequency Indicating Devices: Mount meters or digital readout device and selector switch flush in controller door and connect to indicate controller output. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to safely transfer the motor from the controller to the power line,or from the line to the controller while the motor is at zero speed Include Controller-Off- Bypass selector switch and indicator lights to indicate mode selection. Integral Main Disconnect: Circuit breaker connected to shut down all power to both the controller and the bypass. Interlock breaker with cabinet door. Auxiliary Motor Contactors: Electrically interlocked. One contactor connected between the controller output and the motor,controlled by the controller regulator,and one between the bypass power line and low the motor, providing across-the-line starting capability in the bypass mode. Provide motor overload protection under both modes of operation with control logic that allows common start-stop capability in either mode. Isolating Circuit Breaker: Arranged to electrically isolate the variable-speed controller to permit safe trouble-shooting and testing of the controller, both energized and de-energized, while the motor is operating in the bypass mode. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Mount safety disconnect switches in positions that permit easy operations. B. Label each disconnect switch with the load it serves,per Section 16100. 3.02 FUSES A. Provide one complete set in the disconnect switches provided under this contract,including the service entrance disconnect switch and the number required by equipment furnished by others where shown or specified.Furnish,as spares,one half the number of each size Provided as described above,except furnish no less than three of any one rating,and no less than three of the fuses for the service entrance disconnect switch. 3.03 MOTOR CONTROLLERS APRIL 1995 16102-4 SWITCHING&PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS Output Rating: 3-phase, 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout the voltage range. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque,or as indicated. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. Ambient Temperature: 0 deg C to 40 deg C. Efficiency: 95 percent minimum at full load,60 Hz. Isolated control interface to allow the controller to follow one of the following over an 11:1 speed range: Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 milliamperes at 24 V. Internal AdiustabilitY: Provide the following internal adjustment capabilities: Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum RPM. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum RPM. Acceleration: 2 to 22 seconds. Deceleration: 2 to 22 seconds. Current Limit: 50 to 110 percent of maximum rating. Multiple Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors where applicable, and furnished with a separate overload relay and protection for each individual motor. Tripping of any overload relay shall shut off the controller and all motors served by it. _Self-protection and reliability features shall include: Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors. Snubber networks to protect against malfunction due to system voltage transients. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA class 10 performance. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural frequency of the combination. Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip. Loss of Phase Protection. Reverse Phase Protection. Under-and Over-Voltage Trips. OvertemMrature Trip. hort Circuit Protection. APRIL 1995 16102-3 SWITCHING&PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS 2.03 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General: AWN This Division is responsible for furnishing and installing a motor controller for each motor furnished,unless otherwise noted. Contractor shall coordinate electrical and mechanical drawings and equipment schedules to ensure same. B. Standard Magnetic Motor Starters: Standard magnetic motor starters shall be full voltage non reversing,unless otherwise shown or specified; shall have the number of poles indicated;shall have voltage rating and current rating as required for the load served;and shall have a melting alloy thermal overload relay for each phase wire. Motor starters shall incorporate one set of NO and NC auxiliary contacts, have a control transformer with 120 volt secondary winding,coil shall be 120 volts. Where control power is extended beyond the starter enclosure,provide suitable fusing. On the cover there shall be a maintained contact HAND-OFF-AUTO control station except where"start-stop" switches are specifically called for.Furnish with green"On"pilot light. Standard magnetic motor starters shall not have an integral switch or circuit breaker disconnect.Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for surface mounting unless otherwise specified or shown. Standard magnetic motor starters shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin#709,or equal in Square D, or Westinghouse. Provide identifying nameplate per 16100. C. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters Disconnect Switch Combination magnetic motor starters shall be the same as standard magnetic motor starters, except that they shall have an integral disconnect switch,externally operable,within the la same enclosure. Where identified,furnish a FUSIBLE disconnect with fusing correctly sized - for load served. Combination magnetic motor starters shall be the same manufacturer as the standard magnetic motor starters described above. D. Manual Motor Starters: Manual motor starters shall have toggle handle or push button operated contacts;number of poles,voltage rating, and current rating as required for the load served(two poles for 208 and 230 volt single phase loads);and a thermal overload relay for each phase wire. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1,unless otherwise specified or shown. Manual motor starters shall be the same manufacturer as the standard magnetic motor starters described above. E. Solid-State,Variable-Speed Motor Controllers General: Provide controllers listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of a standard NEMA Design B, 3-phase, induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency of controller. Controller shall be designed and rated by the manufacturer for the type of load (e.g., fans, blowers, and pumps) with which used. Controller shall also be approved by the manufacturer for the type of connection used between the motor and load(direct connection or power transmission connection). Isolation Transformer: 1-to-1 ratio, with capacity coordinated by the manufacturer for the controller, motor,drive,and load combination. Ratings: As follows: APRIL 1995 16102-2 SWITCHING&PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16102 SWITCHING AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Submit shop drawings for the following: Safety disconnect switches. Motor controllers. Fuses 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Section 01600 "Materials and Equipment". B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.04 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 16000. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Safety disconnect switches used for overcurrent protection of wires,transformers,and other similar apparatus,shall be heavy duty,quick break,with defeatable cover interlock,and be fusible,unless otherwise shown or specified. Switches shall have the poles and be of rating required by the system voltage characteristics and the load it is supplying.Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise shown or specified. Safety switches shall be Square D A8000 Series. B. Safety disconnect switches used for motors,and located in an electrical circuit after the overload protection but before the motor,shall be non-fusible type. 2.02 FUSES A. Fuses shall be dual element,time delay,nonrenewable with voltage rating and current carrying capacity as required by load,or as shown on the drawings. The current interrupting capacity shall be 100,000 symmetrical RMS amperes minimum. Fuses shall be Bussman Fusetrons. APRIL 1995 16102-1 SWITCHING&PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS F. The panelboards shall be manufactured by Square D, Westinghouse,or ITE,equal to the following Square D type: 120/208V 3PH 4 Wire--NQOD- PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 LIGHTING and POWER PANELBOARDS A. Mount panelboards with their centerlines 54 inches above finished floor,unless otherwise shown.The edges of the cabinet shall be parallel to finished floors and walls. Support the panelboards from building members,independent of wall finished surfaces and conduits. B. Complete each circuit directory on the inside of the door by typing in the loads served by each circuit. C. Label each panel with the designation shown on the drawings in one inch high painted letters and digits on the back of the door above the circuit directory.In addition,provide the identifying laminated plastic nameplate on front cover as called for in Section 16100. END OF SECTION 16101 APRIL 1995 16101-2 PANELBOARDS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16101 PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for the following: Lighting and power panelboards. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Division 1 specifications. B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.04 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Refer to Section 16000. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS A. The mains shall have voltage and current carrying ratings as shown. B. The branch circuit overcurrent device shall be molded plastic case circuit breakers with bolted connections to bus bar,be quick-make,quick-break,and have a toggle handle. The minimum quality of circuit breakers shall be the Q frame. The trip elements shall be thermal magnetic type;two and three pole circuit breakers shall have internally common trip without handle ties,and shall have positive indication of tripped condition. Single pole circuit breakers shall be full module size.The voltage rating shall be as required by the system voltage,and the current carrying capacity shall be as shown. C. Bussing shall be copper. D. The cabinets shall be galvanized sheet steel,rigidly formed.There shall be a metal barrier forming a dead front construction.The trim shall be smooth sheet steel,and be attached to the cabinet with screws or clamps. The trim shall be for either flush or surface mounting as shown. E. The doors shall be sheet steel,with a minimum projection chrome plated lock,with all locks keyed alike,and with a typewritten circuit directory under protective plastic cover.Each lock shall have three keys.All exposed surfaces shall be finished in baked gray enamel. APRIL 1995 16101-1 PANELBOARDS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Typewritten circuit directory included to identify specific circuit loads. G. Disconnect Switches: .•w, Load being served. Voltage and phase. Ampere rating(continuous). Short circuit interrupting capacity. H. Motor Controllers: Load being controlled. Voltage and phase. Horsepower of load. I. Main and Sub-Telephone Boards: Designation as given on drawings. J. Junction,Pullboxes,etc.: (including communication/facility control systems) Identify all main electrical distribution and systems junction boxes,pull boxes and troughs as to their particular function and/or system served. K. Conductors: Identify conductors,or groupings of conductors, injunction boxes,pullboxes,troughs and other equipment where concentrations of conductors are enclosed.Identification tags shall be equal to Thomas and Betts Company, "Ty-rap"white nylon straps with broad marking surface.Markings shall be made with ink specifically for writing on"Ty-rap". Generally,provide main electric secondary service,main distribution, sub-distribution and branch circuit conductor color coding for phase identification purpose that shall conform to the following color code: 120/208V 3PH 4 Wire Phase "A"-Red Phase"B" -Blue Phase"C"-Black Neutral -White Grounding-Green Provide identification color coding for systems conductors. Any combination or color may be selected Exclude colors utilized for phase,neutral and grounding conductors unless the same are part of,or used in combination with,the particular system. END OF SECTION 16100 APRIL 1995 16100-8 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Install wires in raceways;use only an approved pulling compound for pulling,not oil or grease. Make splices and connections only in accessible outlet,pull,or junction boxes.Make splices and connections with solderless connectors with either integral insulation or applied insulating tape. B. Cables: Flexible metal conduit shall be limited to maximum 6 foot lengths. Install metal clad cables and flexible metallic conduit tight against building members. Whe.z cables must span between members,provide an non combustible"running board"or suitable material to which to secure the cables. At boxes,provide insulating bushings before installing connectors. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION AND COLOR CODING A. Provide identification for all electrical equipment and items by name,function,and/or control. B. Identifying nameplates shall be laminated plastic type,consisting of two black plastic sheets with one white sheet bonded to,and between the two outer black sheets,and having the letters engraved in one black side to the depth of the white plastic. Nameplates shall not be smaller than 1-inch by 3-inch with characters not less than 5/16-inch.Fasten nameplates to equipment with suitable screws. Adhesive affixed nameplates will not be acceptable. C. Generally,equipment and items to be identified,and extent of identification, shall be as follows: Additional identification of equipment or selected items shall be provided as required by the Architect. D. Main Service Equipment: Equipment designation as given on drawings. Voltage and phase of equipment. Ampere rating(continuous) Short circuit interrupting capacity Service entrance label Each individual protective device as to load served. E. Sub-Distribution Equipment: Equipment designation as given on drawings. Voltage and phase of equipment. Ampere rating(continuous). Short circuit interrupting capacity. Each individual protective device as to load served. F. Electric Panelboard: Equipment designation as given on drawings. Voltage and phase of equipment. Ampere rating(continuous). Short circuit interrupting capacity. Main device identification APRIL 1995 16100-7 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION PVC conduit runs below slab which through concrete pour shall have the final sweep be installed in rigid galvanized steel. PVC shall not be used above ground,neither inside nor outside the building. C. Conduit Fittings for Wire Pulling: Install conduit fittings for wire pulling in exposed conduit installations only. Support them by the conduit. Install them with their openings located for easy wire pulling. D. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes where shown on drawings,and where permitted by the Engineer.Boxes are not permitted in finished areas, corrosive areas,or hazardous areas. Install boxes so they are accessible for wire pulling after building is completed Support boxes securely from building members,not from raceways or other pipes. Seal all unused openings. E. Outlet Boxes: Install outlet boxes where required for raceway system outlet facility. Boxes shall be securely mounted to building members,not finished surfaces,and not from raceways or other pipes. Seal all unused openings. Check the location of all wiring outlets with the Architect before placing same and relocate any switches,plugs or light outlets a distance of 5 feet either way from the location shown on plans at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Outlet Box Usage: For galvanized rigid steel conduit. Concealed: sheet steel. Exposed: cast metal. For intermediate metal conduit. Concealed: sheet steel. Exposed: cast metal. For electrical metallic tubing: sheet steel. For flexible steel conduit: sheet steel. For metal clad cable: sheet steel For liquid tight flexible steel conduit: cast metal. For rigid plastic conduit: plastic. For surface raceways: surface raceway boxes. 3.04 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION A. Building Wire: APRIL 1995 16100-6 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Outside of building(where not subject to physical damage). Locations exposed to moisture. Motors. Equipment mounted on vibrating supports. Where otherwise shown or specified. E. Use Type MC metal clad cable for wiring in the following locations,unless noted otherwise: Concealed above ceilings for lighting branch circuits. F. Use surface raceway for wiring in the following locations unless otherwise noted: Branch circuit wiring(power/switch leg,etc.)on existing walls. Low voltage/fire alarm wiring on existing walls. 3.02 RACEWAY LOCATION-NEW CONSTRUCTION A. In finished areas,install raceway concealed above ceilings and in walls. B. In unfinished areas,install raceway surface mounted on wall,on ceilings,or overhead. 3.03 RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. General: The raceway system design is based on installing wires with copper conductors in an overhead routing installation. Minimum raceway size shall be 3/4"trade size. B. Conduits: Install conduit in standard lengths where possible. Where shorter lengths are required, cut conduit with hack saw and ream ends to remove burrs. Cut tapered threads in rigid conduit. Where bends and/or offsets are required,make them without reduction in internal diameter. Support conduit from building members using approved devices. Support conduit on walls with conduit straps and clamp backs.Multiple conduits may be supported on structural channel or angle secured to building members.Fasten supports with screws into wood and with Phillips Red Head anchors into concrete and/or concrete blocks. Where conduit is to be exposed on walls or overheads, install in a neat manner with runs parallel to lines of walls and overheads. Where conduit is to be concealed in block walls, install the conduit as the wall is being erected;chasing of the walls is prohibited. Maintain six inches clearance from heat sources. Apply two coats of asphaltum to all rigid steel conduits installed underground. Where conduit extends through masonry,furnish and install galvanized steel pipe sleeves. Seal the opening between the conduit and the sleeve with bitumastic. Install conduit fire seals at all fire rated floor and wall penetrations. Use OZJGedney Type 1 "GFS"or equal. APRIL 1995 16100-5 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Boxes shall be manufactured by Wiremold. 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Building Wire: All feeder,branch circuit,and signal circuit wiring shall be manufactured of 98% conductivity annealed copper,rated at 600 volts,single conductor for#1OAWG and smaller, stranded for#8 AWG and larger. Minimum size wire for branch circuit and power wiring shall be#12 AWG.For signal circuits,minimum size is permitted to be#16 AWG. For branch circuits(20A)exceeding 100 feet in length from the panelboard to the first device,the minimum conductor size shall be#10AWG. Insulation types shall be"THW"for feeders and power wiring, "THHN"for lighting branch circuits;and"THWN"for signal circuits and fire alarm wiring. All feeder and branch circuit wiring shall contain a separate green insulated grounding conductor,#12 AWG minimum(electrically continuous). The wire shall be manufactured by American Steel&Wire,Anaconda, General Cable, General Electric,Habirshaw,Hazard,National Electric,Roebling,Rome,or Walker. PART 3 -EXECUTION Amok 3.01 RACEWAY MATERIAL USAGE A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used for wiring in the following locations,unless otherwise noted(Contractor may,at his option,utilize Schedule 40 PVC): Under concrete slab in earth Outside building,both above and below ground. In concrete pours. Where otherwise shown or specified. B. Use intermediate or electrical metallic tubing for wiring in the following locations,unless otherwise noted: Surface mounted on ceilings,wall or building members,except where surface raceways are shown or specified. For interior panelboard feeders. Where otherwise shown or specified. C. Use flexible metallic conduit for wiring in dry locations in the following locations,unless otherwise noted(excluding homeruns to panelboards): Motors. Equipment mounted on vibration supports. Where otherwise shown or specified. D. Use liquid tight flexible conduit for wiring in the following locations,unless otherwise noted: APRIL 1995 161004 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION For surface metal raceway;all fittings,connectors, inside and outside corners shall be manufactured as matching components for the raceway system. C. Conduit Fittings for Wire Pulling: Conduit fittings for wire pulling in steel conduit systems shall be cast met with lacquer protective coating,and shall be of the size and shape required by the conduit installation. The covers shall be attached by two screws or dog devices.Provide neoprene gaskets where exposed to moisture. Fittings used in corrosive area shall be constructed of plastic or fiberglass. Fittings shall not be used in hazardous areas. Fittings shall be Crouse Hinds Condulates or Appleton Unilets. Conduit fittings for wire pulling in rigid non-metallic conduit systems shall be plastic and of size and shape required by the conduit installation. Covers shall be plastic. D. Pull and Junction Boxes: Pull and junction boxes,installed in interior dry locations,shall be galvanized sheet steel with flat covers attached by a minimum of four(4)screws,unless otherwise shown or specified. Pull and junction boxes installed in normally wet locations,and surface mounted on outside of exterior surface shall be cast metal with cast metal cover. All boxes shall be sized as required by the National Electric Code,according to the size and number of conduits and/or cables entering. Boxes shall be manufactured by Columbia,or local manufacturer. E. Outlet Boxes for Conduit and Wiring Cables: Outlet boxes shall be made of galvanized or cadmium plate sheet steel,of cast metal,as designated under Part 3 (EXECUTION)of this section. Outlet boxes shall be of proper size for the wiring devices installed and the number of wires therein. Outlet boxes shall contain knockouts for conduit and wiring cable entries. Outlet boxes shall contain threaded mounting holes for device mounting. Outlet boxes for concealed wiring shall have plaster rings,as required for the depth of the wall or ceiling finish in which they are installed. Boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton,Crouse Hinds or Steel City. F. Outlet Boxes for Surface Raceways: Outlet boxes shall be sheet steel factory painted finish suitable for field finish. Outlet boxes shall be of proper size for the wiring devices installed and the number of wires therein. Outlet boxes shall contain twistouts for surface raceway entries. Outlet boxes shall contain threaded mounting holes for device mounting. APRIL 1995 16100-3 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Electrical metallic tubing shall be sheet steel formed in tubing,galvanized,with protective coating on outside, and with interior surface prepared for wire pulling. Tubing shall be manufactured by General Electric,National Electric, Wheatland,or Triangle. Flexible metallic conduit shall be galvanized steel strip,wire wound into interlocked flexible steel conduit,with interior formed into smooth surface for easy wire pulling. Conduit shall be manufactured by General Electric,National Electric,Triangle,or Wheatland. Flexible, liquid tight conduit shall be galvanized steel strip,spiral wound into interlocked flexible steel conduit,with interior formed into smooth surface for easy wire pulling,and with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded on to make conduit liquid tight. Conduit shall be manufactured by Anaconda. Type MC metal clad cable shall be a factory assembly of one or more single conductors, each individually insulated and enclosed in an interlocking metallic sheath. Assembly shall include an insulated green ground conductor. Cable shall be manufactured by Triangle, Wheatland, General Electric or National. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be polyvinyl chloride plastic, Schedule 40. Each length of conduit shall be delivered with a coupling on one end. Conduit shall be manufactured by Carlon or Ethyl Corporation. Surface raceway shall be sheet steel base,and cover formed to mount flat on wall and ceiling finished surfaces.Finish shall be factory painted,suitable for field finish. Surface raceway shall be Wiremold 500 or 700 Series,as required. B. Conduit Fittings: For rigid steel conduit and intermediate metallic conduit,locknuts shall be steel with sharp AXW edges for digging into the wall of the metal enclosures;bushings shall be malleable iron, except where required by NEC or local codes; insulating bushings shall be furnished and installed.Locknuts and bushings shall be manufactured by Appleton,O.Z. Gedney, Steel City,or T&B. For rigid steel conduit, and intermediate metallic conduit,expansion joints shall be constructed to absorb deflections,both normal to,and parallel with,the conduit longitudinal axis,and shall have grounding strap to maintain electrical continuity around the joint. Expansion joints shall be manufactured by Crouse Hinds or O.Z. Gedney. For electrical metallic tubing,couplings and box connectors shall be for sheet steel of the compression, set screw,or indenter type. Fittings shall be manufactured by Appleton,O.Z. Gedney, Steel City,or T&B. For flexible conduit,box connectors shall be malleable iron and sheet steel components with cable set screw and box locknut. Interior surfaces and edges shall be smooth,formed to avoid damaging the wired. For liquid tight flexible conduit,box connectors shall be malleable iron and sheet components,with provisions for making liquid tight connections.Fittings shall be manufactured by Appleton or T&B. For PVC conduits,fittings shall be Schedule 40,solvent joint type,as manufactured by Carlon. APRIL 1995 16100.2 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 16100 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specifications sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Provide complete raceway and wiring material submittals with intended application/use.. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Division 1 specifications. B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.04 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 16000. PART 2 -PRODUCTS/MATERIALS 2.01 RACEWAY MATERIALS A. Conduit/Raceways: All building wiring,unless otherwise noted on the drawings,shall be installed in concealed rigid metallic conduit,or concealed intermediate metallic conduit,or concealed EMT,or flexible metallic conduit,or surface raceway subject to the restriction of the National Electrical Code.Minimum size,3/4". Rigid steel conduit shall be iron pipe,either galvanized or sherardized with protective coating on the outside,and with interior surfaces prepared for easy wire pulling. The ends shall be threaded, and the threads shall be metalized after cutting. Each length of conduit shall be delivered with a coupling on one end,and a protective cap on the other end. Conduit shall be manufactured by General Electric,National Electric,Triangle,or Wheatland. Intermediate metallic conduit shall be mild steel strip,formed into tube and welded along longitudinal seam. Outside finish shall be galvanized,interior finish shall be enamel for easy wire pulling. Conduit shall be manufactured by General Electric,National Electric,Triangle,or Wheatland. APRIL 1995 16100-1 WIRING MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS agency is conducted and will withstand without failure a force of not less than four times its own weight. END OF SECTION 16000 AMMkk APRIL 1995 16000-12 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS R Provide large enough sleeves through walls or floors to allow for anticipated differential movements. S. At vertical conduit risers,wherever possible,support the weight of the riser at a point or points above the center of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the riser,and at intermediate points not to exceed 30'-0"on center. T. Spreaders will be provided at appropriate intervals to separate adjacent conduit runs,unless conduit spans and the clear distance between pipes are sufficient to prevent contact between the pipes during an earthquake. U. Proprietary bracing systems approved by OSHA may be used in lieu of the braces. V. Slacks will be provided in underground cables whenever such cables enter or exit appurtenances. W. Lighting Fixtures: Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the Standard for Safety UL-57. Provide a lateral bracing system. Fixture supports will employ materials which are suitable for the purpose. Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant fixtures shall be filled with a restraining device to hold the stem in the support position during earthquake motions. Pendant supported fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided with a flexible hanger device at the attachment to the fixture channel to preclude breaking of the support. The motion of swivels or hinged joints shall not cause sharp bends in conductors or damage to insulation. Each recessed fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be supported by a seismic resistant suspended ceiling support system,and shall be fastened thereto at each comer of the fixture;or shall be provided with fixture support wired attached to the building structural members using two wires for individual fixtures and one wire per unit of continuous row fixtures. These support wires (min.No. 12 ga.wire)will be capable of supporting four times the support load. A supporting assembly,which is intended to be mounted on an outlet box,will be designed to accommodate mounting features on four-inch boxes,three inch plaster rings,and fixture studs. Each surface mounted fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be attached to a seismic resistant ceiling support system. Fixture support devices shall be locking type scissor clamp,or a full loop band which will securely attach to the ceiling support. Fixtures attached to the underside of a structural slab shall be properly anchored to the slab at each comer of the fixture. Each wall mounted emergency light unit shall be secured in a manner to hold the unit in place during a seismic disturbance. Suspension systems for lighting fixtures that are free to swing a minimum of 450 from the vertical in all directions are acceptable if a passing shaking table test approved by the using APRIL 1995 16000-11 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS H. The following companies, in the past, have met these requirements on a job to job submittal. The names are listed for convenience only,with no intention of excluding other companies: Mason Industries, Inc. M.W. Sausse and Co.,Inc. California Dynamics Corporation I. Conduit and utility systems:Bracing details,support details, schedules and notes apply to all types of pipe and all types of joints. J. Brace all conduits 2-1/2"diameter and larger with the following exceptions: Brace all conduit 1-1/4"and larger located in Boiler Rooms,Mechanical Equipment Rooms and Refrigeration Machinery Rooms. Bracing requirements for conduits less than 2-1/2"in diameter shall be the same as for 2-1/2"conduits in all other locations. Seismic braces may be omitted: (1)when the top of the pipe is suspended 12"or less from the supporting structure member and the conduit is suspended by an individual hanger. (2)On all conduit 3/4"and smaller. K. In addition to a lateral bracing system,a typical vertical support conforming to the following must also be used. Vertical Conduit: Attachment-vertical conduit shall be secured at sufficiently close intervals to keep the conduit in alignment and carry the weight of the conduit and contents. Stacks shall be supported at their bases and,if over 2 stories in height at each floor,by approved metal floor clamps. Horizontal Conduit: Supports-Horizontal conduit shall be supported at sufficiently close intervals to keep in alignment and prevent sagging. L. Traverse bracing at 40'-0"o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted. M. Longitudinal bracings at 80'-0"o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted. When thermal expansion or contraction is involved,provide longitudinal bracings at anchor points. The longitudinal braces at the connections must be capable of resisting the force induced by expansion and contraction. N. Transverse bracing for one conduit section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the conduit section connected perpendicular to it,if the bracing is installed within 24"of the elbow. O. Do not use branch conduits to brace main conduit runs. P. Trapeze hangers can be used Provide flexibility in joints where conduits pass through building seismic or expansion joints,or where rigidly supported conduits connect to equipment with vibration isolators. Q. A rigid conduit system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building,or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Example:wall and roof;solid concrete wall and metal deck with lightweight concrete fill. APRIL 1995 16000-10 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS of partitions,etc. Such changes shall be observed and executed as part of this Contract. The Contractor shall check on all locations shown in accordance with the general plans before installing his work,correcting such discrepancies as they arise during the installation. B. Unless directions are requested from the Architect for the exact locations of any device, the subcontractor will be responsible for any changes that may be necessary to make the work conform to the proper locations. The exact locations of all work in all instances shall be as designated by the Architect. Dimensions shall be given by the Architect where same are necessary to suit equipment layouts;the Contractor shall,by pre arrangement,check the locations of his work with other trades previous to installation and assign space requirements and locations so there will not be any conflict in space requirements for each trade. 1.31 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching for all work shall be done in accordance with Division 1 unless otherwise specified. 1.32 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Excavating and backfilling for all work shall be done in accordance with Division 2 unless otherwise specified. 1.33 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS A. Electrical equipment and elements shall be installed in such a manner to resist the lateral forces and the overturning moment produced by earthquake loads,as defined in Section 1113.0 in the BOCA National Building Code. B. Latest addition of electrical equipment is classified as being either on grade or supported by the building, and as being either rigid or flexible. The maximum weight of an individual piece of equipment shall not exceed 10%of the total building weight,and 30%of the total weight of the floor at the equipment level. C. Floor or roof mounted equipment with vibration isolation shall have restraining devices for lateral and vertical loads. Restraining devices(angles and bolts)shall be designed to withstand 1.0 gravity(0.4 gravity)lateral and vertical loads. Lateral restraining devices shall be installed on all sides of the equipment base. D. The first gravity force is for essential buildings or life safety equipment. The gravity force in parenthesis is for other buildings. E. Floor or roof mounted equipment without vibration isolation shall be secured to a foundation or an adequate structural support with anchor bolts to withstand 0.5 gravity(0.2 gravity) lateral and vertical loads. The first gravity force is for essential buildings or life safety equipment.The gravity force in parenthesis is for other buildings. F. Suspended equipment with vibration isolation shall have hanger rods,bracing members, equipment brackets and vibration hangers designed to withstand 1.0 gravity(0.4 gravity) lateral and vertical loads. The first gravity force is for essential buildings of life safety equipment The gravity force in parenthesis is for other buildings. G. Equipment anchorages such as bolts,expansion anchors,screws,etc. shall be designed to conform with the force level required for seismic zone#2. APRIL 1995 16000-9 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS A. Thoroughly clean all raceways,junction boxes,and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. B. If any part of a system should be stopped by any foreign matter after being placed in operation,the system shall be disconnected,cleaned and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. ' C. During the course of construction,all electrical conduit shall be capped in an approved manner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. 1.27 PAINTING A. All painting of all exposed cabinets,puU boxes,conduits,hangers and other exposed metal work will be done by the Painting Contractor under the General Contractor's work All trim and fronts of all flush panels,pull boxes,etc.,will have prime coat but all finish painting of these surfaces will be done by the Painting Contractor. 1.28 GUARANTEES A. All parts of the work shall be guaranteed for a period of one(1)year from date of acceptance of the job by the Owner. If during that period of general guarantee any part of the work installed fails,becomes unsatisfactory or does not function properly due to any fault in material or workmanship,whether manufactured or job built,each section shall,upon notice from the Owner,promptly proceed to repair or replace such faulty material or workmanship without expense to the Owner,including cutting,patching and painting or other work involved,and including repair or restoration of any damaged sections of the premises '"` _ resulting from such faults. B. In the event that a repetition of any one defect occurs,indicating the probability of fiuther failure and which can be traced to faulty design,material or workmanship then repairs or replacement shall not continue to be made,but the fault shall be remedied by a complete replacement of the entire defective unit. C. In addition to the general guarantee,obtain and transmit to the Owner any guarantees of warrantees from manufacturer's of specialties,but only as a supplement to the general guarantee which will not be invalidated by same. 1.29 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish and set access doors and frame for all concealed junction boxes and controls which are concealed in furred spaces. All access doors shall be fiumished in Milcor,flush type with frame,with frame filled with matching material so these doors will match ceiling,and all doors shall be hinged with flush catches.Provide non-ferrous in all wet areas. B. Where access is required to junction and splice boxes,etc.,that occur above lay-in ceilings, these access doors can be omitted. 1.30 LOCATIONS A. The locations shown on the plans are subject to modification due to conditions arising as the work progresses,such as swing of doors,layout of furnishings, locations of equipment, locations APRIL 1995 16000-8 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS B. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's certified scale drawings,cuts or catalogs, including descriptive literature and complete certified characteristics of equipment, showing dimensions,capacity, code requirements,testing, as specified herein and on the drawings. C. Samples, drawings,specifications,catalogs,etc.,submitted for approval shall be properly Libeled, indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used. Division and article number of specifications governing Contractor's name and name of job. D. Catalog,pamphlets or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog,pamphlet,etc.,of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted E. Review rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed,said review does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail. Said review does not, in any way, relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract drawings and specifications. F. Failure by the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle him to an extension of Contract time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. G. Prior to submission of shop drawings,the Contractor shall thoroughly check each shop drawing,reject those not conforming to the specifications and indicate by his signature that the shop drawings submitted in his opinion meet Contract requirements. 1.24 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND SYSTEM OPERATION A. At the time of the job's acceptance by Owner, Contractor shall furnish one complete set of approved certified drawings to the Owner. In addition,Contractor shall furnish maintenance and operating instructions for all equipment. These instructions shall be written in layman's language and shall be inserted in a vinyl-covered three-ring loose leaf binder. This information in binder shall be first sent to and approved by the Architect/Engineer before turning over to Owner. B. Upon completion of all work and of all tests,this Division shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating the system and equipment for a period of three(3)eight hour days or as otherwise specified. C. During this period, instruct the Owner and/or his representative(s)fully in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all equipment furnished. Give at least 72 hours notice to the Owner in advance of this period. 1.25 QUIET OPERATION A. Electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration, as determined by the Architect/Engineer. Noise level in any normally occupied area shall not exceed that of an "NC-45"curve(noise criteria-45)as established in latest edition of the ASHRAE Guide. B. If such objectionable noise or vibration should be produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus,conduit,or other parts of the Electrical Work,such changes or additions as are necessary shall be made as approved,without extra cost to the Owner. 1.26 CLEANING PIPING,DUCTS, CONDUITS, AND EQUIPMENT APRIL 1995 16000-7 ELECTRICAL•GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS B. All equipment shall be provided with a suitable laminated plastic nameplate fastened with screws or rivets. Small equipment labels may use a pressure sensitive tape. C. All nameplates and labels shall identify components by proper nomenclature and numbered according to equipment schedule or as designated by Owner. 1.21 SLEEVES,INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Each Section shall provide and shall be held responsible for the location and position of all sleeves,inserts,and anchor bolts required by the work. Failure to do so,which requires cutting and patching of finished work, shall be done at no additional cost to Contract. B. All conduits passing through floors,walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves sized to give a minimum of 1/2"clearance between sleeve and the outside diameter of the conduit. C. Sleeves through masonry floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe,set flush with finished wall or ceiling surfaces,but extending 2 inches above finished floors. In all mechanical equipment rooms or penthouses,sleeves shall extend 6"above finished floor. D. Sleeves through interior partitions shall be 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal,set flush with finished surfaces of partitions. E. All sleeves shall be packed with fiberglass or oakum and sealed from both ends. Sealant shall allow for movement without cracking and shall be 3M fire barrier caulk or approved equal. F. Provide escutcheons on conduits wherever they pass through floors,ceilings,walls or partitions in finished areas. Escutcheons for floors shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Company,No. 36A or approved equal split-hinged,cast brass type. ' G. Escutcheons interior walls,partitions,and ceilings shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Company,No. 3A or approved equal, split hinged,cast brass,chromium-plated type. H. Provide C.I. watertight sleeve with flange through outside foundation walls and floors. Furnish with flashing clamp where waterproof membranes are installed. 1.22 EOUIPMENT AND APPARATUS FOUNDATIONS A. Except where specifically noted to the contrary,all concrete bases and foundations for equipment will be minimum 4"high and extend 6"beyond equipment footprint and be provided by the General Contractor with necessary anchor bolts,washers,templates,etc., furnished by this Contractor.Bolts shall be built into foundation with properly sized sleeves. Bases for all moving equipment shall be satisfactorily isolated from building structure by approved isolations. 1.23 SHOP DRAWINGS A Prior to delivery to job site,but sufficiently in advance of requirements necessary to allow Architect and Engineer ample time for review,Contractor shall submit for approval seven (7)copies each of shop drawings of all equipment,materials,raceways,lighting,fixtures, devices,panel and wiring,and further obtain written approval for same from the Architect before installing any of these items. r I.M"k APRIL 1995 16000-6 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. 1.15 TEMPORARY OPENINGS A Ascertain,from examination of the Architectural drawings,whether any special temporary openings in the building will be required for the admission of apparatus provided under this Section and notify the Architect/Engineer in time to arrange for these openings during construct ion. The Section requiring the openings shall assume all costs of providing such openings thereafter. 1.16 SCAFFOLDING,RIGGING,HOISTING A. Unless otherwise specified,the work under this Section shall include all scaffolding,rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery onto the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished Remove same from the premises when no longer required. 1.17 ACCESSIBILITY A Locate all equipment which must be serviced,operated,or maintained in fully accessible positions. If required for better accessibility,furnish access doors for this purpose. Access doors shall be selected by the Architect/Engineer to specific area finishes. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility only if approved by the Architect/Engineer. 1.18 LUBRICATION A All equipment having moving parts and requiring lubrication,which is installed under this Contract, shall be properly lubricated according to manufacturer's recommendations prior to testing and operation. Any such equipment discovered to have been operated before lubrication is subject to rejection and replacement at no cost to the Owner. Units furnished with sealed bearings are excepted. 1.19 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials and apparatus used shall be new,of first-class quality and shall be furnished, delivered, erected,connected and finished in every detail. No materials or apparatus used shall be discontinued or about to be discontinued items. B. The work in each of these Sections shall be constantly under the direction of a competent superintendent who shall be on the premises during such periods as the work is in progress. The superintendent shall familiarize himself with the work of all other Sections involved insofar as they relate to,or in any way effect,the work of these Sections,and shall coordinate the work. C. Unless otherwise noted,all equipment and materials will be installed and/or applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of said equipment,including the performance of any tests recommended by the manufacturer. 1.20 TAGS, CHARTS&NAMEPLATES A. Each fire alarm panel,switch,electrical panel,system support panel and piece of apparatus installed under these Sections shall be properly identified APRIL 1995 16000-5 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS B. Within the specified time period as defined under Division 1, after Award of Contract, submit to the Architect for review,a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work under this Division. The intent to use the exact base bid manufacturer specified does not void this requirement. C. Where any specific material,process or method of construction,or manufactured article is specified by name of or by reference to the catalog number of a manufacturer, the specifications are not intended to take precedence,over the basic duty and performance specified,to notes on the drawings. In all cases,the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review shall be indicated on the shop drawings. D. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate,giving name of manufacturer,description,size,type,serial or model number, electrical characteristics,etc.,in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. The nameplate of a Contractor or distributor will not be acceptable. E. If material,apparatus, systems,or appliances are installed before it is reviewed,it shall be removed and replaced at no extra charge to the Owner,if in the opinion of the Architect or Engineer, it does not meet the intent of the drawings and specifications. 1.11 MEASUREMENTS A. All measurements shall be taken at the site,actual always to take precedence over scaled dimensions. Any discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated on the drawings and specifications shall require written notification of the Architect/Engineer, and work shall not proceed without written instructions from the Owner. B. Furnish the General Contractor with all the necessary information and templates for all recesses,chases, openings,etc.,required for the work in ample time to allow him to lay out his work accordingly and construct same. 1.12 APPROVED MATERIAL A. No materials other than that contained in the"Latest List of Electrical Fittings"approved by the Underwriters'Laboratories, shall be used in any part of the work. All wiring,conduit, switches,and any other material for which label service has been established shall bear the label of Underwriters'Laboratories. 1.13 PERNTTS AND FEES A. Work under each Section shall include all necessary notices,obtaining all permits and paying all governmental taxes,fees,and other costs in connection with their work;filing all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction,obtaining all required Certificates of Inspection for the work and delivering same to the Owner before request for acceptance and final payment for the work- 1.14 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and materials of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen,and shall include making good any damage this caused. B. Each Section shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected,tested,and accepted;protect work against theft,weather,injury or damage and carefully store material APRIL 1995 16000-4 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS G. All circuits and motors shall be meggered and resistance recorded before current is applied, and all controls shall be tested to make certain they are connected properly. H. For testing, a megger reading shall be carefully made by the Contractor of each completed phase to ground with other phases connected to the same ground. The minimum"level off reading shall be 1 megohm. A 500 volt megger shall be used. These readings shall be recorded by the Contractor and presented to the Owner's Engineer. I. Ground tests shall be made on all ground wires and shall measure 25 ohms or less. On completion of work the live wires shall be entirely free from grounds and short circuits. J. After examination and testing,the Contractor,under the supervision and approval of Owner's Engineer, shall demonstrate the correctness of this work by energizing the systems and operating the equipment. 1.07 DRAWINGS A The mechanical,electrical and architectural drawings are intended to supplement each other and are to be considered as a unit which,taken together and in conjunction with the specifications,completely describes the work to be done. All drawings shall be checked to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, notification shall be given to Architect/Engineer before proceeding with installation. B. The Architect/Engineer may,without extra charge to the Owner by the Contractor,make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflicts with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. 1.08 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS A In these specifications and on the accompanying drawings the base bid materials,apparatus, systems or appliances have been specified for use in this installation. This has been done for the purpose of identifying the standard of workmanship,finish and design, and the guaranteed performance of any material,apparatus, system or appliance which shall be installed in this project. B. Where no specific make of material,apparatus system or appliance is mentioned,a fast-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for use,providing it conforms to the requirements of these specifications and meets the approval of the Architect and Engineer. 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To substitute materials,apparatus systems or appliances other than listed acceptable manufacturers,a written request shall be made in accordance with Sections 01600- Materials and Equipment,A701 -"Instruction to Bidders"and the Supplementary Instruction to Bidders",no later than 10 days prior to receipt of bid,for permission to make the substitution. This request shall be accompanied by complete plans and specifications of the substitute offered. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. The materials,workmanship,design and arrangement of all work installed under this Division shall be subject to the review of the Architect. APRIL 1995 16000-3 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS Wiring Devices 16103 Service and Distribution System 16104 Wiring to Equipment Furnished by Other Divisions 16105 Lighting Fixtures 16200 Fire Alarm System 16300 Provisions for the Commercial Telephone Service 16500 Provisions for Cable T.V. Service 16501 Computer Cabling System 16700 1.04 REGULATIONS A. All work shall be done in strict accordance with the State of Massachusetts Building Code, State Fire Safety Code,National Fire Protection Association, State Health Code,NEC,UL, NEMA.,OSHA,with all requirements of local utility companies and the requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. B. Requirements of the above shall take precedence over plans and specifications. 1.05 EXAMMNATION OF SITE AND BID DRAWINGS A Before submitting his final proposal,the Contractor shall examine the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with conditions as they exist,so that he may fully understand the facilities,difficulties and restrictions attending the execution of the work under his Contract,as he will be held responsible for any assumptions made by him in regard thereto. B. Examine the drawings and specifications relating to the work of all Divisions, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of work required,and its relationship to and the requirements of this Division. Include all such requirements as part of this electrical work. C. No consideration or allowance will be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of materials to be furnished or work to be done,it being agreed that tender of proposal carries with it agreement to items and conditions referred to herein,and indicated on the drawings. D. The failure or omission of any Contractor to receive or examine any form, instrument,or document or to visit the site and acquaint himself with conditions there existing, shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation with respect to his bid. 1.06 TESTS A. Conduct all tests called for under the various Sections or as required,and repair or replace any defects. B. Tests shall be performed in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction. C. The Owner shall have the privilege of stopping any of the work not being properly installed. All such detected work shall be repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated. D. All damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and damaged materials replaced. E. All tests shall be made before any circuit main switch,transformer or line is made hot. F. All circuits shall be phased out and connected to the panel,main switch or transformer in a proper manner. Loads shall be distributed as evenly as possible on all phases. APRIL 1995 16000-2 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATIONS SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A The drawings and General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 INTENT OF DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and specifications describe the requirements of the electrical work. Provide all components and other parts necessary to make the installation complete. B. Material,fixtures and equipment identified or scheduled in specifications or on drawings shall be furnished new,completely installed adjusted and left in a clean,safe and satisfactory condition ready for operation. All supplied appliances and connections of every sort necessary shall be furnished and installed to the satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer. C. Apparatus,appliances,material or work not shown on the plans but mentioned in specifications,or vice versa,and any required accessories such as electrical disconnect switches, circuit breakers, etc.,necessary to make the work complete, serviceable and operable in every way shall be furnished. D. Location of all work and electrical :terns shown on drawings,or called for in specifications, are intended to be approximately correct to the scale of the drawings. Figured dimensions and detailed drawings are in all cases to take precedence over them. Notwithstanding the above,the exact location necessary to secure best installed conditions and coordinated results shall be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Architect and Engineer. E. Drawings utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. These have no dimensional significance,nor do they delineate every item required for the intended installation. Work shall be installed in accordance with the diagrammatic intent of the electrical drawings,and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final equipment shop drawings. F. Work under this Section shall include giving written notice to the Owner within 15 days after the Award of the Contract of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable or in violation of any laws or codes,or items of work omitted. In the absence of such written notice,it is mutually agreed that work under this Section has included the cost of all required items and labor for the satisfactory functioning of the entire system without extra compensation. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A The work of this section includes,but is not limited to,the following: Electrical-General 16000 Wiring Materials and Methods 16100 Panelboards 16101 Switching and Protective Equipment 16102 APRIL 1995 16000-1 ELECTRICAL-GENERAL CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Smith College A. ` Northampton, MA Project Manual April 1995 DRAFT CLIENT Smith College Dining Services 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts Paul Garvey, Director -STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Brennan & Partners, Inc. 214 Charles Lane Road New Braintree, MA 01531 ,,w MECHANICAL. ELECTRICAL. & P UMDBING ENGINEERS Luchini Milfort Goodell & Associates 137 Billerica Road Chelmsford, MA 01824 ARCHITECT Livermore, Edwards and Associates 260 Bear HiII Road Waltham, MA 02154 (617) 890-8873 LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION END OF SECTION 15950 APRIL 1995 15950-5 TESTING ADJUSTING&BALANCING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION PUMP MAKE PUMP HORSEPOWER MOTOR SAFETY FACTOR HEATER MANUFACTURER SIZE 0ANk VOLTAGE PHASE PUMP DESIGN DELIVERED CONDITIONS PUMP RPM PUMP INLET OUTLET PRESSURE AMPERAGE BRAKE HORSEPOWER GPM SUPPLY SYSTEM DESIGN DELIVERED CONDITIONS FLOW(GPM)THROUGH EACH CHILLER INLET OUTLET PRESSURE AT EACH CIMIER INLET OUTLET TEMPERATURE AT EACH CHILLER FLOW(GPM)THROUGH EACH COIL INLET OUTLET PRESSURE AT EACH COIL INLET OUTLET TEMPERATURE AT EACH COIL FLOW(GPM)THROUGH EACH TERMINAL UNIT TYPE OF INSTRUMENT AND METHOD USED 3.05 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Adjust air handling systems to the following tolerances: 1. Supply systems shall be balanced so that: The total quantity to each space is within-5%to+10%of design values. If two outlets in space,each outlet is witin-10%to+101/6 of design value. If three or more outlets in space,each outlet is within-15%to+15%of design value. B. Adjust heating system to the following tolerances: Supply water temperature 80 degF to 120 degF: 01/6 to 10%of design value. Supply water temperature 120 degF to 160 degF: -5%to+10°/o of design value. Supply water temperature above 160 degF: -101/6 to+101/a of design value. 3.06 FIELD VERIFICATION A. The design Engineer may request verification of data contained in the balancing report. If requested the TAB technician whose initials appear on the data sheets shall take outlet and inlet readings selected at random by the Engineer who will compare these readings to those in the submitted report. If the field verification is not satisfactory, the firm doing the TAB work shall completely rebalance the system and a new report shall be prepared and submitted for review. APRIL 1995 15950-4 TESTING ADJUSTING&BALANCING IMON LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION OUTLET MANUFACTURER AND TYPE TYPE OF INSTRUMENT AND METHOD USED D. Set all dampers of all types for proper air flow. No system causing objectionable air noise will be accepted All hand volume dampers shall be marked at their final position. E. Provide all instruments and accessories required to perform the tests and make provisions for inserting the instruments. Patch all test holes. F. Notify the Owner's Representative work will start. Prior to this time, send a supervising engineer to the office of the Owner or his Representative to review the design, desired operation, and method of balancing of the job. G. Upon completion of the work, certify that all systems are properly balanced and are delivering, returning or exhausting the required quantities with 5%of design. Deliver to the Contractor five (5) copies of the test report for transmittal to the Owner's Representative. H. Check all safety controls and record control sequences. I. Check and record air temperatures on and off heating coils. J. Check scheduled air and water control,record the operation by simulating complete operating cycle. K. After completion of balancing, mark location of all final positions of dampers and valves. L. Final report shall include the following: 1. Static pressure reading across filters, coils, of each air handling system showing design and actual readings. 2. Measured suction,discharge and total static pressure for each fan. 3. Design and actual CFM from each outlet and remm/exhaust. 4. Outside air,air on and off heating coils,air off cooling coils and terminal air supply temperatures for each air handling system. 5. Rated and actual motor current, in amperes,of every motor at full load conditions. 3.04 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prior to the start of balancing,check the rotation of all pumps. B. Compile the following data for each pump insofar as they apply and include it on the final submittal: NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONDUCTING FIRM PUMP DESCRIPTIVE DATA PUMP NUMBER SYSTEM SERVED PUMP SIZE APRIL 1995 15950-3 TESTING ADJUSTING&BALANCING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.03 AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS A. Prior to the start of balancing, the firm shall check the rotation of all fans. B. Check to verify that all dampers are free to open and close. All filters must be checked and, if dirty, they must be replaced before commencing balancing so as not to create excessive resistance to the system. Make any necessary changes in fan speed to obtain design system conditions and shall realign all belts when necessary. Advise the Contractor of any necessary changes in pulleys and belts required to obtain proper air delivery and any additional dampers, splitters, turning vanes, turbulance vanes and other devices necessary to obtain the correct air balance, all as directed by the Owner or his Representative. C. Compile the following data for each air system insofar as they apply and shall include it on the final submittal: NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONDUCTING FIRM FAN DESCRIPTIVE DATA SYSTEM NUMBER LOCATION SERVED FAN SIZE FAN MAKE FAN HORSEPOWER MOTOR SAFETY FACTOR HEATER MANUFACTURER SIZE FAN DESIGN DELIVERED CONDITIONS look FAN RPM MOTOR RPM TOTAL AND/OR EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE AMPERAGE VOLTAGE PHASE BRAKE HORSEPOWER CFM SUPPLY CFM RETURN CFM EXHAUST FRESH AIR PERCENT RETURN AIR PERCENT SYSTEM DESIGN DELIVERED CONDITIONS EACH OUTLET SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AS TO LOCATION AND AREA REGISTER OR DIFFUSER SIZE REGISTER OR DIFFUSER FACTOR REGISTER OR DIFFUSER FREE AREA,CORE AREA,OR NECK AREA DESIGN CFM DESIGN FPM FINAL RPM READING FINAL CFM APRIL 1995 15950-2 TESTING ADJUSTING&BALANCING �*. LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15950 TESTING ADJUSTING&BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A_ Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections,apply to work of this section. 1. Section 15010-Basic Mechanical Requirements 1.02 SCOPE OF THE WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and tools required to complete the testing, adjusting and balancing of hydronic systems and air handling systems described and shown on the contract drawings. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Test shall be performed just prior to substantial completion of each individual portion of the project. B. The Testing Adjusting and Balancing contract shall be executed directly between the T.A.B. contractor and Smith College. The T.A.B. contractor shall submit his bid for the work in this section directly to the Smith College Physical Plant Department. PART2 -PRODUCTS None required PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Work shall be performed by a Certified Balancing firm, independent of the Mechanical Contractor specializing in the work of testing, adjusting and balancing air handling and hydronic systems. This firm shall provide personnel trained and experienced in system balancing B. Before submitting system performance data for approval or acceptance,perform all necessary tests and make all necessary adjustments as required to obtain the design flow and distribution of air as called for on the Contract Documents. C. The balance reports shall include the names, signatures, and registration numbers of the technicians assigned to the project. 3.02 ACCEPTABLE FIRMS A. The following listed firms are approved to perform this work: Wing's Testing and Balancing APRIL 1995 15950-1 TESTING ADJUSTING&BALANCING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.03 DUCTWORK low A Refer to Section 15800. END OF SECTION 15850 APRIL 1995 15850-3 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MAKE-UP AIR HANDLING UNIT A Provide Trane Modular Climate Changer central station air handling unit of the sizes,type and performance as indicated in the air handling unit schedule. The unit shall be complete with factory furnished components as specified B. Cabinet shall be of sectionalized construction and all sheetmetal parts,including accessories,shall be fabricated of continuous galvanized steel Access shall be provided to the interior of the unit. C. Blower Section: Fan shall be forward curved DWDI type with galvanized steel scroll housing. Fan shall be dynamically balanced before and after being installed in the fan cabinet section. Fan cabinet shall be internally insulated with 1"thick neoprene coated glass fiber.Fan shaft shall be solid steel with all fan wheels over 12"in diameter keyed to the shaft Maximum fan rpm shall be well below the first critical speed All bearings shall be equipped with lubrication fittings. Provide fan belt and pulley guard Fan motor shall be high efficiency TEFC type. D. Heating Coils:All coils shall be per the schedule. Coil performance data shall be certified in accordance with Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute(ARI)Standard 410 where applicable. E. Filters:Prefilters shall be 2"pleated throwaway type-35%efficiency. Final filters shall be bag type,60%min. efficiency. Furnish two sets of filters,one for start-up and testing,one for final turnover. 2.02 EXHAUST FANS A. Furnish and install exhaust fans,based on Greenheck, complete with all accessories, of sizes and rapacity as scheduled on the plans. , B. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Performance Seal for air and sound performance. C. Main toilet exhaust fan shall be of the centrifugal type,belt driven. The fan housing shall be of heavy gauge steel mounted on a rigid support structure. The shroud shall have a rolled bead for additional strength The fan wheel shall be of the aluminum forward curved centrifugal type, with an inlet venturi for maximum performance. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. D. Motors and centrifugal wheels shall be mounted on vibration isolators and isolated from the exhaust airstream. Air for cooling the motor shall be taken into the motor compartment from a location free from contaminants. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to the disconnect junction box Furnish each fan with U.L.disconnect PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Sizes and appropriate locations of all equipment are shown on the drawings. Check carefully with the Architectural Drawings and drawings showing work of other trades to make sure that there will be no conflict between these trades and the equipment. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Install all equipment at locations indicated on plans. Equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner,in accordance with ASHRAE and other applicable industry standards. APRIL 1995 15850-2 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF THE WORK A Provide all labor,materials,equipment and tools and temporary work required for the complete installation of the Air Handling Equipment described and shown on the contract drawings. B. The intent of these specifications and contract drawings is to provide complete installation of the equipment described herein and indicated on the drawings. Any listing or indication of items furnished or work to be performed shall not be construed to be complete in itself,and shall not limit the general requirements to furnish and install all work,equipment,accessories,controls,etc.,to complete the contract in a substantial manner. C. The scope of work shall include the following but not be limited to same: Energy recovery unit H&V/MUA units Exhaust fans Air distribution(refer to Section 15800) Air cooled condensing units Fan-coil air handling units Refrigerant piping and specialties 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Power wiring to mot ors,starters and disconnect switches shall be by the Electrical Contractor,under the direct supervision of the Heating Contractor. B. Painting,except as otherwise noted thereto: Cutting and patching. 1.04 SUBMTITALS A Refer to Section 15010 for requirements of submission of shop drawings and samples. Shop drawings will be submitted for all equipment identified in this Section 1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Refer toDivision 1 specifications. B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractor's base bid must be submitted thereon 1.06 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 15010. APRIL 1995 15850-1 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION C. Horizontal duds 24"or larger in width shall be supported by means of vertical rods and horizontal angles or channels below ducts. D. Vertical ducts shall be supported by means of two (2) horizontal angles fastened to each side of the dud Awk resting on rough slab or floor construction. E. Where ductwork is supported from the overhead steel,fasten hangers to steel with approved clamps based on Grinnel Fig. 131 with welded eye rod Fig.27B. F. Ductwork supported from bar joists shall be supported from upper member.Refer to"Seismic Considerations" -Section 15010. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL.WORK A Provide all auxiliary steel required for spacial dud supports and spanning between structural members;build all stands,brackets,platforms shown or required for mechanical equipment B. Refer to"Seismic Considerations"-Section 15010. C. All such items shall be firmly built with welded,riveted or bolted joints to securely support the equipment as intended. 3.06 SEALWAYS A All duct and pipe openings in fine rated walls,floors and ceilings shall be sealed with fireproof sealants. Refer to Section 15050. �*w END OF SECTION 15800 APRIL 1995 15800-5 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Before roughing any outlet, coordinate with electrical lighting layout, fire protection layout, or reflected ceiling plan. Provide 1/4"scale shop drawings for approval on all duct systems. C. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed by applying a duct sealant adhesive to all sealing flanges,seams, rivets and screw heads for making ductwork airtight. Sealant shall be of Foster, Johns Manville or Precision Technical Products based on Precision Technical Product EZ-4719-NF rubber based, no flash, self extinguishing type. D. Ducts shall be offset as required to clear structural members and, if it is necessary to alter dimensions of the dud,this may be done provided the cross-sectional area is not reduced. E. Balance all air systems to within 5%of air quantities shown on drawings(Refer to Section 15950). F. Panels in all duds shall be cross-broken to provide stiffening. All radii shall be equal to width of dud. Where this is not permissible vanes or dud turns shall be used Dud turns shall be used on all 90 degree square elbows. G. All low pressure ducts up to 12 inches shall be joined with flat bar slips and sheet metal screws 6"on centers. Ducts over 12 inches wide shall be jointed with standing bar slips of heavy gauge metal. Joints shall be secured with No. 10-2/3 screws 9 inches on centers. H Provide flexible neoprene connections not less than 6"clear,to all air moving equipment L Provide angle or wood grounds for all grilles or registers in masonry construction. Seal all dud penetrations through non rated walls,floors and ceiling with fiberglass insulation and cemenL J. All ductwork penetrating through fire rated floors, walls and ceilings shall be sleeved and opening packed with 3M"Fire Barrier"or approved equal in Hilti. K Dimensions of all ducts are the inside dimensions of the duct after the lining, where shown, has been installed 3.02 PROTECTION A Cover and protect all openings left for passage of duds. All open ends of ducts,open collars for registers,etc., shall be closed with plastic(Ply-O-Film)or weatherproof paper such as Sisallaaft taped in place to prevent entry of dust,etc. 3.03 CLEANING A All coils,ductwork,fans,and dud plenums shall be completely vacuum cleaned prior to turning systems over to Owner. B. Damaged heating coils shall be combed out. C. New air moving equipment shall not be used during construction period. 3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A Horizontal ducts less than 24" wide shall be supported from the overhead by means of 1" x 16 gauge bent galvanized steel straps held in place by metal screws at the side of the duct with 1-1/2"of the hanger turned back under the ducts in each case. fir►, B. Hangers to be spaced not more than 8'-0"center to center,3'-0"for flexible dud. APRIL 1995 15800-4 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Volume damper for ductwork two(2)square feet in area or greater shall be multi-leaf opposed blade type. All dampers shall have locking quadrants. C. Volume dampers shall be installed at all branch duct takeoffs. D. Sputter dampers where indicated or required shall be constructed of 20-gauge galvanized metal and 3/8"square rod with ioddng quadrant E. Fire: Furnish and install fire dampers in all ductwork passing through fire walls or floors as required by the Fire Code. Contractor to confirm all such construction with architectural drawings to ensure same. Fire dampers shall be Air Balance U2 119 with perimeter mounting angles. Dud connexions to each side of fire dampers shall be of the breakaway type.Provide access door in ductwork for access to fire damper. Fire dampers shall be installed according to NFPA 90A latest edition and shall have a 1-1/2 hr. and/or 3-hr. standard fire protection rating in accordance with UL 555 bulletin and shall bear UL label or equal to the rating of the wall or ceiling at the duct penetration. Access doors shall be provided to service fine dampers through plaster or non removable ceilings and through ductwork F. Damper blades shall be installed out of the air stream Refer to drawings for details. G. Ducturns:Provide"ducturns"based on Tuttle&Bailey nonadjustable,90 degree,double wall type in all square elbows. H. Volume dampers shall be provided as part of the air distribution system work in every branch and in main duct trunks required for proper balancing of air distribution system AMA 2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide a flexible connection between ductwork and inlet and outlet of each fan and air handling unit. Connection shall be 1/16" neoprene. Secure connections with 1" x 1/8" galvanized drawbands, or other approved means. Flexible connexions shall be made with Ventfab,or approved equal, fire water and weather resistant material. 2.05 REGISTERS.GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS A_ All registers,grilles and diffusers shall be of Titus manufacture. Refer to schedule on drawings. B. Units shall be of sizes and direction as shown and shall be of steel construction unless otherwise noted C. Units in hard wall or ceiling surfaces shall be fim shed with sponge rubber gaskets and setting frames to match register. D. Acceptable alternate manuiaxturers: Metal-Aire. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Sizes and approximate locations of all ducts are shown on the drawings. Check carefully with the architectural drawings and drawings showing work of other trades to make sure that there will be no conflict between these trades and the ducts. APRIL 1995 15800-3 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK AND SEALANTS A All general ventilation/HVAC galvanized ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with"Low velocity duct construction standards",leakage class"C"as published by SMACNA,Inc. B. All joints in ductwork shall be scaled by applying a dud sealant adhesive to all sealing flanges, seams, rivets and screw heads for making ductwork airtight Sealant shall be of Foster,John Manville or Precision Technical Products based on Precision Technical Product EZ-4719-NF nibber based,no flash,self extinguishing type. C. The sizes and the approximate locations of all ducts are shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall check Fully with the architectural drawings,and the drawings showing the work of other trades,to make sure that there will be no conflict between these trades and the ducts. D. Ducts shall be offset as required to clear structural members and,if is necessary to alter the dimensions of any duct,this may be done only with pemvssion of the Engineer. E. Ductwork construction shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Guide and SMACNA "Low Velocity Construction Standards". F. All general ventilation ductwork shall be galvanized sheet steel, unless otherwise noted, and shall be constructed of the following gauges corresponding to greatest dimensions of ducts. Max Galv.Iron Aluminum Round Dud Up to 12" 26 24 Up to 6"dia.-28 Ga. 13 to 30" 24 22 7"thru 14"-26 Ga. 31 to 48" 22 20 15"thru 26" -24 Ga. 49 to 72" 20 27"thru 36" -22 Ga. "* 73"and larger 18 G. Leakage shall be limited to a maximum of 5%of total capacity of the system. K Radii of throat of all metal dud elbows shall be equal to the width of the dud. Where this is impossible, or impractical due to building construction,turning vanes or duct turns shall be used whether shown on the plans or not. L No hangers formed by wires, chains, horizontal pieces of pipe, or perforated metal bands will be permitted in any part of the work,nor will the use of wood or fiber plugs be permitted in lieu of all metal expansion shields or inserts. J. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Ducts shall be free from vibration or rattling when fans are started or stopped. K Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doom, at each automatic control damper, at each dud mounted coil,at each fire and smoke damper,and at every duct mounted control device location. L. Doors located in insulated duds shall be fiunished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Doors shall be 12"x 12"minimum, except where limited by dud size,and shall be larger where necessary(up to 16"x24"maximum)for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. 2.03 DAMPERS AND DUCTURNS A Volume dampers for ductwork less than two(2)square feet in area shall be of the butterfly single blade type mounted on rods. Both ends of all dampers shall extend through drilled holes in duct APRIL 1995 15800-2 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT'S A The drawings and General provisions of the contrail, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY OF SYSTEMS SPECIFIED HEREIN A Furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment, tools and temporary work required for the complete installation of the Air Distribution Systems for the premises herein described and shown on the contract drawings. B. The intent of these specifications and contract drawings is to provide complete installation of the various systems described herein and indicated on the drawings. Any listing or indication of items furnished or work to be performed shall not be construed to be complete in itself, and shall not limit the general requirements to furnish and install all work, equipment, accessories, controls, etc., to complete the contract in a substantial manner. C. The scope of work shall include the following but not be limited to same: Ductwork,with accessories Supply,return and exhaust systems Registers,gnlles,diffusers r Insulation(refer to Section 15250) Exhaust fans(refer to Section 15850) "' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Submit shop drawings for all equipment specified in this section. B. Prepare and submit 1/4"scale sheetmetal drawings. 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Refer to Division 1 specifications. B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type, quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufacturers are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein Contractoors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.05 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS&SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 15010. PART 2-MATERIALS 2.01 DUCTWORK A All general ductwork shall be constructed of copper bearing galvanized steel,as made by ARMCO,Bethlehem or Wheeling,equal to Wheeling"Sofdte". APRIL 1995 15800-1 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Balancing Contractor shall include all costs of balancing the hot water system (Refer to Section 15950). Balancing Contractor shall return to the job after building is occupied and rebalance the new system as required to obtain Proper temperatures throughout the job. B. Mechanical Contractor shall carefully vent the system when filling same and return to the job during the one ARAN year guarantee period as required to assure the Owner of a properly operating system. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING A Plumbing Contractor to install 1" valved cold water line connection in Mechanical Equipment Room Mechanical Contractor to odemd water piping to makeup connection on the hot water heating system B. All cold water piping shall be run in Type"L"copper tubing using sweat fittings. C. Cold water piping shall be insulated with 1"thick Owens-Corning 25-ASJ pipe insulation or approved equal in Armstrong or Knauf~ See Section 15250-Mechanical Insulation. D. Provide a Watts Model 909 back low preventor on makeup water line. Refer to the makeup water detail on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15500 AWW APRIL 1995 15500-5 STEAM AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION J. Supply necessary end trim, inside/outside comer trim covers for all "B"type piping connections. K. Necessary wall support blocking for proper radiator mounting shall be by the General Contractor. Coordinate as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Sizes and approximate locations of all piping are shown on the drawings. Check carefiilly with the architectural drawings and drawings showing work of other trades to make sure that there will be no conflict between these trades and the piping. 3.02 HOT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A Provide a complete hot water piping system to service all heating equipment All supply and return piping IN THE BASEMENT shall be Schedule 40 black steel(2-1/2"and larger)or Type "L"copper(refer to Section 15050). Piping between Stadler headers and heating elements shall be cross-linked PEX tubing with oxygen barrier.. Fittings for Schedule 40 black steel shall be malleable iron, 150 lb. class conforming to ANSI B16.3. Threaded flanges shall be cast iron, 125 lb. class, conforming to ANSI B16.1 or steel 150 lb. class, conforming to ANSI B16.1. Grooved fittings shall be "Zero-Flex" by Victaulic, except where flexible couplings are required for expansion or vibration control. Fittings for Type "L" copper shall be cast bronze solder joint pressure fittings per ANSI B16.18 or wrought copper and bronze pressure fittings per ANSI B 16.22. Oak B. Install all valves and drains.Vent high points of all piping. C. Before the water circulating system is placed in operation,blow out the system with compressed air to remove all chips,dirt,oil,piping compounds and scale. D. Flush out system with solution of water and trisodium phosphate or caustic soda compounds until all traces of dirt,scale,oil and other foreign materials have disappeared Flush out all traces of cleaning compounds. E. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein,water in the system shall be tested and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side(ph-7.2 to 7.5). If the systems are found to be still on the acid side,the cleaning by the use of cleaning compounds shall be repeated F. Hydrostatically test all new hot water heating piping Prior to insulating. Apply a 75 psig pressure, using a pump,for a period not less than four(4)hours without a drop in pressure. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages due to water leaks. 3.03 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING A Provide a complete steam and condensate piping systern to serve the heat exchanger and steam coil. Piping to be Schedule 40 black steel,welded or threaded. Condensate drain piping shall be Schedule 40 steel piping (Refer to Section 15050). Fittings for Schedule 40 black steel shall be malleable iron, 150 lb. class conforming to ANSI B16.3. Threaded flanges shall be cast iron, 125 lb. class, conforming to ANSI B16.1 or steel 150 lb. class, conforming to ANSI B 16.1. 3.04 BALANCING AND VENTING OF HOT WATER SYSTEM APRIL 1995 15500-4 STEAM AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION I. Hot and chilled water pumps are based on as manufactured by Grundfoss. J. Furnish and install on the suction of each pump a MUESCO strainer with cast iron body. Provide with removable stainless steel strainer and fine mesh brass start-up strainer. Space shall be provided for removal of strainer and connection of blowdown valve. 2.07 CABINET HEATERS A Furnish and install cabinet heaters of the sizes and types specified herein and on the drawings, in Trane or Embassy make. B. Fans shall be DIDW forward curved centrifugal connected directly to a constant motor with built in overload protection. Motor leads to be plug in type. Trane units shall be furnished with 1"throwaway filters. C. Casing to be heavy gauge steel with baked enamel finish in a color to be selected by the Architect All fully recess and semi-recessed units shall have an overlap on four sides. D. Heating elements shall be hot water coil construction of copper tubes with aluminum fns, E. Acceptable alternate manufacturers: Sterling. 2.08 FIN TUBE RADIATION A Furnish and install all fin tube radiation as shown and noted on the drawings, of Sterling make. Radiation shall be furnished complete with all accessories and shall be of type,size and capacity as noted in schedule on drawings. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Ted Reed Thermal. AW 2.09 PANEL RADIATORS A. Panel radiators shall be Model "R" or"RF", manufactured by Runtal North America of cold rolled low carbon steel, fully welded and consisting of header pipes at each end, connected by flat oval water tubes. Model RF to have fins welded to backside of tubes. B. Radiators to be standard pressure construction,with.048"min. wall thickness,rated for 56 psi max. working pressure. C. Piping connections to be 3/4"NPT and 118"NPT air vent connections. D. Radiator expansion does not exceed 0.016" per linear foot at 215 degF. Contractor to make allowance for expansion in piping as required. E. Radiators shall be phosphatized and primed with flat white baked enamel, with a finish coat of gloss baked enamel for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils. Color to be selected by architect, from standard colors. F. Radiators shall have continuous mounting strip for attachment anywhere along the length of the radiator. G. Standard K I/K45 wall mount brackets to be provided for an overall mounted depth of 2". H. Radiators to mount 3"above finished floor and centered below windows where appropriate. I. Radiators with "A"type piping connections shall have vertical exposed pipe covered with standard vertical pipe covers. APRIL 1995 15500-3 STEAM AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.02 EXPANSION TANKS AND ACCESSORIES OPW A Furnish and install expansion tank as manufactured by Bell & Gossett, as specified herein and on the drawings. Tank shall be constructed of carbon steel and ASME labeled for 125 psig working pressure and 375F operating temperature. Tank assembly shall be coated with metallic oxide primer to prevent rust or corrosion. B. Tank shall be mounted on steel frame as part of heat exhanger pedcage. Furnish with all accessories necessary for proper operation. 2.03 CHE IICAL FEEDER A Furnish Century Vortex series with E-2000,with 2-005-72A digital output to Energy Management System 2.04 CONDENSATE NIE TER A Furnish Neptune Model DBF-5 with FBK-5 filter bag and Dwyer Model 100 flow indicator. 2.05 AIR SEPARATOR A The air separator shall be cask iron or welded steel, constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME code for a working pressure of 125 psi, and furnished as part of beat exchanger package. Spirotherm"SpmNeW,line size. 2.06 CIRCULATING PUMPS A Furnish and install pumps with capacities as shown on plans. Pumps shall be vertical in-line centrifugal type as manufactured by Grunfoss, and capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. B. Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron with integrally-cast pedestal support. The impeller shall be cast bronze, enclosed-type, dynamically balanced., keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew. C. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the pump shaft by an internally-flushed mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat of at least 98% alumina oxide content, and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225°F. A replaceable bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal. D. Pumps shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. Castings shall have gauge ports at nozzles and vent and drain ports at top and bottom of casting. E. Pump bearing housing assembly shall have heavy-duty regreaseable ball bearings, replaceable without disturbing piping connections and have foot support at coupling end. F. The motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be the size,voltage and enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned by contractor after installation. G. Each pump shall be factory tested. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high-grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. R Each unit shall be checked by the contractor and regulated for proper differential pressure, voltage and amperage draw. This data shall be noted on a permanent tag or label and fastened to the pump for owner's reference. APRIL 1995 15500-2 STEAM AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15500 STEAM AND HYDRONIC HEATING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A The drawings and General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY OF SYSTEMS SPECIFIED HEREIN A Provide all labor,materials,equipment,tools and temporary work required for the complete installation of the Heating Systems for the premises herein described and shown on the contract drawings. B. The intent of these specifications and contract drawings is to provide complete installation of the various systems described herein and indicated on the drawings. Any listing or indication of items firmshed or work to be performed shall not be construed to be complete in itself and shall not limit the general requirements to fimaish and install all work, equipment, accessories, controls, etc., to complete the contract in a wbstantial manner. C. The scope of work shall include the following but not be limited to same: Steam to Hot Water Convertor/Pump Package Cabinet Unit Heaters Hot Water Heating Specialties Valves(Refer to 15050) Hot Water Heating Piping&Accessories Air Handling Units(Refer to 15850) Steam Traps Radiators 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 15010. Submit shop drawings for the all equipment in this section: 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Section 01600"Materials and Equipment." B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manufactmrs are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.05 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTTI'[TITONS Refer to Section 15010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEAM TO HOT WATER CONVERTOR PACKAGE A. Furnish and install as herein specified, shown or scheduled on the Contract Drawings, one (1) steam-to-hot water convertor package consisting of heat exchanger, expansion tank, pumps (see below) valves, starters, traps and accessories factory mounted on a steel frame. B. Heat exchanger shall be Bell&Gossett Model SU64-2. Refer to schedule for capacities. APRIL 1995 15500-1 STEAM AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS D. The Plumbing Contractor shall refinish and restore to their original condition all plumbing equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats or paint and/or enamel. E. The new potable water piping shall be thoroughly sterilized by the Plumbing Contractor with a solution containing not less than fifty parts per million of available chlorine. The chlorinating materials shall be either liquid chlorine or sodium hypochloride solution. The sterilizing solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of eight hours, during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After sterilization,the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual chlorine is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. Sterilization shall be to the satisfaction of the Board of Health. Submit certification in writing,that his work has been accomplished in conformance with the above. F. Any stoppage,discoloration,or other damage to parts of the systems building, its finish or furnishings due to the Plumbing Contractor's failure to properly clean the systems and equipment,shall be repaired at his expense. G. All steam,water and electric current required to clean the systems will be furnished and disposed of by the Plumbing Contractor. 3.15 TESTS AND APPROVALS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall notify the Architect three working days prior to tests being conducted. Test all piping,and make it gas and water tight,in accordance with the State of Massachusetts codes and ordinances,and in the presence,and to the satisfaction of the applicable Inspector along with the Architect and his representitve. B. Pipe lines shall be blown or flushed clean,before piping tests are applied. All plumbing work shall not be covered,concealed,used or made inaccessible to testing,inspection,repair,correction or replacement until tests thereof have been satisfactorily completed in the presence of the Architect's Authorized Representatives. The Plumbing Subcontractor must accommodate his testing operations to the progress of the project as a whole. Correct all defects appearing under test and repeat the tests until all parts of the work have withstood them successfully. No caulking,peening or wicking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable. The Plumbing Contractor shall make and remove all temporary piping and line connections required for the tests and shall dispose of test water and all wastes after tests in a satisfactory and non-damaging manner. Leave all work in good order and ready for full use. C. Upon completion of the roughing in and before setting plumbing fixtures and drains,the entire water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 150%of the maximimum working pressure of the system,and shall hold tight at this pressure for two hours,without additional pumping. Where a portion of the work is to be concealed before completion,this portion shall be tested separately in the manner as described for the entire system. D. Upon roughing in and before setting fixtures,drains and all outlets in soil,waste,vent and rainwater systems shall be temporarily capped and made tight. The piping within the building shall be then filled with water up to the roof and must remain full,without showing any leakage of water. All parts of the system shall be subject to not less than ten feet of hydrostatic head,above the point being tested. Test tees shall be provided as to facilitate testing. E. Gas piping shall be subjected to a pressure of 150 PSI air pressure. Pressure shall be maintained for two hours. F.. Tests on all plumbing systems shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the Massachusetts State Plumbing Code,NFPA 99 and other Local Plumbing Codes. END OF SECTION 15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-11 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE mop receptor. Pressure guages shall be installed on the supply and discharge side of the backflow preventer assembly. Each pressure guage assembly shall include TRERICE 600-0 guage,0-160 PSI dial range, 753-2 valve and 872-1 snubber. Furnish to the Owner one Watts TK-9 Model"A"Test Kit. This Contractor shall act as the Owners agent in seeking approval from the Department of Environmental Protection. This Contractor shall submit all plans, Specification and applications required for approval and shall pay all fees. Avft Approvals shall be secured prior to the purchase and installation of backflow preventers. 3.09 FLOOR DRAINS A. Floor drains shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Contractor,he shall be responsible for correctly setting these drains at the proper grade to assure proper drainage from all surrounding areas. Sizes of drains shall be the same size as the pipe it serves. 3.10 WALL HYDRANTS A. Hydrants shall be set 18"above outside grade and placed as indicated. Loose key stops shall be turned over to the Owner prior to completion. 3.11 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing systems that require accessibility for proper operation and maintenance of the system. Access panels shall be installed by the appropriate trades. 3.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. All plumbing fixtures,except as otherwise noted,shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Contractor, he shall be responsible for correctly setting these fixtures as shown on the Architects Plans and interior elevations. B. Fixtures designated as handicapped use shall be mounted in accordance with Local Codes. C. All shower/tub controls shall be adjusted by the installing plumber prior to the final inspection. Controls shall be set to deliver water at a maximum temperature of 112 degree F. 3.13 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Exposed piping piping above removable ceilings,shall be labeled at 20'-0"intervals, at each change in direction and on either side of a floor or wall penetration. B. All labels shall be placed so that they can be easily read from the floor. 3.14 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the cleaning and purging of all pertinent systems after installation and before systems operation. Any damage to parts of the building,its finish and furnishings, due to the Plumbing Contractor's failure to properly clean the system,shall be repaired or replaced at his expense. B. All plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all plastic,stickers,paint,rust stains and other foreign matter of discoloration,leaving every part in an acceptable condition and ready for use. Surfaces shall be cleaned,polished and left bright. The surfaces of all floor drains,cleanouts,and other equipment shall be cleaned and each item shall be left in a first class condition. C. All finished metal work shall be cleaned,polished and left bright. All equipment,pipe,valves,drains and fittings shall be cleaned of grease,during construction and/or testing. °** PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-10 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE C. All systems shall be tested and approved prior to installing pipe covering and insulation. D. Staples are not to be used. E. All pipe covering and insulation shall pass through all walls,ceiling and floor continuously. The only area where the insulation shall not pass continuously shall be at riser clamps. Hangers shall be installed with insulation shields on the outside of the insulation. 3.06 PIPE SLEEVES,HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Pipe sleeves,hangers and fixture supports for piping shall be furnished and set by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be responsible for their proper and permanent location. B. Pipe sleeves: Shall be installed and properly secured at all points where pipes pass through masonry,concrete and wood. Pipe sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to provide approximately 1/4 inch clearance around pipe. Pipe sleeves through masonry partitions and floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe with chromium platted escutcheons with set screws or clips for firmly holding in place. Sleeves in floors shall extend 1 inch above floor and after installation of pipe shall be packed and made water tight. Sleeves through walls shall end flush with surface of walls. C. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and supports. Pipes shall be supported to maintain required grading and pitching of lines to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place and shall be arranged so as to provide for proper expansion and contraction of pipe. D. All horizontal piping shall be hung with approved adjustable,malleable iron pipe hangers,unless otherwise specified and spaced not over the following distances: Cast Iron 5'-0" at joint Copper Tubing and Brass Pipe 6'-0"on center +• Steel Pipe 10'-0"on center E. Rod size shall be the same size as that approved for use with the hanger assembly,and the size of the rods shall not be less than given in the following table: 112"to 4"pipe 3/8"rod 5"and larger 1/2"rod F. All auxiliary framing required to support plumbing piping between structural frames or grids where they occur will be a part of this Section. G. Sleeves provided for piping between floors and through fire walls or smoke partitions shall be installed with approved packing between sleeves and piping to provide for fire stop. 3.07 CLEANOUTS A. All cleanouts shall be set flush with walls or floors. Finish shall be protected during construction with proper covering. 3.08 VALVES A. All valves famished and installed under this Section shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and repair. B. In no case shall valve stem and handle be installed below the center line of the pipe it serves. C. Backflow preventers and shutoff valves shall be installed between 3 and 4 feet above the floor and a minimum of 12"from any wall. Support the assembly from the floor or the wall. Run vent to nearest floor drain or PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-9 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE E. Provide shock absorbers as required. F. Provide valves on every branch,to group of fixtures and wherever indicated on the Drawings. G. Pipes shall be run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a drain valve with cap and chain at each low point in piping so that all parts of the system can be drawn off. 3.03 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM A. All piping shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site and shall be installed without springing or forcing. B. Branch lines from service or main lines may be taken off the top or bottom of main using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. All service pipes,fittings and valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2"from finished coverings on the different services. C. All piping shall be supported from the building structure with pipe hangers. In general,all lines shall be installed concealed above ceilings in finished spaces where they may occur. D. All piping shall be cut true and threaded. Cap all open ends to prevent the entrance of debris. E. Provide valves on every branch and where indicated on the Drawings. F. All pipes shall be run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a drip leg at each low point and at the base of each riser. 3. 04 SANITARY SYSTEMS A. Soil,waste and vent piping inside the building shall be run as indicated on the Drawings,properly secured to the building structure with iron hangers. Extend to roof all lines of soil,waste and vent piping in stacks with ' all branches and fittings required and extension through roofs as required by the Local Plumbing Code. Where an end circuit vent pipe from any fixture or line of fixtures is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures,the connection shall be at least 3 feet or sufficiently above the floor on which the fixtures are located to prevent the use of the vent line as a waste. B. All changes in pipe size and direction on soil and waste lines shall be made with Y's and cleanouts, reducing fittings or recessed reducers. Y's and 45 degree fittings,of 45 degree combination fittings shall be used wherever possible. Use long sweep bends at the bottom of stacks. C. All fixtures and drains on the sanitary drainage system shall be seperately trapped and each trap shall be vented. D. Sanitary long sweep bends and Y's shall be used for connections to branch lines for fixtures and T.Y's on vertical runs of pipe only. Long turn fittings shall be used wherever conditions permit. Short radius fittings may be installed where in conformity with the Plumbing Code. Furnish and install cleanouts at the bottom of all soil,and waste stacks,at every change in direction on soil and waste piping. Plug all temporary open ends to prevent the entrance of debris. 3.05 INSULATION A. All pipe covering and insulation shall be carefully applied by mechanics skilled in the trade. All insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens Corning or approved equal. B. Pipe coverings and insulation shall be installed on all piping,valves and fittings except piping,valves and fittings designated to be chrome plated. -Nob, PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-8 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE L. Piping or fittings exposed and not insulated in finished areas are to be standard weight brass pipe,chrome plated. M. Provide standard weight steel pipe for pipe passing through walls,and sheet metal or pipe sleeves for pipes AMW passing through floors. N. Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous pipe are to be made with approved adapter fittings. 0. Whether or not specifically shown on drawings,valves are to be provided at following locations: 1. All branches and risers from mains. 2. Divisions of mains. 3. Supply piping to each fixture or other apparatus. 4. Any other locations required by ordinances,codes and regulations. P. Insulate all hot and cold water piping and exposed waste and hot water piping under all handicapped use lavatories Q. Install plumbing fixtures level and securely attached to wall,floor or both. Provide backup plates as needed to obtain solid backing for valves and fixtures. R Each fixture shall be separately trapped,using the type and size of trap specified by the Plumbing Code. All traps are to be 17 gauge material,chrome plated with cleanout plug. S. Protect all plumbing fixtures against damage. Damaged or scratched fixtures will be rejected and shall be promptly removed from the premises and replaced with new. T. Contractor shall make all connections to equipment supplied by others under other Sections of specifications and furnish all valves,traps, supply risers and piping required. U. Identify all valves and piping as speed in Section 15050 complete with typewritten framed charts. V. Sterilize all new piping as required by Code. W. Refer to Section 15050. X. Insulate storm piping in areas where condensation on the storm piping may occur. 3.02 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A. All copper tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site and shall be installed without springing or forcing. B. Branch lines from service or main lines may be taken off the top or bottom of main using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. All service pipes,fittings and valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2"from finished coverings on the different services. C. All piping shall be supported from the building structure with pipe hangers. In general,all lines shall be installed concealed above ceilings in finished spaces where they may occur. D. All copper tubing shall be cut true with cutters;the ends shall be reamed out to full inside diameter of the pipe. Cap all open ends to prevent the entrance of debris. PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-7 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE 2.08 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Refer to fixture schedule on Drawing P2-1 for fixture selection. 2.09 PRESSURE REDUCING STATION A. High flow pressure reducing valve shall be a Watts 2 1/2" model 2235 and the low flow valve,piped in parallel shall be a Watts 3/4"model 2235. Refer to Drawing P-1 for location and P2-1 for detail. 2.10 TESTS AND APPROVALS A. Pipe lines shall be blown or flushed clean,before piping tests are applied. All plumbing work shall be covered, concealed used or made inaccessible to testing,inspection,repair,correction or replacement until tests thereof have been satisfactorily completed in the presence of the Architect's Authorized Representatives. The Plumbing Subcontractor must accommodate his testing operations to the progress of the project as a whole. Correct all defects appearing under test and repeat the tests until all parts of the work have withstood them successfiffly. B. Furnish all labor,material and services for testing,including testing plugs,pumps and compressors;he shall make and remove all temporary piping connections required for the tests and shall dispose of test water and all wastes after tests. Leave all work in good order and ready for full use. C. Tests on all plumbing systems shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the Local Plumbing Code. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install complete system of insulated hot, cold and recirculation water piping to serve all new fixtures. B. In general,pitch all piping upward in direction of flow of water with each fixture separately valved. C. Provide shut off valves and drain valves at bottom of risers. D. Install complete gravity sanitary waste and vent system as shown. E. Verify elevation of exterior lines before running buried piping in building. F. Vent or soil stacks run adjacent to exterior walls of building shall be offset back a minimum of 6 feet. G. Water piping is to be run concealed in all finished areas and so arranged that it can be drained at low points. Provide hose bibb drains at these low points. Support piping with clevis hangers in such a manner that there is not sagging or noise due to vibration. H. Waste and vent piping below grade shall be supported on well tamped earth. Waste,vent and storm water piping above grade shall be supported with clevis hangers at no greater spacing than eight(8)feet on center. I. Unions are to be used at connections to fixtures and other apparatus to allow easy removal. Provide water hammer arresting air chambers where needed. J. Provide chrome plated escutcheons where exposed pipe passes through walls,floor or ceiling. K. Minimum pitch for sanitary sewers is 1/8"per foot. Provide cleanouts at end of all lines,changes in direction,base of all stacks and all traps whether or not shown on drawings. Provide flush access panels to General Contractor for wall or floor mounting as required at each cleanout. Intervals shall not exceed 50 feet. PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-6 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE 2.03 PIPE SLEEVES, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 15050-MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS for installation of pipe sleeves,hangers and supports. 2.04 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company or approved equal. The following series numbers are intendded to establish a level of quality and comparison. 1. Jay R. Smith Series 4023 coated cast iron floor cleanout with nickel bronze top for buried storm and sanitary piping. 2. Jay R. Smith Series 4472 round stainless steel wall access cover,center screw and recessed bronze taper thread plug for storm and sanitary piping in walls. 3. Jay R. Smith Series 4470 recessed bronze taper thread plug for use in conjuction with standard pipe fittings for base of sanitary and storm stacks. 2.05 VALVES A. Refer to Section 15050-MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS for valve selection. 2.06 WATER HEATER A. Two(2)Viessmann HG-HC-120 indirect-fired storage water heaters. (Preordered by Smith College) B. Honeywell L6000 6E manual reset high limit on the hot water main from the heaters. C. Each tank to be supplied with a Tour-Anderson 1 114"V-283 valve with actuator and on/off service. Furnished by Smith College and installed by HVAC Contractor. D. Each tank is to be supplied with an individual aquastat E. Each tank shall be supplied with an individual T&P valve. F. An operating aquastat must be installed together with a motorized valve to control the domestic hot water temperatures in proper proportion. G. Each tank must have a steam valve installed in the steam supply pipe to each individual tank together with an automatic vacuum breaker between valve and tank. 2.07 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for access to all concealed parts of the plumbing systems that require accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system. B. Size shall be sufficient for the purpose,but not less than 12 inches by 18 inches. Particular attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors by masonry walls in order that frame sizes used will match the courses of brick or block. C. Refer to the Contract Architectural Ceiling Drawings for plaster ceiling locations where the above panels area applicable. D. Point out to the Ceiling Subcontractor exactly which tile units are to be marked with a colored button to indicate equipment above. PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-5 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE B. These numbers shall correspond with numbers indicated for valves and controls on the Record Drawings and on a minimum of two(2)typed valve lists. These typed lists shall state the number and locations of each valve and the section or equipment which it controls,and other necessary information, such as requiring the opening and closing of another valve where one(1)valve is to be opened or closed. C. Printed lists shall be prepared in a form to meet the approval of the Architect,framed under glass and displayed in rooms designated by the Architect. 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Give detailed instructions,prior to the completion of the work,to the responsible personel designated by the Architect in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under this Section. A letter with two(2) copies containing the name of the person or persons to whom the instructions were given and the dates of the instruction period shall be submitted to the Architect at the completion of the project. B. Prepare three(3)sets of manufacturer's catalogs,other similar data including the necessary photographic equipment cuts,wiring diagrams covering all mechanical equipment and devices furnished and installed under this Section. These manuals shall provide complete instructions for the proper operation and use of the equipment together with instructions for lubrication and periodic maintenance and for trouble shooting. Operating instructions shall be specific for each system and shall include copies of posted specific instructions. This manual shall contain only that information whichspecifically applies to this project and all unrelatedd material shall be deleted. Dduring the instruction period this manual shall be used and explained. The material shall be bound in note book form and indexed. C. Provide name,address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company for each piece of equipment so that the source of replacement parts and service for each item of equipment can be readdily obtained. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Exterior water service shall be cement lined ductile iron, Class 52, mechanical joint fittings conforming to AWWA Class D. Pipe and fittings shall be cement lined on the inside and bituminous coated on the outside. Changes in direction shall have tie rods anchored to concrete thrust blocks. B. Domestic hot, cold and recirculation piping above grade shall be Type L insulated hard drawn copper tubing with cast bronze or copper sweat fittings. C. Waste and vent piping below grade shall be service weight bell and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings joined with neoprene resilient gaskets. D. Waste and vent piping above grade shall be standard weight hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings joined with approved stainless steel mechanical couplings with neoprene gaskets. E. Waste and vent piping 2"and smaller shall be DWV hard drawn seamless copper tubing with wrought copper drainage fittings. F. Gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel beveled ends with standard weight carbon steel beveled end fittings joined by welding in accordance with local codes. 2.02 INSULATION A. Refer to Section 15200 -MECHANICAL INSULATION for insulation of plumbing piping and equipment. Anek PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-4 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE 1.08 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Each Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for his work and equipment until finally inspected,tested and accepted. Carefully store materials and equipment which are not immeciately installed after delivery to site. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing materials. B. Each Sub-Contractor shall protect work and material of other trades from damage that might be caused by his work or workmen and make good damage thus caused. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings will be submitted for all equipment and systems under this Section. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain at the job site a complete and seperate black line set of prints of the approved Working Drawings on which accurately indicate daily progress. Schedules shall be modified to reflect data consistent with that of the installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of change orders,instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encoutered in the field. Accurately indicate the location,size,type and elevation of new uutilities and their relationship to existing utilities 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions regarding substitution of materials as it relates to this project. 1.12 GUARANTEE A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for requirements all of which shall be included as part of this Specification. 1.13 REMOVAL WORK A. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of services in the adjoining buildings. B. All existing equipment indicated to be removed shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All existing equipment indicated to be turned over to the Owner shall be presented to the Owner in good condition at a location designated by the Owner. All other equipment shall be removed from the premises. C. Remove all abandoned piping and equipment not built into building construction. Where ceilings or walls are to be removed all abandoned piping shall be removed and ends of live services capped. Abandoned elements built into walls or located above ceilings shall remain and ends capped and marked abandoned. 1.14 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Make all final plumbing connections to equipment not furnished under this part of this Section. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturers requirements for final location,size and connections prior to laying out or installing any work. Furnish and install all traps and supply stop kits as required. 1.15 VALVE TAGS AND LISTS A. Provide on each valve a 11/4 inch diameter brass tag with indented numerals and letters filled with black enamel. The tags shall be attached to the valve handle or stem with brass chains and properly secured. All numbers shall be prefixed by the letters"P"to distinguish them from valves which will be furnished by other Contractors in connection with their work. PLUMBING SYSTEMS-15400-3 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE 2. Temporary Water,Heat and Fire Protection 3. Temporary Light and Power 4. Excavation and Backfilling 5. Foundations and Trenching 6. Concrete Bases for Equipment 7. Flashing and Holes through Roof 8. Painting 9. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 10. Fire Protection 11. Electrical 12. Utilities Beyond 10'-0"from the Building 1.04 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND DESIGN DATA A. All work shown on the Drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale,but figures,dimensions and detailed Drawings are to be followed in every case. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of pipes or conduits and methods of running them are shown but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered- B. Locations shown on Drawings are approximate and it is intended that all equipment shall be located in accordance with the general and detail Drawings of the construction proper. All measurements shall be taken at the building before fabrication commences. C. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings,all necessary parts to make complete,approved working systems ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge. D. The Plumbing Contractor,before installing any of his work,shall see that it does not interfere with the clearance required for finished walls and ceilings,as shown on the Contract Architectural Drawings and details. E. Work installed by the Plumbing Contractor which interferes with or modifies the Architectural designs as i•w shown on the Contract Drawings shall be changed as ditected and all costs incident to such changes shall be paid by the Sub-Contractor. 1.05 OBTAINING INFORMATION A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment that is to be furnished and installed Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the work and to complete the project_ 1.06 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction, including all other trades, shall not be delayed and not interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit and must be installed promptly when and as directed. B. Keep fully informed as to the shape,size and position of all openings required for all apparatus and give information in advance to build openings into the work Furnish and set in place all sleeves,pockets,supports and incidentals. 1.07 PERMITS FEES RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under this Section. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses,permits and certificates. Comply with the rules and regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction,the rules and regulations of the Public Utility Companies serving the building. PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-2 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE SECTION 15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIRE TENTS A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMANTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this Section. B. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. D. The Plumbing Contractor is to verify accuracy of information provided on the Plumbing Contract Documents plans. The Information shown is based on existing documentation and an engineers survey and is provided for establishing scope of work only. E. Plumbing Contractor is responsible,when connecting to existing piping,for examination of existing piping. If the existing piping is not acceptable the piping should be removed to a point where the piping is acceptable. F. The entire Plumbing System shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Massachusetts State Plumbing Code,NFPA 99 and other appropriate Local Plumbing Codes. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor,equipment and supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as required by the Drawings and details and as specified herein, in general,to include the following items: 1. A complete domestic cold water system throughout the entire building connecting to each and every fixture and piece of equipment requiring domestic cold water. This system shall extend and connect to the water main 10'-0"outside of the building. 2. A complete domestic hot water system throughout the entire building connecting to each and every fixture and piece of equipment requiring domestic hot water. This system shall include a new Viesman and existing A.0. Smith water heater. 3. A complete sanitary waste and vent system throughout the entire building connecting to each and every fixture and piece of equipment requiring sanitary drainage. This system shall extend and connect to the sanitary main 10'-0"outside of the building. 4. A complete natural gas system throughout the entire building connecting to each and every outlet and appliance requiring gas. This system shall extend and connect to the house side of the meter provided by the Utility Company. 1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. The following and only the following items of labor and/or material related to or incident to the installation of the fire protection system will be provided under separate Sections of this specification. 1. All cutting and patching PLUMBING SYSTEMS- 15400-1 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE and Insurance Underwriters and shall arrange for approval of installation. A certificate of approval and acceptance by authorities having jurisdiction shall be submitted to the Architect and Underwriters' Representative. B. Notify the Architect three working days prior to day of tests are to be made. Test piping and make it gas and watertight, in accordance with all codes and ordinances, and in the presence and to the satisfaction of the applicable inspector along with the Architect and his representative. C. A performance or operation test of all sprinkler systems shall be made by the Sprinkler Contractor in the presence of representatives of the Architect,Engineer and the Fire Department. D. Testing shall be done at the expense of the Sprinkler Contractor, with all required equipment furnished by him. Systems shall be tested and repaired and retested until all requirements are met. E. The piping shall be installed in such a manner that there will be no visible leakage when the system is subjected to the hydrostatic pressure test. 3.10 DESIGN CRITERIA A. The entire new automatic sprinkler sustem shall be hydraulically designed and calculated. Submit computer hydraulic calculations to prove that the most hydraulically remote areas are being properly protected. B. The fire protection system calculations shall be proven using hydrant flow test data. A flow test shall be initiated at the building site. All hydraulic design and pipe sizing shall be based on this flow test. The flow test shall be obtained from two (2) hydrants, one of which shall be used for the static and residual pressure readings. Fire flow data may be used from that taken by the local Water Department if test data is less than 1 year old. C. The system shall be based on the building Underwriters design criteria. The Sprinkler Contractor shall establish with the Underwriter the classification of hazard, head spacing, GPM per square foot, total square ,^ footage of design and temperature of heads prior to any design or hydraulic calculations. END OF SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION-15300-9 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE F. All auxiliary framing required to support fire protection piping between structural frames or grids where they occur will be a part of this Section. G. Sleeves provided for piping between floors and through fire walls or smoke partitions shall be installed with approved packing between sleeves and piping to provide for fire stop. 3.03 VALVES A. All valves shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and repair. B. In no case shall valve stems and handles be installed below the center line of the pipe it serves. C. Double check valve assembly shall be installed in the horizontal position complete with OSY valves and tamper switches. The Sprinkler Contractor shall act as the Owners agent in seeking approval from the Department of Environmental Protection. Submit all plans, specifications and applications required for approval and pay all fees. Approval shall be secured prior to the purchase and installation of the double check valve assembly. 3.04 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES A. All supervisory switches shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and repair. 3.05 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. All pressure switches shall be located in a manner to allow proper access for service and repair. 3.06 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Siamese connection shall be set no less than 1'-6"or more than 3'-6"above outside grade. 3.07 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Sprinkler heads shall be spaced,located and positioned in accordance with NFPA 13 Chapter 4. B. Coordinate final locations of all sprinkler heads with Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans and Building Sections. 3.08 CLEANING OF SYSTEM A. The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for the cleaning and purging of all pertinent systems after installation and before system operation. Any damage to parts of the building, its finish or furnishings due to this Contractor's failure to properly clean the system,shall be repaired or replaced,at his expense. B. All heads,cabinets, pumps, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter or discoloration, leaving every part in an acceptable condition and ready for use. C. All finished metal work shall be cleaned, polished and left bright. All equipment, pipe, valves, drains and fittings shall be cleaned of grease,metal cutting and sludge which may have accumulated during construction and/or testing. D. The Sprinkler Contractor shall refinish and restore to their original condition all equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of paint and/or enamel. 3.09 TESTS AND APPROVALS A. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation and before any piping is concealed, the Sprinkler Contractor shall subject the system to all inspections, examinations and tests required by NFPA 13, 14, 20 FIRE PROTECTION-15300-8 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE C. Pipe shall be run parallel and graded evenly to draining points. Provide a drain valve at each low point in piping so that all parts of the sprinkler system can be drawn off. D. The Fire Protection Drawings intend to show only the scope of the design; and the Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for the correct installation of his work in a manner satisfactory to the best practices of his trade, Code and to complete the scope of this work in all respects. E. The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of field dimensions and shall check for himself all grades, lines, measurements, and other data in any way affecting his work. He shall refer to the project, phasing schedule together with Architectural, Structural and Drawings of other trades for a full comprehension of the extent of the work to be performed and to avoid interference, and shall not be entitled to any extra compensation for any additional work or expense arising from his failure to do so. In case interference develops, the Architect shall decide which work is to be relocated, regardless of which was first installed. Work installed by the Sprinkler Contractor which is improperly located and/or interferes with or modifies either the phasing schedule or the Architectural or Structural design, shall be changed as directed by the Architect,and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by the Sprinkler Contractor. F. Keep other Sub-Contractors fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for apparatus and give full information to the General Contractor and other Sub-Contractors sufficiently in advance of the work so that all openings may be built in advance. Furnish and install all sleeves, supports etc.as required. G. In the case of failure to give proper and timely information as noted above, provide cutting and patching or have the same done by the General Contractor and other Sub-Contractors which may be necessary to facilitate work and the completion of the whole project. H. Installation shall confirm to the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, local codes, other agencies having jurisdiction,and the recommendations of the Owner's insurance company's rating agencies. 3.02 PIPE SLEEVES,HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Pipe sleeves, hangers and fixture supports for piping shall be furnished and set by the Sprinkler Contractor and shall be responsible for their proper and permanent location. B. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured at all points where pipes pass through masonry, concrete and wood. Pipe sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to provide approximately 1/4 inch clearance around pipe. Pipe sleeves through masonry partitions and floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe with chromium plated escutcheons with set screws or clips for firmly holding in place. Sleeves in floors shall extend 1 inch above floor and after installation of pipe shall be packed and made water tight. Sleeves through walls shall end flush with surface of walls. C. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and supports. Pipes shall be supported to maintain required grading and pitching of lines to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place and shall be arranged so as to provide for proper expansion and contraction of pipe. D. All horizontal piping shall be hung with approved adjustable, malleable iron pipe hangers, unless otherwise specified and spaced not over the following distances: Cast Iron 5'-0"at joint Copper Tubing and Brass Pipe 6-0"on center Steel Pipe 10'-0"on center E. Rod size shall be the same size as that approved for use with the hanger assembly, and the size of the rods shall not be less than given in the following table: 1/2"to 4"pipe 3/8"rod 5"and larger 1/2"rod FIRE PROTECTION- 15300-7 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE 2.07 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Fire Department connection shall be similar to Potter Roemer Series 5020 cast brass two-way inlet body with drop clappers, 2 1/2 x 2 1/2 x 4 or 6. Polished brass plate lettered AUTO SPKR Two polished brass double female snots with rigid end NPT x pin lug hose thread swivels,plugs and chains. Threads shall match local Fire Department requirements. 2.08 SWING JOINTS A. Provide swing joint connections at all sprinkler heads in locations with acoustical tile ceilings. All sprinkler heads shall be located in the center of the ceiling tile. 2.09 SPRINKLER HEADS A In general, heads shall be rated for 165 degree operation similar to Grinnell Model C with escutcheon plate except where they occur near the outlet of heating equipment or any other locations where excessive heat may be expected,in which case they shall be designed for a higher melting point. 2.10 SPARE HEADS A. Spare sprinkler heads shall be provided for each type of sprinkler head installed Spare heads along with proper sprinkler head wrenches shall be packed in a metal container and located as directed by Owner. Spare sprinkler heads shall be supplied in proportion to the style and temperature rating of the heads installed. Up to 300 heads Not less than 6 of each type 300 to 1000 heads Not less than 12 of each type More than 1000 heads Not less than 24 of each type 2.11 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels for access to all concealed parts of the fire protection systems that require accessibility for the proper operation and maintenance of the system. B. Size shall be sufficient for the purpose,but not less than 12 inches by 18 inches. Particular attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors by masonry walls in order that frame sizes used will match the courses of brick or block. C. Refer to the Contract Architectural Ceiling Drawings for plaster ceiling locations where the above panels are applicable. D. Point out to the Ceiling Subcontractor exactly which file units are to be marked with a colored button to indicate equipment above. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. All piping shall be cut accurately to measurements obtained at the site of the system and shall be installed without springing or forcing. All piping shall be protected against mechanical injury in manner satisfactory to authorities having jurisdiction. B. All piping shall be located to avoid conflict with structure, all other trades and as required to maintain possible headroom. All service pipes,fittings and valves shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit not less than 1/2" from finished coverings and such other work and not less than 1/2" between finished coverings on the different services. FIRE PROTECTION- 15300-6 SMr]7H COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE B. Riser clamps shall be similar to Carpenter Paterson Figure 89 or Figure 126. 2.03 VALVES A. Gate valves 2 1/2" and larger shall have iron body,bronze mounted, straightway pattern, OSY, flanged ends, suitable for 175 lbs. working pressure, similar to Jenkins Brothers Figure p gore No. 825-0. B. Gate valves 2" and smaller shall have bronze body with screwed ends, OSY, for 175 lbs. working water pressure,similar to Jenkins Brother Figure No. 275-U. C. Globe valves and the inspector test connection shall be bronze body with screwed ends, suitable for 300 lbs. non-shock cold water,similar to Jenkins Brothers Figure No. 106-A- D. Check valves 2 1/2" and larger and the siamese connection shall be swing type with cast iron body, bronze mounted, flanged ends, suitable for 175 lbs. working water pressure, similar to Jenkins Brothers Figure No. 729-C,trapped for automatic ball drip as required. E. Check valves 2" and smaller shall be of the silent type, No. 203-A-T as manufactured by Mueller Steam Specialty. G. All threads shall meet the requirements of the Local Fire Department. K Alarm check valves shall be approved vertical type for dry systems, complete with accelerator, pressure switch, drain valves, pressure guages, secondary check valve, air compressor and other required trimming similar to Viking, Grinnel or equal as approved. I. Double check valve assembly shall be Watts 709 OSY Series complete with test kit and spare parts kit. J. Provide durable metal cages with locks on all exposed valves. 2.04 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES 'Oa A. Supervisory switches for OS&Y valves shall be Autocall Model No. OS&Y-U, FM approved, UL listed equipped with two(2) SPDT contacts, housed in a cast aluminum case with a red enameled finish tapped for a 1/2 inch NPT conduit connection. 2.05 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Pressure switches shall be Autocall Model No. 4181-022, FM approved, UL listed equipped with two (2) SPDT contacts, housed in an aluminum case, a brass bellows sensing element, nickel plated brass bellows housing with 1/2 inch NPT male pipe thread. Switches shall be factory set to transfer between 4 psi to 8 psi and shall be adjustable from 2 psi to 20 psi. 2.06 INSPECTORS TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS A. Dry system test pipe shall not be less than 1 inch in diameter terminating in a smooth bore corrosion resisting orifice to provide a flow equivalent to one sprinkler of a type installed on a particular system installed on the end of the most distant sprinkler pipe in the upper story and be equipped with a readily accessible 1 inch shutoff valve,brass nipple and brass cap. B. Auxillary drain connections shall be provided when a change in piping direction prevents drainage of sections of branch lines or mains through the main drain valve. The drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 3/4 inch size and plug,at least one of which shall be brass. FIRE PROTECTION- 15300-5 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE C. Remove all abandoned piping and equipment not built into building construction. Where ceilings or walls are to be removed all abandoned piping shall be removed and ends of live services capped. Abandoned elements built into walls or located above ceilings shall remain and ends capped and marked abandoned. 1.14 VALVE TAGS AND LISTS A. Provide on each valve a 1 1/4 inch diameter brass tag with indented numerals and letters filled with black enamel. The tags shall be attached to the valve handle or stem with brass chains and properly secured. All numbers shall be prefixed by the letters "FP" to distinguish them from valves which will be furnished by other Contractors in connection with their work. B. These numbers shall correspond with numbers indicated for valves and controls on the Record Drawings and on a minimum of two (2) typed valve lists. These typed lists shall state the number and locations of each valve and the section or equipment which it controls, and other necessary information, such as requiring the opening and closing of another valve where one(1)valve is to be opened or closed. C. Printed lists shall be prepared in a form to meet the approval of the Architect, framed under glass and displayed in rooms designated by the Architect. 1.15 INSPECTION A. The Owner, Architect or Representatives have the right to inspect and witness all installation and testing to insure compliance with all terms and conditions of contract documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Exterior water service piping shall be mechanical joint ductile iron, Class 52,with mechanical joint cast iron fittings; fittings shall conform to AWWA Class D. Pipe and fittings shall be coated on the outside and cement lined on the inside. All changes in direction shall have tie rods and clamps anchored to thrust blocks. B. Water service entrance into building shall be cast iron flanged pipe and fittings;pipe shall conform to Federal Specification WW-P-421, class 150; flanges faced and drilled for 125 psi service. Pipe and fittings shall be coated on the outside,cement lined on the inside. C. Above ground piping where making connections to flanged valves and to underground entrance shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe, black cast iron screwed companion flanges and flanged cast iron fittings, all suitable for 175 psi working water pressure. D. Sprinkler system piping shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe with black cast iron screwed sprinkler fittings suitable for 175 psi working water pressure. E. Riser and sprinkler piping shall be schedule 10 welded and seamless steel pipe in accordance with ASTM- 135 joined with groove fittings and couplings approved for service with grooves rolled on the pipe by an approved groove rolling machine. F. Piping from alarm valve to water motor gong shall be schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi working water pressure. 2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for piping of sizes 4 inches and smaller shall be Carpenter Paterson Figure No. 800 adjustable swivel ring, Crane Company, Grinnell Company or approved equal, black steel and hanger rods with machine threads. Hangers for piping of sizes larger than 4 inches shall be the adjustable clevis hanger type, steel with extension rod to structure, Carpenter Paterson No. 100. All hangers shall be UL/FM approved. FIRE PROTECTION-15300-4 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE information from the General Contractor and the other Sub-Contractors which may be necessary to facilitate his work and the completion of the whole project. D. Confer with all other trades relative to location of all apparatus and equipment to be installed and select locations so as not to conflict with work of other Sections. Any conflicts shall be referred immediately to the Architect for decision to prevent delay in installation of work. All work and materials placed in violation of this clause shall be readjusted to the Architect's satisfaction at no expense to the Owner. 1.08 PERMITS,FEES,RULES AND REGULATIONS A. Give the proper Authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work under this Section. Obtain and pay for all fees, licenses, permits and certificates. Comply with the rules and regulations of all Local, State and Federal Authorities having jurisdiction, the rules and regulations of the National Fire Protection Association and the Public Utility Companies serving the building. B. The Sprinkler Contractor shall include in work, without extra costs to owner any labor, materials, services, apparatus, drawings (in addition to Contract Drawings and Documents) in order to comply with applicable laws, otdinances,rules and regulations whether or not shown on drawings and/or specified. 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has been tested and accepted. B. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted for all equipment and systems under this Section. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions regarding substitution of materials as it relates to this project. 1.12 GUARANTEE A. Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for requirements all of which shall be included as part of this Specification. B. All materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry a warranty against all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than one year from the date of final acceptance of work by the Owner. Any fault due to defective or improper materials, equipment, workmanship, or design which may develop shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of the Sprinkler Contractor, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from his failure. 1.13 REMOVAL WORK A. Particular care shall be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of services in the adjoining buildings. B. All existing equipment indicated to be removed shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All existing equipment indicated to be tamed over to the Owner shall be presented to the Owner in good condition at a location designated by the Owner. All other equipment shall be removed from the premises. FIRE PROTECTION- 15300-3 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE 1.04 APPROVAL AND APPROVED DRAWINGS A. The entire fire protection systems and equipment shall be U.L. listed, and meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association and shall comply with the requirements of the Northampton Fire and Building Department and the Northampton Fire Marshall as well as local and other codes. B. Completed detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Owner for Approval. The Sprinkler Contractor shall submit to the owner two (2) complete sets of sepia transparencies, and two (2) sets of blue line prints for review and approval. Drawings to indicate all pipe sizes and dimensions, and shall include hydraulic calculations. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND DESIGN DATA A. All work shown on the Drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale,but figures,dimensions and detailed Drawings are to be followed in every case. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of pipes or conduits and methods of running them are shown but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. B. The Sprinkler Contractor is cautioned that the sprinkler layout shown is to be used only as a guide in preparing the approved working drawings. Coordinate sprinkler locations with Architectural, Electrical and HVAC plans in order to determine exact amount and sprinkler locations. C. To carry out the true intent and purpose of the Drawings, all necessary parts to make complete, approved working systems ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge. D. Refer to the sprinkler drawings and also to all other drawings for a full coprehension of the extent and detail of the work to be performed. E. Obtain all information from the General Contractor and other contractors which may be necessary to facilitate the work and the completion of the project.. F. The Sprinkler Contractor, before installing any of his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearance required for finished walls and ceilings, as shown on the Contract Architectural Drawings and details. G. Work installed by the Sprinkler Contractor which inteferes with or modifies the Architectural design as shown on the Contract Drawings shall be changed as directed and all costs incident to such changes shall be paid by the Sprinkler Contractor. 1.06 OBTAINING INFORMATION A. Obtain from the manufacturer the proper method of installation and connection of the equipment that is to be furnished and installed. Obtain all information that is necessary to facilitate the work and to complete the project. 1.07 COOPERATION INFORMATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The work shall be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction, including all other trades, shall not be delayed and not interfered with. Materials and apparatus shall be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit and must be installed promptly when and as directed. B. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus and give information in advance to build openings into the work.Furnish and set in place all sleeves,pockets, supports and incidentals. C. The Sprinkler Contractor shall obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus which he is to furnish or install as to the proper method of installing and connecting same. He shall also obtain all FIRE PROTECTION- 15300-2 SN=COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS and applicable parts of Division 1 as part of this section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. C. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the contract. D. The Sprinkler Contractor is to verify accuracy of information provided on Fire Protection Contract Drawings. The Information shown is based on existing documentation and an engineers survey and is provided for establishing scope of work only. E. The entire Fire Protection System shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA-13 and NFPA-24. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work under this Section shall include the furnishing of all material, labor, equipment and supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working system as required by the Drawings and details and as specified herein,in general,to include but not be limited to the following items: 1. A complete automatic dry sprinkler system throughout the dormitory connecting to each and every sprinkler head and fire department connection as shown on plans. This system shall extend and connect to the dry alarm check valve and air compressor. 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. The following and only the following items of labor and/or material related to or incident to the installation of the fire protection system will be provided under separate Sections of this specification. 1. All cutting and patching 2. Temporary Water,Heat and Fire Protection 3. Temporary Light and Power 4. Excavation and Backfilling 5. Foundations and Trenching 6. Concrete Bases for Equipment 7. Flashing and Holes through Roof 8. Painting 9. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 10. Plumbing 11. Electrical 12. Utilities Beyond 10'-0"from the Building FIRE PROTECTION- 15300-1 SMITH COLLEGE-CAPEN HOUSE LE9415 CA.PEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Insulation material shall not be applied until: tests specified in other sections of these technical provisions are completed,all foreign material,such as rust, scale or dirt has been remwed, surface is dry. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry at all times. 3.03 PIPING A- Tape all batted ends of insulation and edges of"Zeston" covers with V thick PVC tape of matching color. Insulation exposed in mechanical and storage spaces shall be completely covered with PVC jacket. B. Armstrong"Armaflex"insulation exposed shall be painted with two(2)coats of Armaflex Finish. 3.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A- Insulation shall be cut or mitered where necessary to fit the shape of the equipment. Seal all insulation edges and butt joints with jacket matching sealing tape. Corner joint tape must be 5"wide, other joints 3"wide. 3.05 DUCTWORK A Rigid Board - Insulation shall be secured with Stick-Klips spaced 3" in from each corner with intermediate pins at no greater than 21"centers. Apply vapor barrier mastic at pin puncture before placing retainer. Seal all insulation edges and butt joints and Stick-Klips with jacket matching sealing tape.Corner joint tape must be 5"wide,other joints 3"wide. B. Blanket insulation - Insulation shall be neatly and tightly wrapped on the ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2". Adhere insulation to metal with 4"strips of insulation bonding adhesive at 8"on centers. C. Additionally secure insulation on bottom of rectangular ductwork over 24"wide with Stick-Klips not over 18" on centers. Staple flange of facing and overlaps at 6" o.c. and tape over all using 3" minimum wide foil reinforced Kraft tape. All pin penetrations and punctures shall also be taped END OF SECTION 15250 r APRIL 1995 15250-3 MECHANICAL INSULATION LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 Adhesive.Acceptable manufacturers: Manville,Certainteed,Knauf. B. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: , PIPE SIZE 3/4'-2- 2-1/2--4- 5-up Hot water supply and return piping in IN 1-1/2" Domestic hoot,cold and recirculating water 1/2" 1/2" C. Zeston covers shall be used on all fittings and all valve bodies. Provide matching thickness of glass fiber insulation with mitered corners under cover and seal the lap joint with Benjamin Foster 82-70 adhesive. E. For handicapped lays and sinks,insulate exposed lavatory waste piping with "Lav-Guard"preformed insulation as manufacture by Tmebm and hot water piping with 1/2"thick Armstrong"Armaflex" insulation. 2.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION A For concealed supply, return and fresh air ductwork - use 1-1/2" thick flexible blanket fiberglass insulation system with factory applied vapor barrier facing with 2"flange. Facing shall be FRY, FSY, ASJ. Thermal conductivity of insulation system shall be equal of that registered by Owens- Corning FRK-25(ED 100)wherein conductivity doesn't exceed.28 at mean temperature of 75°F. B. For outside air ductwork and plenums and supply and return ductwork exposed in mechanical spaces- use 1-1/2"thick rigid board fiberglass insulation system with factory FRK jacket C. Exposed ductwork located in conditioned spaces shall not be insulated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REOUIREMENTS A Insulation work shall be installed by competent applicators regularly employed by Insulating Contractors or manufacturers. B. Insulation shall be applied on clean dry surfaces only. Piping shall have been tested and approved before covering. C. All insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. D. Insulation on all cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used will be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal,hangers,supports,anchors,etc.,that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation. 3.02 MANUFACT'URER'S RECOW ENDATIONS A Except as specified hereinafter,all material shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer for obtaining conformance to the Contract Documents. All packages or standard -.... containers of insulation,jacket-material, cements, adhesives and coatings delivered for use, and all samples required for approval shall have a mantrfactturees stamp or label attached having the name of the manuf ichuer and brand and a description of the material. APRIL 1995 15250-2 MECHANICAL INSULATION LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A The drawings and General provisions of the contzact, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A Provide all labor, materials, equipment and tools required for the complete installation of the mechanical insulation herein described and in compliance with the contract drawings. B. The intent of these specifications and conizact drawings is to provide complete installation of the systems. Any listing or indication of items furnished or work to be performed shall not be construed to be complete in itself and shall not limit the general requirements to furnish and install all work, equipment,accessories,controls,etc.,to complete the contract in a substantial manner. C. The scope of work shall include the following but not be limited to same: Pipe insulation. Ductwork insulation Equipment insulation 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Refer to Section 15010 for requirements of submission of shop drawings and samples. Shop drawings will be submitted for all materials identified in this Section 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Division 1 specifications. B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type,quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided. Equipment manu&tirers are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon. 1.05 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBS I rl MONS Refer to Section 15010. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A All insulation must have a 25/50 flametsmoke rating as tested by ASTM E-84. B. Pipe insulation thickness shall comply with ASHRAE 90Z-1980. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A All heating hot water supply and return piping, condensate drain piping, domestic hot, cold and recirculating water piping, and horizontal rain leaders shall be insulated with Owens-Corning 25ASJ/SSL glass fiber pipe insulation with vapor barrier jacket The longitudinal jacket laps and butt APRIL 1995 15250-1 MECHANICAL INSULATION -10 Elm 11 LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15125 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT'S A The drawings and General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A The intent of these specifications and contract drawings is to provide complete installation of the vibration isolation systems.Any listing or indication of items furnished or work to be performed shall not be construed to be complete in itself,and shall not limit the general requirements to furnish and install all work,equipment and accessories,etc.,to complete the contract in a substantialm PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Provide vibration eliminators as manufactured by Mason Industries. Acceptable alternate manufacturers: Vibration Eliminator Comparsf or Kodund. B. Unless otherwise noted on the equipment schedule, all mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically-transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. AW C. Factory installed(internal or external)isolators in mechanical equipment shall comply with the requirements of Section 15010 regarding seismic considerations. This requirement will not be waived under any circumstances. 2.02 DEFLECTION GUIDE Required Deflection Fan Speed for Basement Grade or 20' For 30' RPM Below Grade Floor Span Floor Span 500&up 0.35" 0.75" 1.5" 375-499 0.35" 1.5" 2.5" 300-374 0.35" 2.5" 2.5" 225-299 0.35" 3.5" 3.5" 174-224 0.35" 3.5" 4.5" 2.03 FLEXIBLE JOINTS A On each side of air handling equipment having duct connections,furnish flexible joint of Ventfabric Tape for expansion and elimination of vibration in ductwork. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Vibration isolators are to be installed for the specific machinery in accordance with isolator manufactunees instructions and recommendations. END OF SECTION 15125 APRIL 1995 15125-1 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A Where any work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete, the method of installation shall be reviewed by the Architect before work is done. Contrwor shall furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required to make openings absolutely watertight. 3.05 PIPE EXPANSION A All pipe connections shall be installed to allow for freedom of movement of the piping during expansion and contraction without springing. Swing joints, expansion loops and expansion joints with proper anchors and guides shall be provided by the Contractor where necessary,and/or shown on the drawings. B. Anchors and guides shall be subject to the review of the Architect. 3.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES A The Contractor shall refer to the General Conditions,Special Conditions and Division 1,for a full description of the temporary services to be provided B. The buildings permanent equipment shall not be utilized for temporary services unless authorized by the Architect 3.07 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A Unless otherwise specified,all wiring shall be fiunished and installed under Division 16000. END OF SECTION 15050 APRIL 1995 15050-8 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION H. Provide escutcheons for pipes passing through floors,ceilings and walls of finished areas. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated brass. L All piping to equipment shall be connected with unions on flanged fittings to permit easy removal. J. Copper tubing shall be cleaned with fine sandpaper before soldering joints. K Threaded Joints shall have IPS threads. Joints shall be made with non-hardening compound equal to Permatex,Crane applied to male threads only. Teflon tape may be used. L. PVC pipe joints shall be solvent welded socket type fittings. Install concrete masonry supports for underground pipes unless piping is resting on natural undisturbed soil of adequate bearing capacity or fill compacted to 95%of bearing capacity. M Install valves in able locations to facilitate use and maintenance. N. Provide valves at all mains and main branch piping and at all fixtures and equipment. O. Provide stops on all plumbing fixture piping. 3.02 BASES AND SUPPORTS A Unless specifically noted otherwise,the Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary supports,bases,and vibration isolators required for all equipment,Piping and other equipment Aunished under this Division. B. Concrete pad foundations shall be furnished and installed by General Contractor. All pads shall be extended 6" beyond equipment base in all directions with top edge chamfered Drawings of all foundations and pads required for mechanical equipment shall be submitted to the General Contractor. C. All equipment,unless shown otherwise, shall be securely attached to the building structure in an acceptable manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature and any attachments that are in the opinion of the Architect,not strong enough,shall be replaced as directed D. Refer to Section 15010 for seismic considerations. 3.03 HANGERS AND ANCHORS A The following is a schedule of maximum spacing for hanger and supports and the size of suspension rods required for all piping,unless otherwise indicated or required: Pipe Si%e Maximum Spacing Rod Diameter Up to 1-1/4" 6'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2"to 2" 91-0" 3/8" 2-1/2"to 3" 11'-0" 1/2" 4"to 6" 14'-0" 5/8" B. All cast iron or ductile iron pipe with Bell and Spigot,flanged,or mechanical joint ends shall be supported at the hub ends and at each change of direction. Hangers and supports shall be spaced no more than ten(10)feet C. Vertical piping shall be supported at floor or at intervals of not more than fifteen (15)feet and at not more than eight(8) feet from end of riser. Use pipe clamps or floor supports as required D. Refer to Section 15010 for seismic considerations. 3.04 WATERPROOFING APRIL 1995 15050-7 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.11 VALVES A In general, the piping systems shall be provided with valves so located that they may be operated, repaired and/or replaced with a minimum of effort. B. Valves shall be of the same make throughout unless otherwise shown and shall be equal to valves listed in Schedule: Gate valves-2"and smaller(threaded)-Fairbanks 0252 Gate valves-2"and smaller(soldered)-Fairbanks 0282 Gate Valves-2-12"and larger(flanged)-Fairbanks 0405 Globe valves-2"and smaller(threaded)-Fairbanks U-0 1 Globe valves-2"and smaller(soldered)-Fairbanks 0583 Globe valves-2-12"and larger(flanged)-Fairbanks 0131 Swing Check-2"and smaller(threaded)-Fairbanks 0640 Swing Check-2"and smaller(soldered)-Fairbanks 0681 Swing Check-2-12"and larger(flanged)-Fairbanks 0702 Ball Valves-2"and smaller-Watts B-0000,B-(M I Series Ball Valves-2-12"and larger-Watts G-4000 Series Butterfly Valves-3"and larger-Centerline LT Drain valves-1-12"and smaller-Watts B-6000 ball valve w/hose corm. Stop and Waste-Apollo"95"design Pressure Relief-Watts 174 Balance Valves(AHU Heating Coils)-Armstrong CBV,Tour&Anderson STAF/STAD Balance Valves-12"-3/4"(Radiation,CUH,etc.)-B&G Circuit Setter C. All gate and globe valves shall be designed for repacking under pressure when fully opened,thence protecting the packing and stem threads from the fluid,and shall have a gland follower. D. Ball valves shall have stainless steel ball and Teflon seats and seals.(Watts B-6001-SS-XH) E. Butterfly valves: Butterfly valves to have discs of the same material as the body,and EPDM seats unless otherwise specified Furnish gear operated handwheel or crank for all valves 8"and larger regardless of service. Furnish memory stop and latching handle for all valves 6"and smaller. Acceptable manors: Milwaukee,Jamesbury,Nbco,Victaulic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION:GENERAL A. Group piping in straight parallel lines when possible. B. Guide,support and anchor pipe so as to prevent creep,sag and buckle. C. Do not cover piping until it has been tested and inspected and approved by Owner and Code administration authorities. D. Provide all necessary anchors and expansion joints to control movement of pipe subject to stresses. E. Provide isolating valves for risers and sub-mains. Cap all open end piping during construction F. Exposed piping in toilet areas,etc.,shall be chromeplated G. Reductions m pipe sizing for water piping shall be made by using exentric reducing fittings level on top. Steam piping reducing fittings shall be eccentric level on bottom APRIL 1995 15050-6 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.08 HANGERS,ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A Hangers and supports shall be by PHD Manufacturing of heavy construction and suitable for size and type of pipe to be supported All hanger materials must be in accordance with "Code for Pressure Piping", ANSI AWk B31.1. Hanger material shall match piping material. Acceptable alternate manors: Carpenter&Patterson,Grinnell,Bmben Pipe Support Corp. B. Piping 2"and smaller may be supported with Hook Plates,wherever it runs adjacent to a side wall. Piping 2- 1/2"and larger shall be supported by a wall bracket and either a clevis or roller type hanger. C. In general, hanging pipe shall have clevis type hangers similar to PHD Model 450, and copper tubing shall have an adjustable ring hanger similar to PHD Model 442,copper plated For beam attachment-PHD Model 900. Concrete inserts shall be PHD Model 950. No piping shall be hung from the piping of other trades or systems. D. Use of perforated bands or wiring will not be allowed E. Piping subject to expansion,such as steam and/or hot water piping,shall be supported by means of roller type pipe hangerstsupports,PHD 400 series. F. Provide 180°, 18 gauge sheet metal self centering insulation shields for hangers for all insulated piping,PHD Model 160. Hangers shall be sized to fit over insulation and shields. 2.09 ACCESS DOORS A Furnish access doors and flame for all concealed cleanouts,valves,controls and dampers which are concealed in flared spaces. B. All access doors shall be furnished, 12"x12" minimum, in Milcor, flush type with flame, with fiiame filled with matching aterial so these doors will match ceiling or g g wall, and all doors shall be hinged with flush catches. Provide non-ferrous in all wet areas. C. Access doors shall be furnished by this Contractor and installed by others. D. Where access is required to dampers,valves, etc.,that occur above lay-in ceilings, these access doors can be omitted,provided suitable plastic markers identifying exact location of valves,dampers,etc.,on lay-in ceilings are applied directly below valve grouping and identified by a number,this number to be used as a marking on valve or damper chart.Access doors shall be fire rated as required. Acceptable manufacturers: Karp,Bilco. 2.10 INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES A Liquid pressure gauges shall be Trence #450 black cast aluminum cased glass front, white dial, black numbers,bourdon type with range from 0 to 100 prig with a minimum 4-1/2"dial. Gauges shall be installed where otherwise indicated Provide shutoff cocks. Acceptable manuf cturers: Ashcroft,Marsh. B. Pipe line thermometers shall be Trerice Adjustable Angle bimetal with 9" case and bronze extension neck separable socket. Thermometers shall be installed where indicated on the plans and/or details. Provide socket wells with cups. Temperature range shall be 30 to 2400F. Acceptable manufacturers: Moeller,Ashcroft C. Air pressure gauges shall be Trerice 4900 Series"U Gauge",range suitable for application. D. Air dud thermometers shall be Trerice 83200 Series bimetal with 3"dial and 12"stem. Thermometers shall Idow, be installed where indicated on the plans and/or details, and adjacent to all energy management system sensors. APRIL 1995 15050-5 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. All materials shall be in accordance with the following: ASTM E-84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials "* ASTM E-818-Fire Test of Through-Penetration Firestops UL- -Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops UL Building Materials Directory.Through-Penetration Firestop Systems(XHEZ)and Fill,Void or Cavity Materials(XHHW) Basic Building Code(BOCA) B. Submittals shall be as follows: Submit manubctu ez's insmictions for applying sealant Submit manufacturer's certifications that materials meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Regulatory requirements: Conform to UL requirements and to applicable code for fire resistance ratings. D. Acceptable Material: Fberfrax Fyre Putty,Nelson Firestop Systems or Hilti High Performance Firestop System. Material shall be UL rated material classified for use in through-penetration Frestop systems Nos. 124, 150, 275 and have a flame spread/smoke contribution of 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E-84. E. Examination: Verify that surfaces of openings are sound, clean, dry and ready to receive application of sealants and that penetration elements are securely fixed and properly located.,with space between penetrations and surfaces of openings- Clean contact surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of sealant.Remove incompatible materials which affect bond by scraping,brushing,scrubbing or sandblasting. Apply sealant in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealant in sufficient thickness to achieve required rating. Pack material solidly around penetrations in conformance to scheduled fire ratings. F. Field Quality Control: Inspection will be performed to verify compliance with requirements. Correct unacceptable work and provide further inspection to verify compliance with requirements. G. Cleaning: Remove excess material,droppings,and debris. Remove sealant from materials and surfaces not specifically required to be sealed H Protect applied sealant from damage. L Provide escutcheons on all pipes wherever they pass through floors, ceilings, walls or partitions in finished areas. Escutcheons for pipes passing through floors shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Company, cast brass type designed to fit pipe on one end and cover alcove projecting through floor on the other end Escutcheons ! for pipes passing through interior walls,partitions,and ceilings shall be Ritter Pattern and Casting Company, chromium-plated type.Split hinged shall not be acceptable. J. Provide C.I.watertight sleeve with flange through outside foundation walls and floors. Furnish with flashing clamp where waterproof membranes are installed APRIL 1995 150504 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION H. Black Steel Piping-Grooved Connections: Grooved fittings and couplings shall be malleable iron as manufactured by Vitaulic. Gasket shall be EPDM,of grade and style suitable for the application. AM& 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A Cleanouts shall be provided as specified and required by applicable codes. W xthff shown on the Drawings or not,cleanouts in drainage lines shall be installed in the following locations: At the bottom of each fixture trap which is not integral with the fixture. At the end of each branch drainage line. At each point where drainage lines change direction. At the foot of each inside rising soil or waste line. In every horizontal line at not more than fifty(50)feet on centers,except on eight(8)inch and larger drainage lines where cleanouts shall be not more than one hundred(100)feet on centers. B. All unions for piping 2"and smaller shall be wrought,copper sweat type as required for use on copper pipe. Provide dielectric unions when joining dissimilar metals, in open system, such as domestic waer, cooling tower loops,etc. C. Shock absorbers shall be installed in the hot water and cold water piping for each fixture and on mains. The shock absorbers shall be sized in accordance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH2O1 and shall be PPG Industries make. Strainers for capper pipe shall be bronze or brass body. Acceptable manufacturers: Josam,JR Smith- 2.04 EOUIPMENT AND APPARATUS FOUNDATIONS A Except where specifically noted to the contrary, all concrete bases and foundations for equipment will be provided by the General Contractor with necessary anchor bolts, washers, templates, etc., furnished by this Contractor.Bolts shall be built into foundation with property sized sleeves. Bases for all moving equipment shall be satisfactorily isolated from building structure by approved isolations. 2.05 SLEEVES,INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS A Each Section shall provide and shall be held responsible for the location and position of all sleeves, inserts, and anchor bolts required by the work. Failure to do so,which requires cutting and patching of finished work, shall be done at no additional cost to the Contras. B. All pipes passing through floors,walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves sized to give a minimum of 1/2"clearance between sleeve and the outside diameter of the pipe,or insulation enclosing the pipe. C. Sleeves through masonry floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, set flush with finished wall or ceiling surfaces,but extending 2 inches above finished floors. In all mechanical equipment rooms or penthouses,sleeves shall extend 6"above finished floor. D. Sleeves through interior partitions shall be 22 gauge galvanized street metal,set flush with finished surfaces of partitions. 2.06 SEALANTS A. All sleeves shall be packed with fiberglass and sealed Sealant shall allow for movement without cracking and shall be DOW 780. ,•,., 2.07 FIREPROOF THROUGH-PENETRATION SEALANTS APRIL 1995 15050-3 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Black steel pipe for general use shall be Schedule 40,and shall conform to ANSI B125.2. Where forming or bending of piping is required, use ANSI B125.1, Grade B. Piping shall be domestic made, Sawhill or Laclede. C. Copper tubing shall be Anaconda or Phelps-Dodge make, seamless type and furnished as specified on the Piping Schedule and shall conform to the following: Type"M"hard drawn copper tubing shall comply with ANSI H23.1. Type"L"hard drawn copper tubing shall comply with ANSI H23.1. Type"K"soft drawn copper tubing shall comply with ANSI H23.1. 2.02 FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A Cast Iron Pipe-Bell and Spigot Connections: Fittings shall be standard weight conforming to ANSI Al 12.5.1. Joints shall be made with an standard weight neoprene gasket conforming to ASTM C564,Tyler"Ty- Seal",or approved equal. B. Cast Iron Pipe-No Hub Connections Joints shall be made up with neoprene gaskets and 300 Series stainless steel clamps. C. Copper Tubing-Solder Joint: Fittings shall be vast bronze pressure fittings per ANSI B16.18,or wrought copper and bronze pressure fittings per ANSI B16.22. Solder shall be 95%tin and 5%antimony conforming to ASTM B32,alloy grade 95TH. Soldering flux shall conform to Federal Specification O-F-506,Type 1. D. Copper Tubing-Flared Fittings: Fittings shall be cast bronze fittings for flared copper tubes per ANSI B 16.26. E. Black Steel Piping-Threaded Connections: Threaded fittings shall be malleable iron, 150 lb.Class,conforming to ANSI B16.3. Threaded flanges shall be: Cast iron, 125 lb.Class,conforming to ANSI B 16.1. Steel, 150 lb.Class,conforming to ANSI B 16.1. F. Black Steel Pipe-Welded Joints All welding of pipe shall be done only by experienced welders whose qualifications shall comply with the Welding Code of the Heating, Piping and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (USA). G. Flanged Joints All flanges shall have gaskets, which shall be of the proper type for the particular application. All gaskets shall be coated on each side with Dixon's"Pipe Joint Compound". APRIL 1995 15050-2 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE A Equipment construction standards shall be as follows: Pressure vessels shall be constructed in accordance with latest applicable AWE Code,all electrical equipment shall be U.L.listed and approved and conform to latest edition of N.E.C. Piping materials,fittings,valves and accessories shall be constructed in accordance with latest ASTM standards for class of work involved. All equipment and materials shall be new. B. Equipment and component parts thereof shall bear main facturees nameplate, giving mamAx tureris name, size,type,model number of serial ntmtber,electrical characteristic,to facilitate maintenance and replacement. Nameplates of distributors or contractors are not acceptable. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Submit shop drawings for the following products: Pipe and fittings Hangers Valves look Access doors Instruments and gauges 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A Refer to Section 01600"Materials and Equipment". B. Catalog numbers specified are those of the type, quality and operating characteristics of the equipment to be provided Equipment manufacturers named are identified as capable of meeting the specifications set forth herein. Contractors'bid must be submitted thereon 1.05 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Section 15010. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A Cast Iron Soil Pipe shall be standard weight pipe with Bell and Spigot ends or No-Hub conforming to ANSI A 112.5.1. Provide cast iron with bell and spigot ends below floor slabs.The inside and outside shall be coated with coal tar pitch or similar material. Each length of pipe shall be plainly marked with the mans hLureris initials or trademark and the insignia of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. �. APRIL 1995 15050-1 MECH.BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION G. Energy efficient motors shall meet or exceed the nominal efficiency stamped on the nameplate by the manufacturer per NEMA Standard MG1.12.54. The c iciencics are for 1,800 rpm, polyphase, open drip- ""'" proof and totally enclosed fan cooled motors at full load. The installed enemy efficient motors will be rated at or greater that the ratings listed: Horsepower Nominal Efficiency 1 82.0 1.5 84.0 2 84.0 3 87.0 5 87.5 7.5 90.0 10 90.0 15 91.7 20 92.4 25 93.0 30 93.0 40 93.0 50 93.6 60 93.6 75 94.0 R Service factors-open-drip proof; lhp through 200 1.15;TEFC,all horsepowers-1.0. L Noise levels within NEMA standard MG 1-12.29. J. In addition to the above, all motors 1 through 20 hp, or any motor mounted in the airstream of a piece of equipment, shall be TEFC with drain holes for both horizontal and vertical positions. Each shall be equipped with deep groove double shielded ball bearings prelubricated with provision for regreasing. K Motors smaller than 1R hp shall be capacitor-start or split-phase type designed for 120 volts, single phase, 60 cycles alternating currenL L. Manufacturers shop drawing submittals for materials and equipment utilizing 3-phase motors, specified under these Division 15 specifications,shall include motor efficiency information for review. M. Motors intended for use with variable speed motor controllers/drives shall be listed and rated for such applications. 1.04 ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Motor starters will be furnished under Section 16000 unless specified to be furnished as part of the mechanical equipment B. All electric motor starters shall conform to requirements of AIEE,NEMA,UL,NEC,and shall be suitable for required load,duty,voltage,phase,frequency,service and location. 1.05 ELECTRIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS A Variable speed motor controllers will be furnished under Section 16000 unless specified to be fimshed as part of the mechanical equipment. B. All variable speed motor controllers shall conform to requirements of AIEE,NEMA,UL,NEC,and shall be suitable for required load,duty,voltage,phase,frequency,service and location. END OF SECTION 15030 APRIL 1995. 15030-2 ELEC.REQ'TS FOR MECH.EQUIP LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECr1ANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A The drawings and General provisions of the contract,including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Section 16000 includes all power wiring for all electrical switches, motor starters, and unmounted motors furnished at the job site by other Sections or furnished under the Electrical Section as stated in other Sections of the specifications. B. Section 16000 shall furnish and install all starters for three phase motors and all manual starters for all single phase motors unless furnished as an integral part of the equipment by the manufacturer. C. Electrically operated equipment supplied by other Sections which will be installed and wired by the Electrical Section shall be delivered to him with detailed instructions for their installation and wiring in sufficient time and proper sequence to enable him to meet his work schedule. D. Control devices shall be installed and wired by the Temperature Controls Contractor according to the provisions and requirements set forth in the Electrical Section.Refer to Section 15900-Energy Management System E. Equipment which includes a number of correlated electrical control devices mounted in a single enclosure or , on a common base with equipment,shall be supplied for installation completely wired as a unit with terminal boxes and ample leads and/or terminal strips ready for electrical wiring. F. Electrical Contractor shall furnish disconnect switch for all equipment where same is not part of a combination disconnect switch and starter. G. Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install manual motor terminal disconnect switch for all fractional horsepower motors. 1.03 ELECTRIC MOTORS A All motors 1/2 hp and above shall be integral horsepower polyphase induction motors conforming to NEMA starxiards MG-1-1967. and shall be T-frame design in sizes 143T through 445T. Each shall be NEMA design B with minimum tome values per MG 1-12.37.and 12.38. B. Duty shall be continuous,ambient temperature 40 deg. maximum, allowable temperature rise for open drip- proof-90 deg.,TEFC,80 deg.C with Class B insulation rating all per MG 1-12.42. Horsepower,speed and flame sized per MG 1-10,32, 1.26,and 1.27. C. Enclosures-open drip-proof and TEFC per MG 1-1.25, 1.26,and 1.27. D. All dimensions per MG 1-11.31a, 11.32x,and 11.34x.All motors shall have stainless steel nameplates with NEMA voltage standards shown. E. Locked rotor KVA per horsepower shall be designated by proper NEMA code letter per MG 1-10.37. F. All motors shall be high efficiency type with a full load efficiency range of 82%to 95% APRIL 1995. 15030-1 ELEC.REQ'TS FOR MECH.EQUIP LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. All parts of the work shall be guaranteed for a period of one(1)year from date of acceptance of the job by the Owner. If during that period of general guarantee any part of the work installed fails,becomes unsatisfactory or does not function properly due to any fault in material or workmanship,whether manufactured or job built, each section shall,upon notice from the Owner,promptly proceed to repair or replace such faulty material or workmanship without e,q=w to the Owner,including cutting,patching and painting or other work involved, and including repair or restoration of any damaged sections of the premises resulting from such faults. B. In the event that a repetition of any one defect occurs, indicating the probability of further failure and which can be traced to faulty design,material or workmanship,then repairs or replant shall not continue to be made,but the fault shall be remedied by a complete replacement of the entire defective unit C. In addition to the general guarantee, obtain and transmit to the Owner any guarantees of warrantees from manu&ctur&s of specialties,but only as a supplement to the general guarantee which will not be invalidated by same. D. Also refer to Division 1. 1.29 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. The Contractor shall not use the building's permanent heating systems for temporary usage. END OF SECTION 15010 APRIL 1995 15010-10 BASIC NECK REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Each valve shall have a 1-12"diameter brass tag with identifying number. Tag shall be secured to valve stem with a sufficient length of brass coated jack chain to allow tag to be easily read- C. A chart shall be made for each system,showing valve number,location and what it controls. D. Final typed chart shall be placed in a suitable glass covered frame and hung in place designated Valve tags shall be equal to Seton Name Plate Company,New Haven,Connecticut,style SBT. E. All other equipment shall be provided with a suitable laminated plastic nameplate fastened with screws or rivets,equal to Seton Name Plate style 2060. F. All nameplates and labels shall identify components by proper nomenclature and numbered according to equipment schedule or as designated G. Identifying nameplates shall be laminated plastic type, consisting of two black plastic sheets with one white plastic sheet bonded to and between the two outer black sheets and having the letters engraved on one black side to the depth of the white plastic. K Nameplates shall not be smaller than 1-inch by 3-inch with characters not less than 5/16-inch. Fasten nameplates to equipment with suitable screws. Adhesive affixed nameplates will not be acceptable. 1.25 TESTS A Conduct all tests called for under the various Sections or as required,and repair or replace any defects. B. Tests shall be performed in the presence and to the satis&tion of the Architect and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction. C. The Owner shall have the privilege of stopping any of the work not being properly installed All such detected t work shall be repaired or replaced and the tests shall be repeated D. All damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and damaged materials replaced. 1.26 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND SYSTEM OPERATION A. At the time of the job's acceptance by Owner,Contractor shall furnish the specified quantity(as defined under Division 1) of complete sets of approved certified drawings to the Owner. In addition, Contractor shall furnish maintenance and operating instructions for all equipment These instructions shall be written in layman's language and shall be inserted in a vinyl-covered three-ring loose leaf binder. B. This information in binder shall be first sent to and approved by the Architect before turning over to Owner. C. Upon completion of all work and of all tests, each Division shall furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating the system and equipment for a period as specified under Division 1. D. During this period,instruct the Owner or representative(s)fully in the operation,adjustment,and maintenance of all equipment furnished Give at least 48 hours notice to the Owner in advance of this period- 1.27 RECORD DRAWINGS A A set of clean construction record drawings,consisting of reproducible marked set of drawings with additional sketches as required, denoting and dimensioning accurately all changes in elevations, location and size of material deviating from the drawings, shall be kept concurrently with the progress of the installation. Upon completion of work,the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect an up to date set of these construction record drawings. -*WWI 1.28 GUARANTEES APRIL 1995 15010-9 BASIC MECH.REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Each Section shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected,tested,and accepted;protect low work against theft, weather, injury or damage and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. C. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during constriction to prevent entry of obstructing material. 1.18 TEM30RARY OPENINGS A Ascertain, from examination of the Architectural drawings, whether any special temporary openings in the building will be required for the admission of apparatus provided under this Section and notify the Architect in time to arrange for these openings during constriction. The Section requiring the openings shall assume all costs of providing such openings thereafter. 1.19 SCAFFOLDING,RIGGING.HOISTING A Unless otherwise specified, the work under each Section shall include all scaffolding, core drilling, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery onto the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from the premises when no longer required 1.20 CLEANING PIPING,DUCTS,AND EQUIPMENT A Thoroughly clean all piping,ducts,and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation This applies both to new components and any existing components being reused B. If any part of a system should be stopped by arty foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnected wherever necessary to locate and remove obstructions. Any work damaged in the course of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system is reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipe shall be capped in an approved manner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. At the end of construction,remove all equipment air filters and replace with new. 1.21 PAINTING A. All field painting of all exposed piping,ductwork,hangers and other exposed metal work will be done by the Division 9 contractor,under Section 09900. 1.22 CUTTING AND PATCHING A Cutting and patching for all mechanical work shall be done in accordance with Division 1, Section 01045 unless otherwise specified. 1.23 EXCAVATION AND BACIFILLING A Excavating and back0mg for all mechanical work inside and outside of building shall be done in accordance with Division 2,Section 02200A unless otherwise specified 1.24 TAGS,CHARTS&NAMEPLATES A Each valve, control, motor, fan and piece of apparatus installed under these Sections shall be properly identified APRIL 1995 15010-8 BASIC MECH.REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A The locations shown on the plans are subject to modification due to conditions arising as construction progresses,such as swing of doors,layout of furnishings,locations of equipment,locations of partitions,etc. B. Such changes shall be observed and executed as part of this Contract. The subcontractor shall check on all ► locations shown in accordance with the general plans before installing his work,correcting such discrepancies as they arise during the installation. C. Unless directions are requested from the Architect for the exact locations of any outlets,the subcontractor will be responsible for any changes that may be necessary to make the work conform to the proper locations. The exact locations of all work in all instances shall be as designated by the Architect Dimensions shall be given by the Architect where same are necessary to suit equipment layouts; the subcontractor shall, by pre- arrangement, check the locutions of his work with other trades previous to installation and assign space requirements and locations so there will not be any conflict in space requirements for each trade. D. The Architect may,without extra charge,make modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflicts with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work 1.13 A All measurements shall be taken at the site, actual always to take precedence over scaled dimensions. Any discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated on the drawings and specifications shall require written notification of the Architect,and work shall not proceed without written instructions from the Owner. B. Furnish the General Contractor with all the necessary information and templates for all foundations, pits, recesses,trenches,chases,openings,etc.,required for the work in ample time to allow him to lay out his work accordingly and construct same. 1.14 QUIET OPERATION A Mechanical and electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration, as determined by the Architect Noise level in any normally occupied area shall not exceed that of an"NC-35"curve(noise criteria-35)unless otherwise noted,as established in latest edition of the ASHRAE Guide. B. If such objectionable noise or vibration should be produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus,piping,ducts,or other parts of the Mechanical and Electrical Work, such changes or additions as are necessary shall be made as approved,without extra cost to the Owner. 1.15 ACCESSIBILITY A Locate all equipment which must be serviced,operated,or maintained in fully accessible positions. If required for better accessibility,furnish access doors for this purpose. Access doors shall be selected by the Architect to specific area finishes. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better acc=bility only if approved by the Architect.Doors shall be installed by others. 1.16 LUBRICATION A All equipment having moving parts and requiring lubrication,which is installed under this Contract,shall be property lubricated according to manuf hirer s recommendations prior to testing and operation. Any such equipment discovered to have been operated before lubrication is subject to rejection and replacement at no cost to the Owner. Units furnished with sealed bearings are excepted. 1.17 PROTECTION A Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and materials of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen,and shall include making good any damage this caused APRIL 1995 15010-7 BASIC MECH.REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's certified scale drawings,cuts or catalogs, including descriptive literature and complete certified characteristics of equipment, showing dimensions, rapacity, code requirements,motor and drive,motor efficiency,testing,as specified herein and on drawings. C. Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for approval shall be properly labeled, indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, division and article number of specifications governing,Contractor's name and name of job.Partial submittals will be rejected. D. Catalog, pamphlets or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog,pamphlet,etc.,of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink Data of a general nature will not be accepted E. Review rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, said review does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail- Said review does not, in any way, relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the Contract drawings and specifications. F. Failure by the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle him to an extension of Contract time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed G. Prior to submission of shop drawings,the Contractor shall thoroughly check each shop drawing, reject those not conforming to the specifications and indicate by his signature that the shop drawings submitted in his opinion meet Contract requirements. K Substitutions will only be reviewed if accompanied by a submittal art of the specified piece of equipment.Also refer to"Equipment Variations and Substitutions"in this section I. Also refer to Division 1. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials and apparatus used shall be new, of first-class quality and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail. No materials or apparatus used shall be discontinued or about to be discontinued items. B. The work in each of these Sections shall be constantly under the direction of a competent superintendent who shall be on the premises during such periods as the work is in progress. The superintendent shall familiarize himself with the work of all other Sections involved insofar as they relate to,or in any way effect,the work of these Sections,and shall coordinate the work C. Unless otherwise noted, all equipment and materials will be installed and/or applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of said equipment, including the performance of any tests recommended by the manu&turer. 1.11 DRAWINGS A. The mechanical, electrical and architectural drawings are intended to supplement each other and are to be considered as a unit which,taken together and in conjunction with the specifications,completely describes the work to be done. B. All drawings shall be checked to verify spaces in which work will be installed Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate,notification shall be given to Architect before proceeding with installation. 1.12 LOCATIONS APRIL 1995 15010-6 BASIC MECH.REQUIREMENTS XMMMF- LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Complete"as built"drawings will be required for water installations. Such drawings will show the location of valves and pipelines referenced to permanent structures. 1.05 PERMITS AND FEES A* A Work under each Section shall include all necessary notices, obtaining all permits and paving all governmental taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with their work;filing all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction, obtaining all required Certificates of Inspection for the work and delivering same to the Owner before request for acceptance and final payment for the work 1.06 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS A. In these specifications and on the accompanying drawings the base bid materials, apparatus, systems or appliances have been specified for use in this installation. This has been done for the purpose of identifying the standard of workmanship,finish and design,and the guaranteed performance of any material,apparatus, system or appliance which shall be installed in this project. B. Where no specific make of material,apparatus system or appliance is mentioned,a first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for use, providing it conforms to the requirements of these specifications and meets the approval of the Architect and Engineer. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION A. To substitute materials,apparatus systems or appliances other than listed acceptable manufacturers,a written request shall be made in accordance with Section 01600-Materials and Equipment, A701- "Instructions to Bidders" and "Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, no later than 10 days prior to receipt of bid, for permission to make the substitution. This request shall be accompanied by complete plans,submittal cut and specifications of the substitute offered 1.08 SUBMITTALS A The materials,workmanship,design and arrangement of all work installed under this Division shall be subject to the review of the Architect B. Within the specified time period as defined under Division 1, after Award of Contract,submit to the Architect for review,a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work under the this Division The intent to use the exact base bid manufacturer specified does not void this requirement. C. Where any specific material,process or method of construction,or manufactured article is specified by name of or by reference to the catalog number of a mantrfacttu er, the specifications are not intended to take precedence,over the basic duty and performance specified,to notes on the drawings. In all cases,the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review shall be indicated on the shop drawings. D. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate, giving name of manufacdrrer,description, size,type,serial or model number,electrical characteristics,etc., in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. The nameplate of a Contractor or distributor will not be acceptable. E. If material or equipment is installed before it is reviewed,it shall be removed and replaced at no extra charge to the Owner, if in the opinion of the Owner, the material or equipment does not meet the intent of the drawings and specifications. 1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS A Prior to delivery to job site, but sufficiently in advance of requirements necessary to allow Architect and Engineer ample time for review, Contractor shall submit for approval shop drawings of all equipment, lomwk. materials, piping ductwork, etc., and further obtain written approval for same from the Architect before installing any of these items. APRIL 1995 15010-5 BASIC MECH.REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Screwed pipes-screwed pipes(I.P.S.)shall be supported at not less than every other story height Copper tubing shall be supported at each story for piping 1-12"and larger diameter,and not more than 6 foot intervals for piping 1-1/2"and smaller in diameter. Pipes of other approved material shall be supported in accordance with their approved installation standards. Horizontal piping. Supports-Horizontal piping shall be supported at sufficiently close intervals to keep in alignment and prevent sagging. Screwed piping(I.P.S.)or flanged pipe shall be supported at approximately 10 foot intervals. Copper tubing shall be supported at approximately 6 foot intervals for tubing 1-12" and smaller in diameter and 10 foot in diameter for tubing 2"and larger in diameter. Traverse bracing at 40'-0"o.c.maximum unless otherwise noted Longitudinal bracings at 80'-0" o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted. When thermal expansion or contraction is involved, provide longitudinal bracings at anchor points. The longitudinal braces at the connections must be capable or resisting the force induces by expansion and contraction. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the pipe section connected perpendicular to it,if the bracing is installed within 24"of the elbow or tee of similar size. For threaded piping the flexibility may be provided by the installation of swing joints. In welded or solder joint piping the flexibility shall be provided by expansion loops or manufactured flexible connectors. For piping with manufactured ball joints select length of piping offset using"seismic drift"in place of"Expansion per joint manufacturers"selection table. Seismic drift=0.015 ft.per foot of height Do not use branch lines to brace main lines. Trapeze hangers can be used Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints,or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration isolators. A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building,or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Example:wall and roof, solid concrete wall and metal deck with lightweight concrete fill. Provide large enough pipe sleeves through walls or floors to allow for anticipated differential movements. At vertical pipe risers,wherever possible,support the weight of the riser at a point or points above the center of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the riser,and at intermediate points not to exceed 30'-0"on center. Cast iron pipe of all types,and any other pipe joined with a shield and clamp assembly where the top of the pipe is 12"or more from supporting stricture shall be braced on each side of a change in direction of 90°or more. Riser joints shall be braced or stabilized between floors. Spreaders will be provided at appropriate intervals to separate adjacent pipe lines,unless pipe spans and the clear distance between pipes are sufficient to prevent contact between the pipes during an earthquake. Proprietary bracing systems approved by OSHA may be used. APRIL 1995 15010-4 BASIC MECH.REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Brace all round ducts 28"in diameter and larger. Transverse bracing shall occur 30'-0" o.c. mac. (except rectangular duds 61" and larger in either direction may be braced at 32'-0"o.c.). Transverse bracing shall be installed at each dud turn and at each end of a dud nm. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60'-0"o.c. max Transverse bracing for one dud section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it,if the bracing is installed within four feet of the intersection of both ducts and the bracing is sized for the larger dud. Dud joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards. All joints in duct sections shall provide a positive fastening together of the section. No bracing is required if the top of the dud is suspended 12"or less from the supporting structural member and attached to the top of the member. A group of duds may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with maximum weight for selection of the members from the schedule on the attached sheet. Walls (including gypboard non-bearing partitions) which have duds running through them may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide solid blocldngs around dud penetrations at stud wall construction. Duds and pipes not braced shall be installed with a 6"minimum clearance to vertical hanger wires. All sheet metal for bracing shall be Fy=33KSI. Minimum U.S.standard gauge for sheet metal bracing to be as follows: 16 gauge(0.0598 inch) 14 gauge(0.0747 inch) 12 gauge(0.1046 inch) All pneumatictelectric air terminal boxes with a weight of maximum 100 pounds shall be braced. All sheet metal for bracing to be Fy=33ksi. Minimum U.S. standard gauge for sheet metal for bracing to be minimum 16 ga. (0.0598"). H. Piping and utility systems: Bracing requirements apply to all types of pipe and all types of joints. Bracing shall conform with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Brace all pipes 2-1/2"diameter and larger with the following exceptions: Brace all piping 1-1/4" and larger located in Boiler Rooms and Mechanical Equipment Rooms. Bracing requirements for pipes less than 2-1/2"in diameter shall be the same as for 2-1/2"pipes in all other locations. Seismic braces may be omitted: (1) when the top of the pipe is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structure member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger.(2)On all piping 3/4"and smaller. The above requirements provide for a lateral bracing system A typical vertical support conforming to the following must also be used Vertical Piping: Attachment-vertical piping shall be secured at sufficiently close intervals to keep the pipe in alignment and carry the weight of the pipe and contents. Stacks shall be supported at their bases and, if over 2 stories in height at each floor,by approved metal floor clamps. APRIL 1995 15010-3 BASIC MECH.REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Plumbing 15400 Mechanical Hydronic Heating Systems 15700 OOW Air Distribution Systems 11800 Air Handling Equipment 15850 Temperature Controls 15900 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 15950 1.03 REGULATIONS A- All work shall be done in strict accordance with the latest editions of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Fuel Gas & Plumbing Code, State Fire Safety Code, National Fire Protection Association Sections 31, 90-A, 90-B, 91 and 96, NEC, UL, NEMA, OSHA., with all requirements of local utility companies and the requirements of all governmental departments and agencies having jurisdiction. B. Requirements of the above shall take precedence over plans and specifications. 1.04 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS A Mechanical equipment and elements shall be installed in such a manner to resist the lateral forces and the overturning moment Produced by earthquake loads, as defined in Section 1113.0 in the BOCA National Building Code/1990. B. Mechanical equipment is classified as being either on grade or supported by the building,and as being either rigid or flexible. The maximum weight of an individual piece of equipment shall not exceed 101/o of the total building weight, and 30% of the total weight of the floor at the equipment level. Floor or roof mounted equipment with vibration isolation shall have restraining devices for lateral and vertical loads. C. Restraining devices (angles and bolts) shall be designed to withstand 1.0 gravity (0.4 gravity) lateral and vertical loads. Lateral restraining devices shall be installed on all sides of the equipment base. The first gravity force is for essential buildings or life safety equipment The gravity force in parenthesis is for other buildings. D. Floor or roof mounted equipment without vibration isolation shall be secured to a foundation or an adequate structural support with anchor bolts to withstand 0.5 gravity(0.2 gravity)lateral and vertical loads. The first gravity force is for essential buildings or life safety equipment. The gravity force in parenthesis is for other buildings. E. Suspended equipment with vibration isolation shall have hanger rods, bracing members, equipment brackets and vibration hangers designed to withstand 1.0 gravity (0.4 gravity) lateral and vertical loads. The first gravity force is for essential buildings of life safety equipment The gravity force in parenthesis is for other buildings. F. Mechanical equipment anchorages such as bolts,expansion anchors,screws,etc. shall be designed to conform with the force level required for seismic zone #2. The following companies, in the past, have met these requirements on a job to job submittal. The names are listed for convenience only, with no intention of excluding other companies: Mason Industries,Inc. M.'W. Sausse and Co.,Inc. California Dynamics Corporation G. Ductwork Systems: Ductwork systems shall be seismically braked in accordance with the methods and detail described in the "Seismic Restaint Manual-Guidelines for Mechanical_Systems"published by SMACNA. Brace all rectangular ducts 6 square foot of area or larger. APRIL 1995 15010-2 BASIC MECH. REQUIREMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT'S A The drawings and General provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,and Division 1 of the Specification sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A It is the intent of the specifications and drawings to call for finished work, complete, tested and ready for operation. B. The drawings show the general layout of the mechanical work Furnish all components and other parts necessary to make the installation complete. C. Material,fixtures, and equipment mentioned in specifications or shown on drawings shall be furnished new, completely installed adjusted and left in a clean, safe and satisfactory condition ready for operation. All supplied appliances and connections of every sort necessary shall be furnished and installed to the satisfaction of Engineer and Owner. D. Apparatus,appliances,material or work not shown on the plans but mentioned in specifications,or vice versa, necessary to make the work complete,serviceable and perfect in every way shall be finished E. Location of all items shown on drawings,or called for in specifications,not definitely fixed by dimensions,are AOW approximate only. Exact location necessary to secure best conditions and results shall be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Engineer. F. Work shown on the drawings is intended to be approximately correct to the scale of the drawings. Figured dimensions and detailed drawings are in all cases to take precedence over them. Typical details shall apply to each and every item of the project where such items are incorporated G. Drawings utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work These have no dimensional significance, nor do they delineate every item required for the intended installation. The schematic drawings are intended to identify the arrangement in which the equipment and accessories are to be installed Work shall be installed in accordance with the diagrammatic intent of the mechanical drawings,and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final equipment shop drawings. The final arrangement of connections to equipment and accessories shall be determined by the final approved equipment to be installed H. Work under each Section shall include giving written notice to the Architect,within 15 days after the Award of the Contract,of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable or in violation of any laws or codes,or items of work omitted In the absence of such written notice,it is understood that work under each Section has included the cost of all required items and labor for the satisfactory fi nctioning of the entire system- L The work of this Division includes,but is not limited to,the following: Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010 Electrical Requuments for Mechanical Equipment 15030 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods 15050 Noise and Vibration Control 15125 An* -- Mechanical Insulation 15250 Fire Protection 15300 APRIL 1995 15010-1 BASIC NECK REQUIREMENTS CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Smith College Northampton, MA Project Manual April 1995 DRAFT CLIENT Smith College Dining Services 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts Paul Garvey, Director STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Brennan & Partners, Inc. 214 Charles Lane Road New Braintree, MA 01531 MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL, & PLUMBING ENGINEERS Luchini Milfort Goodell & Associates 137 Billerica Road Chelmsford, MA 01824 ARCHITECT Livermore, Edwards and Associates 260 Bear Hill Road Waltham, MA 02154 (617) 890-8873 LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Before installation of toilet and bath accessories, check surfaces, openings and recesses to receive units to ensure they are of proper size and location, and are plumb and square. Check substrate materials, blockings, and built- in anchor plates for structural adequacy to support the accessories. B. Mount accessories securely on wall surfaces and into wall openings and recesses, tightly anchored into place, and with trim fitted tightly and neatly against the wall surface. Mount surface counted accessories plumb, level, and true, and securely anchored into place. C. After installation, adjust all accessories for proper operation, and clean and polish all exposed surfaces. Protect accessories from damage from all sources whatever. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 10800-3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.01 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Furnish and install toilet and bath accessories indicated on the Drawings or as scheduled below, except toilet and bath accessories specified to be provided under other Sections. B. Products manufactured by Bobrick have been specified herein to establish type and quality and is not necessarily complete nor limited to specified manufacturers. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be acceptable subject to approval of the Owner and Architect. Carefully review the Drawings for other types of toilet and bath accessories and to establish quantities, location, and mounting heights of the various accessories required. Locations and mounting heights not indicated shall be as directed by the Architect. 2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE A. Bathroom 1. Mirror B294 2. Toilet Paper Dispenser B-288, B-386 3. Towel Dispenser B-3609P 4. Soap Dispenser B-306 5. San. Napkin Dispenser Bobrick 6. San. Napkin Disposer B-354 7. Coat Hook B670 8. Tilt Mirror B294 (16x24) 9. Grab bars B6806 2.03 FASTENINGS, PACKING, AND MARKING A. Fastening devices shall be theft-proof, of appropriate type and of adequate capacity for each purpose intended. Exposed head of fasteners shall be stainless steel with finish to match surrounding surfaces. Accessories shall have screws, bolts, and other fastenings necessary for proper installation, wrapped in same package as the accessory item for which it is intended. B. Each package shall be clearly labeled indicating the portion of the work for which it is intended. PART 3 EXECUTION APRIL 1995 10800-2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 10800 ARk TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all toilet and bath accessories as required to complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Wood blocking for accessory supports at gypsum drywall partitions: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL and in Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. B. Masonry walls: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction and installation, including details of methods of anchorage and attachment to supporting materials. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data required for complete product and product use information. C Do not order materials or begin fabrication work until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Con- tractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS * APRIL 1995 10800-1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1. Type ABC F.E.: Carbon Dioxide CD Series with 5 lb. nominal capacity and minimum UL IOB;C rating. Fire extinguisher shall be American- LaFrance Model #5M3-5H or approved equal. 2. Mount on "J" wall bracket. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the fire extinguishers where indicated on the Drawings and in full accordance with all pertinent regulations and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The top of the fire extinguisher shall be set no more than five feet above the finished floor. Components shall be firmly anchored in place for long life under hard use. 3.02 SERVICE A. Determine the approximate completion date of the work and then inspect, charge, and tag the fire extinguishers at a date not more than ten days before nor less than one day before actual Completion Date of the Work. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 10522-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install fire extinguishers as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Masonry wall construction: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY, B. Gypsum drywall construction: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL. C. Painting, Section 09900, PAINTING. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS,AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguishers 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment furnished under this Section shall comply with all pertinent codes and regulations, shall be approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., shall bear the UL label, and shall be approved by the local fire chief. B. Fire extinguishers shall conform to NFPA 10. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFAC'T'URERS A. Fire extinguishers shall be manufactured by American-LaFrance, Co., J.L. Industries, Fyrfyter Co., or approved equal. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire extinguishers shall be as follows: APRIL 1995 10522-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 10500 LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide metal lockers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel locker units with baked enamel finish, interior shelf and hooks, number plates, latching mechanism, filler panels, and legs where raised base not provided; baked enamel finish; Lyon Metal Products or approved equal: 1. Athletic lockers, 16 gage steel fabrication. 2. Double tier type. 3. Sloped tops. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 10500-1 LOCKERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Characters must be a minimum of 3" in height. B. Sign must be a minimum clearance of 80" from floor. C. Overall Sign Dimensions to be as follows: 1. Sign size to be determined by architect. 2.09 SAFETY AND TEMPORARY SIGNS A. Temporary signs shall meet all OSHA Regulations, but are not required to meet accessibility guidelines. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the signage in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations, anchoring all components firmly in place for long life under hard use. B. Mounting height shall be set at 60" A.F.F. to centerline of sign on the wall at 5" from the latch side of the door unless otherwise directed by the Architect. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 10426-5 SIGNAGE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3. The written description must be placed directly below the pictogram symbol. 4. The size of the handicap pictogram must be within a minimum field of 6" in height for these required permanent room signs. Pictograms can be raised 1/32", but are not required to be raised. 5. Men and Women's room to accomodate standard pictogram of person next to handicap pictogram. B. Overall Sign Dimensions to be as follows: 1. Permanent Room identification signs shall be 4" X 4". 2. Restroom and other signs with pictograms shall be 9 1/2" x 9 1/2". 2.06 ELEVATOR SIGNAGE (Provided Under Division 14)(NOT USED) A. Elevator entrances must have raised character and Braille floor designations provided on both jambs. B. The characters must be 2" high upper case and raised 1/32". C All elevator control buttons must be designated by Braille and by raised standard alphabet characters for letters, arabic characters for numerals, or standard symbols as shown in the regulations and ASME A17.1-1990. D. Overall Sign Dimensions to be as follows: 1. Floor identification signs for directional header plates shall be 14 1/4" x 4 3/4". 2.07 ADJUSTIBLE ROOM NAMEPLATE SIGNAGE A. The permanent portion plaque must meet permanent room signage specifications. The informational portion (i.e. A changeable insert name of person) needs to meet only the informational signage regulations. B. Overall Sign Dimensions to be as follows: 1. Room identification signs shall be 4" x 4". Size of signs and lettering shall be appropriate to use and viewing distance. Letter size shall be 3/4' high. Room umbers shall be permanenet and room names shall be interchangeable. Provide larger plaques to accommodate long names as may be required. C Sign color and style shall be chosen by the architect from manufacturer's standard selection. 2.08 SUSPENDED OR PROJECTED OVERHEAD SIGNAGE APRIL 1995 10426-4 SIGNAGE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Size of characters shall be 1 1/2". -low G Size of handicap pictogram shall be 8". D. Sign to be attached with concealed fasteners. E. Overall Sign Dimensions to be as follows: 1. Handicapped parking signs shall be 16" wide x 20" high. 2. Exterior accessible informational signage dimensions as approved by architect. 2.04 INFORMATIONAL (DIRECTIONAL) SIGNAGE (Not Used) A. Plaque material shall consist of melamine plastic laminate, approximately 1/8" thick, with core painted a contrasting color and rated non-static, fire-retardant and self-extinguishing. Plastic laminate will be impervouse to most acids, alkalies, alcohol, solvents, abrasives and boiling water. E. Lower case letters are permitted. G. Pictograms can be any size within any size field for directional or informational signs. E. Sizes of letters and numbers of room designators shall be as follows: 1. Room numbers shall be 7/8" high. 2. Lettering for room usage and directional identification shall be 5/8" high. 4. Arrows shall be 4". F. Overall Sign Dimensions to be as follows: 1. Directional signs shall be comprised of a 4 3/4" x 4 3/4". 2. Arrow signs shall be 4 3/4" x 4 3/4". 2.05 PERMANENT ROOM ACCESS SIGNAGE(OWNER FURNISHED) A. Signage guidelines for signs with symbol of accessibility to be same as Informational (Directional) Signage with the exceptions as follows: 1. Characters must be raised 1/32". 2. Raised characters must be all upper case based on an upper case APRIL 1995 10426-3 SIGNAGE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. All signage shall meet the requirements of the local accessibility codes and the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act-1990 Accessible Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ANSI A117.1-1986. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All interior signage unless otherwise indicated shall be 1/8 inch thick opague acrylic plastic with satin matte finish and integral permanent color with raised letter and numbers that conform to the above referenced accessibility codes. Signs shall meet all safety and fire code requirements for installation in public buildings. B. Sign color and style shall be chosen by the architect from manufacturer's standard selection. C. Signage as manufactured by Best Sign Systems, Modulex, Inc, Mohawk Sign Systems, or Poblocki and Sons, Inc. are named to set the standards for the installation. D. Interchangeable Letter Signage for Servery shall be Interior 20 directory type signage system with interchangeable text as manufactured by Modulex, Racine, WI, each as indicated below. Colors shall be selected by the Architect. Provide 7 menuboard assemblies. 1. Two (2) 11 3/4' x 30" panels with 10 one inch lines of interchangeable text and one line of 1 3/4" permanent text. 2. Provide standard quatity of extra letters, numbers and blank assortments, and 24 blank knob foils at 1' X 30". 2.02 CHARACTER STYLES A. All character styles unless otherwise indicated shall consist of the following: 1. Characters must be Helvetica Medium or other Sans Serif or Simple Serif typeface. 2. Characters must have a width-to-height ratio of between 3:5 and 1:1. 3. Characters must have a stroke width-to-height ratio of between 1:5 and 1:10. 4. All characters and background must be eggshell, matte or other non-glare finish. 2.03 EXTERIOR ACCESSIBLE SIGNAGE A. Materials for exterior handicap parking Signage to consist of an 1/8" simulated black duranodic aluminum backside and a blue vinyl face with white vinyl characters and handicap pictogram. APRIL 1995 10426-2 SIGNAGE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 10426 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, tools and equipment, necessary to furnish and install signage and related accessories complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Signage will be supplied by Owner. This specification should be used as a guideline. B. Included shall be: 1. Room numbers with interchangeable space designators for all rooms listed on the finish schedule or as otherwise indicated. 2. Signage indicated on drawings or scheduled below. a. Exterior Accessible Signage 1. Informational accessible entrance signage b. Informational (Directional) Signage c. Permanent Room Access Signage. d. Safety Signage. 3. Interchangeable letter signage for Servery. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Signage Contractor shall be responsible for review of existing building signage for overall dimensions, materials, colors, character sizes and braille location on each sign. In renovated buildings new signage shall match existing signage format as approved by architect. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and specifications, including color samples of materials for selection, as applicable to the architect for approval. C Submit list of all signage with wording, materials, letter sizes & and styles, dimensions relating the words and/or pictograms to the border, overall dimensions of each sign, including mounting locations for approval by the Architect. D. Submit samples of all items demonstrating ranges of colors, type of letters, and methods of attachment. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION APRIL 1995 10426-1 SIGNAGE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 10200-3 METAL,VENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL VENT A. Metal vent for sidewall ventilation at elevator shaft shall be as dimensioned and detailed on drawings. Vent shall be 4 in. deep extruded aluminum, storm-proof type. 1. Extruded aluminum shall conform to ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy. 2. Fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. 3. Heads, sills, and jambs shall be one piece structural members. 4. Manufacturer shall provide all necessary structural supports to carry wind load of not less than 20 psf. B. Screens: Provide vent with 8 mesh aluminum wire intercrimp insect screen secused in removable extruded aluminum frames. C Finish: Flouropolymer finish, 2 coat Kynar 500. Color as selected by architect in manufacturer's standard colors. D. Acceptable unit to be as manufactured by Airolite Co. or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine openings to receive vents to assure dimensions conform to shop drawings and that openings are free of irregulasities which would interfere with installation. B. Report unsatisfactosy conditions to Architect in writing. C Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install vents in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Install level and true, and securely anchored to the supporting construction. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. After installation, assure units are level and securely anchored. B. Verify that screens are installed. C Repair any damage to vent finish to match original or replace. APRIL 1995 10200-2 METAL,VENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 10200 METAL VENTS PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment, necessary to furnish and install the metal vents complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Masonry work: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY. B. Metal lintels: Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS. C Wood blocking and nailers: SSection 06100, ROUGH CARPENTR D. Perimeter sealing of vent frame: Section 07900, SEALANTS. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and samples as follows: 1. Shop drawings shall include details of fabrication and erection and shall indicate anchorage, accessories, and finishes. 2. Sample shall include a sample vent section which indicates frame corner coostruction, blade construction, typical welds, and specified finish. B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive date of vents including standard drawings, free area, and installation instructioos. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver vents to project site in manufacturer's packaging, fully identified and protected from damage by padded blankets. B. Store vents off ground and under cover; protected from weather and construction operations. C Handle vents during transportation and installation in a manner that prevents rackiog or damage to finish os adjacent coostruction. APRIL 1995 10200-1 METAL VENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION C. Handle materials during transportation and installation in a manner that prevents racking or damage to finish or adjacent construction. , PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Solid plastic toilet partitions: 1. Panel material: Manufacturer's standard polymer resin solid homogeneous sheet.. B. Fittings: Door latches and coat hook on inside face of door. All fittings shall meet ADA accessibilty requirements. C. Equal products by Misco Partitions Corp. or Santana Solid Plastic Products. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Limit openings between panels, doors and pilasters to less than 1/2". * C. Adjust hardware, clean, and protect work. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 10160-2 TOILET PARTITIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 10160 -TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment, necessary to furnish and install toilet partions and related accessories complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide toilet partitions and screens as follows: 1. Floor-supported partitions. 2. Wall-hung screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Masonry work: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY. B. Wood blocking and nailers: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY> C Drywall work: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): _- B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes A 591 Steel Sheets 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and samples as follows: 1. Shop drawings shall include details of fabrication and erection and shall indicate anchorage, accessories, and finishes. 2. Sample shall include a sample partition section which indicates frame corner construction, typical attachment pieces and specified finish. B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive data of including standard drawings and installation instructions. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver material to project site in manufacturer's packaging, fully identified and protected from damage by padded blankets. B. Store material off ground and under cover; protected from weather and construction operations. APRIL 1995 10160-1 TOILET PARTITIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION F. Provide plastic trim as required to accommodate windows and corners. 1.3 EXE=ON A. Surface Conditions: 1. Remove all foreign materials such as paint, soap, film, etc., from all existing tub surfaces. 2. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Installation: 1. All wall panels shall be installed with as few seams as possible. 2. Apply adhesive to back of panel and position panel in place: Apply silicone waterproofing around all plumbing and in between the panel and wall sections. 3. Where bathrooms have a window located over the bathtub, install plastic trim on window sill, jamb and header to completely encase window. 4. Trim and edge exposed ends with plastic extrusions. 5. All perimeter edges between new panels and existing walls including corner joint between windows or back wall or the two side walls must be permanently caulked. C. Clean-up: 1. Remove all waste resulting from this work and leave each area clean upon completion. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 00980- 2 P.V.C. WALL FINISH LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09980 P.V.C. WALL FINISH 1.1 GENERAL A. Quality Assurance: Comply with reference standards of the American Society for Testing and Nlatcrlals (ASTM) and Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.). B. Guarantee: Wall surrounds shall be installed by the manufacturer and guaranteed for a period of three (3) years from date of substantial completion. C. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Samples of plastic mw)tc--�::1, all accessories, caulking, and fastening devices. 2. Shop drawings showing proposed methods of installation for actual field conditions. 3. Maintenance informal;-i and repair instructions. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. General: All materials shall he new, free of defects impairing their strength, durability, or ah; ; ance, and of best commercial quality for purposes noted. B. Manufacturer/Installer: Universal Bath Systems, 165 Font Street, Chicopee. MA 01013 (413) 592-4791. C. Caulking shall be watertight. mildew resistant silicone or sealant equal to or better than Dow Corni�-` ;': 'x ,786, or GE-SCS-1702. D. Adhesives used shall be fir:, water, and mildew resistant in their cured state. E. Plastics shall be polyvinyl c'iloridc in sheet form with the following characteristics: 1. .093" thickness as spo%"-d for each member with a tolerance of ten percent. 2. Fire retardant per AST' ' 7-635 and U.L. listing under UL-94-V-0. 3. Satin gloss finish rc> ! to chipping, cracking, acids, chemicals, stains, or discolorau;� r 4. Repairable against i._ • -al abuse. APRIL 1995 )80- 1 P.V.C. WALL FINISH LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS ""'"* 1.1 GENERAL A. Submittal: Product data, shop drawings, full-width sample of each wall covering, and 12- inch long sample of each molding accessory. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread: 25 or less; smoke developed: 450 or less; per test method ASTM E 84. C. Project Conditions: Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 deg (16 deg C) in installation areas for at least 10 days before and 10 days after installation. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Wall Coverings: Vinyl wall covering material will be furnished by the Owner to be installed under this contract. ,r. B. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard for use with specific wall covering and substrate application; mildew resistant, non staining and strippable. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Prepare a smooth, dry , clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects according to the wall covering manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Wall Liner: Install where required by wall covering manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Wall Covering: Install seams vertical and plumb; horizontal seams are not permitted. D. Clean: Remove excess adhesive. END OF SECTION 09950 APRIL 1995 09950- 1 WALL COVERING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION e. Wood floors: Specified in Wood Floors, Division 9. END OF SECTION 09900 APRIL 1995 09900-6 PAINTING no LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at the manufacturer's *!' recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. K. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. L. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat to material to be painted or finished that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn- through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish , or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. N. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass, and paint splattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Q Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by cleaning, repairing, or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. P. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up or restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. C� Paint Schedule: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated: 1. Exterior surfaces: a. Painted wood: two coats exterior alkyd eggshell enamel on exterior primer. b. Galvanized metal: two coats exterior alkyd semigloss enamel on exterior galvanic primer. 2. Interior surfaces: a. Wood for transparent finish: two coats semi-gloss polyurethane varnish on primer. b. Wood for opaque finish: two coats semi-gloss alkyd enamel on primer. C. Veneer plaster: two coats eggshell acrylic enamel on primer. d. Veneer plaster and wood in bathrooms: two coats "Perma-White Bathroom and Ceiling Paint". APRIL 1995 09900-5 PAINTING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION c. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 3. Galvinized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surface with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock mechanical methods. F. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 2. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. G. Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide the finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface. 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in place. Extend the coatings in these areas to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surface behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint the surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 7. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, or roller, according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. APRIL 1995 09900-4 PAINTING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacture , based on testing and field experience. .M C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade- sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. D. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of custom colors. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements. Do not begin application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Coordination: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. C. Preparation: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Cleaning: Clean substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Z. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. APRIL 1995 09900-3 PAINTING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1) Veneer Plaster: Two 12" square samples, for each finish and color. 2) Painted Wood: Two 12" square samples of each color and material on wood species to be painted. 3) Ferrous Metal: Two 8" long samples of steel pipe for each color and finish. E. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. F. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. G. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface. 1. Final acceptance of color will be from job-applied samples. H. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's label with the product trade name manufacturer's instructions. I. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. J. Project Conditions: Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. K. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). L. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Benjamin & Moore Co. 2. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints. 3. Pratt and Lambert. 4. Wm. Zinsser & Co. Inc. (to be used on veneer plaster and wood in bathrooms only). - B. Paint Materials, General: Provide primers, finish coat materials, and -" related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates APRIL 1995 09900-2 PAINTING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1.1 General A. This section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatments. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in the schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from strandard colors or finishes available. C Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. - D. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product data for each paint system specified. a. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. b. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. C. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 2. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. After color selection the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 3. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers, and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. a. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of look color and texture only: APRIL 1995 09900-1 PAINTING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION W A. Carpeting, materials, installation and workmanship shall be inspected by the architect and the manufacturer's representative before carpet installer leaves the job. The carpeting shall be vacuumed clean before and after final inspection. B. Correct all defects in materials and workmanship listed by Architect during inspection. C Approval of carpet installation will be given only after all such defects have been corrected. 3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of the installation, this Contractor shall clean up all dirt and debris and clean the carpets of all spots with a recommended spot remover. All loose threads shall be removed. B. Just prior to occupancy by the Owner, all carpeting shall be thoroughly vacuumed. C All work adjacent to operations under this Section shall be inspected for damage and stains, and repaired or cleaned prior to the completion of work. 3.07 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Carpet manufacturers shall provide maintenance manuals, procedure, etc., for Owner's maintenance Department. B. Carpet manufacturers with this installer shall set up maintenance instruction conference with the Owner and the Architect at the time of final inspection to review all techniques, procedures, etc., for proper and acceptable maintenance of all the carpeting types and installation types. 3.08 CLEAN-UP A. During the progress of the work, this Contractor shall keep the premises clear of debris resulting from his operations and shall remove surplus and waste materials from the site as soon as possible. C Upon completion of the work, this Contractor shall remove from the site all scaffolding, equipment and materials used on the work as well as any debris resulting from the operations. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09680-4 CARPETING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION to eliminate any "telegraphing" through of lines, ridges, etc., in the substrate; and to maintain proper pile height to meet other flooring materials. D. Determine room center using standard tie laying techniques. Adjust center lines as required to assure perimeter modules of a minimum off half width; to facilitate maximum use of whole tiles in doorways; and to provide whole tile sin heavy traffic areas. In all conditions no cut tile will be permitted in the field of any floor area. After locating adjusted center point, divide area into quadrants. Quadrants must meet as four exact right angles. Strike guide lines. Apply full spread pressure sensitive adhesive to tiles and file borders over floor area as work progresses. Install first tile into adhesive precisely along guide lines in one quadrant squarely and tightly against previously installed tiles. Maintain straight line along guide lines. Complete one entire quadrant before beginning the next one. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Maintain continuous joints in both directions, align and neatly fitted, in both field and borders. All border joints must be square and parallel to those of full tiles. E. Where carpet edges occur at removable trench location or at other exposed edges not requiring reducer strips, coat edges with an approved silicone sealant to prevent edge tufts from pulling out. F. Work installed not in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, or in a manner unacceptable to the Architect, will be deemed unsatisfactory, and many result in Owner requiring removal and reinstallation at the Contractor's expense. G. A sample of each type of corner detail and border for the carpet tile shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. Joints shall be completely free of puckering and shall lie flat. Architect shall have the right to approve. H. Carpeting shall run under all open-bottom items, such as heating convectors, and shall be installed tight against columns, walls, partitions, banquettes, etc. so that all portions of the designated floor area are covered with carpet. I. Provide all necessary accessories, trim, reducer strips, etc. as required where carpet tile butt other flooring materials. Accessories and trim shall be installed in accordance with details on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S JOB ASSIGNMENT A. The carpet manufacturer shall assign, through the installer and approved by the Architect, a representative experienced and knowledgeable of its products to inspect and monitor the installation of its product on this project. 3.05 QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION APRIL 1995 09680-3 CARPETING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet shall be provided by Owner and installed by Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The work of this Section shall be coordinated with that of associated trades. B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper execution and performance of the work described herein. 3.02 INSPECTION A. The Contractor/Installer shall inspect the areas and spaces where materials are to be applied and assure himself that they are in proper condition to receive the work to be performed under this Section. The Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing, before any work is installed, of any condition requiring correction. Failure to make such a report shall be construed as acceptance of the existing conditions and the responsibility to provide an acceptable installation. B. The Contractor/Installer shall measure all areas to receive his materials and verify in the field their actual dimensions. He shall be responsible for the proper installation and fitting of all carpeting,carpet tiles, carpet borders and accessories. G Field measure all work which must be accurately fitted to construction, including wall-to-wall dimensions, offsets, door locations and details, and all other installed items. D. Responsibility for carpeting fabricated and installed accurately to properly fit the construction shall be that of this Contractor/Installer, who shall pay all costs involved in correcting any misfitting carpeting as fabricated and installed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The installation of the carpeting shall be made in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer for direct applied (cemented) carpeting. In addition, installation shall comply with the Carpet Institute's "Handbook for Carpet Layers" recommendations as applicable. B. Areas to receive carpet tile by dry method installation shall be at areas indicated on the Finish Schedule. C. New concrete shall be sealed by this trade in accordance with manufacturers specifications leveling as required. Existing flooring shall be cleaned and leveled as necessary to provide smooth, even surface; APRIL 1995 09680-2 CARPETING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09680 CARPETING ' PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Carpeting materials and intallation of carpeting will be provided by Owner under a separate contract. General Contractor will provide all floor and wall preparation required to receive the work of this section. B. The General Contractor will cooperate and coordinate with the Owner and his Contractor in the execution of the work of this section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Preparation of surfaces: Section 02072, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING. B. Concrete finish: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. C. Abutting adjacent materials: Section 09660, RESILIENT. TILE FLOORING and Section 09705, RESINOUS FLOORING. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable pans of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 18" x 18" samples of all types and colors of carpet to be used on the project. Approved samples shall be used as standard of quality and color. B. Submit samples of carpet accessories for approval. C Submit diagram of seaming locations for carpet for approval. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLER A. Installer shall demonstrate experience in carpet installations similar to the project to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. 1.06 MAINTENANCE SUPPLY A. An additional amount of 10% of each carpeting type and color shall be purchased under this section and delivered to the Owner in sealed packages for his future use. APRIL 1995 09680-1 CARPETING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION waived. Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of conditions in the A*W area as suitable to properly receive the resilient base work. 1. Do final cleaning of surfaces just before installation. Remove dust, dirt, and other loose particles. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Do not begin installation until work of other Sections, including painting, has been substantially completed. Use only experienced workmen. Strictly adhere to printed instructions of the manufacturers of the various materials. 2. Room temperatures at any area in which resilient base is being installed shall be maintained at temperatures of not less than 650F. for a period of at least 48 hours prior to commencement of work to at least 48 hours after completion of the work in the given area. B. Install resilient base in manner to ensure uniform positive contact with subsurface, and to product finished surfaces which are smooth, even, and in true planes, free of buckles, waves, and other imperfections. Store and use adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Form inside and outside comers neatly. Heat-form external corners for uniform cove appearance. Cope internal corners (do not miter). Scribe and fit joints accurately. A maximum of three lengths of base will be permitted in closets with joints at comers only. 3.03 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS A. Fumish additional resilient base in quantity of at least 3% of total of each different color of base used on project, carefully wrapped and sealed. B. Deliver additional materials to the site and place in designated storage area(s) in building. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean resilient base after installation in strict accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, removing all exposed adhesive and other stains. Replace any material which cannot be cleaned to satisfactory appearance, subject to Architect's approval. B. Remove all rubbish, cartons, debris, and tools from the work and leave work areas broom clean at completion of work. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09678-3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION waived. Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of conditions in the area as suitable to properly receive the resilient base work. 1. Do final cleaning of surfaces just before installation. Remove dust, dirt, and other loose particles. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Do not begin installation until work of other Sections, including painting, has been substantially completed. Use only experienced workmen. Strictly adhere to printed instructions of the manufacturers of the various materials. 2. Room temperatures at any area in which resilient base is being installed shall be maintained at temperatures of not less than 650F. for a period of at least 48 hours prior to commencement of work to at least 48 hours after completion of the work in the given area. B. Install resilient base in manner to ensure uniform positive contact with subsurface, and to product finished surfaces which are smooth, even, and in true planes, free of buckles, waves, and other imperfections. Store and use adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C Form inside and outside corners neatly. Heat-form external corners for uniform cove appearance. Cope internal corners (do not miter). Scribe and fit joints accurately. A maximum of three lengths of base will be permitted in closets with joints at corners only. 3.03 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS A. Furnish additional resilient base in quantity of at least 3% of total of each different color of base used on project, carefully wrapped and sealed. B. Deliver additional materials to the site and place in designated storage area(s) in building. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean resilient base after installation in strict accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, removing all exposed adhesive and other stains. Replace any material which cannot be cleaned to satisfactory appearance, subject to Architect's approval. B. Remove all rubbish, cartons, debris, and tools from the work and leave work areas broom clean at completion of work. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09678-3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION written manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this ►. Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - RESILIENT MATERIALS A. Resilient materials shall be uniform in thickness, size, and profile. B. Resilient materials shall be cut accurately with square, true edges. C. Plain colors shall be uniform throughout. D. Colors (maximum of two colors) shall be as selected by the Architect from a full range of manufacturer's standard colors. E. Resilient materials shall be free of objectionable odors, blisters, cracks, objectionable foreign material, or other physical defects affecting appearance of serviceability. 2.02 RUBBER BASE A. Rubber base shall be smooth surface, toeless carpet type at carpeted floors "* and set on cove type at other floor conditions. 1/8". thick, 4" or 6" high, rounded tops, in 40 ft., 50 ft., or 100 ft. lengths. Base of toe of set on type base shall be flexible enough to conform to floor variations of 1/8". Base shall be manufactured by Johnson Rubber Co. or equivalent product approved by the Architect. Maximum of four colors will be selected. 2.03 ADHESIVE AND PRIMER A. Adhesive shall be vinyl base adhesive of type and brand recommended by manufacturer. B. Primer, if required, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Initial Preparation: Surface to receive resilient base shall be turned over to this trade plumb, true to line and plane, with joints finished flush, clean, and free of loose dirt and dust, grease, oil, and other deleterious materials such as paint and glue, ready to receive work of this Section. B. Final Preparation: Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify Architect, in writing, of all conditions which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence work on any surface where such notice has been sent until corrective work has been completed or APRIL 1995 09678-2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09678 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES A"k PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install resilient base and related items, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Gypsum wallboard wall finish, ready to receive resilient base: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL. B. Resilient tile flooring: Section 09660, RESILIENT TILE FLOORING. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. Aak 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with that of other trades affecting, or affected by, this work, cooperating as necessary with said trades to assure the steady progress of all the work of the Contract. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit representative samples of products t be furnished under this Section to Architect for selection and approval. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved materials. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, complete test data and technical characteristics, complete installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. C Do not order materials or proceed with installation work until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and Document 00810, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard APRIL 1995 09678-1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings. C. Installation: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of floor covering installation included in Project. Layout sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction. 2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor substrates. 3. Match edges of floor covering for color shading and pattern seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. 5. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished floor covering, install sheet vinyl floor covering before these items are installed. 6. Heat-weld seams in sheet vinyl floor coverings where this seaming method is indicated. 7. Where indicated, cove sheet vinyl floor coverings up vertcal surfaces to form integral base of height indicated over cove support strip with top edge butted against and covered by cap molding. 8. Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. D. Cleaning: Clean sheet vinyl floor coverings after installation and 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Completion. Apply protective polish according to flooring manufacturer's directions. END OF SECTION 09666 APRIL 1995 09660- 2 RESILIENT FLOORING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09660 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS PART GENERAL A. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Samples of each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering specified. 2. Maintenance data for SHEET vinyl floor coverings, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. B. Extra materials: Deliver to Owner not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form of each different composition, wearing surface, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering installed. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products. 1. Smaragd; Forbo Industries Inc. 2. Coordinates; Tarkett. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds; Latex-modified, portland-cement based formulation provided or approved by sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer for application indicated. C Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering products and substrate conditions indicated. D. Rod for Heat-Welding Seams: Product of floor covering manufacturer in color complying with the following requirement. 1. Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Examine area where installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements. 1. For wood subfloors verify that underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and substances with potential to interfere with adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain sheet vinyl floor coverings. APRIL 1995 09660- 1 RESILIENT FLOORING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION is within three (3) inches of all end joints. Leave 3/4" between end of flooring and wall line. D. Sanding: After all other construction is finished and immediately prior to staining and sealing, lightly machine sand the floor to remove all scratches and irregularities form the surface. Sanding sequence shall progress through No. 2 sandpaper, No. 1/2 sandpaper, No. 00 sandpaper on third and fourth traverse. The floor shall receive a final buffing or cleaning with fine sandpaper or No. 0 steel wool. Sweep and vacuum floor clean for finishing. Use no water. E. Finish approval: Provide finish sample of Dura Seal in color(s) selected by the Architect on actual flooring sample for final approval/selection by the Architect. Do not begin finishing work until Architect's approval has been obtained. F. Finishing: Apply the first coat of Dura Seal Neutral (or color of your choice) with a lambswool applicator or brush. Allow to penetrate for 5 to 10 minutes. While Dura Seal is still wet, buff with #2 steel wood to remove excess and smooth the grain. Coverage approximately 500 square feet per gallon. Allow the first coat to dry approximately 8 hours and apply a second coat in the same manner as the first. Allow the second coat to dry approximately 8 hours and buff to a satin sheen using a polishing brush or pad. 3.03 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all debris related to the conduct of this portion of the work from the premises. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09550-3 WOOD STRIP FLOORING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. The flooring contractor shall verify the site conditions to assure himself that both site environment and substrate conditions are acceptable for the installation of his work. Commencement of installation will indicate his acceptance of the site conditions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Flooring shall be T&G Hardwood 3-1/4" x 2-1/4" strip flooring distributed by Hoboken Wood Flooring Corporation, East Rutherford, NJ. Species of wood for flooring shall be: Light: Select white oak Dark: Select white oak stained Ebony or as approved by Architect. B. Underlayment shall be Bruce Cold-Stick Mastic or 4 mil polyethylene film as recommended by manufacturer for condition of substrate. C. Screeds shall be 2"x 4" preservative treated wood in random lengths from 18" to 48". Alternate screed system if approved by Architect and floor supplier - 3/4" plywood in standard sheets with permacushion pads stapled T-0" ox to the underside. D. Finish shall be two coats of Dura Seal penetrating wood finish as manufactured by Minwax Construction Products Division, Montvale, NJ in color to be selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY A. Flooring material shall not be delivered until the job is thoroughly dry and, in Winter, building is continuously heated. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Underlayment: Install polyethylene in continuous length courses, overlapping each course a minimum of six (6) inches or install mastic according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Install screeds in mastic in random lengths overlapping by 4" in alternate directions at 12" o.c. flat side down. Provide solid blocking in short lengths under "picture framed", corners or change in direction of planking. Leave 1" between ends of screeds and wall. C. Nailing: Through tongue at intersection with shoulder at an angle of 45 to 50 degrees. Space all nails not to exceed twelve (12) inches apart and counter sink all heads lightly with steel nail set. Space nails so that a nail APRIL 1995 09550-2 WOOD STRIP FLOORING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09550 WOOD STRIP FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all wood strip flooring and related items to complete the work as indicated, including vapor barrier, wood screeds, shims and pads. B. Smoothing and sanding of flooring in preparation for staining and finishing . C. Finishing the floor. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Preparation of subfloor: Section 02072, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING. B. New concrete subfloor and patching: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples of the following items shall be submitted: 1. A composite sample of each flooring type one foot square, finished as directed for approval by the Architect. 1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials for the work of this Section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers, plainly marked with the product's and manufacturer's name. Materials in broken containers of in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage, shall not be used and shall be removed from the site. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS APRIL 1995 09550-1 WOOD STRIP FLOORING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Samples: Submit to the Architect for approval samples of acoustical tiles, panels and members of suspension system proposal for use. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Type ACTT- Washable, Vinyl-faced Ceiling Panel: 1. Ceiling Panels: Shall be 2' x 2' x 1/2" Sheetrock Lay-in Panels panels No. 3260 with washable stiple pattern 2 mil vinyl finish as manufactured by USG Interiors Corporation. 2. Suspension System: Exposed, two-direction, painted steel Tee Grid System, 2' x 2' x 15/16" wide flange, "Prelude Fire Guard Exposed Tee Grid" Equal to products of Armstrong Co., Donn Products Co., or Chicago Metallic Corp., as approved by Architect. Exposed portions shall be aluminum cover with factory painted with white enamel finish including hold down clip. PART 3 EXEC,'[TTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation: 1. Installation of ceiling systems shall be done by an authorized representative or franchised applicator of the manufacturer, or an applicator approved by the manufacturer, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. It shall conform to the governing laws and building code and to the standards specified under ASTM Standard C636. 2. Provide all secondary framing required to avoid interference with overhead work of other trades. 3. Install grid system in accordance with layout on the Reflected Ceiling Plans, flush and level with exposed "Tees" in perfect alignment. Install acoustical panels, maintaining direction of pattern and "mill- run" in one direction throughout. Subcontractor shall contact related trades and coordinate ceiling system with the integration of electrical fixtures/systems and mechanical systems. 4. Patching of existing acoustical ceiling system shall be done with best workmanship and with careful attention given to matching appearance of new work to the existing work and to make joinings between new and existing work as imperceptible as possible in the finished work. B. Extra Panels: Furnish to Owner at least 5% extra acoustical panels of types used on the project, in unopened, standard manufacturer's cartons, for future maintenance or replacement. r END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09510-2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Scope: Furnish all materials and install all acoustical ceiling work and related items, to complete the work as indicated on the Drawings. Include: 1. New exposed "Tee" suspended panel ceilings. 2. Patching and repairing of existing panel ceilings to remain where disturbed by work of this Contract. B. Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect for approval complete shop drawings of all acoustical ceiling work. Obtain approval of shop drawings before proceeding with installation of acoustical materials. 2. Samples: Submit to the Architect for approval samples of acoustical tiles, panels and members of suspension system proposed for use. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Adjacent Gypsum Soffits: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL. B. Section 16000, ELECTRICAL. C- HVAC Registers and Grills: Mechanical. D. Sprinklers: Section 15300, FIRE PROTECTION. E. Plastic Wall Panels: Section 09270, FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELING. 1.0 3 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect for approval complete shop drawings of all acoustical ceiling work. Obtain approval of shop drawings before proceeding with installation of acoustical materials. APRIL 1995 09510-1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 6. Seal all joints between gypsum wallboard and adjoining door and window frames in exterior walls. AM* 7. Do all other sealing called for on the Drawings or reasonably required to produce maximum thermal and sound transmission reduction through the walls and partitions. B. Seal joints in partitions continuing above suspended ceilings, in similar manner, for acoustical purposes. C Sealing shall be done using sealant of type specified hereinbefore, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and applicable requirements of ASTM C 919. Sealant shall thoroughly fill void for a complete sound and thermal seal, and shall be tooled to dense, smooth, concave finish. 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically called for on the Drawings, in two layer wallboard work seal only the outer layer. 3.09 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect the work of other trades and work of this Section already installed against soiling and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged or soiled. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09250-11 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3. Install casing bead wherever finish wallboard abuts dissimilar materials and other places where specifically called for on the Drawings. 4. Install control joints generally over (and under) centers of all major wall openings (those greater than 40% of wall height, measured floor to ceiling), over all door frames, over control joints in back-up materials, and at maximum distance of 30 ft. in walls, 60 ft. or to limit areas to not more than 2400 sq. ft., at ceilings (except where lesser distance is indicated), and other places specifically called for on the Drawings. Interrupt furring and/or framing behind the control joints. In all cases, specific locations of control joints shall be as indicated or as directed by the Architect, and this information must be in hand before control joint installation is begun. 5. Install access panels supplied by others as required. Before installation, verify correct rating of panel to be installed. 3.07 JOINT FINISHING A. Finish all corners, joints, and edges of gypsum wallboard and gypsum soffit board work, and all corner beads, casing beads, control joints and other trim to provide complete finishing of all exposed wallboard surfaces, in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C 840. Finish to absolutely flush, true surface showing no irregularity when tested by light source parallel to the plane of the nominal wallboard face. B. Finish all concealed joints in wallboard above ceiling finishes flush with tape and a minimum of two coats of compound to provide a continuous, uninterrupted plane for acoustical and fire-resistive performance. Concealed joints may be left in rough condition without finish sanding. 3.08 ACOUSTICAL SEALING A. Walls and partitions designated on the Drawings with an STC Rating and/or indicated to receive acoustical or thermal insulation, including interior faces of exterior steel framed curtain walls, do all sealing work required, as indicated on the Drawing and generally as listed below. 1. Seal all joints between the gypsum wallboard and surrounding construction. 2. Seal full perimeters of all frames, sleeves, ducts, and other items set into, or passing through, gypsum wallboard construction. 3. Seal full perimeters of all projections through the gypsum wallboard construction, such as pipes, conduits, etc. 4. Seal all control joints in the gypsum wallboard work. 5. Seal all joints between gypsum wallboard and adjoining gypsum wallboard panels at corners and intersections. OOPA APRIL 1995 09250-10 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION framing member. Install wallboard at walls and partitions with long dimension vertical, and with each end and edge lying over a framing ,,w, member. 1. At double layer installations apply second layer by combination of laminating adhesive and mechanical fastenings (through first layer into the steel framing and/or furring member behind), in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations for each project condition. C. Carry gypsum wallboard, each side, continuously from floor to underside of deck construction above, including above suspended ceilings, for acoustical and fire-resistive performances. D. To minimize end joints, use maximum practical lengths. Bring gypsum wallboard panels into contact, but do not force into place. Fit abutting ends and edges neatly. Provide slots for sealant at top, bottom, ends, and comers of wallboard at all walls and partitions indicated to receive acoustical insulation, as indicated. Also provide slots for sealant where wallboard abuts other finish materials, as specified hereinbelow. E. Spacing and installation of drywall screws for the various applications and fire-rating requirements shall conform to the printed standards of the manufacturer. F. Set heads of fasteners flush with surface of the paper, but not breaking the paper. Where attached loosely to a framing or furring member, a second fastener shall be installed within 1-1/2 in. G. Cut gypsum wallboard neatly at corners, edges, etc., and for pipes, electrical outlets, electrical conduit and raceway, recessed cabinets, and other projections. 3.05 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Walls and partitions indicated on the Drawings with a STC Rating or indicated to receive acoustical insulation shall have a single, continuous layer of insulation installed as indicated and specified, filling the entire open space between the framing members. Carry insulation behind backs of all electric boxes and similar appurtenances. Provide mechanical attachment to prevent future settlement. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Install accessories at gypsum wallboard installations, as follows, in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install joint reinforcement tape at all joints, and at all internal corners where abutting surfaces are both gypsum wallboard construction. 2. Install corner beads at all external wallboard corners. APRIL 1995 09250-9 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION C. Steel Stud Chase Walls: Construct partitions on both sides of non-fire rated chase walls in same manner as other partitions, with studs in direct alignment across the chase. Brace with three gypsum wallboard gussets, per pair of studs, across the chase, located at quarter points, and screwed to the studs. Comply with manufacturer's published details. D. Steel Furring: Install screwable steel furring channels over faces of concrete or masonry walls to receive gypsum wallboard finishes, continuously along tops and bottoms of walls and in continuous vertical rows space 16 in. o.c. along full length of each furring member, through alternate flanges. E. Metal Access Panels: Install all metal access panels at partitions, furrings, and suspended ceilings. Access panels will be furnished to this trade loose under other Section(s). F. Fixture Attachments: Before any wallboard is installed, a complete survey of all fixtures, accessories, cabinet work, shelves, rail brackets, door stops, or other items to be attached to the finished work of this Section shall be made and wood blocking or other attachments shall be installed within the steel framing and furring work to receive the loads. Blockings or other attachments for the various loads shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be described on the shop drawings. All such fixture attachments shall be observed by the Contractor before commencing installation of wallboard. All such blockings and attachments shall be provided as work of this Section. mow, _ G. Miscellaneous Framing and Furring: Construct all special miscellaneous screwable steel stud framing and furring, such as at ceiling edgings, soffits, column and beam enclosures, skylight wells, etc., as detailed and as required to achieve the shapes and profiles indicated and other miscellaneous framing indicated and/or reasonably required for the thorough completion of the Project. 1. Thoroughly fasten together, anchor, and brace to provide absolutely rigid structural conditions fully capable of supporting the loads to be applied with factor of safety not less than 2-1/2 to 1. Carry out the work generally as detailed, strictly following instructions of the manufacturer for steel and stud structural framing use. Screw all connections with self-tapping metal screws or other appropriate fasteners and provide all additional reinforcement required to assure the required performance. 3.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD APPLICATION A. Unless otherwise indicated, application of gypsum wallboard shall conform to ASTM C840. B. Apply thickness and layers of gypsum wallboard at ceilings, walls, partitions, column and beam enclosures as indicated. Stagger joints in each layer. Locate joints in first layer on opposite sides of partitions to occur on different studs. Apply wallboard at ceilings with long dimension perpendicular to furring channels, with each end occurring over a APRIL 1995 09250-8 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 4. Entire installation shall be level and true, with maximum variation AM& from level 1/8 in. when measured with a 10 ft. straight-edge, and with accumulation of variation of level not to exceed 1/2 in. per room or area. B. Screwable Steel Stud Partition construction shall conform to ASTM C754, and the following: 1. Installation of Partition Track: Align standard steel track at floors and ceiling construction according to partition layouts and secure with suitable fasteners to the floor and ceiling construction at a spacing not to exceed 24 in. o.c. Carry all walls and partitions full height as noted on the Drawings above ceiling to underside of floor and roof decks. Fill all voids above track, such as steel deck flutes, solidly with packing wool or fiberglas insulation at non-fire rated partitions, and with mineral wool fire-safing insulation at fire rated partitions for smoke and fire-stopping purposed in flutes of steel deck directly above top track where partitions run perpendicular to flutes, to achieve effective closure and to assure the rated performance at fire-rated assemblies. Where partitions run parallel to trusses provide 2 X 6 bridging 2'0" o.c. Where acoustical partitions (those to receive acoustical insulation) and fire-rated partitions run parallel to trusses, install all the track in continuous bed of acoustical or thermal sealant formed by applying a 1/4 in. minimum bead of sealant to the rear of the track and pressing into place. At fire-rated partitions also install tightly backed fire-safing insulation in the voids for smoke and fire- stopping purposes to achieve effective closure and to assure the rated -a, performance of the fire-rated assemblies. 2. Installation of Steel Studs: Steel studs shall be one piece, without splices installed at spacing not to exceed 16 in. o.c. (or other spacing indicated) and located at abutting construction and at the internal apex of corners. Provide additional studs at corner conditions, frame jambs, etc., as called for on the Drawings and specified herein. 3. Position steel studs vertically engaging both floor and runners. Anchor studs located adjacent to door and floor glass frames, partition intersections, comers, and over partition ends, to the floor and ceiling runner flanges with positive screw engagement with 3/8 in. Type S partition screws or by locking the studs with metal lock fasteners and to the ceiling runner flanges by screw engagement. Allow for relief of 1/2 in. roof or ceiling deflection at tops of all partitions by screwing through slotted holes. 4. Install double stud at door and fixed glass frame jambs and securely attach to the frame anchors by at least two screws per anchor. Over steel door and fixed glass frames, install steel track header and install studs above, with back-to-back pair, centered over the door to secure control joints. Run continuous length of cold-rolled steel channel through the stud cores, overlapping at least one stud beyond jamb studs at each end. Frame out for recessed cabinets, accessories, grilles, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer for each of the project conditions. -M%. APRIL 1995 09250-7 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.01 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION A. Inspect job conditions and related work and report to Architect in writing, all conditions interfering with the proper installation of work of this Section. Commencement of work in any given area shall constitute acceptance of conditions in that area as acceptable to receive work of this Section. B. Make all changes and adjustments in work of this Section as needed to accommodate the work of other trades, providing all cutting and patching until it has been inspected. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work shall conform to published specifications and installation instructions of each manufacturer, the approved shop drawings, above- referenced quality assurance standards, the governing laws and code. Refer to Drawings to determine location of fire-resistive, fire-protective, and acoustically-rated work, and construct this work to conform to the specifications and installation instructions of UL or other testing agency(ies). Also refer to the Drawings to determine the number of layers of gypsum board, thickness of board, etc., for each of the installations. B. Erect gypsum drywall work, rigidly support, and securely fasten in place, in such manner that plumb, level, and true finished lines and surfaces will result in the finished work in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 40W 754 and ASTM C 840. C Do gypsum drywall work only after all windows and door openinEs are enclosed and a temperature of not less than 550F. is maintained during and up to completion of the drywall work. D. Gypsum drywall work only after permanent heat is installed. 3.03 STEEL FRAMING AND FURRING A. Suspended Ceilings: Install complete suspended steel ceiling framing system in accordance with ASTM C 754, and the following: 1. Install hangers at ends of, and 48 in. on center along lengths of main runners, securing to ceiling structure above with the appropriate anchors. Provide all additional secondary framing as required to provide support by primary framing members or deck above. Do not anchor hangers to pipes, ducts, or other overhead non-structural elements. 2. Install steel runner channels 48 in. on center maximum and within 6 ft. of walls. 3. Install screwable steel furring channels perpendicular to main runners and spaced 24 in. on center along length of, and within 6 in. of walls without wall angles, and within 8 in. of ends of panels and clipped to, the main runners. APRIL 1995 09250-6 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1. Screws for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard to Steel Framing and Furring Members: Self-drilling, Type S, bugle head screws, AAW conforming to ASTM C 646, with bugle-type Phillips-head, appropriate size and length in each case as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Screws for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Blocking: Self- drilling Type W screws conforming to ASTM C 894, with bugle-type Phillips-head. Screw length and size in each case shall be as recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer. 3. Screws for Attachment of Steel Framing and Furring Members to Other Steel Members: Self-drilling, Type S, pan head screws, conforming to ASTM C 646, appropriate size and length in each case as recommended by manufacturer. G. Accessories shall conform to ASTM C 840 and the following: 1. Comer Bead: 1 in, by 1 in. perforated flange, standard type, 26 gauge, galvanized steel, for compound finishing. 2. Metal Trim: 24 gauge, galvanized steel, with perforated flanges, for compound finishing. 3. Control Joint: 26 gauge, galvanized steel, "Vee" type, with perforated flanges, for compound finishing. H. Acoustical Insulation: 1. Blanket/Batt Insulation: Indicated thickness by 16-1/8 in. and 24-1/8 in. wide, as appropriate, equal to "Fiberglas CWI Unfaced Insulation", manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., or approved equal. 2. Packing Wool Insulation: Fiberglas or mineral wool packing insulation, equal to products manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co. or Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. 3. Fire Safing Insulation: Mineral fiber fire-rated fire safing insulation in conformance with the governing laws and building code, manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co. or approved equal. I. Acoustical Sealant: 1. Sealant for concealed applications shall be "BA-98 Acoustical Sealant", manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., or approved equal. 2. Sealant for exposed applications shall be paintable "AC-20 Acrylic Latex Caulk", manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product manufactured by DAP or Gibson Homans Co., or approved equal. PART 3 EXEL ON APRIL 1995 09250-5 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION ,s 2. Hangers shall be 12 gauge, minimum, galvanized and annealed steel wire. 3. Steel runner channels shall be 1-1/2 in. cold-rolled 16 gauge steel channels, weighing 475 lb. per 1,000 lin. ft., shop painted black. 4. Screwable steel ceiling furring channels shall be 25 gauge hot-dip galvanized, screwable, pressed steel furring channels, 7/8 in. thick, hat section. 5. Clips for attachment of steel furring channels to steel carrying channels shall be proprietary clips as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Tie Wire: Not less than 16 gauge annealed and galvanized. B. Screwable Steel Stud Framing System: Unless otherwise indicated, shall be a complete proprietary framing system consisting of prefabricated, non-load bearing, screwable 20 gauge (heavy gauge) and 25 gauge (light gauge) hot-dip galvanized steel studs, and all required steel track, anchors, and related items, conforming to ASTM C 645, all hot-dip galvanized. 1. Steel studs at jambs of door and fixed glass frames, at open partition ends, where the partition is to receive wall-mounted shelves, heavy fixtures, etc., and where use of light gauge studs is limited by manufacturer's structural design tables shall be 20 gauge. At other locations studs shall be 25 gauge. 2. Wood blockings for support of fixtures, accessories, etc., shall be Construction and/or Standard Grade Hem-fir. C. Screwable Steel Wall Furring Channels: 25 gauge hot-dip galvanized, screwable, pressed steel furring channels, 7/8 in. thick, hat section. D. Gypsum Wallboard: Indicated thickness(es) by 48 in. width by lengths as required, tapered edge, paper finish, conforming to ASTM C36. Where used in fire-rated assemblies, Type X fire resistant type shall be used. Moisture resistant gypsum wall board shall be used at toilet rooms and kitchen areas and as indicated on the drawings. E. Cement Board: To be used at all ceramic tile. Indicated thickness by lengths required installed according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Joint Treatment Materials: Joint treatment materials shall conform to ASTM C 475. 1. Laminating Adhesive and Joint Finishing compound: As recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer, interior type for interior general use, exterior type for use at water-resistant gypsum backer board. 2. Joint Tape: 2 in. to 2-1/2 in. wide paper tape, as recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer. '* F. Screws: APRIL 1995 09250-4 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Samples: Furnish samples of materials to be furnished under this Section to Architect for approval. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to governing laws, building code and manufacturer's printed standards. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Work of this Section shall be coordinated with the work of other Sections to assure the steady progress of all the work of the Contract. Obtain complete information regarding wall and ceiling mounted fixtures, grilles, registers, access panels, equipment, accessories, etc. to be used on the work from other trades. In no case shall work of other Sections be concealed until it has been inspected. 1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver all manufactured materials to site in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and brand names, type of material, and contents. B. Store materials in interior spaces, above floors, under cover, away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces, and with good ventilation. C Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces. Protect metal corner beads, casing beads, and trim from being bent or damaged. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials shall be manufactured by Gold Bond Building Products, United States Gypsum Co., Georgia-Pacific Co. B. Cement board fiberglas reinforced lightweight concrete panel "Wonder Board" by Modulars, Inc., Hamilton, OH or "Durock" by USG Industries, Chicago, IL. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Ceiling Suspension System: Shall be a complete, mechanical suspension system, conforming to ASTM C 645, consisting of cold-rolled steel channel main runners, screwable steel furring channels, hangers, and anchors, and all required clips and other components, required for complete installation. 1. Hanger anchors shall be of type suitable for each of project conditions, and of sufficient capacity (not less than 150 lb. live load each) for purpose intended. APRIL 1995 09250-3 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.0 3 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 36 Gypsum Wallboard C 475 Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction C 645 Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Boards C 646 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Light- Gauge Steel Studs C 754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, and Water-Resistant Backing Board C 840 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board C 893 Type G Steel Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Gypsum Board C 894 Type W Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Wood Framing C 919 Sealants in Acoustical Applications C 954 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84-mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84-mm) in Thickness B. All products used in the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Furnish complete shop drawings and product cuts of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction and installation, and sizes, gauges, configurations, and connections of all components. Confirm on shop drawings that deflection will not exceed L/360 of length. APRIL 1995 09250-2 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Fumish and install gypsum drywall work, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to: 1. Steel suspension systems for interior gypsum wallboard ceilings. 2. Screwable steel stud interior partition framing. 3. Screwable steel stud framed and furred enclosures at columns and beams. 4. Rated fire walls and shaft-wall construction at vertical chases and at mechanical shafts where indicated. 5. Blockings and attachments for fixture supports on exterior and interior walls. 6. Gypsum wallboard finishes for interior ceilings, walls, partitions, ceiling edgings, soffits, interior skylight wells, column enclosures, beam enclosures, etc. 7. Acoustical sealing and acoustical insulation of gypsum wallboard finishes at steel stud framed partitions and furrings where indicated. 8. Other gypsum drywall work called for on the Drawings or reasonably required to complete the Project intent. 9. Install access panels required in gypsum drywall work. 10. The drywall contractor must provide all required cranes and lifts. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Wood blocking, furring, grounds, etc., except plumbing fixture support blocking: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. B. Access doors: Section 08305, ACCESS DOORS. C. Resilient base: Section 09678, RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES. D. Painting: Section 09900, PAINTING. E. Wood trim: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY. F. Curved plaster ceilings: Section 09200, PLASTERING WORK. G. Comer guards: Section 10100, SPECIALITIES -* APRIL 1995 09250-1 GYPSUM DRYWALL LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09215 VENEER PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide veneer plaster over gypsum board for walls and ceilings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. One coat veneer plaster: ASTM C 587, Imperial Finish, U. S. Gypsum or approved equal. B. Two coat veneer plaster: ASTM C 587, Imperial Basecoat and imperial Finish, U. S. Gypsum or approved equal. C. Gypsum board for veneer plaster: ASTM C 588, 5/8" thick regular, fire- resistant, and foil-backed types as required; U. S. Gypsum, Gold Bond Div. National Gypsum, Domtar Gypsum or approved equal. D. Gypsum board for multiple layer applications: ASTM C 588, 5/8" gypsum base or ASTM C 442 backing board, regular, fire resistant, and foil-backed types as required; U. S. Gypsum, Gold Bond Div. National Gypsum, Domtar Gypsum or approved equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 754, ASTM C 844, ASTM C 843 and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Maintain environmental conditions within the limits prescribed by manufacturer. B. Machine mix plaster and trowel on to provide very smooth and dense finish surface, except as otherwise indicated. Continue finish behind furniture, casework and similar removeable items; finish may be omitted from permanently concealed surfaces. C. Remove spillage from adjoining work and protect plaster work from damage. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09215-1 VENEER PLASTER LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 5. Water: Potable, clean and free from deleterious materials. 6. Bonding Agent: Aqueous resinous emulsion, "PlasterWeld" by Larson Co., or equivalent by Silibond Co., or W.R. Grace Co. 7. Metal Lath: Self-furring 3.4 lb. diamond mesh. C Delivery and Storage of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered to site in original packages or containers bearing manufacturer's names and brand names and stored to protect from damage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Work shall conform to the printed specifications and standards of the manufacturer, the Metal Lath Institute, and the above referenced standards. B. Gypsum Plaster Work 1. Plaster Type: Shall be smooth-trowelled gypsum-lime plaster finish applied over a single double-back gypsum-sand base coat applied to back-up material to which a continuous application of bonding agent or metal lath, as appropriate, has been applied. 3.4 lb. diamond mesh metal lath shall be used where insufficient back-up surface is available. 2. Patching of existing plaster to remain shall be done with best workmanship and with careful attention given to matching appearance of new work to the existing work and to make joinings between new and existing work as imperceptible as possible in the finished work. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 09200-2 PLASTERING WORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 09200 PLASTERING WORK PART 1 GENERAL '1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Scope: Furnish all materials and install all lathing and plastering work and related items, to complete the work, as indicated. Include: 1. Patching of defects in existing gypsum plaster surfaces which presently exist or are caused by work of this Contract. 2. Plaster surfaces as indicted on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Demolition work: Section 02072, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING B. Gypsum drywall ceilings: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all drawings and all other sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Association Standards and Quality: Specification Standards ANSI A42.1 and A42.2 shall apply to the work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be by U.S. Gypsum Co., National Gypsum Co., or equal approved by the Architect. B. Gypsum Plastering Materials: 1. Pressure-hydrated Finishing Lime: ASTM C206, Type D. 2. Gypsum Cement Plaster: ASTM C28. 3. Gypsum Gauging Plaster: ASTM C28. 4. Sand: ASTM C35. APRIL 1995 09200-1 PLASTERING WORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION c. Flush mounted unframed mirrors shall be 1/4 inch thick mirror quality glass with a copper protected silver coating. The copper shall be coated with mirror backing paint, baked on. Adhesives shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the glass for the conditions of installation. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glazing Sealant: Shall be a one-part, liquid-polymer, acrylic-based sealant. B. Glazing compound shall be elastic glazing compound meeting Fed. Spec. TT-G-00410c. C Glazing tape shall be polyisobutylene or polybutene tape, flat or tapered configuration as required by profile of glazing stop, 1/8 in. minimum thickness. D. Setting blocks, spacers and setting glides shall be made of resilient neoprene, with 70-90 durometer for setting blocks and 40-50 durometer for spacers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 All glazing work shall conform to the manufacturer's printed instructions, the standards of the Flat Glass Manufacturers Association "Glazing Manual", and with details on the Drawings. 3.02 Fumish tempered glass which has been fully tempered after cutting to finish size to achieve a flexural strength of 4 times normal glass strength. Provide all tempered glass free of visually exposed tongue marks and oil canning. 3.03 Set exterior glass by heel bead method, using glazing tape on the interior stop, a heel bead of glazing sealant, and glazing sealant on the exterior stop. Set interior glass by conventional stop bead glazing method, using glazing compound on both stops, except at tempered glass and wired-glass substitute glazing tapes and/or glazing sealant on both stops. 3.04 Mirrors shall be flush mounted with adhesive, with adjacent edges closely butted, according to manufacturer's printed recommendations. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 08800-2 GLASS AND GLAZING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION ,. SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish all labor and materials to complete all glass and glazing work as indicated. Include, but do not limit to: 1. Glazing of interior doors with fixed lites. 2. Glazing for interior frames. 3. Mirrors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Steel doors: Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Wood windows: Section 08610, WOOD WINDOWS. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of all glass and glazing items to Architect for approval. B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work under this Section to Architect for approval, including engineer calculations for interior structural glass screen, glazing channels and support channels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS A. Glass shall be of thickness and quality specified herein, and shall conform to Fed. Spec. DD-G-45la and DD-G-001403. 1. Glass Schedule: Exterior and interior glass shall be of types indicated on the Drawings and specified as follows. All glass shall conform to all federal, state, and local safety glazing requirements. a. Glass for general use shall be 1/4 in. thick clear wire-glass (where required by governing code) and clear float glass at other locations, flat tempered where required to comply with safety glazing requirements. b. Curtainwall, door and window insulating glass shall be 1 inch thick and shall consist of 1/4 inch thick tempered glass sheets, metal tubing spaced and double hermetically sealed to form a double glazed panel. The spacer shall be filled with a moisture absorbing desiccant. Both lites shall be clear glass. APRIL 1995 08800-1 GLASS AND GLAZING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Hardware shall be attached and placed by skilled mechanics and shall be fitted and adjusted accurately. Install hardware on doors and frames at Aft, locations conforming to ANSI and NAHM standards, and DHI "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware." B. Install metal thresholds, weatherstripping, sound seals, etc., furnished as part of finish hardware, in strict accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and with approved Submittals. Set exterior thresholds in beds of sealant provided under Section 07900, SEALANTS. 3.02 COMPLETION AND CONTINUED MAINTENANCE A. Before completion of work of this Section, inspect work with Architect and adjust and correct work to leave operating parts in perfect operating condition, jointing to adjacent materials tight, surfaces without blemishes or stains, work properly executed and complete, and defects and damaged work replaced is corrected. B. Provide services of hardware manufacturer's representative to inspect hardware six months after Substantial Completion of Project. Readjust and restore hardware. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 08710-10 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION c. Exit device d. Electric strike e. Card reader w power supply f. Security alarm g. Kickplates Set #2 a. Butts. b. Closer c. Exit device d. Kickplates Set #3 a. Butts. b. Lockset (See 2.03B for model #s) Set #4 a. Butts. b. Push/Pull c. Closer d. Kickplates Set #5 a. Butts. b. Lockset c. Closer d. 2 Kick plates PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION APRIL 1995 08710-9 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.15 HANDICAPPED ASSIST DEVICES A. Where indicated provide and install handicapped assist device complete with all elements to provide service as intended. Coordinate with all other hardware, existing field conditions, etc. B. Door assist system to be Beasam Model #150 Automatic Door Opening Mechanism (W. J. Flynn Company, Woburn MA). C System to have the following features: NA 2.16 ALARM DEVICES FOR DOOR SECURITY A. Where alarm device is specified at exit doors with Von Duprin exit devices provide a Von Duprin Monitor Strike Device at door latch. B. Provide Von Duprin head mounted magnetic door position monitor switch for all alarmed doors. C Wire alarms so that either device, if both are provided, registers alarm. D. Provide Power supply as required for specified device. 2.17 CARD READING DEVICES (Supplied and installed by Owner) A. Card Readers to be "Synergistics" as supplied by A.L.Purington Corporation (508) 754-2618. . B. Control Panel to be as supplied by A.L Purington Corp. for above indicated low use. 2.18 POWER SUPPLY FOR DOOR SYSTEMS A. Power Supply device to be MPB 851 by Von Duprin. 2.19 ELECTRIC STRIDES A. Strikes to be Von Duprin Series 6000 compatible with latching hardware and power device for door system. 2.20 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Refer to the Door Schedule on the Contract Drawings for general functions and locations of finish hardware to be furnished hereunder for doors and frames. B. Hardware Sets Schedule: Set #1 a. Butts b. Closer APRIL 1995 08710-8 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Furnish specified manufacturer's 8-inch high (16-inches high for handicapped doors and 32-inches high for kitchen doors) kick plates for doors where so indicated, of widths as determined by door width; 2 inches LWOD for single doors, and one inch LWOD for pairs of doors. C. Items are to be solid in material specified. No plated products will be accepted. 2.09 DOOR PULLS A. Furnish Burns No. 26B surface pulls for doors where so indicated. 2.10 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS A. Manual flush bolts: Ives No. 458B. B. Automatic flush bolts for hollow metal doors: Ives No. 459B. C Automatic flush bolts for wood doors: Ives No. 456B. D. Coordinators: Ives 900 Series. 2.11 ROLLER LATCHES A. Furnish Glynn-Johnson No. GJ-30 roller latches for doors where so indicated. 2.12 SILENCERS A. Furnish Ives No. 20 silencers for all interior pressed steel door frames, at a rate of 3 silencers per single door, and 2 per pair of doors. 2.13 THRESHOLDS A. Furnish and install thresholds as indicated on documents suitable for purpose and conditions indicated. B. Finish of thresholds to be mill finish aluminum unless otherwise indicated. C Thresholds shall meet requirements of ADA and local Accessibility codes. 2.14 SOUND GASKFTING AT DOORS A. Where indicated on drawings or schedules, provide sound gasketing at all edges of doors. B. For door jambs and heads, provide Zero Model #770 adjustable sound sealing system. C At door sills provide Zero Model #362 automatic door bottom in wood doors and Model #360 in metal doors. APRIL 1995 08710-7 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.04 KEYING AND KEY CONTROL A. Grand Master Key all locks to the existing lock system, as directed by the Architect and/or the Owner. B. Furnish four (4) Grand Master Keys and four (4) Master Keys each set. Deliver all master keys as directed. C Furnish three (3) change keys for each locking device. D. Construction Masterkey all cylinders. Furnish twelve (12) Construction Master Keys. 2.05 CLOSERS A. Furnish closers for all doors where so indicated, with drop plates and accessories as required, for mounting locations on door face which will be least frequently exposed to view. Refer to the Door Schedule on the drawings for degrees of opening for each door requiring closers. B. Closers for exterior out swinging doors: LCN Series 4111 or 4110 w/90 deg. stop. C Closers for interior doors, except as otherwise indicated: LCN Series 4111 or 4110 w/ Cush-N-Stop holdc►• on non-fire-rated doors only.. 2.06 EXIT DEVICES AW A. Refer to the Door Schedule on the Drawings for locations of doors requiring exit devices. B. Exit devices for pairs of doors: Von Duprin 99 Series. Finish color to be selected by Architect. C Exit hardware for single doors shall be Von Duprin Series to match double doors with dogging. Finish color to be selected by Architect. 2.07 STOPS AND STAYS A. Furnish a stop or stay for each door and each leaf of a pair of doors. Provide floor stops for all locations, except where conditions do not permit proper installation of same; in such cases provide overhead stays. B. Determine height of each floor stop by the various conditions, such as undercut doors, thresholds, carpeting, and other floor coverings. Where carpeting occurs, furnish a base riser where so required. D. Overhead stays: Corbin Series 775. 2.08 PUSH PLATES AND KICK PLATES A. Furnish specified manufacturer's 16 by 5 inch push plates for doors where so indicated. APRIL 1995 08710-6 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 15. Astragals: Pemko, Therm-L-Brush 16. Silencers Ives 17. Handicapped assist devices: Beasam D. Provide thru bolts with finish washers wherever possible to connect to door hardware (closers, pulls, hinges, exit devices). 2.02 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Furnish 2 hinges or pivots per door, for heights up to and including 60 inches; and an additional hinge or pivot for each additional 30 inches, or fraction thereof, in height of the door. B. Furnish Stanley Lifespan 500 continuous hinges cut full length for all as indicated on schedule. C Furnish Stanley CB 1900 Series, except as otherwise noted, for all interior doors, and sized as follows: Door Thickness Door Width Hinge Weight Hinge Height 1-3/8 inches All widths Plain bearing 4-1/2 inches 1-2/4 inches 39 inches and less Regular weight 4-1/2 inches 1-2/4 inches More than 39 inches Extra heavy 4-1/2 inches D. Determine hinge widths by the specific trim condition. E. All exterior doors shall have pivot hinges. 2.03 LOCKSEtS AND LATCHSETS A. Refer to the Door Schedule and the drawings for intended lock functions. Submit lock functions to Owner for final approval. B. Furnish Corbin ML2200 (6PIN, L4 Keyway) locksets for all doors, except as otherwise noted below: • Donn room locksets ML2210 • Exterior doors ML2265 • Closet doors ML2257, DL4000 C Furnish 2-3/4 inch backset locks and latches, with wrought box strikes. D. Furnish abrasive type textured strip behind levers at all mechanical rooms, elevator machine room, electrical rooms, and other hazardous areas for identification of hazard by handicapped.. E. Furnish cylinder locks, only, for overhead doors, entrance doors and *. screens. APRIL 1995 08710-5 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.11 GUARANTEE A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS and modifications to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH HARDWARE - GENERAL A. Finish and Base Material Designations: Unless otherwise indicated, all hardware shall have US4 finish. Door closers shall be sprayed finish to match hardware. B. Hardware Mounting Heights: DHI "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware", except as otherwise indicated. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Numbers used in preparation of this Section have been taken from the following manufacturer's catalogues, or equal as approved by Architect. 1. Butts and hinges: Stanley 2. Locksets, latchsets and cylinders Corbin Russwin 3. Exit devices Von Duprin 4. Closers: LCN 5. Push-pull bar assemblies: Burns 6. Pulls: Burns 7. Protection plates: Burns 8. Floor stops: Ives 9. Overhead stops: Ives 10. Flush bolts: Ives 11. Coordinators: Ives 12. Roller latches: Glynn Johnson 13. Gasketing: Zero 14. Thresholds: Pemko APRIL 1995 08710-4 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION POW B. Each hardware item shall have the required screws, bolts, and fastenings necessary for proper installation and shall be wrapped in the same package as the hardware item for which it is intended, and shall match finish of hardware with which to be used. 1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of hardware shall be made to the Project by the Hardware Supplier in accordance with the instructions of the Contractor. B. Provide adequate locked storage space with shelving for the hardware, and shall be responsible for all items of hardware after receipt from the Supplier, and shall replace all hardware lost or damaged after delivery and receipt. C Furnish receipts for hardware and accessory items to Owner. 1.09 MATERIALS AND QUALITY A. Work of this Section shall conform to governing laws and building codes. B. Hardware shall be of the grade of solid metal entirely free from imperfections in manufacture and finish. C Qualities, weights, and sizes given herein are the minimum that will be accepted. It is the responsibility of the Hardware Supplier to supply the specified size and weight of hardware and the proper function of hardware in each case and to provide the proper UL approved hardware at UL labeled fire-rated doors. D. To the fullest extent possible, each of the following items shall be the product of one manufacturer for the entire project: 1. Locksets and lockset trim. 2. Butts. 3. Door closers. 1.10 HANDICAPPED REQUIREMENTS A. Ensure that the various items of hardware are of a design and function to permit exterior doors to be opened with a maximum pressure of fifteen (15) pounds, and interior doors to be opened with a maximum pressure of ten (10) pounds. B. Equip doors, opening into hazardous areas from path of travel, with knurled knobs or handles, to provide tactile warning for the visually handicapped. C Ensure that all hardware conforms to the handicapped requirements of the Architectural Barriers Board having jurisdiction and the ADA, for use *. in public buildings. APRIL 1995 08710-3 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier shall have in his employ a member of the American Society of Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for the complete requirements of this Project. B. Hardware installation shall conform to Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) published recommendations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit six copies of a complete hardware schedule, as proposed, within ten days after award of contract for approval by the Architect. Hardware schedule shall be in vertical format and shall list each door opening throughout the Project, its size and materials, fire labeling (if any) and other relevant information. Submit therewith complete catalog cuts and descriptive data of items that differ from products specifically scheduled herein. Formal details of the hardware shall be subject to Architect's approval. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete catalog cuts including as descriptive data, UL listings, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. C Samples: Submit to the Architect for approval, a complete line of samples as directed by the Architect. Samples shall be plainly marked giving hardware number used in this Specification, the manufacturer's numbers, types and sizes. The Architect will deliver approved samples to the Project site to be stored. Samples will remain with the Architect until delivery of all hardware to the Project is complete, after which time they will be turned over to the Contractor for incorporation into the work. 1.06 REVIEW AND TEMPLATES A. Hardware Supplier shall review hardware functions with the Architect at time of submission of the hardware schedules to ensure the appropriateness of each of the hardware functions. B. Keying arrangement: Prior to ordering keys for hardware to be furnished hereunder, submit a complete keying arrangement to the Architect, for transmittal to, and approval by, the Owner. C Hardware Supplier shall furnish all templates required by all Subcontractors on the project at such times and in such quantities as requested. 1.07 PACKING AND MARKING A. Hardware shall be packaged for delivery to the site in packages legibly marked with labels indicating the manufacturers' numbers, types, sizes, and Hardware Schedule reference number. APRIL 1995 08710-2 FINISH HARDWARE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install finish hardware for interior and exterior doors except as specified otherwise, including related items and services, as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. Furnish hardware schedules and templates as required for fabrication of doors and frames under other Sections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Rough and finish hardware, under other appropriate Sections. Specific items of finish hardware and accessories specified to be provided under other Sections including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Hardware for architectural woodwork. `V, 2. Hardware for miscellaneous building specialties. 3. Hardware for various equipment items. 4. Hardware for mechanical and electrical equipment. B. Wood thresholds: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY. C. Steel doors and frames: Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. D. Magnetic holder, card readers, door openers and sensors: Section 16100, ELECTRICAL. E. Finish painting for shop primed items: Section 09900, PAINTING. F. Coiling door hardware: Section 08330, COILING DOORS AND GRILLES. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, Tall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. APRIL 1995 08710-1 FINISH HARDWARE 3.01 INS'T'ALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. WINDOW SCHEDULE: AO R.O. 36 1/4!' X 5'-2" © HOPPER R.O. 12 1/4!' X 28 1/4!' © R.O. 36 1/4" X 3'-10" OSPECIAL © DORMERS R.O. 3'-0" X 2'-0" EO R.O. 16 1/4" X 5'-2" OR.O. 36 1/4" X 4'-2" © SPECIAL © SOUTH CABLE R.O. 5'-0" X 8'-0" HO R.O. 3'-3/4' X 8'-3 3/4" (O R.O. 5'-7 3/4" X 1 '-8 3/4' MARCH 1995 08610-2 WOODWIIWWS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 08610-WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide wood windows. 1. Individual units set in conventional wall construction. B. Wood window types: 1. Double-Hung Windows 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data, mock-ups, warranty, test reports, maintenance data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Performance: Comply with NWWDA I.S.4. for grade of window required. 1. Heavy Duty Commercial PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Units: NWWDA I.S.4. windows for application required; compression and sliding type weatherstripping and hardware. B. Sash and Frames: 1. Aluminum-clad wood units: Sheet and extruded aluminum cladding with baked-on acrylic white coating; Pella Co. or Eagle Window Company. 2. Glazing: Glazing shall be clear float glass, ASTM-C1036, system shall be 5/8" insulating glass with air space. 3. Screens: For each operable window, provide aluminum framed screens with fiberglass insect screening; removeable for cleaning. Screening shall conform to ANSI-SMA-1004 and be 18/16 mesh, supplied complete with all hardware. PART 3 -EXECUTION MARCH 1995 08610-1 WOOD WINDOWS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.05 GUARAN'T'EE A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS AMWA and MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors shall be flush-type, 16 g. minimum thickness for frame and 14 gauge for panel, 22 in. X 22 in. and 24 in. X 36 in., sizes as indicated specially designed for each type of wall and ceiling finish and construction with which used, with factory-applied prime finish, as manufactured by Inryco/Milcor Inc., Karp Associates Inc., C.E. Sparrow Company, Inc., or equal approved by Architect. Refer to Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Drawings for locations, sizes, and materials with which used. 1. Where installed at fire-rated walls or ceilings, access doors shall be of fire-resistive construction and shall bear the proper U.L. label. 2. Where installed in gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, access doors shall be of the type which will accept adhesive-mounted gypsum board flush with surrounding surfaces. Gypsum board will be provided under Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL. PART 3 EXEC LMON 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Metal access doors shall be installed in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. It shall be the responsibility of the access panel installer to verify the required fire rating of the panel before installation. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 08305-2 ACCESS DOORS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, deliver to Project site, unload in designated storage area, and where specifically called out, install access doors as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Where metal access doors and Panels are called for on the Drawings, and are required on the project for access to valves, damper controls, pipes, conduits, switches, regulators, etc., they shall be furnished under this Section to the proper trades for building into the work, except that any access panels specifically specified under the Mechanical or Electrical Sections of the Specifications to be provided as work of those trades are excluded from the work of this Section. Doors provided under the mechanical or electrical sections shall meet the product requirements of this section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL. B. Access panels for mechanical and electrical systems: All Division 15 Sections and Section 16100, ELECTRICAL. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing all pertinent details of construction, finish and installation. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data required for complete product and product use information. G Do not order materials or begin fabrication or installation work until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. APRIL 1995 08305-1 ACCESS DOORS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION G Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper -took operating conditions. 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Remove all cartons and debris as the work progresses and leave work areas in broom clean condition at completion of the work of this Section. 3.0 8 COMPLETION A. Before completion of Work of this Section, inspect work in the company of the Architect adjustments and corrections to work leaving all operating parts in perfect operating condition, all jointing to adjacent material tight, all surfaces without blemishes or stains, all work properly executed and complete, and all defects and damaged work replaced or corrected. B. Rehang or replace doors that cannot be made to operate properly, as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 08210-5 WOODDOORS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.02 COORDINATION A. Examine steel door frame installations. Verify that frames meet tolerances and other requirements of wood door manufacturer. B. Submit list of conditions detrimental to wood door installation and do not begin door installation until such conditions are corrected. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Condition doors to ambient temperature and humidity at point of installation before hanging. B. Supervise sealing of wood doors in field under Section 09900, PAINTING. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Installations shall conform with approved submittals, including manufacturer's published instructions, and to AWI Standards. B. Cut wood doors to fit frames accurately, leaving uniform clearance at heads and jambs and uniform bevels. Do not cut rails and stiles beyond manufacturer's specified limits. Undercut as required to clear finish materials, fit thresholds, etc., including correct clearance for carpeting. C Hang doors plumb and true. Apply door hardware so that opening and closing movement of doors is smooth and free. D. After fitting, remove doors to permit sealing of tops, bottoms, and edges under Section 09900, PAINTING, then re-hand and leave in proper working conditions, without binding, sticking, or warping. E. Clearances for fire-rated doors shall conform to NFPA 80. 3.05 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Field painting and finishing will be provided under Section 09900, PAINTING. Ensure that doors are primed or sealed before installation. Paint or seal coats shall be dry before items are installed. B. Finish work shall be sandpapered at field joints and where required by installation and shall be left in perfect condition for finishing under Section 09900, PAINTING. 3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air- drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. APRIL 1995 08210-4 WOOD'JCM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION installation. Doors shall be stored and hung in buildings that maintain a humidity range of between 30 and 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Interior flush-type mineral core fire-rated wood doors shall be as manufactured by K-D Frame and Door Corp., Steel Buck Corp., Pioneer Door Corp., Cal-Wood Door Div., or approved equal. B. Non-rated interior flush-type solid core wood doors shall be as manufactured by Weyerhauser Company; Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division; Algoma Hardwoods Inc.; Cal-Wood Doors Div. Timberland Industries, Inc.; or approved equal. C. Interior hollow core wood doors shall be manufactured by Morgan Woodwork, or approved equal. 2.02 WOODDOORS A. Mineral Core Flush Wood Fire-Rated Interior Doors: Shall be flush wood- faced mineral core doors, 1-3/4 in. thick, five ply, with crossbanding and face veneers bonded to both faces, of fire-rated construction. Doors shall have edge banding of high density, fire resistant, laminated wood fiber sheets of special laminated material (SLM). Adhesive for bonding veneers shall be waterproof resin glue. Provide blocking for hardware so that all screws fasten into hard-wood for their complete length. Furnish ' Underwriters' Label of indicated Class and Hour rating affixed to hinge jamb of each door. 1. Veneers for doors with transparent natural finish: Plain, sliced, wood, Stain Grade, Premium Grade. 2. Guarantee: Mineral core flush doors shall be covered by manufacturer's standard lifetime guarantee (interior), covering all defects in materials and workmanship, including warping, for the life of the original installation. B. New wood doors to match existing shall be exact reproductions of existing doors in all respects. Doors shall also meet requirements of AWI Quality Standards "Custom Grade". Finish shall match approved wood finish sample for adjacent wood trim. An alternate to refinish the existing doors will be entertained by the Owner at the contractor's option. Typical door thickness to be 1 3/4" thick, closet doors to be 1 1/4" thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver wood doors to Project site. Protect during shipment to prevent damage. Store in interior areas fully protected from moisture and damage. APRIL 1995 08210-3 WOODDOORS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Samples: If required by Architect, submit cutaway door samples to Architect for approval showing core construction, cross banding, and face veneer of each door type. 1. For transparent finished doors submit samples of door faces representing typical range of color and gain. Also submit strips of solid wood 3 in. wide by 12 in. long of species to be used for exposed edges, trim, and other solid wood components. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, complete installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. C. Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit certification that fabricator of door frames has been engaged regularly in fabrication and installation of door frames of types and quality specified for at least five years. List similar successful installations in place for at least two years. 1.07 FIRE-RATING REQUIREMENTS A. Doors indicated or scheduled on the Drawings to receive Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label shall bear a UL label of Class and hour-rating scheduled on the Drawings. B. Fire-rated doors shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 80. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and Document 00810, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Include, but do not limit to, standard manufacturer's guarantees specified under product descriptions. 1.09 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Doors shall be properly packaged by manufacturer and fully protected during shipment, unloading, and storage. Comply with requirements of NWMA Ref. 1. B. Doors shall not be delivered to the job site until the building thoroughly dried out. Doors shall be stored flat, above floors, in dry area(s) until APRIL 1995 08210-2 WOODDOORS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 08210 AOk WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install wood doors and related items, as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Steel doors and frames, including metal frames for wood doors: Section 08110,STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. B. Glass vision panels: Section 08800, GLASS AND GLAZING. C. Finish hardware and templates: Section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE. D. Painting and finishing of doors in field: Section 09900, PAINTING. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute/National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NWMA): I.S. 1 Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors B. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Standards Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80 Standard For Fire Doors and Windows D. National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA): Ref. 1 How To Store, Handle, Finish, Install and Maintain Wood Doors 1.05 SUBMITTALS APRIL 1995 08210-1 WOODDOORS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver steel doors, frames, and related items to project site and store in interior areas fully protected from moisture an damage. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Buckling and warping of face sheets shall not exceed 1/16 in. in any direction. B. Formed members shall be straight and true with mitered joints, and properly aligned. C Welded joints shall be dressed smooth to hide joint. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Set frames in proper position properly plumbed, and aligned. 1. Hang doors plumb and true, and apply door hardware so that opening and closing movement of doors is smooth and free. B. Frame and door installations shall conform to SDI 105. Fire rated door and frame assemblies shall conform to NFPA 80 and SDI 118. C Place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. ` D. Provide a minimum of three wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. 3.04 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Finish painting shall be provided under Section 09900, PAINTING. Prime doors and frames as specified in Part 2 of this Section. B. Provide field touch-up as necessary. 3.05 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. Before completion of work of this Section, inspect work in company of Architect and make adjustments and corrections to work as necessary to leave operating parts in perfect operating condition, jointing to adjacent material tight, surfaces without blemishes or stains, work properly executed and complete, and defects and damaged work replaced or corrected. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 08110-6 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION anchors per jamb. One additional anchor shall be added per jamb for each additional 30 in. in height, or part thereof. At UL labeled frames, wall "^!^ anchors shall conform to requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. I. Floor Anchors: 1. Provide concealed 12 ga. clip-angle floor anchor at each frame jamb and equivalent concealed floor anchor at each mullion. Floor anchors at jambs in areas to receive subsequent floor fill or setting beds shall be adjustable type; others shall be solidly welded to the jambs. 2. At UL labeled frames, floor anchors shall conform to requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. J. Workmanship: The finished frames shall be strong and rigid, with neatly formed members, free from dents, buckling, warping, and other defects and with all welded joints on exposed surfaces dressed smooth and flush. 2.04 PROVISIONS FOR HARDWARE A. Door and frames shall be mortised, reinforced, punched, drilled; and tapped at factory to receive all finish hardware in accordance with templates provided by Finish Hardware Supplier under Section -08710, FINISH HARDWARE. All such preparation shall conform to requirements set forth in the above-listed reference standards. B. Each door frame shall be punched to receive rubber silencers; three on ,,W latch side of each single door frame and two at head of each door pair frame. C Provide for acoustical gasketing as indicated on drawings. 2.05 SHOP FINISH A. After fabrication, all metal shall be dressed smooth, degreased and thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, oil, and other impurities. All exposed surfaces of ungalvanized steel shall be hot-phosphate coated to condition the surface of the metal to resist and inhibit corrosion and provide positive paint adhesion. Galvanized sheet metal surfaces shall have been given hot- phosphate treatment at the mill, as previously specified,and shall be additionally treated as required to assure positive paint adhesion. All exposed surfaces shall be given a dip or spray coat of baked-on, rust- inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc chromate, or synthetic resin primer applied to all exposed surfaces, including backs of frames, ready to receive finish painting under Section 09900, PAINTING. 2.0 6 KITCHEN DOORS AND FRAMES A. All doors and frames in kitchen and back-of-counter areas in servery shall be galvanized according to the provisions of this specification. PART 3 EXECUTION APRIL 1995 08110-5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION corrugated steel, spot-welded to face sheets or manufacturer's standard honey comb cores. D. Hollow portions of doors shall be filled with mineral rock wool or other thermal and sound-deadening insulation, UL approved "U" factor of exterior doors shall be 0.24 or better, tested in accordance with ASTM C 236. E. Lock edges of stiles shall be beveled 1/8 in. in 2 in. Bottom shall be formed as required to properly fit thresholds, magnetic type weatherstripping, finish floor materials, etc. F. Workmanship: The finished doors shall be strong and rigid, with neatly formed members, free from dents, buckling, warping, weld-spots, and other defects, and with all welded joints dressed smooth and flush. 2.03 STEEL FRAMES A. Materials: 1. Sheet metal for fabrication of all exterior frames and frames indicated to be installed in loading dock, kitchen, and dishwashing areas shall be hot-dip galvanized, coating weight 0.06 oz. per sq. ft. per side, conforming to ASTM A 525 and A 526 and hot-phosphate, mill-treated (to assure positive paint adhesion) cold-rolled carbon sheet steel. 2. Sheet metal shall be of prime quality, free of rust, scale, pitting, and _-- surface defects. B. Steel frames shall be sizes and profile indicated on the Drawings. Steel for frame shall be 16 ga. C Frames for steel doors shall be shop assembled, except where size requires field assembly. Joints shall be closed tight, continuously welded and then ground smooth on exposed surfaces. D. Provide all internal formed steel head reinforcement to ensure absolute rigidity of frame assemblies. E. Provide proper-sized, removable, rectangular-profile 18 ga. steel glazing beads at glazed openings,and secured in place with oval head, Phillips head screws at comers and not farther than 9 in. on center between. Dimple holes for flush fitting of screw heads. F. Door frames to be equipped at factory with removeable spreader for shipping. G. Frames to be installed in steel stud partitions shall be treated on concealed surfaces with sound-deadening, reinforcing mastic as recommended by manufacturer and conforming to UL requirements. H. Wall anchors: Provide concealed metal wall anchors appropriate for adjoining wall (drywall or masonry as required) construction. Wall OW anchors shall be nonremovable, welded-on, and of same material and gauge as frame. Frames 7 ft.6 in. in height and less shall be provided with three APRIL 1995 08110-4 STE EL..DOORS AND FRAMES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION C. Do not order materials or begin fabrication of work of this Section until AWN, Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. 1.07 FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS A. Doors indicated to receive Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label shall bear the UL label of Class and hour-rating scheduled. Each frame to receive a UL labeled door and frames for fire-rated fixed-glass partitions shall bear UL frame label. B. Fire-rated doors and frames shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 80 and shall have been tested, listed, or labeled in accordance with ASTM A 152 by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.0 8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Doors, frames, and related items shall be properly packaged and protected during shipment, handling, and storage to prevent damage. B. Materials shall be stored indoors or under cover, on raised platforms, fully . protected from dirt and moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flush steel doors and frames shall be manufactured by Williamsburg Steel Products, Pioneer Door Co., or approved equal. Doors shall be products of single manufacturer. 2.02 FLUSH STEEL DOORS A. Material: 1. Sheet metal for fabrication of all exterior doors and doors indicated to be installed in loading dock, kitchen and dishwash ing areas shall be hot-dipped galvanized, coating weight 0.06 oz. per sq. ft. per side, conforming to ASTM A 525 and A 526 and hot-phosphate, mill-treated to ensure positive paint adhesion, cold-rolled carbon sheet steel. 2. Sheet metal shall be prime quality, free of rust, scale, pitting, and surface defects. B. Flush doors shall be 1-3/4 in. thick, sizes as indicated, custom fabricated to two outer 18 ga. steel sheets with edges welded and finished flush. Vertical edges shall be formed of face sheets. Top and bottom edges shall be reinforced with internal 14 ga. steel channels, closed flush at heads for exterior doors only. Seams or joints will not be permitted on door faces or edges. Edge joints will be allowed on interior doors. C. Door shall have internal reinforcing consisting of continuous 18 ga. vertical steel channels or "zees", 6 in. on center, or continuous 26 ga. ° APRIL 1995 08110-3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A 568 General Requirements for Steel, Carbon and High Strength Low-Alloy Hot-Rolled Sheet, Hot-Rolled Strip, and Cold-Rolled Sheet A 569 Steel Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality C 236 Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box E 152 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies C Steel Door Institute (SDI): 100 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 105 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 118 Base Fire Door Requirements D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to governing laws and building code, and the following trade standards: 1. ANSI A115.1 through A115.14, as applicable. 2. SDI 100, SDI 105, and SDI 118. 3. NFPA 80. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings of work of this Section to Architect for approval, showing profiles and gauges of metal, construction details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions of openings, details of construction, UL label requirements, provisions for finish hardware, glazing conditions, shop finish, and other pertinent information. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on the Contract Drawings. 2. Indicate location of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete specifications, test report data, installation instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. APRIL 1995 08110-2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install steel doors, glass side lights, and frames and related items as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Finish hardware and templates, including weatherstripping: Section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE. B. Finish field painting: Section 09900, PAINTING. C. Grouting of frames: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY. D. Glass side lights and vision panels: Section 08800, GLASS AND GLAZING. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. Awk B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A 115.1 Series on Door and Frame Prcparation (A115.1 thru A115.17) *123.1 Nomenclature for Steel Doors and Steel Door Frames *151.1 Performance Test for Standard Steel Doors, Frames, Anchors, Hinge Reinforcings and Exit Device Reinforcings B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 366 Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality A 525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process A 526 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality APRIL 1995 08110-1 STEEL.DOORS AND FRAMES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1. Sealed joint shall be left with a uniform, slightly concave profile, free from gaps, cracks, and entrapped air. 2. Joints shall be filled completely to within 1/16 in. of finished surface. 3. Where required, light tooling of the joint can be performed immediately after sealant application. E. Thresholds of exterior doors shall be set in full beds of exterior sealant, not less than 3/8 in. thick. At Contractor's option, a polybutene or polyisobutylene sealant by same manufacturer may be used at thresholds. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove smears from adjacent surfaces immediately, as the work progresses. Exercise particular care to prevent smearing or staining of surrounding surfaces which will be exposed in the finished work, and repair any damage done to same as result of this Work without additional cost to the Owner. B. Remove all cartons, debris, emptied containers, and tubes, etc., as the work progresses, and finally at completion of work of this Section. Legally dispose of the same off the site. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07900-6 SEALANTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1. Examine all joints to receive sealant prior to application, and notify the Architect in writing of all conditions detrimental to achieving wW positive, weathertight and air-tight seals. Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent until corrective work has been completed or waived. Start of work in any area without issuances of such notice shall constitute acceptance of conditions as correct to properly receive the work of this Section. 3. Preparation of joints shall conform to manufacturer's printed recommendations. Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be sound, clean, dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, and other foreign matter. Wire brush joints in concrete and masonry, and air-blow or vacuum clean. 3. Surfaces which have been given protective coatings and all those which contain oil or grease shall be thoroughly cleaned with xylol or MEK solvent, with due precautions taken to minimize hazards. 4. Prime all surfaces where and as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 5. Exterior joints shall be backed with joint backing material- to eliminate back bond. Where width of joint is 1/2 in. or less, prepare joint so depth of sealant bead is approximately equal to its width. Where width of joint exceeds 1/2 in., prepare joint so depth of sealant bead is approximately equal to 1/2 its width or 1/2 in., whichever is greater. 6. Backing of joints to receive interior sealant will not be required except where depth of joint exceeds width of joint, in which case it shall be backed to that depth by use of compressible foam, as above, or non-staining oakum. 3.02 GENERAL SEALANT APPLICATION A. Sealing of joints shall be scheduled for as long as possible a time following completion of concrete work. 1. Concrete work shall be thoroughly dried and cured prior to start of sealant application. B. Joints to be sealed shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed shall be applied to surfaces that will be sealed. Adjacent surfaces shall be suitably protected from staining and other damage during sealant application. Sealant shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, within three hours after primer application. C Primer and sealant shall be applied in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's written recommendations, using hard guns or pressure equipment. Temperauure of sealant and surfaces to be sealed shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. D. Sealant shall be forcibly gunned into the joint to obtain maximum bond to joint shoulders. APRIL 1995 07900-5 SEALANTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. At interior joints greater than 1/2 in. in width or subjected to periodic building movement, substitute exterior type sealant as specified above. 3. Where surrounding wall surfaces are to be unpainted, substitute exterior type sealant as specified above. B. Sealant for interior use at plumbing fixtures, showers, and other areas of high humidity shall be General Electric SCS 1702 Sanitary Sealant or approved equal. Silicone sealant shall be specifically formulated to resist growth of mold and mildew and shall meet requirements of Fed. Spec. TT-S- 001543A. C Acoustical Sealant: 1. Sealant for concealed applicatons shall be "BA-98 Acoustical Sealant," manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product manufactured by U.S. Gypsum co., National Gypsum Co., or approved equal. 2. Sealant for exposed applications shall be paintable "AC-20 Acrylic Latex Caulk," manufactured cy Pecora Chemical Corp., equivalent product manufactured by DAP or Gibson Homans Co., or approved equal. D. Primer for sealants shall be as recommended by manufacturer for each specific material. AOW 2.03 JOINT BACKING A. Joint backing for general use in joints in vertical surfaces shall be compressible, closed-cell, polyurethane foam, or a similar plastic foam recommended by manufacturer. B. Joint backing for general use at joints in horizontal surfaces shall consist of two rows of butyl rubber or neoprene foam rod in contact with one another, and each compressed to approximately 2/3 original width when in place. C All such materials shall not be of type which will bleed through sealant, discolor its surface, or produce other deleterious effects. In each instance, size shall be selected to provide compression to approximately 2/3 original width when io place. Profile of backing material shall be concave profile to the rear of the sealant, and shall be equipped with a bond-breaking film. PART 3 EXEC UIION 3.01 PREPARATION OF JOINTS TO RECEIVE SEALANT A. Unmess otherwise indicated, use of sealants shall conform to the following: ASTM C 790 for latex sealants and ASTM C 962 for other sealants. B. Preparation of Joints: APRIL 1995 07900-4- SEALANTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE-AND HANDLING A. Matesials under this Section shall be delivered to, and stored at, the job site in unbroken factory sealed containers with labels intact. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Furnish joint sealant manufacturer's written single-source performaoce warranty that joint sealant work will be free of defects related to workmanship or material deficiency gor five years from date of Substaotial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR SEALANTS A. Sealant for exterior horizontal joints shall be non-staining, two components polyurethane based sealant conforming to Ged. Spec. TT-S- 00227, Class A, with a Shore A Hardness of 30±5, or better. 1. Sealant shall be Type I (self-levgling), equal to Tremco THC-900, or approved equal. 2. Comor of sealants shall be selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard color chart. 3. Primer shall be thau recommended by the sealant manufacturer. AVA 4. Sealant and primer shall be products of the same manufacturer. B. Sealant for general use at exterior joints in vertical building surfaces shall be (1) two-part, low-modulus, polyurethane sealant, gun-grade, non- sagging type, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227, Type II, Class A, and to ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Sealant shall be equal to "Dymeric" manufactured by Tremco Mfg. Co., "Dynatrol II" manufactured by Pecora Corp., "Vulken 227" manufactured by Mameco International, or "Iso-Flex 2000" manufactured by H.S. Peterson Co., Inc. 1. Color(s) of sealant shall be manufacturer's standard color(s), as selected by Architect, to match, or contrast with adjacent materials. 2.02 INTERIOR SEALANT A. Sealant for general interior uses shall be paintable acrylic-latex sealant, conforming to ASTM C 834. Sealant shall be "AC-20 Acrylic- Latex", manufactured by Pecora Co. or equiwalent product manufactured by DAP or Gibson-Holman Co. 1. Color(s) of sealant shall be manufacturer's standard color(s) as selected by Architect to match or contrast with adjacent materials. APRIL 1995 07900-3 SEALANTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 790 Use of Latex Sealing Compounds C 834 Latex Sealing Compounds C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants C 962 Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants B. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): TT-S-00227 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glaziog in Buildings and Other Structures) 1.05 COMPATIBILITY A. Sealant and sealant joint backing materials selected shall be suitable for the use intended and compatible with the material with which they will be in contact. Compatibility of sealant and accessories shall be verified by the . sealant manugacturer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers' product data shall be submitted for each sealant and sealant material proposed. Product data shall include test results and shall be in conformance with refergnce applicable standards where standasds or testing requirements have been specified. B. Manufacturer's standard color chart of sealants shall be sucmitted for selection of colors. C Samples of the following shall be submitted for approval: Item Quantity and Size Joint Backer Two pieces, full size 4 in. length Sealant, each Cured sample of each color selected for the Architect type 2x2in. D. Furnish samples of any other materials of this Section requested by Architect for approval. Form of samples shall be as rgquested by the Architect. E. Do not order materials or begin installation until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. APRIL 1995 07900-2 SEALANTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07900 SEALANTS PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Caulk and seal joints as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Include, but do not limit to: 1. Sealing of expansion joints and control joints in exterior concrete. 2. Sealing of joints between perimeter of exterior door frames, window frames, skylights, and other items occurring in openings in exterior walls, and the surrounding construction, including bed sealing of thresholds. 3. Sealing and caulking of interior perimeter joints at door frames, window frames, skylight systems, and other wall openings. 4. Acoustical caulk at the junction of materials to prevent the passage of sound as indicated on the Construction Documents. 5. Sealant at all joints between finished surfaces and between finished surfaces and fixed equipment in kitchen, food preparation, and food serving, food storage, and dishwashing areas. b. All other exterior and interior sealing called for, or reasonably inferred from the Drawings, and as required to provide weathertight conditions in exterior walls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Compatible expansion joint filler at concrete control joints: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. B. Acoustical sealing of gypsum drywall work: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL. C- Acoustical sealing at masonry walls: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY. D. Food Service Equipment: Section 11400, FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. APRIL 1995 07900-1 SEALANTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Oak 3. Exposed edges shall be doubled back 1/2 in. in such a manner as to conceal them and to provide stiffness, and shall generally be bent out at a 45 degree angle. 4. All flat-locked seams at sheet metal work shall be soldered. Soldering shall be done slowly with well heated coppers, and ample solder shall be used so that the seam will show at least 1 in. of evenly flowed solder. 5. As a general sheet metal fabrication procedure, remove all flux from faces of sheet metal and then neutralize the flux residue by swabbing with washing soda or ammonia. Pre-tin and clean all soldered joints before final assembly wherever possible. 6. Seal all working-joints in sheet metal work with low-modulus sealant to assure positively weathertight conditions throughout, using materials as specified hereinbefore and workmanship as specified under Section 07900, SEALANTS. 7. All sheet metal remaining exposed in the finished work shall be cleaned and left free from stains and blemishes. F. Upon completion of work, sheet metal remaining exposed in the finished work shall be cleaned and left free from stains and blemishes. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07620-4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION types specified, equal to products manufactured by General Electric, Dow Chemical Co., or Pecora Co., as approved by Architect. AN%k PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES A. Carefully inspect surfaces to receive sheet metal for all conditions affecting sheet metal application and performance. Carefully check wood blockings, inserts, nailers, etc., for adequate anchorage. Defects shall be reports in writing to the Architect and sheet metal work shall not proceed until defects have been corrected. B. Beginning of work shall constitute acceptance of the conditions of the surfaces to which this work is to be applied as satisfactory to properly receive the work. 3.02 SHEET METAL WORKMANSHIP A. Furnish and install sheet metal flashing and trim, and other work as required for the various conditions as specified hereinabove and as shown on the Drawings, in addition to other locations where the use of sheet metal may be inferred as necessary to make the work of this Section complete in its intent of providing thoroughly weathertight conditions at roofing membranes, and control of moisture where used in masonry walls. B. Accessories and other items essential to the completeness of each of the sheet metal installations, though not specifically shown or specified, shall A nevertheless be provided, and shall be of matching material. C. Surfaces to be covered with sheet metal shall be free from defects of every description and shall be clean of dirt and other foreign matter before sheet metal work is started. Portions of sheet metal in contact with dissimilar metal, concrete, or masonry shall be given a coat of bituminous paint. Extreme care shall be taken to prevent direct contact of dissimilar metals. D. Except as otherwise shown on the approved shop drawings or specified herein, the workmanship of sheet metal work, method of forming joints, anchoring, cleating, provisions for thermal movement, etc., shall conform to the standard details and recommendations of the sheet metal producer and those of producer organizations and research institutions and associations governing the sheet metal used, in addition to the standards and details set forth in the SMACNA Manual. 1. To greatest extent applicable, fabricate sheet metal components in shop, and thoroughly clean joints on both sides of the sheet metal work as specified hereinbelow. -2. Seams, except where expansion provisions are required or where otherwise specified or detailed, shall be flat-locked and shall finish at least 1/2 in. in width. APRIL 1995 07620-3 SHEET?4ETAL FLASHING AND TRIM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION special conditions, showing sizes, materials, profiles and gauges of all materials, joining and splicing, attaching and anchoring sheet metal components, methods of relieving thermal stresses, and other pertinent information. B. Samples: Furnish 8 in. long samples of roof edge, gravel stop, and other sheet metal item as directed by the Architect to illustrate type, thickness, weight and gauge, and color and finish. C. Obtain approval of submittals prior to proceeding with fabrication or ordering of materials. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials in manufacturer's sealed containers and rolls. B. Store indoors or under cover, on raised platforms, fully protected from damage. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. In addition to roofing manufacturer's guarantee, furnish to the Owner a written guarantee of roofing (and sheet metal) subcontractor against all defects of materials and workmanship in work of this Section for a period of one year, commencing on the date of Substantial Completion of the building. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Sheet metal for other uses throughout, except as otherwise specified shall be 16 oz. cold-rolled, cornice-temper sheet copper conforming to ASTM B 370, coated with lead at rate of 7-1/2 lb. per side per 100 sq. ft., conforming to ASTM B101. Except where heavier gauge is called for on the Drawings, nailing cleats shall be of 20 oz. lead-coated sheet copper. B. Nails shall be "Stronghold" type, with large flat heads, annular rings, and needle points. Nails shall not be smaller than No. 12 Stubs gauge and of sufficient length to penetrate wood substrates not less than 7/8 in. Nails shall be of same materials and finish as sheet metal with which used. C Screws, bolts, and other accessories shall be of same materials and finish as sheet metal with which used. D. Solder shall be 50% lead, 50% tin. E. Flux shall be non-acid proprietary flux manufactured specifically for use with lead coated or terne coated materials, as applicable. F. Sealant shall be low-modulus sealant, silicone or urethane based, compatible and recommended by manufacturer for use with sheet metal APRIL 1995 07620-2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07620 Ask SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide all sheet metal flashing and trim as required to complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to: 1. Sheet metal flashings, gravel stops, fascias, and counterflashings at exterior walls. 2. Sheet metal work at all other locations where the use of sheet metal may reasonably be inferred as necessary to make the work complete in the intent of providing thoroughly weathertight conditions at roofs, throughout. 3. Flashing for roof sleepers required to mount equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Wood blocking, nailers, etc.: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. B. Exterior windows and doors: Section 08520, ALUMINUM ENTRANCE SYSTEMS. C. Sheet metal ductwork: Section 15841, LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK and Section 15842, MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK. D. Masonry work: Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CON- TRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Manual Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all work of this Section to Architect for approval, indicating large scale details of all typical and APRIL 1995 07620-1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07610-SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide sheet metal roofing with seam profile as follows: 1. Standing seam roofing with all flat seams soldered continously. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Copper: ASTM B370 copper sheet, 16 oz. per square foot; 20 oz. per square foot for special fabricated shapes. B. Accessories: Non-corrosive, compatible with roofing sheet material. Provide underlayments recommended by manufacturer of roofing. C. All copper roofs shall be complete with drip edge, copper gutters with copper support straps at 18" o.c. and copper down spouts.and shall have 20 ga. oil finish. Downspouts should be 16 oz. fastened with hinged type spike hangers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual recommendations. Comply with accessory manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with roofing system to ensure weathertight performance. B. Anchor securely to structure to withstand inward and outward loads. C. Isolate dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07610-1 SHEET METAL ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION e. Expansion Joints: Treat expansion joins as indicated in expansion joint manufacturer's standard details and published instructions ' ^ for specific conditions. f. Unusual Penetrations: Seal clusters of pipes and unusually shaped penetrations with pourable sealer, 2 in. deep in pitch pocket seal, as indicated in manufacturer's standard details and published instructions for specific conditions. g. Roof Drains: Install membrane into drain flange and seal between membrane and drain base with water cut-off mastic, as indicated in manufacturer's standard details and published instructions for specific conditions. h. Sheet metal copings, fascias, roof edge, and flashings will be furnished and installed under Section 07620, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. 7. Provide daily night seal at loose edges to prevent water flow beneath finished roofing. a. Mix sealer components as • instructed by manufacturer. Apply at rate of 1 gal./100 linear ft., 12 in. back from sheet edges on exposed substrate. b. Embed membrane in sealer and apply continuous pressure with 2- 1/2 in. tubing filled with sand. Pull sheet free before continuing permanent installation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Keep surrounding surfaces clean as work progresses. B. Remove cartons, debris, emptied containers, and other rubbish as work progresses, and at completion of work of this Section. Legally dispose of rubbish off site. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07530-7 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION ,., E. Feather or taper board around drains for smooth transition between roof surface and drain clamp ring. 3.04 ELASTOMERIC ROOFING A. Elastomeric Sheet Roofing Membrane Installation: 1. General: Start installation only in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. 2. Cut sheets to maximum size possible, in order to minimize seams and to accommodate contours of roof deck and proper drainage across shingled laps of sheets. 3. Adhesive Adhered Elastomeric Sheet Roofing: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer. Apply adhesive to surfaces to be bonded and roll Elastomeric Sheet Roofing into place when adhesive has properly cured. Treat seams with special cement and apply sealant to exposure sheet edges, tapering application as recommended by manufacturer. Install mechanical fasteners, flashings and counter-flashings, and accessories at location sand as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Walkway Protection Boards: Install 1/2" thick walk mats by Carlisle at locations shown and where required for access to roof-mounted equipment. Adhere mats to the roof system carefully to avoid damage to membrane. 5. Elastomeric Flashings. Provide elastomeric sheet flashings at elastomeric sheet roofing work, as indicated. a. Use longest practical lengths and widths of elastomeric sheet flashing material to eliminate or minimize joints. Complete splices between fleshings and main roof sheet before bonding flashings to vertical surfaces. Splices shall be sealed 3 in. beyond fasteners that attach membrane to horizontal nailer ins same manner as splices within roofing membrane. Flashings shall be bonded 100% to subsurfaces, except at coves where movement is anticipated, where flexible tube shall be installed. b. Apply bonding adhesive to flashing and surface to which it is being bonded. When bonding adhesive has dried to the point where it does not string or stick to a dry finger touch, roll flashing into adhesive. Do not bridge flashing at changes of direction. C. Nail top of flashing 12 in. on center under sheet metal copies, counter flashing, and other sheet metal work. d. Pipe Flashing: Flash penetrating pipe, conduit and duct penetrations with prefabricated pipe seals where possible and field fabricated sealants where necessary. APRIL 1995 07530-6 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Where surfaces joints at roof and wall substrates exceed 1/4 in. width, fill _ flush with surface with pourable sealer before proceeding with the low installation. C Do not leave unfinished roof areas uncovered overnight or during inclement weather. D. Work shall conform to manufacturer's published specifications. Roof shall be made permanently weatherproof in continuous operation, including connection to flashing and roof edge provided under Section 07620, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. E. Provide manufacturer's recommended weatherproofing method at all special conditions, such as at projections, at connections to sheet metal roof edge, flashings, etc. F. Special Cautions: 1. Do not use oil-based or plastic roof cement. 2. Do not subject elastomeric materials to contact with petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, nor animal fat. Prevent contact with hot pipes, and ducts. 3. Cements and bonding adhesive contain petroleum distillates and are extremely volatile and flammable. Avoid breathing vapors and do not use near fire or flame. "- 4. Ensure that splicing and bonding surfaces are dry during installation. G. Do not damage or stain surrounding work. Remove stains and repair damage immediately, as work progresses, as part of work of this Section. 3.03 ROOF INSULATION A. Follow sequence coding. Install only as much insulation and daily as can be covered with roofing by close of work. Do not expose materials to rain or snow, nor overnight. Replace material that becomes wet. B. Lay insulation over roof deck with spots of cold adhesive to facilitate handling during placement and securing of mechanical fasteners. Neatly cut board to fit around roof penetration sand projections. Trim edges of boards so that no edge is left unsupported. Stagger transverse joints in board underlayment 2 ft. in adjacent trows and butt edges tightly. Joints between boards shall be less than 1/4 in. wide. C Insulation shall be fastened mechanically to roof deck by installation of proprietary anchor plates for sheet roofing. D. Install tapered cants and crickets as indicated on approved shop drawings to provide required roof slope and pitch to drains. APRIL 1995 07530-5 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Provide manufacturer's standard non-penetrating membrane anchor assemblies. 2.05 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bonding adhesive shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Adhesive shall be compatible with all materials to which the elastomeric membrane is to be bonded. B. Splicing cement and splice cleaner shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. C Lap sealant for sealing the exposed edge of the splices shall be trowel or gun consistence, as recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Water cutoff mastic shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. E. Night seal shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. F. Pourable sealer shall be as recommended by membrane manufacturer. G. Prefabricated elastomeric accessories (pipe seal, inside and outside corners, etc.) shall be as manufactured and recommended by membrane manufacturer. H. Nailing Strips and Fasteners: Nailing strips shall be extruded rubber and fasteners shall be non-corrodible. I. Roofing Nails: 11 gauge hot-dip galvanized, length to penetrate wood members at least 7/8 in., with 5/8 in. diameter heads, as recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES A. Carefully check roof deck areas for conditions affecting application and performance. Ensure pull-out resistance of deck to be 360 lb. minimum. Report defects in writing to Architect. Do not proceed with roofing work until defects have been corrected. B. Beginning work shall constitute acceptance of its conditions and any defects in roofing work resulting from such accepted surfaces shall be corrected without further expense to the Owner. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Surfaces to receive roofing materials shall be rigid, tight, clean, dry, smooth, free of scale, dust, oil, or other foreign matter, and also free of frost or the effects of freezing. Thoroughly clean surfaces to remove loose particles immediately before application of subsequent materials. Do not apply roofing materials over wet subsurfaces. APRIL. 1995 07530-4 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION written notice of any leak within thirty days from the discovery of such leak. Warranty is solely intended to cover any condition caused by defective materials for twenty years, installation, and ordinary wear and tear. Warranty shall not cover damage from lightning, full gales, hurricanes, or similar unusual natural occurrences or any condition caused by any deliberate act or by negligence in maintenance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM A. Roofing system shall be a non-penetrating adhered membrane roof system. Materials and installation shall conform to the manufacturer's standard specifications, and work of this Section shall be executed by Roofing Subcontractor licensed by the manufacturer. B. Elastomeric roofing system shall consist of "Sure Seal" fully adhered roofing system as manufacured by Carlisle, Inc. Follow all Manufacturer's reccommedations for installation. C Roof patching where required shall be compatible with original aplication and shall be guarranteed in conformance with the provisions of this specification. 2.02 INSULATION A. Rigid insulation beneath membrane: shall be indicated thickness of composite, "Foamular" 150 (extruded polystyrene) insulation consisting of 2" and tapered board. 1. Rigid "Foamular" component shall have minimum density of 2 lb. cu. ft., minimum compressive strength (ASTM D 1621) of 25 psi, maximum moisture vapor transmission (ASTM E96) of 2.0 perm, "C" factor of 0.16 in. and "R" factor of 6.67 (1 in.) or in thickness as indicated on the drawings which ever is greater. 2. Insulation shall be approved by Factory Mutual (FM) for Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Construction and shall be UL listed Class A. 2.03 MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIAL A. Fully adhered, bar anchor, Elastomeric Sheet Roofing System: 1. Elastomeric Sheet Material: Manufacturer's standard thickness but not less then 60 mils, 1400 psi minimum tensile strength (ASTM D 412), 250% elongation (ASTM D 413), vapor permeable, ultraviolet and ozone resistant, low temperature brittleness of -40OF (400C) (ASTM D 746) standard color. 2.04 MEMBRANE ANCHOR ASSEMBLY APRIL 1995 07530-3 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. Shop drawings shall include: outline of roof and roof size, location and type of all penetrations, perimeter and penetration details, special details, location of Membrane Anchors, and a Bill of Materials. C Samples: Submit samples of each material under this Section requested by Architect, for approval. Samples shall be in size and form requested by Architect, and reasonable to show characteristics, color and finishes of the materials. 1. Submit a 1 ft. x 1 ft. sample of roof leveler board. D. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data of all materials and systems to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description, test data, specifications, sufficient to fully describe the proposed work. E. Do not order materials or begin installation until Architects approval of submittals has been obtained. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, factory-sealed packages, cans and rolls, all bearing the name and description of the product and the name of the manufacturer. B. Protect all materials from the weather, under cover, and on raised platforms. C. Adhesives, cements, mastics and sealers shall be stored between 60OF and 800F. Should they be exposed to lower temperatures, restore to room temperature for three to five days prior to use. Do not use materials damaged in handling or storage. D. Store leveler board with full protection against dampness prior to laying. Leveler boards shall be dry when applied, and shall be protected from the weather during installation. Any materials damaged by exposure to the elements or other cause shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 1.07 GUARAN'T'EE A. Furnish and deliver written manufacturer's guarantee in Owner's name covering all materials and workmanship under this Section, in addition to, and not in lieu of, guarantee requirements set forth under Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and Document 00810, MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS, and other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provision of the Contract Documents. B. Furnish manufacturer's warranty stating that manufacturer shall maintain roofing and elastomeric membrane flashings in water-tight condition at his own expense for fifteen years from the date of Substantial Completion, provided that Owner gives the manufacturer APRIL 1995 07530-2 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install adhered membrane roofing system as required to complete the work of the Contract, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide temporary walkway over existing roofing for use of contractors of other trades in performing work at the roof. Provide protection of existing roofing at work sites on the roof as required. Patch existing membrane roof with matching materials as required to provide complete and waterproof roof system." C. Provide all required blocking with P.T. lumber. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Carpertry 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIRE'ViENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): HH-I-1972 Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane and Poly isocyanurate Faced 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating slope-to-drain plan of roof showing all slopes, valleys, crickets, and drain details. Provide details of roof penetrations. B. Shop Drawings for Final Inspection: Submit shop drawings for final inspection of the roof as follows: 1. Shop Drawings shall be approved and assigned by the roof manufacturer. APRIL 1995 07530-1 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Install water protection sheet at valleys (3 feet), ridges, and eaves (6 feet). C. Restore damaged components. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07310-2 ASPHALT SHINGLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07310 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide shingles for roofing and siding 1. Asphalt shingles. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, product data, mock-ups, warranty, extra stock. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt shingles, fiberglass base, UL Class A; GAF, " Timberline Ultra". B. Roofing Underlayment: "Shingle Mate" glass reinforced underlayment. C. Fasteners and accessories: Non-corrosive, as recommended by manufacturer. D. Water protection sheet: "Weather Watch" by GAF on approved equal. Provide at all Hips, Ridges, Dormers, Eaves, Valleys, and Rake edges. E. Provide 16 oz. per square foot copper sheets for eaves and valleys, and 20 oz. for special shapes for all new shingle installations. F. Provide all new 20 oz. Double Bead 5" 1/2 Round with Rod and nut gutters and rain leaders as required for the entire roof system. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordiante with work of other sections. APRIL 1995 07310-1 ASPHALT SHINGLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION E. Provide material thicknesses necessary to provide fire-resistance ratings indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Owner may employ independent field testing agency. Cooperate and provide samples as requested. Contractor shall pay all costs relating to repair/replacement/retesting of non-complying work. G. Remove overspray, repair or replace damaged areas and protect installed fireproofing from damage. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07250-2 FIREPROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07250 FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide fireproofing for protection of structural steel columns, beams, ducts, and metal deck as required by building code. 1. Cementitious fireproofing. 2. Fireproofing board 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, product data, warranty, test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cementitious fireproofing; W. R. Grace, Monokote or approved equal. B. Fireproofing board for rated ductwork or as indicated on drawings; Super Firetemp 2000. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Schedule and coordinate sequence of work to prevent damage from both weather and other work, to minimize time building is unprotected and to permit adequate observation, testing and inspection before being concealed by other work. B. Examine substrates, report in writing all unsatisfactory conditions; beginning work means acceptance of substrate. C. Clean, prime and prepare substrates. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. D. Provide all auxiliary materials necessary and provide reinforcement wherever joint movement is expected. APRIL 1995 07250-1 FIREPROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE REINOVATION Fiberglas Corp, Rockwool Industries, Inc., Manville Corp., or approved equal conforming to governing laws and building code. 2.04 Rigid insulation shall be closed cell polyurethane equal to Dow SM. 2.05 Vapor barrier under slabs shall be 6 mil polyethelene sheeting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION- GENERAL A. Insulating materials and installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and specific recommendations, and health and safety precautions, for each of the project conditions and in accordance with the governing laws and building code. 3.02 GLASS FIBER BLANKET/BATT INSULATION A. Install continuous application of glass fiber blanket/batt insulation as indicated. Fit all batts tightly together and to framing members, furring strips, penetrations, and the abutting construction for positive thermal seal. Carry continuously behind light cans, junction boxes, etc. B. Install blanket/batt insulation, fully filling spaces between framing members. Pack tightly into corners, and fill all double studs and box headers and sills, and other similar voids, with insulation to maintain the insulation integrity across the entire wall area. C Coordinate work with that of other Sections. 3.03 FIRE SAFING A. Thoroughly pack into place, tightly and to maximum practicable density, mineral wool fire safing insulation in the following locations, filling all voids and hollow spaces, to serve as fire stopping: 1. Around all pipes, ducts, etc., penetrating through floors except in fire- rated chases. 2. Other places where fire safing insulation is indicated or reasonably required to carry out the intent of the Drawings. 3.04 VAPOR BARRIER UNDER SLABS A. Install vapor barrier under all new concrete slabs. Lap material 8" at all seams and tape in place securely. Take care not to puncture barrier. Where rigid insulation is intalled place under insulation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Upon completion of building insulation work in any area, remove all rubbish and debris from the work area and leave in broom clean condition. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07210-3 BUILDING INSULATION LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): HH-I-521 Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit representative samples of all materials proposed for use under this Section to the Architect for approval. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data for all materials and systems to Architect for approval, consisting of complete product description and specifications, complete instructions, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. C. Do not order materials or begin installation until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to site in original, unopened packages or containers bearing manufacturer's names, brand name, and types and thickness of contents. B. Store off the floor in interior spaces, adequately protected against damage , from all sources. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBERGLASS BLANKET/BATT INSULATION A. Fiberglass Blanket/Batt Insulation shall be indicated thickness(es) by full 16-1/8 in. and 24-1/8 in. width (depending on spacing of steel framing members) unfaced, commercial fiberglass blanket or batt insulation, conforming to Fed. Spec. HH-I-521e, Type I, equal to "Fiberglas CWI Blanket Insulation", manufactured by Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp., or equivalent manufactured by Manville Corp., CertainTeed Corp., or approved equal by Architect. 2.02 FIBERGLASS OR MINERAL PACKING WOOL INSULATION A. Fiberglass or Mineral Packing Wool Insulation shall be bagged, fiberglass or mineral fiber, insulating packing wood, equal to "Fiberglas Packing Wool" by Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp., or "Thermafiber Packing Wool" manufactured by United States Gypsum Co., or equivalent product manufactured by Manville Corp., as approved by Architect. 2.03 FIRE SAFING A. Fire safing insulating shall be mineral wool fiber fire stopping insulation, equal to "Thermafiber Fire Safing insulation", manufactured by United States Gypsum Co., or equivalent product manufactured by Owens-Corning APRIL 1995 07210-2 BUILDING INSULATION LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete the building insulation work as indicated on the Drawings, and as specified herein. Building insulation shall include but not be limited to: 1. Glass fiber batt insulation in all new interior partitions. 2. Fire-sating insulation at fire-stopped spaces between edges of floor slabs and exterior concrete brick or curtain wall construction; around pipes, ducts, etc., penetrating through floors except in fire-rated chases; and other places as may be called for on the Drawings. 3. Rigid insulation at interior or exterior of concrete walls or under concrete slabs. 4. Glass fiber batt insulation with vapor barrier in exterior wall systems. 5. Glass fiber bait insulation in attic assemblies. 6. Other building insulation work as may be called for on Drawings and not indicated or specified to be included under other Sections. B. Provide vapor barrier under all new concrete slabs on grade. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior wall construction: Section 08520, ALUMINUM ENTRANCE SYSTEMS. B. Acoustical and thermal insulation at gypsum drywall steel stud framing and furring: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL. G Pipe insulation: Section 015400, PLUMBING and Section 15250, MECHANICAL INSULATION. D. Duct insulation: Section 15250, MECHANICAL INSULATION. 1.0 3 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. APRIL 1995 07210-1 BUILDING INSULATION LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. During the progress of the work, this Contractor shall keep the premises clear of debris resulting from his operations and shall remove surplus and waste materials from the site as soon as possible. B. Upon completion of the work, this Contractor shall remove from the site all equipment and materials used on the work as well a any debris resulting from the operations. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 07150-4 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and the condition under which the Work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to installation of waterproofing, meet at the Project site to review the material selections, installation procedures, and coordination of the Work with other trades. Meeting shall include the Architect, Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer's representatives, inspection and testing services (if any), and any other subcontractor whose work requires coordination with this work. C Surfaces to receive waterproofing shall be thoroughly dry and free of moisture. Concrete shall have cured a minimum of 28 days before application of waterproofing. D. Concrete floor surfaces shall receive a 1/4 in. deep raked finish and shall be held one inch down from the finished grade elevation. 1. Area must be broom clean prior to commencing of work by the waterproofer. E. Surfaces shall not contain any grease, oil, or any other contaminants which could affect the complete bonding of the waterproofing to the concrete surface. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install and complete the system to assure that no water leakage through the system occurs. B. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses, provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative at the job site as often as deemed necessary by the manufacturer to advise on all phases of this Work. C Install the system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein. D. Fill non-moving cracks and joins with sealant or other compounds as recommended by the waterproofing materials manufacturer for compatibility with the waterproofing. E. Allow waterproofing to cure properly. During this period protect waterproofing from physical damage. 3.03 CLEANING A. Care shall be taken to protect all surrounding surfaces and at the completion of the work all damage and stains shall be repaired or cleaned. B. All work adjacent to operations under this Section shall be inspected for damage and stains and repaired or cleaned prior to the completion of work. APRIL 1995 07150-3 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Existing Conditions 1. The Contractor shall refer to Section 01010 for project requirements and this Contractor's responsibility thereunder. B. Environmental Requirements 1. The Contractor under this Section shall verify site condition with the Construction Manager to assure that the requirements in the storage of materials an installation Procedures conform to the following: a. Storage areas are maintained at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer of the materials. b. Conditions of installation relative to temperature and dust and dirt control are as recommended by the manufacturers of the materials. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. All workmanship and materials shall be guaranteed for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. B. The guarantee shall be in writing, in a form acceptable to the Architect and the Construction Manager and shall be delivered to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner. look C The furnishing of the guarantee shall be a condition precedent to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Waterproofing liquid membrane for pits, trenches and where otherwise indicated on the Drawings shall be Carlisle 60 mils thick "Liquiseal", Toch "Trio-Deck" or Karnak one coat as approved by the Architect. B. Dampproofing: Semi-fibrated (ASTM D1227, Type 1, except without asbestos) or non-fibrated (ASTM D1187, Type B), spray or brush applied, vapor-permeable, asphalt emulsion dampproofing containing no asbestos; Karnak 100 non-asbestos, Sonneborn Hydrocide 600 or 700B or approved equal. 1. Protection board below grade: 1/8" to 1/2" protection board, compatible with asphalt emulsion. Omit protection board at areas to receive compatible insulation over dampproofing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACE APRIL 1995 07150-2 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 07150 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials to complete the dampproofing and waterproofing as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein, including: 1. Exterior wall dampproofing. 2. Liquid applied waterproofing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Masonry Work; Section 04200, MASONRY B. Concrete Work; Section 03000, CONCRETE WORK C. Cement Plastering Work; Section 09180, CEMENT PLASTERING WORK D. Penetrations by other trades; Section 15400, PLUMBING, Section 15500, HVAC, Section 16000, ELECTRICAL. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The requirements of the State of Massachusetts Basic Building Code establish the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials, and all work shall conform thereto unless more stringent requirements are indicated or specified by the Contract Documents. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Brochures 1. Complete manufacturer's brochures shall be submitted. Brochures shall be marked up to indicate all products to be employed in the work in order that a proper evaluation can be made of the materials, methods, assemblies and construction to be provided. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials for the work of this Section shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to preclude damage of any nature. Manufactured materials shall be delivered and stored in their original containers, plainly marked with the product's and manufacturer's name. Materials in broken containers or in packages showing watermarks or other evidence of damage, shall not be used and shall be removed form the site. -- 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS APRIL 1995 07150-1 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Provide locking cylinders and keying matching door hardware as specified under section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSIIP A. The details shown on the drawings are an outline or requirements and are to intended to interfere with manufacturer's standard shop procedures and practices. Where important differences occur between these details and the manufacturer's standards, the manufacturer shall flag such differences by notes on shop drawings. 3.02 QUALITY OF MILLWORK A. Wood cabinets, tops, and shelving exposed to view shall conform to AWI "premium" grade AWI Quality Standards. All other work shall conform to AWI "custom" grade standards. 3.03 DELIVERY A. Delivery millwork only under favorable weather conditions and store within building at such time that proper conditions of temperature and humidity for storage 65°F to 75°F can be maintained. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF MILLWORK A. Installation is part of the work of FINISH CARPENTRY. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work of this section, remove all debris relating the conduct of this portion of the work from the premises. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 06400-3 CABINETS AND COUNTERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION single and complete units to the greatest extent that the requirements of delivery and installation in the building will permit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FOR WOOD CABINETS AND SHELVING A. Stile, Rails, Panel Doors: 3/4" solid stock white oak (staine) conforming to "premium" grade AWI Quality Standards. B. Movable Shelving and Dividers: 3/4" clear Hard Mapple or 3/4" AB Grade binch plywood with exposed edges edgeband with a Hard Mapple or fir stained to match cabinet exterior. C. Backs: 1/2" AB grade fir plywood. D. Framing, Blocking, Nailers, etc.: No. 2 Pine or equam. E. Filler Strips: Similar grade to adjacent material. 2.02 LAMINATED PLASTIC ASSEMBLIES A. NEMA Standard LD-1 for Class 1, high pressure decorative laminates: formica or equal: color and finish as called for in the color schedule to meet the following standards: 1. Surface Sheet: 1/16" thick 2. Back Sheet: 1/32" thick phenolic back sheet. 3. Edging: 1/16" thick, general purpose; os postforming grade 0.5" thick. 4. Adhesive: Fire resistant, as recommended or furnished by the plasuic laminate manufacturer. 5. Backing: 3/4" AC Grade DFPA plywood. No flake board or particle board will be permitted. 2.03 CABINET HARDWARE A. Knape and Vogt, Garcy, Stanley, or equal, to suit indicated functions of items fabricated and shall be listed and noted on the shop drawings for each iuems submitted for approval. APRIL 1995 06400-2 CABINETS AND COUNTERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION single and complete units to the greatest extent that the requirements of delivery and installation in the building will permit. `" PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FOR WOOD CABINETS AND SHELVING A. Stile, Rails, Panel Doors: 3/4" solid stock white oak (staine) conforming to "premium" grade AWI Quality Standards. B. Movable Shelving and Dividers: 3/4" clear Hard Mapple or 3/4" AB Grade binch plywood with exposed edges edgeband with a Hard Mapple or fir stained to match cabinet exterior. C. Backs: 1/2" AB grade fir plywood. D. Framing, Blocking, Nailers, etc.: No. 2 Pine or equam. E. Filler Strips: ,ow* Similar grade to adjacent material. 2.02 LAMINATED PLASTIC ASSEMBLIES A. NEMA Standard LD-1 for Class 1, high pressure decorative laminates: formica or equal: color and finish as called for in the color schedule to meet the following standards: 1. Surface Sheet: 1/16" thick 2. Back Sheet: 1/32" thick phenolic back sheet. 3. Edging: 1/16" thick, general purpose; os postforming grade 0.5" thick. 4. Adhesive: Fire resistant, as recommended or furnished by the plasuic laminate manufacturer. 5. Backing: 3/4" AC Grade DFPA plywood. No flake board or particle board will be permitted. 2.03 CABINET HARDWARE A. Knape and Vogt, Garcy, Stanley, or equal, to suit indicated functions of items fabricated and shall be listed and noted on the shop drawings for �*► each iuems submitted for approval. APRIL 1995 06400-2 CABINETS AND COUNTERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION l ok SECTION 06400 CABINE'T'S AND COUNTERS PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for millwork indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1. Cabinets and counters 2. Laminated plastic assemblies 3. Shelving and storage lockers 4. Millwork hardware. 5. Conan tops, Back splash & End splash 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Finish carpentry, millwork and counters: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY. B. Plumbing work: Section 15400, PLUMBING. C Painting and finishing: Section 09900, PAINTING. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit copies of millwork shop drawings to the Architect for approval. Show fabrication of typical units, unit assemblies, locations and installation setting details. Cabinet hardware proposed to be furnished with, and as a part of cabinets to suit indicated use of function of the item, shall be listed or noted on the shop drawings. Identify all material on shop drawings, as required to complete the work, ready for installation. 1.04 SAMPLES A. Submittal and approval of samples shall be required where the work will not be in strict compliance with the drawings, specifications or color schedule. 1.05 MANUFACTURER(SUBCONTRACTOR) A. Millwork must be fabricated and assembled by a millwork subcontractor equipped and experienced to do work equal in all respects to the best standards for fabricating quality millwork. Millwork shall be manufactured at the shop of the millwork subcontractor and assembled in APRIL 1995 06400-1 CABINET'S AND COUNTERS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.0 6 COMPLETION A. Just prior to completion of work of this Section, inspect work in the company of the Architect and make adjustments and corrections to the work leaving all operating parts in perfect operating condition, all jointing to adjacent material tight, all surfaces without blemishes or stains, all work properly executed and complete, and all defects and damaged work replaced or corrected. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 06200-6 FINISH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Finish work shall be sandpapered at field joints and where required by installation and shall be left in perfect condition for finishing under Section 09900, PAINTING. 3.03 SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS A. Important Note: No attempt is made in the following specific instructions to list all elements of finish carpentry and architectural woodwork required on this Project, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine for himself from the Drawings the scope and nature of the work required. These specific instructions are intended only to provide additional instructions regarding those portions of the finished carpentry and architectural woodwork for which information beyond that given on the Drawings or covered in the AWI Quality Standards seems needed to properly describe the work. Where the scope of a category is listed it is done in a general manner to assist the Contractor in determining the general nature of work he shall look for as being required in said category, and not to limit the work. 3.04 FINISH CARPENTRY WORK A. Generally, the scope of finish carpentry work shall be taken to include: 1. Plywood mounting panels at electrical rooms for telephone and electrical equipment. B. Install plywood mounting panels on back walls of electrical room as called for on Drawings, securely anchoring to supporting structures by anchorage devices of appropriate type and adequate capacity. Maintain the work plumb, level, straight, and true. 3.05 MILLWORK A. Include all millwork throughout the Project except that provided as parts of manufactured assemblies under other Sections. B. Fabricate and install all millwork items indicated in accordance with the details on the Drawings and the above material schedule and workmanship requirements, and the above mentioned quality standards applicable to this work. All work shall be constructed and installed with the highest quality of workmanship by first-class mill workers and finish carpenters normally engaged in work of the indicated type and specified quality. G Miscellaneous Items: Construct and install all required standing and running trim and other miscellaneous millwork items throughout, as called for on the Drawings and as required to satisfactorily complete the entire work, whether or not each and every required piece is specifically indicated on the Drawings. All trim shall be of same material and finish as the larger member to which applied. D. Provide all cut-outs required in laminate work at shop from templates as required for built-in items. APRIL 1995 06200-5 FINISH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION D. Solid Surfacing Material (SSM) shall be Fountainhead from manufacturer's selected colors as manufactured by Nevemar and shall be provided in dimensions and color indicated on the documents and approved by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Finished woodwork shall be dressed and sanded free from machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grain, or other defects on surfaces exposed to view. Construction and workmanship of transparent and laminated plastic finished architectural woodwork shall conform to, or exceed, the requirements of "Premium Grade" as established by AWI Quality Standards. Other architectural woodwork and finish carpentry work shall conform to "premium" grade. B. Joints shall be tight and so formed as to conceal shrinkage. Butt joints shall be fitted with concealed spline. Shop miters four inches or greater shall be glued and doweled or locked with metal spline. Miters less than four inches shall be glued and splined with the spline concealed. C. Frames shall be free of splices along lengths of members. Running trim shall have a minimum of splices or joints and where such splices or joints occur, they shall be fastened securely so that all exposed surfaces result in smooth, continuous planes. 'o D. Exposed edges of plywood and particleboard shall be edged with triangular- section edge strip of (matching) hardwood, at least 1/2 in. thick, the full width of the plywood or particleboard edge. Miter edge strips at corners. Edge strips shall not be exposed on faces of the sheets. E. Nails in finished work shall be blind nailed, wherever possible and surface nails shall be set and filled with matching plastic wood. Nailing through laminated plastic will not be permitted. F. Wherever nailing into concrete is done, care shall be taken to protect pipes or conduits embedded in the slab. No puncturing of pipes or conduits will be allowed. Damage to embedded work shall be corrected without further cost to Owner. All inserts and anchor bolts shall be placed before the pouring of concrete. G. Work shall be secured as to prevent checks or warps. Woodwork shall be properly framed, closely fitted, and accurately set to the required lines and levels and shall be rigidly secured in place. 3.02 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Field painting and finishing will be provided under Section 09900, PAINTING, but it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see to it that all finish carpentry items and architectural woodwork items be primed or sealed before installation. Paint or seal coats must be dry before items are installed. APRIL 1995 06200-4 FINISH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION materials or fabricated items. Store all materials off the floor, fully protected from damage of all kinds. 2. Materials used for laminated plastic or transparent finished architectural woodwork shall meet or exceed the requirements of "Premium Grade" as established by AWI Quality Standards. Materials for other architectural woodwork and finish carpentry work shall conform to AWI Quality Standards "Custom Grade". 3. Wood panel for exposed paint finish shall be waterproof, sign grade MDO board as recommended by and conforming to AWI Quality Standards. 4. Wood shall be furnished in longest practical lengths with respect to each intended use, and single-length pieces shall be used wherever possible. 5. Take all necessary field measurements before starting fabrication of built-in work. B. Finish Carpentry Materials: 1. Plywood for construction of mounting panels at telephone, electrical and mechanical rooms shall be A-D veneer plywood (A veneer exposed), APA Interior Grade. C. Architectural Woodwork Materials: All finish carpentry work where concealed by doors shall be for paint finish. All other architectural woodwork, except that specifically indicated to be laminated plastic finished, or transparent finished, shall be for paint finish. Materials for transparent finished, laminated plastic finished, and paint finished architectural woodwork shall be as follows: 1. Solid stock hardwood for exposed paint finish shall be from clear select plain-sawn stock natural birch or white poplar conforming to specified AWI Quality Standards except all bullnose and chair rail trim shall be hard maple. 2. Plywood for exposed paint finish shall be paint grade, Good Grade, rotary cut Birch veneered plywood, veneer or lumber core, as recommended by and to conform to the specified AWI Quality Standards. 3. Backup for laminated plastic finishes shall be 3/4" AC grade DFPA plywood conforming to AWI Quality Standards. 4. Laminated plastic shall be first quality, General Purpose grade, high pressure laminate, 1/16 in. thick, conforming to NEMA standards and ANSI A161.2, matte finish, in solid colors as selected by Architect, as manufactured by Wilson-Art, Formica, Textolite, Nevamar, or equal approved by Architect. Adhesive shall be as recommended by laminated plastic manufacturer, in accordance with AWI Quality Standards. APRIL 1995 06200-3 FINISH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A161.2 Performance Standards for Fabricated High Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops A208.1 Particleboard, Mat-Formed Wood B. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program - Fifth Edition C. LD-3 High Pressure Decorative Laminates - National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in complete detail to Architect for approval, covering all architectural woodwork items. B. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of all requested materials of fabricated items to Architect for approval. Size and form of samples shall be as specified or as requested by the Architect. C. Do not order materials or begin production runs of architectural woodwork items until Architect's approval has been obtained. D. Do not order materials or begin production until field measurements have been done. ,,,w E. Verification of all field dimensions are the responsibility of the Contractor. F. Provide full size mock up of banquette for approval prior to proceeding with the work. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. In addition to the specific guarantee requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS, the Contractor shall obtain in the Owner's name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY AND ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK MATERIALS A. General: 1. Do not deliver materials to site until building has been closed in, materials have been installed and are sufficiently dry, and building is continuously maintained at a temperature above 65°F. Obtain approval of Owner's representative before delivering architectural woodwork APRIL 1995 06200-2 FINISH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete finish carpentry and millwork as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Include, but do not limit to: 1. Finish carpentry work, including all wood trim. 2. Back boards for mounting telephone and electrical panels. 3. Architectural woodwork, including millwork and wainscotting. 4. Plastic laminate vanity and counter tops, cabinets and shelving, except as provided under CABINETS AND COUNTERS, SECTION 06400. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Rough carpentry: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. B. Interior rails: Section 05721, ORNAMENTAL RAILS AND ACCESSORIES C. Painting: Section 09900, PAINTING. D. Installation of doors: Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES E. Installation of wood doors: Section 08210, WOOD DOORS F. Installation of finish hardware: Section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE. G. Installation of specialities: Section 10100, SPECIALITIES. H. Section 06400, CABINETS AND COUNTERS. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): APRIL 1995 06200-1 FINISH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION F. Install wood blockings, nailers, ledgers, etc., as indicated or specified, furnished in not less than 12 ft. lengths, except where shorter lengths are "" required. G. Install all wood grounds required at gypsum drywall, and all grounds and screeds required at stucco soffit work, including those required by other trades to properly attach their work, such as grounds for attachment of fixtures, louvers, grilles, registers, diffusers, etc. At gypsum drywall include all blockings for attachment and anchorage of all fixtures, accessories, cabinets, shelves, rail brackets, door stops, and other items required to be attached to finished walls and ceilings, all of adequate strength to carry with a factor of safety of at least 2 to 1 the various loads to be applied. H. Nailing of rough carpentry work shall conform to requirements of the governing laws and codes. I. Where nailing or power-driving into concrete or masonry is done, take care to avoid puncturing conduits, pipes, ducts, etc., embedded in such work, and repair any damage so caused. J. Install all plywood sheathing and subflooring throughout, as indicated. Where one side is to be exposed, install with best veneer to exposed side. Provide solid framing or blocking under all ends and edges. Allow approximately 1/16 in. gap between panel edges at square edged plywood panels and 3/32 in. gap at tongue-and-groove edged plywood panels. Installation and nailing of plywood board shall be in strict accordance with the printed specifications and recommendations of the American Plywood Association. K. Install continuous "X" bridging across wood joist and rafter installations where and as indicated on structural drawings and/or as required by governing code, built up of 1 in. by 4 in. wood strips or of proprietary metal type. Provide continuous 1 in, by 3 in. wood strapping across underside of wood joist installations except where resilient steel furring channels or clips are called for, perpendicular to the joists, and located 16 in. on center, for support of ceiling finish. Shim all furring and strapping as required to assure straight lines and true planes for the finish materials to be applied. 3.02 BUILDING FELTS AND PROTECTIVE PAPERS A. Provide (1) all building felts required for installation of work of this Section and (2) protective papers required for protection of finished floors except where specified to be provided by a different trade. 3.03 CLEANING A. Upon completion of rough carpentry work in any given area, remove all rubbish and debris from the work area and leave in broom clean condition. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 06100-5 ROUGH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Building Products Co., or equal approved by Architect. Types, capacities, and size of all steel framing accessories shall conform to building code and job requirements. Where exposed to exterior weather, metal framing accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized. D. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, wood sill plates, ledgers, etc., of 2 in. nominal thickness or greater shall be bolted to backup concrete or masonry materials by use of 1/2 in. "L" bolts located 4 in. from ends and splices and spaced not greater than 32 in. on center along lengths of the members, to develop positive and secure anchorage to the back-up material. E. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, wood nailers, furrings, etc., less than 2 in. nominal thickness shall be secured to back-up concrete or masonry materials by use of appropriate fasteners located 4 in. from ends and spaced not greater than 16 in. on center along lengths of the members. Type and length of fastening devices shall be such as to develop positive and secure anchorage to the back-up material. 2.03 BUILDING FELTS AND PROTECTIVE PAPERS A. Building felts for general use shall be Type K. B. Kraft paper for protective purposes shall conform to Fed. Spec. UU-P-246a, Type 1, and shall be positively non-staining. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY WORK A. No attempt is made in this Specification to list the various elements of rough carpentry work, as the major part of the work to be done is clearly shown on or reasonably inferred from the Drawings. The rough carpentry work required shall include all such work required throughout the project to complete the entire intent of the work, regardless of whether or not each and every item is specifically called for. Refer to Drawings to determine the major extent of the rough carpentry work required. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity, connections, and anchorage of all rough carpentry work. G Construct all rough carpentry work plumb, level, and true with tight, close fitting joints, securely attached and braced to surrounding construction, all in a first class workmanlike manner. Counterbore for bolt heads, nuts, and washers where required to avoid interference with other materials. D. Install continuous strips of fiberglas sill sealer under all sill plates bearing on perimeter foundation walls. E. Install wood framing members in one-piece, full length members for maximum strength, laid out and spaced in accordance with the structural framing drawings. APRIL 1995 06100-4 ROUGH CARPENTRY NNW LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION salts per cu. ft. of wood. Supply certificate of treatment to Architect. All treated wood shall be redried before installation and all field cuts shall be brush treated with the preservative material. 2. Under no circumstances shall creosote preservatives be used. 3. Wood preservative treatment for roofing elements shall be compatible with EDPM roofing materials and with the guidelines of Factory Mutual. G Fire Retardant Treated Wood 1. Where requried all fire retardant treated wood shall meet the requirements of the Building Code and shall have the necessary approvals from the governing authorities in the use and assembly for which it is intended. All fire retardant treated wood shall be in conformance with the guidelines of Factory Mutual. 2. The following wood elements require fire retardant treatment: a. Structural wood elements b. Wood blocking C. Wood framing d. Wood sheathing H. Sill Sealer shall be 1 in. by 6 in. fiberglass "Sill Sealer" by Owens- Corning Fiberglas Corp. 2.02 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Provide all rough hardware required to complete this work and to attach this work in a secure and rigid manner to work of this and other trades, including all inserts, anchors, anchor bolts, "L" bolts, lag bolts, screws, washers, nuts, nails, joist hangers, post anchors, and other rough hardware. Assist other trades as necessary in the placement of inserts and anchor bolts in concrete and masonry and furnish full instructions regarding locations, sizes, and other requirements of the items in order that they may properly prepare their work to receive same. All rough hardware shall comply in all respects with the governing laws and codes. B. All rough hardware to be exposed in the finished exterior and interior work shall be hot-dip galvanized steel (conforming to applicable ASTM standard) or non-ferrous, except that cadmium plating may be substituted for galvanized at interior locations only. Concealed rough hardware may be unplated. Exposed exterior nails shall be hot-dip galvanized steel, or non-ferrous. Fully concealed exterior nails and interior nails shall be bright steel. Rough hardware items shall be of appropriate type and of proper capacity and size as required for each specific project condition. C. Beam hangers shall be proprietary steel assemblies, with top flanges, equal to "Series LB and B", by Simpson Co., equivalent by Cleveland Steel Specialties or Heckman Building Products Co., or equal approved by Architect. Joist hangers shall be proprietary steel assemblies, as manufactured by Simpson Co., Cleveland Steel Specialties or Heckman APRIL 1995 06100-3 ROUGH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION C. Lumber shall be surfaced four sides and shall bear the grade and trademark of the association under whose rules it was produced, and a mark of mill identification. D. Lumber shall be furnished in longest practical lengths with respect to each intended use, and single length pieces shall be used wherever possible. E. Cteneral Carpentry Material Schedule: Item Grade Species Lumber 2 in. nominal Stress Rated Structural Douglas Fir thickness or greater Framing, Fb 1500 psi or Larch for beams, rafters, and joists. Built up headers. Lumber 2 in. nominal Stud Grade Hem-Fir thickness for non- structural studs and cripples. Lumber 2 in. nominal No. 2 Structural Hem-Fir thickness or greater or Better for other uses. Lumber less than 2 in. No. 2 Common Hem-Fir nominal thickness: Plywood Roof Sheathing: U.S. Product Standard Group 1 PS-1-74, Standard Species Sheathing, Exterior Grade, S2S CDX Wall Sheathing 5/8" Firestop type X One Hour Rated Exterior Gypsum - G-P Dens-Glass - Mfg. by Georgia Pacific Plywood Interior U.S. Product Standard Group 1 Subflooring: PS-1-74, STURD-I-FLOOR Species Interior Grade, Exterior Glue, T & G Edges F. Wood Preservative Treatment 1. Pressure Type: All lumber for use as sill plates, plates, furring strips, etc., in contact with face brick masonry, foundation walls or slabs-on- grade shall be pressure treated with a toxic salt wood preservative conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-W-535, Type B, applied in a closed cylinder by vacuum process, full cell method in strict accordance with the recommended practices of the American Wood Preservers Association and Fed. Spec. TT-W- 571g. Retention shall be at least 0.35 lbs. of dry APRIL 1995 06100-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Include all rough carpentry work as required to complete the Work of the Contract, as indicated. Include, but do not limit to: 1. All rough hardware, inserts, related metal components, etc., for work of this Section, except those items specifically specified to be provided by other trades. 2. All rough carpentry framing (beams, joists, rafters, headers, studs, cripples, sills, plates, ledgers, ridge boards, etc.) blockings, edgings, curbs, grounds, screeds, nailing strips, nailing inserts, furring, strapping, sheathing, subflooring, etc., required for all trades, including preservative treatments and applications. 3. Building felts for work of this Section, and protective papers for finished floors. 4. Other usual items of normal rough carpentry work indicated on the Drawings or necessary for the proper completion of the project, even though not specifically mentioned herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Installation of inserts and cast-in or built-in anchor bolts to secure work of this Section to concrete and masonry: Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. B. Finish carpentry and millwork: Section 06200, FINISH CARPENTRY C Building insulation: Section 07210, BUILDING INSULATION. D. Gypsum drywall: Section 09250, GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials when delivered to site shall be stacked and stored above the ground under protective coverings or indoors in such manner as to insure proper drainage, ventilation, and protection. No kiln dried materials shall be placed in the building until concrete, and masonry work have been completed and are sufficiently dry. B. Lumber shall be of sound stock, new, straight, of consistent size, free of stains and mildew, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than low 19%. Where exposed or semi-exposed, wood members shall be selected for best possible appearance from the grade of stock specified. APRIL 1995 06100-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION D. Where members, other than expansion bolts or inserts, are fastened into concrete, set such members in proprietary-type expanding grout manufactured specifically for such purpose, used strictly in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Holes to receive members shall be formed with galvanized sheet metal sleeves, expanded polystrene foam, or other approved method to provide at least 1/2 in. clearance around entire perimeter. At exposed applications, hold expanding grout back 1/2 in. from finish surface and fill voids with Portland cement grout to match color and texture of surrounding concrete surface. E. Electrolytic Isolation: Where dissimilar metals are to come into contact with one another, isolate by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on contact surfaces in addition to shop coat specified above. Do not permit the bituminous paint in any way to. remain on surfaces to be exposed or to receive sealant. 3.04 STEEL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS A. Fabricate and install interior and exterior steel handrails and railings at stairs and platforms, ramps, open wells, overlooks, and other locations as called for on the Drawings. B. Handrails, at all but mechanical and service areas, throughout, shall be of Architectural Quality. Exceptional care shall be taken in welding and grinding, filling and surface sanding to provide truly smooth, clean, neat and flush construction throughout, free of all surface defects and defacements. G Steel handrails shall be fabricated of seamless round steel pipe, in accordance with designs and configurations as called for on the Drawings. Sizes and shapes of all members shall be as indicated. Joints shall be full- welded and ground flush and smooth. D. Include as part of this work all posts, balusters, pipe handrails, intermediate rails, proprietary wall brackets, proprietary weld-on fittings (escutcheons, flanges, and returns, 90 degree corners, bends, crossovers, tees, etc.) anchors, and other items required for complete installations. E. Exterior handrails shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication as specified hereinbefore. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 05520-5 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION straightened to remove all warpage and distortion caused by the process. 3. Furnish to the Contractor, with copy to Architect, a certified statement that galvanizing complies fully with this Specification. B. Shop Painting: 1. Steel handrail and railing assemblies shall be given a shop coat of epoxy primer to type specified hereinbefore. Handrail and railing assemblies will be field primed and painted under the work of Section 09900, PAINTING. 2. Immediately before shop painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign material with wire brushes and/or steel scrapers. Power tool clean in accordance with SSPC SP3. Remove any grease and oil by use of solvent recommended by paint manufacturer. Sandpaper exposed surfaces as required to product smooth, even finishes. 3. Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to uniform thickness(es) recommended by manufacturer. Apply thoroughly and evenly and work into corners and joints taking care to avoid sags and runs. 4. Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete, or to be welded in the field. After field welds are complete, grind smooth and flush, thoroughly clean and then apply specified primer over all unprimed surfaces in the field by brush or roller. 5. After erection, sand smooth and retouch all portions of the shop coats chipped or damaged during erection, and coat all field welds and connections with primer equivalent to that used for the shop coat. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to prevent deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent rusting and the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned prior to erection. B. Work shall be erected square, plumb, and we, accurately fitted, and with tight joints and intersections. All anchors, inserts, and other members to be set into concrete or masonry shall be furnished loose by this trade to be built-into concrete and masonry by those trades as the work progresses. Later cutting or drilling shall be avoided wherever possible. C Metal work shall be rigidly braced and secured to surrounding construction, and shall be tight and free of rattle, vibration, or noticeable deflection after installation. APRIL 1995 05520-4 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION F. Shop paint for prime coat of steel handrail assemblies shall be Tnemec "No. 66 Hi-Build Epoxyline", Carboline "No. 190", DuPont "Corlar", or Napko "TPC Epoxycote PA No. 5616" epoxy primer. Dry film thickness of application shall be 3.0 to 4.0 mils. PART 3 EXECLMON 3.01 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust pitting; well formed and finished to shape and size, true to details with straight, sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall be to true radii. Exposed sheared edges shall be eased. B. Weld all permanent connections. Weld shall be continuous on all exposed surfaces and where required for strength on concealed surfaces. Exposed welds shall be ground flush and smooth, with voids filled with metallic filling compound (metallic filling compound not permitted on surfaces to receive hot-dip galvanizing). Tack-welding will not be permitted unless specifically called for. Do not use screws or bolts where they can be avoided. Where used, fastener heads shall be countersunk, screwed up tight, and threads nicked to prevent loosening. 'r _ C. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall give amply strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water. D. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of hardware and of work by other trades where so indicated or where directions for same are given prior to, or with approval of, shop drawings. E. Live loads shall be not less than the minimum required by law. In addition, the top railing shall be capable of resisting a force of 200 lb. applied at any point in any direction. Design and construction shall be such as to assure that under these design live loads there shall be no failure of any member or connection, deflection of not more than L/360 of length of any member, and without permanent deformation of any member or fastener. Factor of safety shall be not less than 2-1/2 to 1. 3.02 SHOP COATINGS A. Galvanizing: 1. Ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use shall be hot-dip galvanized, including all bolts, nuts, washers, and other related ferrous metal items used therewith. Galvanizing shall be done in largest practicable units. 2. Hot-dip galvanizing process shall comply with ASTM A123, A153, A385, and A386, as applicable. After galvanizing processed items shall be APRIL 1995 05520-3 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION DIA Structural Welding Code - Steel C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of steel handrail and railing work to Architect for approval, showing sizes and thicknesses of all members types of materials, methods of connection and assembly, complete dimensions, clearances, anchorage, relationship to surrounding work by other trades, shop paint and protective coatings, and other pertinent details of fabrication and installation. B. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of all materials to be furnished under this Section in size and form requested by Architect. C. Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, and of best commercial quality for each intended purpose. 1. Steel pipe shall be seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53, Schedule 40. Galvanized steel pipe shall be used at exterior uses. 2. All other steel shall conform to ASTM A36. B. Provide all anchors, bolts, sockets, sleeves, and other parts required for securing each item of work of this Section to the construction. Furnish required inserts and sleeves for installation in concrete under Section 03001, CONCRETE WORK. Furnish anchors, bolts. Furnish required inserts and sleeve for installation in timber under Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. C. Grout for setting handrail posts in concrete, where applicable shall be Set- 45, manufactured by Set Products, Inc., Macedonia, OH 44056, or approved equal. D. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same materials and finish as the metal to which applied, unless otherwise noted. E. Welding rods shall conform to AWS Standards and the recommendation of the welding rod manufacturer. Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D1.1. APRIL 1995 05520-2 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Aawk SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install steel handrails and railings, and related items, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Placing of metal inserts and sleeves where required for attachment of work of this Section to concrete: Section 03001, CONCRETE WORK. B. Metal fabrications other than specified herein: Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS. C Field finish painting: Section 09900, PAINTING. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as AW listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 36 Structural Steel A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless A 123 Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from. Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) On Iron and Steel Hardware A 385 High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products B. American Welding Society (AWS): APRIL 1995 05520-1 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION specified above. Do not permit the bituminous paint in any way to remain on surfaces that are to be exposed or are to receive sealant. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to prevent deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent rusting and the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned prior to erection. B. Work shall be erected square, plumb, and true, accurately fitted, and with tight joints and intersections. All anchors, inserts and other members to be set in concrete or masonry shall be furnished loose by this trade to be built-into concrete and masonry by those trades as the work progresses. Later cutting or drilling shall be avoided wherever possible. C Metal work shall be rigidly braced and secured to surrounding construction, and shall be tight and free of rattle, vibration, or noticeable deflection after installation. D. Where members, other than expansion bolts or inserts, are fastened into concrete, set such members in proprietary-type expanding grout manufactured specifically for such purpose, used strictly in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Holes to receive members shall be formed with galvanized sheet metal sleeves, expanded polystyrene foam, or other approved method to provide at least 1/2 in. clearance around entire .,, perimeter. At exposed applications, hold expanding grout back 1/2 in. from finish surface and fill voids with Portland cement grout to match color and texture of surrounding concrete surface. 3.04 DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR ITEMS A. The items described below constitute the major part of the work of this Section, but are not intended or implied to cover each and every item that may be required to properly complete the work. Carefully review the Drawings to determine the full extent of the miscellaneous metal work required, and carefully review the other trade Sections of the Specifications, to determine the extent of metal work to be done by those trades. All miscellaneous metal work not specifically specified to be provided under other Section(s) but shown on the Drawings or reasonably inferred therefrom, shall be furnished and installed as part of the work of this Section. B. Support steel for wall support at ceilings. C Support brackets and dunnage for wall, roof and ceiling mounted mechanical equipment not provided by other sections. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 05500-6 METAL FABRICATIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION D. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of hardware and of work of other Sections where so indicated or where directions for same are given prior to, or with approval of, shop drawings. E. Live loads shall be not less than the minimum required by law. Where specific live loads are not set forth in the laws and codes applicable to this work, or in Contract Documents, designs shall be such as to support the live loads normally imposed, without failure, without deflection of more than L/360 of length of any number, and without permanent deformation, all with a safety factor of not less than 2-1/2 to 1. 3.02 SHOP COATINGS A. Galvanizing: All ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use, including steel lintels in exterior masonry walls, in addition to interior items specifically so specified, shall be hot-dipped galvanized, including all bolts, nuts, washers, and other related ferrous metal items used therewith. 1. Hot-dip galvanizing process shall comply with ASTM A123, A153, A385, and A386 as applicable. After galvanizing, processed items shall be straightened to remove warpage and distortion caused by the process. 2. Furnish certified statement that galvanizing complies fully with this Specification. B. Shop Painting: Ungalvanized ferrous metals under this Section shall be given a shop coat of rust inhibitive primer of type specified hereinbefore. low Galvanized metals shall be field primed and painted under Section 09900, PAINTING. 1. Immediately before shop painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign material with wire brushes and/or steel scrapers. Power tool clean in accordance with SSPC SP 3. Remove grease and oil by use of solvent recommended by paint manufacturer. Sandpaper exposed surfaces as required to product smooth, even finishes. 2. Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to uniform thickness(es) recommended by manufacturer. Apply thoroughly and evenly and work well into comers and joints taking care to avoid sags and runs. 3. Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry, or to be welded in the field. After field welds are complete, grind smooth and flush, thoroughly clean and then apply specified primer over all unprimed surfaces in the field by brush or roller. 4. After erection, sand smooth and retouch shop coats chipped or damaged during erection, and coat all field welds and connections with primer equivalent to that used for the shop coat. C. Electrolytic Isolation: Isolate dissimilar metals from all other with heavy !, coating of bituminous paint on contact surfaces, in addition to shop coat APRIL 1995 05500-5 METAL FABRICATIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 5. Metal stairs shall be erected level and plumb, in correct alignment free from distortion and defect. Include all field welding and bolting as required. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1. 6. Steel pipe shall be seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53, Schedule 40. Steel tubing shall be structural steel square tubing conforming to ASTM A501. 7. Construction specialties such as slotted inserts, wedge inserts, etc., shall be as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard; Gateware Erectors Inc.; Richmond Screw Anchor Co.; or equal approved by the Architect. S Non-ferrous metals shall be as specified under descriptions of specific items, hereinbelow. C. Provide anchors, bolts, sockets, sleeves, and other parts required for securing each item of work of this Section to the construction. Furnish inserts and sleeves to be set into concrete form work and concrete under Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. D. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same material and finish as the metal to which applied, unless otherwise noted. E. Welded rods shall conform to AWS Standards and the recommendations of the welding rod manufacturer. F. Shop Paints: Shop paint for ferrous surfaces shall be high-quality, lead- free, rust-inhibitive primer, equal to Tnemec No. "10-99" Metal Primer or equivalent products manufactured by Devoe and Raynolds Co. or Carboline, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust pitting; well formed and finished to shape and size, true to details with straight, sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall be to true radii. Exposed sheared edges shall be eased. B. Weld all permanent connections. Weld shall be continuous on all exposed surfaces and on concealed surfaces where required for strength. Exposed welds shall be ground flush and smooth, with voids filled with metallic filling compound. Tack-welding will not be permitted unless specifically called for. Do not use screws or bolts where they can be avoided. Where used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed up tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening. C. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed to exclude water. lopk APRIL 1995 05500-4 METAL FABRICATIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION clearances, anchorage, relationship to surrounding work of other sections, shop paint and protective coatings, and other pertinent details of ,W, fabrication and installation. 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, openings, size and type of fasteners, and any accessories. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations, applicable details, and field dimensions. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. B. Samples: Submit duplicate samples of all materials to be furnished under this Section in size and form requested by Architect. C. Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in manner to prevent deformation and damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent rusting and the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned before erection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, and of best commercial quality for each intended purpose. 1. Unless otherwise specifically called for, work of this Section shall be fabricated of structural steel conforming to ASTM A36. B Metal Stairs 1. Concrete-filled metal pan stairs shall be designed and fabricated to support a uniform live load of 100 psf with stringer deflection not to exceed L/360 of span and shall conform to Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code requirements. 2. Structural steel shapes shall be ASTM A 36 steel; sheet steel ASTM A 611. 3. Fabricate stairs with closed risers and treads of pan construction to receive concrete fill. Form treads and risers from 12 gage minimum sheet steel. 4. Steel pan stairs shall receive a shop coat of steel primer. APRIL 1995 05500-3 METAL FABRICATIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Spec. Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members C American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A 36 Structural Steel A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless A 123 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware A 385 High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products A 501 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing D. American Welding Society (AWS): DIA Structural Welding Code - Steel low, D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Conform to governing laws, building code, and following standards: 1. AISI Specifications. 2. AIS C Code. 3. AISC Specifications. 4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), applicable publications. 5. AWS D1.1 and D1.3. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all metal fabrications to Architect for approval, showing sizes and thicknesses of all members, types of materials, methods of connection and assembly, complete dimensions, APRIL 1995 05500-2 METAL FABRICATIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete the metal fabrications work as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Building into concrete and masonry of all metal inserts, sleeves, slots, and anchor bolts except expansion type, to secure work of this Section to concrete and masonry: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE and Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY. B. Masonry anchors and ties for masonry work, Section 04200, UNIT MASONRY. C. Handrails and railings: Section 05721, ORNAMENTAL INTERIOR RAILS AND ACCESSORIES and Section 05520, METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS. D. Rough hardware for rough carpentry work: Section 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY. E. Field painting: Section 09900, PAINTING. F. Hangers, brackets, troughs, guards, and other steel items called for on Drawings or in the Specifications to be provided for mechanical and electrical work and required exclusively for the support or protection of Mechanical and Electrical Work: All Division 15 Sections and Section 16100, ELECTRICAL. 1.0 3 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Code Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges Spec. Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. -� APRIL 1995 05500-1 METAL FABRICATIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 4. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. 5. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 6. Veneer Walls a. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings during construction. Strike joints cavity flush. 3.0 3 LINTELS A. Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 6 inches for openings less than 6 feet-0 wide, and 8 inches for wider openings. 3.04 FLASHING A. Place thru-wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. B. Seal flashing penetrations with mastic before covering with mortar. C Terminate flashing 1/2" from face of the wall. D. Extend flashings beyond edges of lintels, at least 4" and turn up edge on sides to form pan to direct moisture to exterior. E. Provide concealed flashings in masonry work as shown. F. Provide to Owner daily "Instamatic" photographs showing the detailed construction of all flashing work. 3.05 CLEANING A. Exposed masonry walls shall be thoroughly cleaned with water and fiber brushes to remove mortar stains, dirt and dust. B. If the mason has difficulty removing stains, he may use stiff fiber brushed and not over 10% solution of muriatic acid. C Rake out imperfect mortar joints and repoint as directed by the Owner, so that the entire work shall be free of blemishes. D. Cleaning shall be entirely completed before windows and door frames are installed. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 04200-6 UNIT MASONRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION G. Pattern Bond: Lay unit masonry work in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Interlock each course of each wythe at corners. H. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement- type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less- than-half-size units at comers, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. I. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. J. Tooth-in all block work at infill conditions. K. Built-In Work 1. As the work progresses, build-in-items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. a. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. b. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. c. Install channel frames of steel where shown for elevator and overhead doors, according to the manufacturer's specifications. d. Install loose lintels of steel where shown. e. Install access panels where required in masonry. Before installation, verify correct fire rating of panel to be installed. L. Mortar Bedding and Jointing 1. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use water clear and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2 1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. 2. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs in mortar in starting course on foundation walls and in all courses where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. 3. Joints: Maintain joint widths, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment, lay walls with 3/8 inch joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. APRIL 1995 04200-5 UNIT MASONRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. Provide concealed flashings as follows: a. All flashings for masonry work shall be 5 oz. electrolytic sheet copper bonded on both sides to asphalt saturated cotton fabric as manufactured by AFCO Products, York or Phoenix. 3. Provide plastic tube type weeps at the base of all cavities or horizontal interruptions of cavities at 2'-0" on center in such a way as to insure full drainage of cavity. D. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories 1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60 of the size shown. 2. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, of size and configuration as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE A. Examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be in- stalled. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units using units of nominal thickness indicated on the drawings. B. Build recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. C. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. D. Do not wet masonry units. E. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. F. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. APRIL 1995 04200-4 UNIT MASONRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.03 MORTAR A. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 1. Natural color for CMU 2. Color for brick veneer mortar to be selected by the Architect. B. Hydrated lime: ASTM 0207, Type S. C Sand: ASTM C144. 2.04 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing, for concrete masonry units. 1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with matching corner and 'tee' units. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross-rods, and a unit width of 1 1/2 inches to 2 inches less than thickness of wall. 2. Provide units fabricated as follows: a. Truss type fabricated with single pair of 9 gauge side rods and continuous diagonal cross-rods spaced not more than 16 inches on center. 3. For exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize after fabrication with 0.8 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A116 Class 3. B. Anchoring Devices for Masonry 1. Flexible Anchors: Where masonry is shown or specified to be anchored to structural framework with flexible anchors, provide 2- piece anchors which will permit horizontal and vertical movement of masonry, but will provide lateral restraint. a. Flexible anchors shall be either adjustable web tie type 3/16" galvanized steel 12" long with a 4" taper to rod, 8" wide or b. L-type corrugated tie 3" long with 4" bend inserted into anchor clip made of 14" ga. by 3/4" wide galvanized steel. c. or approved equal. 2. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 24 inches on center vertically and 36 inches on center horizontally. C. Flashing and Weep Holes 1. Provide concealed flashings over door opening, windows, angles and as shown to be built into masonry. APRIL 1995 04200-3 UNIT MASONRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Masonry Units 1. Concrete masonry units must be purchased from a single manufacturer. C. Work shall conform to published reccommendations of the Brick Institute of America. D. Flashing details shall conform to Factory Mutual guidelines. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1. Submit samples of typical unit masonry units, required. Include, if required, the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed work. Architects review will be for color and texture only. 2. Submit samples of manufacturer's standard mortar colors, a colored mortar may be selected for the masonry units exposed to view. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Manufacturer: Obtain concrete masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color. B. Concrete Masonry Units 1. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long x 8 inches high (15-5/8 inches x 7-5/8 inches actual), unless otherwise shown, depth as shown on the drawings. Contractor should take note that some concrete units are not standard sizes. General Contractor will be responsible for matching blocks at existing block walls. 2. Special Shapes: Provide (with matching textured finish as re- quired) required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions as required for a complete installation. 3. Weight: Provide units complying with ASTMC129. Units shall be "normal weight", using ASTM C33 concrete aggregates for a dry net weight of not less than 125 lbs. per cubic feet or CMU units which are rated as having a 2 hr fire-rating as noted on the drawings. a. Concrete masonry units (CMU): provide manufacturer's stan- dard color and texture. APRIL 1995 04200-2 UNIT MASONRY LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED The conditions of the Contract including General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The extent of the concrete masonry unit work is shown on the drawings and includes but is not limited to: 1. Brick masonry work 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU) 3. Concrete masonry accessories 4. Masonry mortar 5. Reinforcing for concrete masonry units 6. Install access panels in masonry walls. 7. Daily "Instamatic" photographic record of all flashing installation. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete work: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Door frames: Section 08110, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES C Access doors and frames: Section 08305, ACCESS DOORS D. Painting of block walls: Section 09900, PAINTING E. Sealing of joints: Section 07900, SEALANTS F. Protection of pedestrian walks: Section 01500, TEMPORARY FACILITIES 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lay up all walls and partitions plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true of level of more than 1/8 inch in 8'-0" in any direction is unacceptable. APRIL 1995 04200-1 UNIT MASONRY LE9415 C.APEN HOUSE RENOVATION )off* 03550 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide concrete floor topping over existing concrete slabs to repair and level floors and prepare surface for floor finishes. Provide floor topping when necessary to provide 1/8" per foot slope where plans show sloping to drains. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data, 4' by 4' mock-ups, test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland-cement based topping mix with minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi; K-15 by Ardex or approved equal. B B. Approved aggregate for excessive thickness of topping as per manufacturers instructions. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Prepare surfaces in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Remove all oil and grease. B. Prime surfaces and install topping following manufacturer's recommendations. C Level surfaces to within 1/8" in 10'. D. Cure and protect. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 03550-1 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION D. Non-Slip Aggregate Finish: Where indicated, provide abrasive, non-slip Amok aggregate finish to troweling 1/4 lb.ft.2 of abrasive into surface. E. Sealing: Apply two coats of sealing/dustproofing compound to all concrete surfaces indicated to be left exposed in the finished work. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Thoroughly clean and prepare concrete before sealing to remove -all discoloration, dirt and stains. F. Exposed wall surfaces in and on the exterior ramp will rubbed with an abrasive hone after applying a thin coat of cement grout. All fins and form marks will be removed and the surface left smooth and hard. 3.0 8 CURING A. Begin curing immediately after placement and preliminary finishing. Keep concrete continuously moist for at least 7 days after placement. B. Cure slabs with use of membrane forming curing compound applied in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect fresh concrete surfaces from drying winds, rain, soiling and damage. Protect with plastic film sheeting as needed. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. The following allowable installed tolerances are allowable variations from locations and dimensions indicated by the Contract Documents and shall both be added to allowable tolerances indicated for other work. 1. Allowable Variation from True Plumb: ± 1/8" in 10'-0" 2. Allowable Variation for True Level: ± 1/8" in 10'-0" 3. Allowable Variation from True Line: ± 1/8" in 10'-0" 4. Allowable Variation from True Wall Thickness: ± 1/4" 5. Allowable Variation from True Plane of Adjacent Surfaces: ± 1/8" before finishing. After finishing, joints shall be flush and invisible. B. Provide ACI 301 Class A surface finish. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 03300-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION E. The Contractor shall pay for all cutting, patching and remedial work necessary because of failure to properly place and coordinate embedded items. 3.06 CONCRETE ME ING,TRANSPORT AND PLACEMENT A. Dispatch ready-mixed concrete from plant at intervals not exceeding 30 minutes. Keep drums in constant rotation during transportation and delivery. Do not add water during transit nor at the job site without the written permission of the Architect. B. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to the Architect before placing any concrete. Obtain Architect's approval of soil bearings for footing and slabs before placing concrete. C. Place concrete continuously and in compliance with ACI, except where more restrictive requirements are specified. Place concrete within 90 minutes after cement has been mixed with aggregate or within 45 minutes after addition of water and admixtures. 1. Avoid excessive handling and flowing of concrete. Avoid segregation of the mix. 2. Do not drop concrete "freefall" for more than 6 feet without the use of elephant trunks. D. Pumping of concrete will be permitted only if the Contractor provides full-time independent inspection and testing acceptable to the Architect and the cost of the special inspection and testing is included in the base Contract Price. E. Consolidate concrete with electric/mechanical vibrating equipment acceptable to the Architect to eliminate honeycombs and air pockets and to ensure full coverage of reinforcing steel. Avoid over vibration and do not use vibrators to move concrete within forms. 3.07 FINISHES A. Surfaces Concealed in the Finished Work: Provide as cast surfaces with at least minimum concrete coverage over reinforcing steel. Where concrete is indicated to be directly covered with a thin finish such as paint, veneer plaster, or wall covering, provide surfaces as specified for "Surfaces Exposed in the Finished Work". B. Surfaces Exposed in the Finished Work: Provide smooth, uniform surfaces that appear monolithic. Remove fins and projections. Fill and patch voids with fine concrete grout. Rub entire surface with burlap bags and neat cement past or other acceptable technique to create a fine textured, uniform "plaster-like" surface. C Slab Trowel Finish: Steel trowel and power float slab surfaces to provide hard, slick, smooth, uniform planes within specified tolerance. Slabs shall have ACI 302, Class #4 finish. Do not add cement, sand, water, or mortar to slab surfaces. APRIL 1995 03300-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION D. Remove standing water from formwork before placing concrete. Except in freezing weather, wet soil bearing immediately before placing concrete, but do not soften bearing surfaces. AAW 3.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Place and tie reinforcing in position and secure against displacement. Tie all splices and at least 25% of all intersections, but in no case tie less than necessary to maintain secure position. Except as indicated otherwise, lap splices at least 40 bar diameters. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. Maintain clear spacing between parallel bars at least the greatest of the following: 1-1/2", one and one-half the maximum aggregate size, or two times the bar diameter. 1. Provide chairs, bolsters, spacers and hangers as needed to maintain at least minimum concrete coverage over steel. Provide plastic tipped accessories where finished work will be exposed to view. Turn tie wire back into center of form to avoid exposed wire. B. Place welded wire fabric reinforcement in largest flat sheets available and lap at seams at least 10". Support welded wire fabric at least Y-0" on center each way. Concrete bricks may be used instead of bolsters to support fabric reinforcing. C Do not fabricate, rebend or rework steel reinforcing at the job site. 3.04 JOINTS A. At locations indicated or a pp roved by Architect, lawk provide construction, isolation, contraction, and control joints as needed to control cracking and/or differential settlement. Provide shear transfer dowels and galvanized steel keyway sections at construction and control joints. B. Provide contraction joints at least 1/4 the depth of slabs at locations approved by Architect. Form contraction joints by saw cutting or by using removable strip inserts. 3.05 EMBEDDED WORK A. Build into work all items indicated and required to be embedded into cast- in-place concrete. Accurate place embedded items using templates and setting diagrams provided with embedded items by other trades. B. Do not embed any wood other than necessary nailing of blocks into concrete. C. Telephone and electrical conduit shall be run in concrete only when specifically approved by the Architect in writing. Do not run conduit larger than 3/4" in concrete. Only one layer of 3/4" conduit will be allowed in slabs on grade. Aluminum conduit cannot be run in concrete under any circumstances. D. Do not run plumbing pipes of any size in concrete. APRIL 1995 03300-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION I. Formwork: Contractor's option, but shall be suitable to provide straight, flat, accurately aligned surfaces within specified tolerances. Where exposed to view in the finished work, formwork shall be new and capable of providing exposed surface as specified. J. Ready-Mix Concrete: Shall comply with ASTM C94, except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this section. Batch plant shall be certified in compliance with National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association Standards. K. Waterstops: Provide dumbbell type of size indicated or approved by Architect and fabricated from polyvinyl chloride complying with CRD C572. L. Curing Compound: Provide compound complying with ASTM C309, Type 1. Where direct glue-down finished materials are indicated to be installed over concrete, provide curing compounds which are certified by their manufacturer to not impair the bonding capability of normally used construction adhesives. M. Grout: Provide non-shrink, 5000 psi minimum grout. Provide one of the following products: 1. U.S. Grout Corporation, Five Star Grout 2. Sonneborne, Sonogrout 3. Master Builders, Embeco 4. Upson, High Flow PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. The installer/erector shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts substrates and conditions. 3.02 FORMWORK A. Securely construct and brace formwork to provide concrete members and structures of sizes, shapes, elevations, profiles, alignments, and positions indicated within specified tolerances. B. Provide openings and sleeves in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Coordinate installation to ensure correct sizes and locations. C Clean and adjust forms immediately prior to placing concrete. Apply form release agent to aid form removal before placing reinforcing steel. APRIL 1995 03300-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3. Keep concrete and formwork at least 50° F for at least 96 hours after placing concrete. 4. The use of calcium chloride in any form is not permitted. C. Hot Weather: Concrete, when deposited, shall be less than 80° F. Cool the mix in a manner acceptable to the Architect if the concrete temperature is higher. 1. Comply with ACI 305 in hot weather. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, type as required. Use only one brand of cement throughout project. Limit temperature of cement to 140° F when delivered to batching plant. B. Aggregates: ASTM C33. Provide aggregates with long history of successful use in similar work and conditions. Grade fine aggregate from 1/4" to fines; grade coarse aggregate from 1/4" to size. C Water: Clean and drinkable and free from impurities which are detrimental to concrete. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260; use only admixtures which have After been accepted in mix designs. Provide one of the following products: 1. W.R. Grace, Darex AEA 2. Master Builders, MBVR 3. Sika Chemical, Sika, AER E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494; use only admixtures which have been accepted in mix designs. Provide one of the following products: 1. W.R. Grace, WRDA 2. Master Builders, Pozzolith 3. Sika Chemical, Plastocete F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, new, deformed, unless indicated otherwise. Tag and identify reinforcing with waterproof marks for checking, sorting and placing. G. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, new, rectangular. Tag and identify reinforcing with waterproof marks for checking, sorting and placing. H. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear, virgin polyethylene sheeting in largest sheets available to minimize seams. APRIL 1995 03300-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3. Entrained Air Content: 4% to 6% for concrete exposed to freezing #00* and 2% to 4% for all other concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4". 5. Minimum Cement Content: 5.5 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete. B. Mix Design Revisions: When necessary because of job conditions, weather, test results or other reasonable circumstances, mix designs may be adjusted if submitted to and approved by the Architect in advance of use. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each proprietary material used and for all other materials as requested by Architect. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and erection of steel reinforcing. Provide sufficient information and detail so that reinforcing can be placed without the use of the Contract Drawings. Provide information on the number of pieces, sizes, grade of steel, accessories and all other information needed for fabrication and placement. Show coordination of reinforcing with all items which are to be embedded into concrete construction. C Mix Designs: Submit written reports for each proposed mix design at least 15 working days in advance of start of work. Include specific information on quantities of admixtures and water used. D. Test Reports: Submit certified reports for tests required within 48 hours after tests are made. Provide three copies each to Architect, Contractor, and concrete producer. E. Dray Slips: Provide concrete delivery slips showing job name and location, date and time of delivery, quantity of concrete, quality and type of concrete, admixtures and all other relevant information. Submit at the end of each week. 1.0 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather: Protect concrete from damage and reduced strength or performance due to weather extremes during mixing, placing and curing. B. Cold Weather: Unless special precautions are taken to protect concrete, do not work when temperatures are below 40° F or when temperatures are expected to fall below 40° F within 72 hours after placing concrete. 1. Comply with ACI 306 in cold weather. 2. Maintain concrete temperature of at least 60° F. Reinforcement forms and ground in contact with concrete shall be free of frost. APRIL 1995 03300-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Quality Control: Perform testing and sampling during concrete works as follows: 1. Sample concrete in compliance with ASTM C172. 2. Make on slump test in compliance with ASTM C143 for each load at discharge from truck. 3. Make one air content test in compliance with ASTM D173 for each set of compressive strength specimens. 4. Make one set of compressive strength tests in compliance with ASTM C39 for each 50 yards of concrete or fraction thereof. Test one specimen at 7 days, one specimen at 28 days, and retain one specimen for future testing if needed. C. Reference Standards: Strictly comply with the following referenced standards: 1. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ACI 614, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, and Placing Concrete. 4. ACI 306, Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 6. ACI 315, Recommended Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 7. ACI 302, Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 8. CRSI, Reinforced Concrete - A Manual of Standard Practice. 9. CRSI, Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. 10. CRSI, Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports. 1.06 MIX DESIGN A. Mix Design: Proportion mixes in compliance with ACI 301. Provide concrete of consistency which will work easily into comers and around reinforcement with the method of placement to be used and will not segregate or allow excess free water to collect on the surface. Provide concrete having the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: As shown on the drawings. 2. Slump: 3:" to 4" A. APRIL 1995 03300-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The work of this section specifies all cast-in-place concrete required for the project including, but is not limited to, floor slabs, concrete stairs, grade beams, footings and bases, and other miscellaneous concrete work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the work of this section. 1. Carefully review all of the Contract Documents for anchor bolts, sleeves, anchors, and all other items which must be cast into concrete construction. 2. Items needed to be embedded in concrete work are not described in detail and must be determined through careful coordination of all subcontractors and building trades. B. Site Concrete: Section 02515, SITE CONCRETE. 1.03 REFERENCES A. All of the Contract documents, including General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this section. 1.04 INTENT A. A major intent of the work of this section is to provide structurally sound cast-in-place concrete required for the project. When exposed to view in the finished work, concrete shall have smooth, flat, uniform surface texture and appearance. B. Remove and replace work in sufficiently large sections as directed by the Architect, if this intent is not met. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: The Owner will provide the services of an independent testing agency acceptable to the Architect and authorizes having jurisdiction to design concrete mixes, to test and evaluate materials, and to certify the work of this section. 1. Certificates signed by concrete producer may be submitted instead of material testing when acceptable to the Architect. APRIL 1995 03300-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION E. Lawns, sod: Vigorous, strongly rooted sod, 2 years old. F. Soil amendments and fertilizer: Nursery recommended corrections and additions to tested soil. G. Mulch: Well aged ground or shredded bark. H. Accessories: 1. Edgings: All heart redwood or staked steel. 2. Gravel: Washed, river-bed gravel. 3. Plastic sheet: 8 mil thick black polyethylene. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with approved submittals. Install landscape work in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Prepare topsoil by mixing fertilizer with loam. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 2 lbs of actual nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. for plant beds and 2 lbs per inch of trunk for tree pits. C. Install soil mix to a depth of 18" in plant beds. D. For seaded lawns, apply seed at rate of 5 pounds per 1000 square feet. E. For lawns with sod, place sod tightly, with grain in same direction. F. Excavate as required for trees and shrubs. G. Install plant material and backfill with soil mix. Stake and guy trees. Water thoroughly. Allow for soil settlement. H. Replace damaged materials. I. Trees and shrubs to be removed from the site will balled, burlapped, transported and protected for replanting at a site selected by owner. J. The contractor shall maintained lawns for three mowings. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 02900-2 LANDSCAPING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide topsoil and lawns. B. Provide plants and trees. C. Provide related materials such as soil amendments and mulch. D. Provide related landscape accessories such as edgings, gravel, and plastic sheet. E. Provide pruning and relocation of existing plant materials. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data, mock-ups, test reports, warranty, maintenance data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Warrant trees and shrubs for a period of one year after date of Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth and except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse by others, or natural phenomena. Replace unsatisfactory plant material at end of warranty period. One replacement is required. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Plants and trees: Balled and burlapped and graded in accordance with American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1. B. All existing top soil shall be stock piled on site, location to be defined by owner. C. Topsoil: From site stockpile with additional fertile, friable topsoil from local source. D. Lawns, seed: New crop seed mixture. APRIL 1995 02900-1 LANDSCAPING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION L. Provide hardened tactile warning surface concrete finish for handicapped ramp to meet requirements of ADA and local codes. Products and Systems by Increte Systems, Tampa FL set the standards of quality and "O'' durability required for this work. Conform fully to manufacturer's printed specifications. M. Provide concrete for misc. site items as noted on the drawings. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 02515-5 SITE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Reinforce concrete work as shown on the drawings. Allow for minimum 2" inch concrete cover. B. Do not extend reinforcing through expansion and contraction joints. 3.05 FORMING EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Place expansion and contraction joints as shown on the plans. Where possible, make joints of curbs coincide with joints in walks. When sidewalks abut building, provide continuous joint filler. B. Fit joints with filler of required profiles, set perpendicular to longitudinal axis of walks, curbs, and gutters. Recess 1/8 inch below finished concrete surface. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish, free of open texturing and exposed aggregate. B. Avoid working mortar to surface. C. Make 1/4 inch wide hand tooled dummy joints at 5 foot intervals, or as noted on the Drawings. D. Round all edges, including edges of dummy and expansion an contraction joints, with 1/2 radius edging tool. E. Where paved surfaces are adjacent to walks, make concrete curbs integral with walks. Make expansion an contraction joints of curbs coincide with walk joints. Provide dummy joint at line between walks and curbs. F. Provide exposed surfaces of walks and steps with heavy broom finish and hand tooled smooth borders. Curbs to be floated smooth. G. Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels, or grade by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet when measure with straightedge. H. Apply curing compound on finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I. Concrete base for precast concrete pavers and brick paving shall be as detailed on the drawings and provided with 1-1/2" weep holes 6' o.c. each way. J. Concrete service area pavement shall be placed over leveling course of #411 stone, compacted as required, where existing base material is deemed adequate by the Architect. Any sub-standard areas shall be excavated and backfilled or filled as in Section 02200. Joints shall be sawcut 2" deep. Finish to be rough broom texture. K. Provide concrete for sit walls ad detailed on the drawings. APRIL 1995 02515-4 STTE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2.04 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES A. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting, and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete. B. Joint Filler: Minimum 1/2" thick asphaltic impregnated vegetable fiber and finely divided mineral filler, ASTM D1751. C. Concrete Curing Compound: ASTM C309, non-yellowing, non-staining liquid membrane forming type. 2.0 5 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and proportion to produce minimum 4000 psi concrete at 28 days with maximum slump of 3-4 inches and 4-1/2 to 7-1/2 percent air entrainment, ASTM C94. B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when acceptable to Architect. Use of admixtures shall not relax cold weather placement requirements. Do not use calcium chloride. C. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when acceptable to Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SUB-GRADE Aftk A. Ensure rough grading has brought sub-grade to required elevations. B. Fill soft spots and hollows with additional fill. C. Level and compact sub-grade, to receive granular base for concrete walks, curbs, and gutters, to 95% maximum dry density. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF GRAVEL FILL A. Place and level gravel fill over prepared sub-grade to a compacted depth of 4 inches (or as shown on the plans) true to lines and levels. Compact to 95% maximum dry density. 3.03 FORMING A. Form vertical surfaces to full depth and securely position to required lines and levels. Ensure form ties are not placed so as to pass through concrete. B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit easy dismantling and stripping, and to prevent damage to concrete during formwork removal. 3.04 PLACING REINFORCING APRIL 1995 02515-3 SITE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION F. ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. G. ASTM C308 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. H. ASTM A185 - Welded steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement. I. Massachusetts Dept. of Transportation "Construction & Materials Specifications", current edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FELL MATERIALS A. Gravel Base: Angular pit run crushed natural carbonate stone; free from shale, clay, and friable materials and debris; graded within following limits: #304. Sieve Size % Passing 2 inches 100 1 inch 70-90 3/4 inch 50 to 85 No. 4 25 to 60 No. 40 7 to 30 No. 200 0 to 15 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150; normal - type 1. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. G Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious material. D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: 60 ksi yield strength; deformed billet steel bars; ASTM A615; galvanized finish; size as detailed. B. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge annealed type, or patented system acceptable to Architect. C Welded steel wire fabric: plain, galvanized ASTM A185 sized as detailed. APRIL 1995 02515-2 SITE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 02515 SITE CONCRETE ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Prepare sub-grade to receive base course materials for walks; curbs, steps and pavements. B. Place and compact base course materials for walks; curbs, steps and pavements. C Concrete walks, curbs, steps and pavements complete with reinforcement. D. Concrete for site walls. E. Provide handicapped access ramps as indicated on drawings to meet requirements of local codes and ADA. D. Misc. site concrete. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Excavation, fill and backfill: Section 02200, EARTHWORK. B. Concrete work: Section 03300, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. , C Painting and marking: Section 02510, ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. B. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. C ASTM C260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. APRIL 1995 02515-1 SITE CONCRETE LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase. Proof roll and check for areas requiring additional compaction. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning of work means acceptance of subbase. C. Apply prime coat to prepared subbase. Apply tack coat to previous laid work and adjacent in-place concrete surfaces. D. Place asphalt concrete at minimum temperature of 225 degrees F in strips not less than 10' wide overlapping previous strips. Complete entire base course before beginning surface course. E. Construct curbs to dimensions indicated or if not indicated to match existing. If above conditions are not applicable then provide standard shapes. Provide tack coat between curb and pavement. F. Use 10 ton steel tandem roller. A 5 ton roller may be use for walks and confined areas of light duty paving. Begin rolling when pavement can withstand weight of roller. Roll while still hot to obtain maximum density and to eliminate roller marks. G. Test in-place asphalt work for thickness and smoothness. Remove and replace defective work and patch to eliminate evidence of patching. Provide the following thickness and smoothness unless required otherwise: 1. Subbase course: 6" gravel base 2. Base course: 2 1/2" after rolling, hot laid plant mix. 3. Surface course: 1-1/2" plus or minus 1/4" after rolling, hot laid plant mix. 4. Surface course smoothness: Plus or minus 1/8" in ten feet. No ponding of water is acceptable. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 02510-2 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 02510 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.0 SUMMARY A. Provide asphalt concrete paving for following applications and prepared subbase and compacted base. 1. Roads. 2. Parking areas. 3. Driveways. 4. Walkways. B. Provide striping for parking, roadway, and handicapped markings. C. Provide and install curbing to match existing as shown on drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data, test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Prime coat: Cut-back asphalt. B. Tack coat: Emulsified asphalt. C. Asphalt cement: AASHTO M226 and as required by local authorities. D. Aggregate: Crushed stone or crushed gravel. E. Traffic paint: Quick-drying chlorinated-rubber alkyd type, color as approved. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Asphalt/aggregate Mixture: Comply with local DPW Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges. Class as required by loading and use. APRIL 1995 02510-1 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING LE9415 CAFEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Variation of moisture content in fill and backfill materials shall be limited to Optimum Moisture (-1% to +3%). Moisture content shall be as uniformly distributed as practical within each lift, and shall be adjusted as necessary to obtain the specified compaction. B. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to be compacted to the specified densities shall be moisture conditioned by sprinkling, disking, windrowing, or other method approved by the Architect. 1. Material conditioned by sprinkling shall have water added before compaction. Uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to obtain sufficient moisture content. The Contractor shall maintain sufficient hoses and/or water distributing equipment at the site for this purpose. C Material containing excess moisture shall be dried to required Optimum Moisture Content before it is placed and compacted. Excessively moist soils shall be removed and replaced or shall be scarified by use of plows, discs, or other approved methods, and air-dried to meet the above requirements. D. Materials which are within the moisture requirements specified above, but which display pronounced elasticity or deformation under the action of earth-moving and compaction equipment, shall be reduced to Optimum Moisture Content, or below, to secure stability. E. In the event of sudden downpours or other inclement weather, exposed subgrades and fills which become inundated or excessively moistened shall have excess water removed and soil dried as specified above. END OF SECTION low APRIL 1995 02200-12 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION subgrade Area or structure not 85 12 90 otherwise noted Building 90 6 95 Concrete Building 90 8 95 entrance or exit pad Footing, foundation, manhole, or similar structure, and within 2 ft. horizontally 90 8 95 COMPACTION TABLE(CONT) Pavement, including 1 ft. beyond edge 90 8 95 Pipe cover -- 6 95 D. Compaction requirements shall apply to material directly below the indicated supported item (base, course, footing, or structure), and to all material above the undisturbed earth beneath fill, and enclosed by the following planes: I. Horizontal plane at the elevation of the bottom of the supported item (base course, footing, or structure), within a perimeter line located 2 ft. beyond the exterior face or edge of item. 2. Flat planes extending from the perimeter line downward and outward at 45° angle with the horizontal, to where the planes intersect undisturbed earth. Where zones of higher and lower percentages of compaction overlap, that of the higher percentage shall apply. E. Compaction of backfill in excavation shall be to a density not less than that required of the surrounding area fill. F. Equipment and methods employed to achieve specified compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's representative, and equipment shall be replaced and methods revised as directed until specified compaction is obtained. G. Compaction of each lift shall be completed before placing of the next lift is started. H. Backfill adjacent to wall, conduit, pipe, and similar item, and in other areas where wheeled equipment cannot safely be employed, shall be placed in 8 in. thick layers, to the specified compaction, using mechanical tampers. 3.06 MOISTURE CONTROL Amw APRIL 1995 02200-11 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Backfilling shall be done in any area only after the Owner or representative of testing laboratory has inspected and approved subgrade, foundations, or other work in excavations. Notice that the work is ready for inspection shall be given promptly, and sufficient time shall be allowed for making necessary examinations. C. In order to prevent lateral movement, care shall be exercised in placing backfill adjacent to foundation wall, footing, utility line, and other structures. Backfill on opposite sides of such items shall be kept at approximately the same elevation as backfilling progresses to prevent unbalanced earth pressure. During backfilling the difference in elevation of backfill on opposite sides of the structure shall not exceed 12 in. 1. Shoring shall be employed as necessary to protect such items. 2. Foundation walls and footings have been designed to act with other portions of the structure to withstand the loads they will bear in completed project; they have not been designed to withstand construction loads or unbalanced earth or equipment loadings. D. Backfill shall be placed carefully and shall not damage items against which it is placed. E. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed backfill shall be ± 2 in. from true grade indicated, and variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100 sq. ft. area. 1. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete foundation shall be plus 1/2 in. and minus 2 in. 2. Tolerance for backfill beneath concrete slab on grade shall be plus 1/2 in. and minus 1-1/2 in. 3.05 COMPACTION A. Degree of compaction shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557. B. Except as otherwise noted, fill and backfill materials shall be placed in successive horizontal lifts which do not exceed specified thickness. C. Subgrade and backfill of indicated areas or structures shall be compacted as specified in the following table: COMPACTION TABLE Area Subgrade Max. Compacted Compaction or Compaction Thickness Per of Each Lift Structure Minimum % Lift - in. Maximum Above pipe cover to 85 12 90 APRIL 1995 02200-10 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION construction of new work indicated, shall be abandoned, demolished, and/or removed only with the approval of the Owner's representative. 2. Pipe which is to be abandoned in place shall be suitably and permanently plugged at end. Plug shall be stiff concrete, with a thickness, measured parallel to pipe axis of 1 pipe diameter, for pipe less than 18 in. diameter. Both inner and outer faces of plug for pipe equal to or greater than 18 in. diameter shall be formed. Pipe less than 4 in. diameter need not be plugged. 3.02 PLACING EMBANKMENTS A. Filling shall be done in any area only after the testing laboratory or Owner's representative has reviewed subgrade. B. Benching: Fills placed on existing slopes which exceed 6 ft. horizontal to 1 ft. vertical shall be keyed or benched into the existing slope not less than 5 ft. to prevent the formation of slippage planes. C Compaction at End of Day: Areas undergoing filling shall be smooth-rolled before the end of the work day to seal and protect these areas from rainfall infiltration during the night. D. Except as otherwise noted, tolerance of top surface of completed fill areas shall be +/- 2 in. from true grade indicated. Variations from indicated tolerance shall approximately compensate within each 100 sq. ft. area. .• 3.0 3 BIDDING A. Minimum width of bedding material shall be at least as wide as the item to be installed on it. Where width of bed is less than full width of trench, concrete or "Granular Fill" shall be placed adjacent to bedding material to fill full width of the trench, and shall be compacted with bedding material. I. Width of bedding for sewer pipe shall extend full width of trench excavation. B. Where bed is damaged during excavation or while placing pipe, or otherwise, it shall be repaired to specified grade, contour, and compaction before weight of pipe is placed on it. C Bedding material and embedment material for utilities will be furnished, placed, and compacted under the appropriate utility specification section. 3.04 BACKFILL A. Excavation below finished grades shall be backfilled. Temporary planking, timbering, forms, debris, and refuse shall be removed before backfill is placed. APRIL 1995 02200-9 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION D. As excavation approaches underground utilities and structures, excavation shall be done by hand tools. Such manual excavation is incidental to normal excavation and no special payment will be made. E. Excavation shall include satisfactory disposal of excavated material not employed as backfill or fill materials. F. Excavation for pipe and other items shall be carried far enough below underside of item to accommodate bedding material. G. Excavations which extend below indicated or specified levels ("over- excavations"), shall be filled to those levels with concrete having a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 2,000 psi if in rock, or with compacted Granular Fill, if in earth. H. If bearing surface of subgrade which is to receive fill, concrete footing, structure, or other construction becomes softened, disturbed, or unstable, unsuitable material shall be removed down to a firm bearing surface and replaced with suitable material. Subgrade shall then be protected from further disturbance until construction item is placed. I. Excavations shall not be wider than required to set, brace, and remove forms for concrete, install piping, or perform other necessary work. Width of trench at 12 in. above top of pipe or conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit shall be less than the outside diameter of the pipe or the conduit + 3 ft. Sides of trench above this level shall be sloping, at an angle 30 degrees or less from vertical, from this level to grade. In materials where sloping walls are not stable, trench walls shall be sheeted. J. Rock excavation by blasting shall be done in strict accordance with applicable laws and ordinances. Explosives shall be stored on-site only when blasting is in progress. When the need for explosives has passed, they shall be removed from the site. 1. Surfaces of rock foundation shall be sufficiently rough to bond well with the masonry and embankments to be built and, if required, shall be cut to rough benches or steps. 2. Before masonry is built upon rock, the rock shall be freed from all vegetation, dirt, clay, shale, excessively cracked rock, water, ice, and other objectionable substances. Picking, wedging, streams of water under high pressure, stream jets,and other effective means shall be used to clean exposed rock. 3. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, rock shall be excavated to a depth 6 in. or more below bottom of structures. K. Below-Ground Demolition 1. Underground construction, pipe, and similar items indicated on the Drawings as to be demolished or removed, shall be demolished and/or removed. Other items, not indicated on the Drawings, which impede APRIL 1995 02200-8 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1-1/2 in. 100 No. 4 20 - 60 No. 40 10 - 35 No. 200 0 - 8 2. Structural Fill shall be a gravelly sand or sandy gravel, graded within the following limits: Sieve Size % Pasaing_¢v Wei" 6 in. 100 No. 4 30 - 80 No. 40 5 - 30 No. 200 0 - 8 3 / Common Fill shall be backrun sand, gravel, or mixture thereof, graded within the following limits: Sieve Size % Pac ing ,, by Weigh 6 in. 100 No. 4 30 - 90 No. 200 0 - 15 4. Sand Fill shall be sand, graded within the following limits: Sieve Size % Pasting by Weight No. 4 100 No. 300 0 - g PARU 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAWATION A. Sheeting, shoring, bracing, pumping, bailing, and other incidental work necessary to make and maintain excavations and keep them free from water at all times during placing of concrete, utility lines, and fill backfill materials, shall be performed or supplied as required. Fill and backfill shall be placed in dry or dewatered areas only. B. Sheeting shall be installed where required to maintain safe and workable conditions in excavations. Sheeting, including necessary wales and struts, shall be selected and designed by the Contractor. Use of sheeting shall equal or exceed minimum required for safety and/or conformance to law. C. Structures, pipes, pavement, earth, and other property liable to damage from excavation operations shall be braced, under-pinned, and supported as required to prevent damage and movement. APRIL 1995 02200-7 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION +, B. As construction proceeds, the Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner's representative prior to start of earthwork operations requiring inspection and/or testing. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining test samples of soil materials proposed to be used and transporting them to the site sufficiently in advance of time planned for use of these materials for testing of materials to be completed. Use of these proposed materials by the Contractor prior to testing and approval or rejection shall be at the Contractor's risk. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE OF MATERIALS A. Material shall be obtained from required on-site excavation, to the extent that suitable material is available, and from off-site sources, to the extent that suitable material is not available from on-site excavations. 2.02 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. On-site materials for use in compacted backfill shall be natural, inorganic, granular soil, taken from areas of excavation after stripping of topsoil and removal of unsuitable material. B. Material containing organic matter, topsoil, organic silt, peat, or soft or frost-susceptible soil is unsuitable for any of the following areas: Backfill beneath building area Backfill beneath pavement and within 5 ft. of subgrade Bearing strata material Bedding C Backfill materials shall be free from rocks greater than 8 in. in diameter or length, having largest dimension greater than 3/4 lift thickness, or greater than 1/2 ft. in volume, and foreign matter, such as construction debris, trash, wood, roots, leaves, sod, organic matter, or soft clay and silt. Sound sieves of building stone, masonry, and concrete from on-site sources subject to the same size limitations as stone, may be employed in backfill. Individual pieces shall be mixed into general backfill material, leaving no voids between pieces. Backfill shall be clean, non-organic material, of non-swelling character, capable of being readily compacted to form a solid, stable embankment. Materials containing ice or frozen lumps shall not be employed. D. Backfill material shall be well graded within the specified limits. Gradation of materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C136. 1. Granular Fill shall be well graded natural sand and gravel, graded within the following limits: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight APRIL 1995 02200-6 EARTHWORK_ LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Do not excavate!to full indicated depth when freezing temperatures may Awk be expected, unless footings or slabs can be poured immediately after the excavation has been completed. Protect the excavation from frost if placing of concrete is delayed. B. Completed foundations which have not been backfilled shall be protected from freezing by temporary additional earth cower, insulating blankets, heaters, or other methods acceptable to the Architect. C Frozen material shall not be placed as fill or backfill. 1.12 SHORING AND SHEETING A. Provide shoring, sheeting and/or bracing at excavations, as required, to prevent collapse of earth at side of excavations. B. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. C Remove sheeting and shoring and the like, as backfilling operations progress, taking all necessary precautions to prevent collapse of excavation sides. 1.13 ROCK A. Rock - shall be defined as sound and solid mass, layer, or ledge of mineral matter in place of such hardness and texture that it: 1. Mechanical Defi nition of 0^,t,- Cannot be effectively loosened or broken down by ripping in a single pass with a late model tractor-mounted hydraulic ripper equipped with one digging point of standard manufacturer's design adequately sized for use with and propelled by a crawler type tractor rated between 210- and 240-net flywheel horsepower, operating in low gear, or 2. Manual Definition of-Rock- In areas where the use of the ripper described above is impracticable, rock defined as sound material of such hardness and texture that it cannot be loosened or broken by a 6 lb. drifting pick. The drifting pick shall have a handle not less than 34 in. in length. 1.14 COORDINATION A. Prior to start of earthwork the Contractor shall arrange an on-site meeting with the Owner's representative for the purpose of establishing Contractor's schedule of operations and scheduling inspection procedures and requirements. APRIL 1995 02200-5 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION property. Protect existing structures and foundations from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of, and without cost to the Owner. Existing roads, sidewalks, and curbs damaged during the project work shall be repaired or replaced to their original condition at the completion of operations. The Contractor shall replace, at his own cost, existing bench marks, monuments, and other reference points which are disturbed or destroyed. C Buried structures, utility lines, etc., including those which project less than 18 in. above grade, which are subject to damage fsrom construction equipment shall be clearly marked to indicate the hazard. Markers shall indicate limits of danger areas, by means which will be clearly visible to operators of trucks and other construction equipment, and shall be maintained at all times until completion of Project. 1. 0 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, adequate pumping and drainage facilities to keep excavated areas sufficiently dry from ground water and/or surface runoff so as not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground or footing and slab subgrades. B. The Contractor shall grade and ditch the site as necessary to direct surface runoff away from open excavations and subgrade surfaces. Positive drainage (minimum 1.0% slope) shall be maintained at all times. C. Water from trenches and excavations shall be disposed of in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to existing work, nor to the work completed or in progress, nor to the surface of roads, walks, and streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. Methods of disposal of pumped effluent shall not cause erosion or siltation, and shall conform to requirements of erosion and sediment control. D. Under no circumstances place fills, pour concrete, or install piping and appurtenances in excavations containing free water. E. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times to remove water. F. Where, in the opinion of the Owner's representative, pumping of excavations is not effective in maintaining a dry firm subgrade, other dewatering methods acceptable to the Owner's!representative, shall be employed. 1.11 FROST PROTECTION APRIL 1995 02200-4 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION I. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill in the building area and under paved areas. 2. Observation of compaction of building excavation subgrade and paved area subgrades. 3. Observation during placement and compaction of fills. 4. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as required. 5. Observation of footing installation. 6. Observation of subgrade preparation for slab-on-grade and paved areas. 7. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation, and compaction tests at a frequency and at locations determined by the testing laboratory. The results of these tests will be submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis so that the Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated deficiencies. During the course of construction, the testing laboratory will advise the Architect in writing with copy to Contractor if, at any time, in his opinion, the work is not in substantial conformity with the Contract Documents. 8. Observation of fills following interruption by rains or other `.. inclement weather. B. The testing laboratory's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing laboratory, nor any observations and testing performed by it shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work. C The Owner reserves the right to modify or waive testing laboratory services. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. A 10 lb. sample of each off-site material proposed for use, and of any on- site material when so requested by the Architect shall be submitted for approval. I. Samples required in connection with compaction tests will be taken and transported by the testing laboratory. 1.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. The work shall be executed in such manner as to prevent any damage to adjacent property and any other property and existing improvements such as, but not limited to: streets, curbs, paving, utility lines and structures, monuments, bench marks and other public and private APRIL 1995 02200-3 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): T 191 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method T 239 Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C 33 Concrete Aggregates C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates C 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-1b. (4.54-kg.) Rammer and 18-in. (457-mm.) Drop. 1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site, consult records and drawings of adjacent structures and of existing utilities and their connections, and note all conditions which may influence the work of this Section. B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all conditions affecting work under this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions. C Before beginning work the Contractor will, at his own expense, conduct subsurface testing. This testing shall include the use of an AUTOMATIC ELECTRONIC UTILITY LINE TRACER (Metrotech 810 or Equal) to locate all existing utilities in the affected area. 1.06 INFORMATION NOT GUARANTEED A. Information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions, natural phenomena, and existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available. Such information is furnished only for the information and convenience of the Contractor, and the accuracy or completeness of this information is not guaranteed. 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to retain a testing laboratory to perform on-site observation and testing in accordance with Section 01400, QUALITY CONTROL during the construction operation. The services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to the following: APRIL 1995 02200-2 EARTHWORK NOW LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to complete the earthwork which includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Site excavation, filling, and grading. 2. Excavation and backfill for buildings and structures. 3. Excavation and backfill for utilities. 4. Preparation of subgrade for slabs, pavements, and landscaping. 5. Sheeting, bracing, and support of excavations as necessary. 6. Drainage and dewatering as necessary to!perform work in the dry. 7. Placement and compaction of fills. 8. Underground testing for utility locations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Inspection and testing: Section 01400, QUALITY CONTROL. B. Building demolition and maintenance of clean roadways: Section 02072, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING. C. Furnishing and installing utility!bedding and embedment materials is included under the appropriate utility specification section/ D. Aggregate base courses beneath paving, is included under the applicable paving specification section. E. Provision of a Professional Land Surveyor to provide survey control: Section 01400, QUALITY CONTROL. 1.0 3 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS,AND CONDTTIOOS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIWISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. APRIL 1995 02200-1 EARTHWORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 4. Plumbing fixtures. 9. Disposal: Remove and legally dispose of off-the-site all materials removed which are not designated on Drawings to be reused on the project or salvaged for Owner's use. Contractor shall, upon removal from the site, have rights of salvage of the materials. C Cleaning: 1. Upon completion of selective demolition work in any exterior or interior work are; remove all loose and crumbling finish materials, paint, etc., and all loose dust and debris, brush down all exposed surfaces, and leave the area broom clean, ready for subsequent work on the Contract. 2. Following broom cleaning, thoroughly clean all exposed interior surfaces throughout which are to be left exposed in the finished work and all exterior and interior surfaces to receive new finishes, including painting, in the finished work. Clean in a manner suitable for each of the materials, such as to cause no damage to same or to surrounding materials to remain. Except for items subject to water damage, provide wet cleaning with bristle brush, clean water, and caustic detergent followed by careful, controlled, thorough, rinsing with fresh, clean water. Clean items subject to water damage by effective dry method(s). Exercise extreme care to control wash water and rinse water run-off, splashing, etc., to prevent damage to the building surfaces or finishes to remain. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 02072-4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. Carry out selective demolition work with utmost care, using appropriate and safe tools and methods to assure that the building structures or finishes are not damaged or are not subjected to damaging shock or vibration. Do not endanger building structure by cutting, removal, overloading, or other cause. Contractor will coordinate with owner to ensure noise control methods and the timing of the work meets with his satisfaction. 3. Cut or remove work causing openings in exterior walls, roofs, or other elements providing weather protection, only after temporary weatherproof enclosures have been provided under TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section. 4. Repair damage done to elements of building to remain, except repairs specified to be provided under other Sections. Provide neat cutting and trimming of elements to remain wherever cutting is required, to provide straight, true, and sharp, cut-lines and edges. Do not overcut or overdrill, nor break, puncture, tear down, or otherwise damage existing construction beyond the limits needed for proper preparation of openings or for proper passage of penetrating elements. Where existing finishes, except paint or varnish, are indicated to be removed, remove down to bare subsurfaces without causing damage to the subsurfaces. 5. Do not allow debris to accumulate. Sprinkle during handling and loading to reduce dust. Either store debris outside of building temporarily in dumpster type container(s) or remove from premises daily. Carry debris out in containers or drop in fully enclosed chutes, in no case passing through, throwing from, or dropping free from windows, wall openings, etc. 6. Block or effectively filter return air systems in a safe manner to prevent intrusion of dust into remaining air handling systems. 7. Items to be Reused: Carefully remove all existing items specified or designated on Drawings to be reused on the work in manner to assure Ieast possible damage. After removal, store in protected storage areas for later refurbishing and/or reinstallation, as specified. Replace with equivalent new items all items designated to be reused which, in the opinion of the Architect, have become too damaged to be satisfactorily reused, without additional cost to the Owner. 8. Salvage of Items for Owner: Carefully remove and store in designated storage areas within the existing building all existing item(s) specified or designated on Drawings to be removed for Owner's future use. Items to be salvaged and delivered to Owner: 1. Doors and hardware. 2. Toilet accessories. 3. Light fixtures. APRIL 1995 02072-3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION be removed by the demolition contractor. The completion of any work not covered under the separate contracts of the subcontractors will be the responcibility of the General Contractor. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1. Weather protection enclosures, dust . barriers and curtaining and miscellaneous protective barriers. 2. Disconnecting, plugging, capping, etc., of existing mechanical and electrical work to be removed and demolition and removal of portions of existing mechanical and electrical work to be removed which are indicated and/or specified to be removed by Mechanical and Electrical trades. 3. Pest and rodent control. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this section. B. Examine all drawings and all other sections of the specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this section. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION A. Phasing and Commencement of Work: It is intended that by the date of execution of the Contract agreement the work areas for work of this contract will be fully evacuated by Owner and ready for demolition work to begin. However, no work shall be started in or on the existing building for any of the phases until prior written approval has been issued to the Contractor by the Owner, such approval not to be unreasonably withheld. B. Selective Demolition: 1. Do all work to conform to the governing laws and building codes. All permits required for the selective demolition work shall be procured by the Contractor. a. Provide unobstructed legal exits at all times. b. Meet Requirements of Clean Air Act. C. Provide demolition so as not to release hazardous materials into the environment. APRIL 1995 02072-2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 02072 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Scope: Include all selective demolition and cleaning work as required to complete the work of the Contract as indicated. Include, but do not limit to: 1. All selective demolition work within, on, or relative to, the existing building as specifically called for on the Drawings and as required to accommodate the additions and renovation work, except specific demolition and removal work specified to be done as work of other Sections. 2. Cutting of all grooves, chases, openings, holes, etc., required for all trades through or into existing construction, except cutting and drilling specified to be done as work of other Sections. 3. Removal from site and legal disposal of all removed materials, trash, debris, etc., removed by selective demolition operations, except any items indicated to be reused on the project or to be stored by Owner's future use. 4. Careful removal of items indicated to be reused on the project, and Aak safe storage until time for reinstallation. 5. Careful removal of items indicated to be salvaged for Owner's future use, including safe storage within the existing building. 6. General cleaning of all interior and exterior work areas of the building followed by thorough cleaning and surface preparation of all interior surfaces to be exposed in the finished work, and all interior and exterior surfaces to receive subsequent new finishes, in the finished work. 7. Provision of Sidewalk Tunnels if required as indicated in Section 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES. 8. Full cleaning of affected streets and roadways with sweepers and by any means necessary to remove debris, dust, earth, rocks, etc. caused by the construction of this contract on a regular basis in order to maintain a clean roadway at all times. Work shall be accomplished to the satisfaction of the Owner's designated representative. B. NOTE: It is the intent of this specification that demolition work be done by the demolition contractor. It will be the responcibility of each trade to mark and coordinate with the demolition contractor for all items in his trade that are to remain in place, be salvaged or to be removed. The individual trades shall disconnect, cap, or deactivate all items that are to APRIL 1995 02072-1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND CLEANING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number. 1.04 FORA OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: 1. Size 8-1/2 in. X 11 in., punched sheets for standard three-ring binder. a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS".List: a. Title of Project. b. Name of Contractor. C Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 1.05 THE OF SUBMITTALS A. For equipment or components parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction: 1. Submit documents within ten days after inspection and acceptance. B. Otherwise make submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. C For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.06 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, service, and maintenance contracts as specified in respective section of Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION l APRIL 1995 01740-2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 'Oak, PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C Co-execute submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General warranty of construction: GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Operating and maintenance data: Section 01730, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA. C Warranties and Bonds required by Specific Products: Divisions 2 through 16. 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: Two each. C Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item including: 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm, with name of principal, address, and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedures in case of failure. ---e+ APRIL 1995 01740-1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION C Submit four copies of approved data in final form within ten days after final inspection or acceptance. 1.09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection or acceptance, instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operating and maintenance. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION s. APRIL 1995 01730-7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. Circuit directories of panelboards. a. Electrical service. .•k, b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a.. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.08 SUBMITTAL SCHEDTJJLE A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to start of Work. 1. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. Submit one copy of complete data in final form 15 days prior to final inspection or acceptance. 1. Copy will be returned after final inspection or acceptance, with comments. APRIL 1995 01730-6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule. a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance, including: a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As-installed color code piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts recommendations, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. C. Contents, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. APRIL 1995 01730-5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION c. Information required for re-ordering special manufactured Awk products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. C. Summer and winter operating instructions. APRIL 1995 01730-4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. C Drawings: 1. Supplement Product Data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Include reduced photocopies or microfiche aperture cards of Project Record Drawings for Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC and Electrical work. Provide additional maintenance and operations drawings keyed to Record Drawings. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit three copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content; for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, composition. b. Color and texture designations. APRIL 1995 01730-3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. • b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 5. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and . cleanable plastic covers. 2. Maximum ring size: 1 inch. 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. 1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal including address, and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. APRIL 1995 01730-2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent Sections of the Specifications. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Record Specifications and Drawings: SECTION 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUM lVfS. C Warranties and bonds: Section 01740, WARRANTIES AND BONDS. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional operating and maintenance manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2 in. X 11 in. 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. t 4. Drawings: APRIL 1995 01730-1 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. Changes made by Architect's Supplemental Instructions or by Change Order. 1.06 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract closeout, deliver reproducible copies of each set of Record Documents to Architect for Owner. Revisions shall be neat, legible, accurate and consistent with original Drawings in quality of drafting. B. Accompanying submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each Record Document. 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECL ION Not used. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01720-3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Construction Specifications Institute Master format. C Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect. 1.04 MARKING DEVICES A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in color code designated by Architect. 1.05 RECORDING A. Maintain current, discrete sets of Record Documents for general construction (site work and architectural and structural work) and for Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC, and Electrical Work. B. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. C Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. D. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 1. Depths of various elements of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. 4. Field changes of dimensions and detail. 5. Changes made by Architect's Supplemental Instructions or Change Order. 6. Details not on original Contract Drawings. E. Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each Product and item of equipment actually installed. APRIL 1995 01720-2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01720 Amok PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIRE1,1ENTS INCLUDED A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of: 1. Project Manual and Specifications, including discrete sets of Contract Documents for: a. Site work and architectural and structural work, b. Plumbing work, c. Fire protection work, d. HVAC work, and e. Electrical work. 2. Drawings. 3. Addenda and Bulletins. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Architect's Supplemental Instructions or other written instructions. 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 7. Field test records. 8. Construction photographs. 9. Copies of building, electric, plumbing, and public safety codes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer's certificates: Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. B. Shop Drawings, etc.: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES. 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of record documents. -� APRIL 1995 01720-1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION B. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis until painting is finished. B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ skilled workers for final cleaning. B. Clean and restore adjoining surfaces and other work which was soiled or damaged superficially during the installation; replace other work damaged beyond successful restoration. Where the performance of subsequent work could possible result in damage to the complete unit or element, provide protective covering or other provisions to minimize possible damage. C. Remove, grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces. D. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. E. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine. F. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment: 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters units in units are operated during construction. 2. Do not operate equipment without filters during construction and testing. G. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. H. Before final completion and Owner-occupancy, inspect sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and work areas to verify that Work is clean. I. Food service equipment will be cleaned and adjusted by the Food Service Contractor after installationby the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall coordinate his work with the Food Service Contractor and shall make cfforts to protect equipment until final acceptance is obtained from the Owner. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01710-2 CLEANING NEW LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Execute cleaning during progress of the Work and at completion of the Work, as required by GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract and Special Conditions Relative to Cleaning Requested by the Owner: GENERAL CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Cleaning for specific Products or Work: Division 2 through 16. 1.03 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and antipollution laws. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Do not allow accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At the completion of Work remove all waste materials and rubbish from the Project as well as all tools, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials. Restore all areas used for storage of debris or rubbish to rough grade condition. Where storage of trash is designated, such storage shall be in an orderly manner as directed by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use cleaning materials that pose no hazards to health or property, and will not damage surfaces. B. Use those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site, and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and windblown debris resulting from construction operations. APRIL 1995 01710-1 CLEANING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The following are prerequisites to substantial completion. Provide the following: 1. Punch list. 2. Supporting documentation. 3. Warranties. 4. Certifications. 5. Occupancy permit. 6. Start-up and testing of building systems. 7. Change over of locks. 8. Start up and testing of all food service equipment. B. Provide the following requisites to final acceptance: 1. Final payment request with supporting affidavits. 2. Completed punch list. C. Provide a marked-up mylar set of drawings including changes which occurred during construction. D. Provide the following closeout procedures: 1. Submission of record documents. 2. Submission of maintenance manuals. 3. Training and turnover to Owner's personnel. 4. Final cleaning and touch-up. 5. Removal of temporary facilities, including all restoration and repair work required. PART 2 PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not used) END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01700-1 CONIRACI'CLOSEOUF LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION E. After installation, provide coverings to protect Products from damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed. 1.0 8 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Within 10 days after date of Contract, submit complete list of materials and equipment proposed, with names of manufacturers, trade names, and model designations. B. Options: 1. Products specified only by reference standard: Any Product meeting that standard. 2. Products specified by naming several manufacturers: Products of any named manufacturer meeting Specifications. 3. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers and "or approved equal": Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. 4. Products specified by naming only one manufacturer: No option. 1.09 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide products from one manufacturer for each type or kind as applicable. Provide secondary materials as recommended by ` manufacturers of primary materials. ,, B. Provide products selected. The College has designated standard products for use throughout the campus. Products submitted for substitution shall be submitted with acceptable documentation, and include costs of substitution including related work. C. Conditions for substitution include: 1. An 'or equal' phrase in the specifications. 2. Specified material cannot be coordinated with other work. 3. Specified material is not acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Substantial advantage is offered Owner in terms of cost, time, or other valuable consideration. D. Substitutions shall be submitted prior to award of contract, unless otherwise acceptable. Approval of shop drawings, product data, or samples is not a substitution approval unless clearly presented as a substitution at the time of submittal PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01600-3 MATERIAL AND EOUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.04 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS'INSTRUCTIONS A. When work is specified to comply with manufacturers' instructions, submit copies of published instructions as part of product data required in Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. Distribute copies as specified and maintain one set in field office as required in Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. B. Perform work in accordance with details of instructions and specified requirements. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect. 1.0 6 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules. Coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site. B. Prevent damage to and soiling of materials and equipment in transit and in handling, deliver in dry, undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging. C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. G Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to ensure that Products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. APRIL 1995 01600-2 MATERIAL AND EOUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Products. B. Workmanship. C Manufacturer's Instructions. D. Transportation and Handling. E. Storage and Protection. F. Substitutions and Product Options. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract: GENERAL CONDITIONS and MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Submittal of manufacturer's certificates: Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. C Shop Drawings, Product Data submittals: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES. D. Maintenance of approved Submittals on site: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. E. Operation and maintenance data: Section 01730, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA. F. Warranties and Bonds: Section 01740, WARRANTIES AND BONDS. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. Products include material, equipment, and systems. B. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. C Components required to be supplied in quantity within a Specification Section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as specifically required, or allowed, by Contract Documents. APRIL 1995 01600-1 MATERIAL AND EOUIPMENT LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION • APRIL 1995 01560-3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION shall notify the owner of specific areas requiring attention as soon as it is ANk evident. 1.07 DEBRIS CONTROL A. Maintain all areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris. B. Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction site, storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes. 1. Provide containers for deposit of debris as specified in Section 01710, CLEANING. 2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes. a. Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements. C Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris as specified in Section 01710, CLEANING. 1. Provide additional collections and disposals of debris whenever the periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent accumulation. 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillages and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. 1. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters. 1. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers. D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. 1. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. 2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants to atmosphere. PART 2 PRODUCTS APRIL 1995 01560-2 TEMPORARY CONTROLS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction, as necessary to provide controls over environmental conditions at the construction side and related areas under Contractor's control; remove physical evidence of temporary facilities at completion of Work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Temporary utilities: Section 01510, TEMPORARY UTILITIES. B. Cleaning: Section 01710, CLEANING. 1.03 NOISE CONTROL A. Noise levels shall not exceed those stipulated by Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 1.04 DUST CONTROL A. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from construction operations, and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere. 1.05 WATER CONTROL A. Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to Project, site, and adjoining properties. 1. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits, tunnels, and other construction areas; and to direct drainage to proper runoff. B. Provide, operate, and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to control surface and water. C. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to any portion of the site or to adjoining areas and properties. 1.06 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A. The Owner will provide pest and rodent control as necessary to prevent infestation of construction and storage areas. B. The Contractor will cooperate with the owner to coordinate and schedule rodent and pest control activities during construction. The Contractor APRIL 1995 01560-1 TEMPORARY CONTROLS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION As toilet rooms are returned to service, these are not to be used by Mk construction personnel. Contractor will be responsible for restricting access, for daily cleaning, final cleaning, maintenance, and repair if required. 3. Drinking water. Provide portable water at building. 4. Cleaning and trash removal. Contractor will be responsible for maintaining a clean work site. Work site both inside and outside building will be cleaned up each work day. Trash will be removed to dumpsters located in approved locations before the end of each work day. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01500-3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVA710N at end of work day. Contractors are directed to contact the College for special requirements. Notify Iocal fire department of telephone alert status and normal status at end of work day. 2. Building enclosure and lock-up. Contractor will insure that all windows are closed in work areas at end of each work day. Contractor will be back-charged if College personnel must perform window closure after normal working hours. Contractor will be issued building access card or key by College and will be responsible for lock-up. 3. Post "No Smoking" signs throughout the work area as required by the Owner. 4. Protection of existing finished areas is essential. a. Protect existing corridors and stairs serving the areas in which his forces are working as well as any existing floors to remain with reinforced Kraft paper, model Seekure 3892, as provided by Fortifiber of Attleboro, MA. D. Environmental Protection: 1. Environmental protection. Contractor will not dispose of environmentally detrimental materials in improper manner. Contractor will submit Material Safety Sheets directly to the Owner on all chemical products used on job and will comply with applicable regulations for use and disposal. Copies of all material data sheets will be kept at project site office. E. Access: 1. Owner will designate parking, dumpster, service and delivery locations. 2. Hours of operations for project will be from 7:00 AM to 4:00 PM. Requests for off-hours or overtime work must be approved by College. F. Provide personnel support facilities: 1. Contractor's field office. Contractor will maintain one (1) field office. Location of Office area will be approved by the Owner. Office will include bulletin board for posting required notices and safety information, plan and submittal file, telephone and telephone answering machine, and suitable plan table or working surface. 2. Sanitary facilities. If inside toilets are not available Contractor will provide portable toilets at building location and will be responsible for servicing, cleaning and disposal. Toilets in building will be out of service due to construction operations, and access to other areas of building will not be permitted. APRIL 1995 01500-2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A"k` PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide temporary services and utilities, including utility costs where indicated: 1. Water (potable and non-potable). Contractor may utilize water from College system at no cost. 2. Lighting and power. Contractor may use power supplied by the College. Electrical subcontractor will arrange for temporary distribution and lighting as necessary. 3. Telephone. Contractor shall obtain telephone service for project. Contractor may use existing College connections but shall obtain own line and pay all telephone charges. Contractor shall maintain telephone and telephone answering machine or portable telephone and fax machine. 4. Toilet facilities. Contractor will provide portable toilet facilities. 5. Materials storage. Material storage will be at the direction of the College, including storage inside the buildings or in trailers, dumpsters, etc. outside the buildings. •• B. Provide construction facilities, including utility costs: 1. Construction equipment. 2. Lighting. 3. Hoisting for materials. Bulk materials (eg. drywall) will not be carried through stairwells. Contractor shall hoist all these materials through windows on each floor. 4. Storage of materials: Work in various sections will require removal, and re-installation of various items. These fixtures, etc., may be stored in work areas in rooms designated by the College, providing suitable protection is maintained for floors, walls and stored items. 5. Storage of items salvaged for Owner's use elsewhere: Owner will designate a storage site on campus. Contractor will deliver designated items to storage area. G Provide security and protection requirements: 1. Fire extinguishers and alarm systems. Alarm system will be maintained in full functioning status throughout the project. If temporary shut-down is required, service will be restored and tested APRIL 1995 01500-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the Product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. F. Furnish verification of materials and equipment compliance with Contract Documents. G. Identify materials to be tested or inspected by Testing Laboratory or Agency. H. After determination of need for testing or inspecting by Owner, notify Laboratory sufficiently in advance, minimum five days, of operations to allow for its assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence. I. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling, and testing required: 1. For the Contractor's convenience; and 2. When initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. 1.08 CONDUCT OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, Architect, and Testing Laboratory in sufficient time before the performance of work to permit the proper conduct of Owner-authorized inspections and tests. B. Representatives of Testing Laboratory shall inspect the manufacture, assembly, and placement of materials as required and as authorized by the Owner, and shall report their findings to the Architect, Owner, and Contractor. C. Work shall be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall in no way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner to accept such work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 FXECLMON Not used. APRIL 1995 01410-4 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 8. Identification of Product and Specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect. 13. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents. F. Perform properly authorized additional services as required by the Owner. 1.06 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work, except as specifically authorized by the specifications. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and to Manufacturer's operations. 1. Monitor each inspection, sampling, and test. 2. Provide Laboratory or Agency with written acknowledgement of each inspection, sampling, and test. 3. Within 24 hours notify Architect and Owner in writing of reasons for not acknowledging Laboratory results. B. Secure and deliver to the Laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. C. Provide to the Laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Furnish copies of Product test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. APRIL 1995 01410-3 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. E. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards. b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.05 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. B. Acquaint Owner's, Architect's and Contractor's superintendent with testing procedures and with all special conditions encountered at the site. C Inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction methods shall be as specified in individual technical specification sections. 1. Comply with specified standards, ASTM, ANSI, and other recognized authorities. , 2. Conduct and interpret the tests and state in each report whether the test specimens comply with the requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. 3. Obtain Contractor's written acknowledgement of each inspection, sampling, and test made. D. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies of Work or Products which are observed during performance of services. E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Project Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. * _ 7. Date of test. APRIL 1995 01410-2 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The Owner reserves the right, at his sole discretion, to select and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified services and testing as may be in the Owner's best interest. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its services. 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. For all items tested that fail to meet required test standards as indicated by this specification additonal testing shall be required at no cost to the Owner until specified testing requirements are met and are approved by the Architect and Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS. A. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities: Condition of the Contract. �. B. Respective sections of specifications: Certification of products. C. Laboratory tests required, standards for testing, and certification of products: Divisions 2 through 16. 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E 329 Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction 1.04 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet requirements of ASTM E 329. C. Authorized to operate in the state of in which the project is located. D. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most APRIL 1995 01410-1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXEC[IITON Not used. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01340-6 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION APPROVED EXCEPT AS NOTED: Minor amount of corrections; noted items must not be fabricated without further corrections of original submittal; checking is complete; details of items noted by checker are to be clarified further before full approval can be given, items without marks may be fabricated without further corrections to the original submittal. Resubmission required. DISAPPROVED: Submittal is rejected as not in accord with the Contract Documents, too many corrections, or other justifiable reasons. When returning submittal, Architect will state reasons for rejection. Correct and resubmit. Do not fabricate. 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Architect and resubmit until approved. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect. G Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.10 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data which carry the Architect's stamp of approval to: 1. Job site file. 2. Record Documents file. 3. Other affected contractors. 4. Subcontractors. 5. Supplier or fabricator. B. Distribute samples which carry the Architect stamp of approval as directed by the Architect. 1.11 ARCHITECT DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accord with schedule and the requirements of Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal, or approval of submittal. G Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. APRIL 1995 01340-5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent and critical features of the Work and materials. 8. Reference to shop drawings to the work of other trade(s) shall designate such trade(s); the term "By Others" shall not be used. 9. Applicable standards, such as ASTM, ANSI, or Federal Specification Numbers. 10. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 12. An 8 in. X 3 in. blank space for Contractor and Architect stamps. 13. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 1.09 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Architect's stamp shall contain the following data: "Approval" is only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and is relying on the accuracy of information contained in the submittal. See Contract Documents for Contractor's responsibility for dimensions, quantities, coordination, revised submittals, etc. APPROVED APPROVED AS NOTED APPROVED EXCEPT AS NOTED DISAPPROVED" B. The Architect will insert the date of action taken and an identification of the person taking the action. G Explanation of the designated actions is as follows: APPROVED: No corrections, no marks: Resubmission not required. APPROVED AS NOTED: Minor amount of corrections; all items can be fabricated without further corrections to ' original submittal; checking is complete and all corrections are deemed obvious without ambiguity. Resubmission not required. APRIL 1995 01340-4 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION G. Do not begin work that requires Submittals until return of Submittals with Architect's approval. 1.08 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Architectural Work: Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. b. Engineering Consultant's Work: Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction directly to the consultant; submit one opaque reproduction to the Architect with a copy of the transmittal sent to the consultant. The Consultant's review and comments will be made on the reproducible which will be forwarded to the Architect who will then return the reproducible to the Contractor. 2. Product Data: a. Architectural Work: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two which will be retained by the Architect. b. Engineering Consultant's Work: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus three to the consultant and one to the Architect with a copy of the transmittal sent to the consultant. The Consultant's review and comments will be made on the Product Data which will be forwarded to the Architect who will then return the Product Data to the Contractor. 3. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section. C. Submittals shall contain: 1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. 2. The Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. The names of. a. Contractor. b. Supplier. C. Manufacturer. APRIL 1995 01340-3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable to the Work, and to identify clearly applicable products and work. 2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture, and pattern. B. Field samples and mockups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mockups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to the "► Architect, unless incorporated in the Work. 1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples prior to submission. B. Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance with specifications. C. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for individual items of work as single package. D. Submit interior finish samples as single package. E. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. F. Notify the Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. APRIL 1995 01340-2 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES Aw, PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples required by Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions and Additional Responsibilities of Parties: Document 00700, GENERAL CONDITIONS and Document 00810, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Submittal of manufacturer's certificates: Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. C Record documents: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. 1.03 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. A Schedule of shop drawings, product data, and samples shall be submitted indicating by trade the date by which each such item is to be submitted and the date by which final approval of each item must be obtained. This schedule shall be revised as required by conditions of the Work, subject to Architect's approval. In each case, reasonable time must be permitted for Architect's review, Consultant's review, and for resubmittals if required. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Details shall be identified by reference to Project name and number, Architect's name, sheet and detail number, schedule or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. B. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 z 11 in. C Each submittal shall be accompanied by appropriate transmittal form. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring and piping diagrams and controls. B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: . APRIL 1995 01340-1 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION a. Interferences between plumbing, HVAC, electrical, architectural and structural work will be avoided; and b. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for operation, repair, removal and testing of plumbing, HVAC, electrical and other equipment will be provided. 3. Pipes, conduits, ducts and similar items shall be kept close as possible to ceiling, walls and columns, to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, conduits, ducts equipment and similar items shal be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use of other building equipment or systems. 4. Furnish and install all offsets, fittings and similar items necessary in order to accomplish the requirements of coordination with out additional expense to the Owner. 5. Within 10 days after Notice to Proceed prepare and submit for approval by the Architect composite coordination drawings for all mechanical equipment rooms and other mechanical/electrical interfacing areas. Drawings shall show the work of all trades covered, shall be drawn to a scale same as the Construction Documents, and shall show clearly in both plan and elevation that all work can be installed without interference. 6. Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid interferences shall be made without additional expense to the Owner. In case interference develops, the Architect will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first. 7. The prosecution of this work shall be orchestrated by the General Contractor. He shall engage qualified personnel and make the needed arrangements with his subcontractors immediately after award of this contract to assure prompt and expeditious development of coordinated drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION' APRIL 1995 01300- 3 SUBMITTALS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 5. Resubmit periodically when conditions are changed so as to warrant resubmission or as directed by the Architect. B. PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1. Prepare schedule in bar chart form or alternate form as approved by Architect. 2. Show progress of job on weekly basis for each major element of construction. 3. Identify fixed milestones and critical path elements. 4. Revise schedule on a weekly basis and submit with application for payment. Submit initial schedule within 15 days after award of contract. 5. For subsequent submittals, provide written narrative explaining deviations from originally submitted schedule. C SCHEDULE OF VALUES 1. Submit schedule of values for the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. 2. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total contract sum. 3. The application for payment shall use the same values and categories as the approved schedule of values. 4. Resubmit schedule of values until approval by Architect is obtained. 5. Submit schedule of values within 10 days of award of project. Final approval must be obtained before approval of first application for payment. D. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES 1. Submit certificates in duplicate, in accordance with the requirements of each specification section. 2. Provide proper identification of each submittal; project, contractor, subcontractor, supplier and specification section or drawing number. E. COMPOSITE COORDINATION DRAWINGS 1. Due to the complexity of the mechanical/electrical installation, the General Contractor shall prepare composite coordination drawings for the following trades: 2. Coordinate the work of the various trades so that: APRIL 1995 01300- 2 SUBMITTALS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART GENERAL 1/01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Progress Schedules. B. Schedule of Values. C. Manufacturer's Certificates. D. Composite Coordination Drawings. E. NOTE: In order to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals the Architect will provide reproducible bases of existing drawings to the contrator(s) at cost in such scale(s) that are available. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Testing Laboratory Reports: Section 01410, TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES. B. Manufacturer's instructions: Section 01600, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT. C. Contractor's list of Products: Section 01600, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT. Aft* D. Shop drawings submittals: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. E. Closeout submittals: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS; Section 01730, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA and Section 01740, WARRANTIES AND BONDS. 1.0 3 PROCEDURES A. General 1. Deliver submittals to Architect at address listed on cover of Project Manual. 2. Provide each submittal in form and content acceptable to Architect. 3. After Architect review of submittal, if not approved, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal. 4. Distribute copies of approved submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. A.P%, APRIL 1995 01300- 1 SUBMITTALS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain project schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Progress Schedule. 8. Progress schedule during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Progress Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 14. Other business. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01250-4 PROJECT MEETINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work, and storage areas. b. Owner's requirements c. Parking. 9. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids. 10. Temporary utilities. 11. Safety and first-aid procedures. 12. Security procedures. 13. Housekeeping procedures. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings, at least weekly. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the Work. C. Location of the meetings: Shall be determined by Contractor. D. Attendance: ►. 1. Owner 2. Architect, and his professional consultants as needed. 3. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 4. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 5. Mechanical and electrical subcontractors. 6. Others as approppriate. E. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Construction Progress Schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, and delivery schedules. APRIL 1995 01250-3 PROJECT MEETINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule within 10 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by Contractor. C Attendance: L Owner's Representative. 2. Architect and his Professional Consultants. 3. Resident Project Representative. 4. Contractor's Project Managers and Superintendents. 5. Major Subcontractors. 6. Major suppliers. 7. Others as appropriate. D. Suggested Agenda: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected Construction Progress Schedules. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project Coordination. a. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions. b. Proposal Requests. c. Submittals. d. Change Orders. e. Application for Payment. 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. APRIL 1995 01250-2 PROJECT MEETINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01250 PROJECT MEETINGS A"k PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The Owner shall schedule and administer the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor shall schedule and administer the weekly progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout progress of the Work. B. The Contractor shall: 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at the meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting. a. To participants in the meeting. , b. To parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. Furnish one copy of minutes to Architect. 7. The Contractor shall provide a fax machine that has automatic operation and is available 24 hours/day. C Representatives of contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. Any and all subcontractors and or suppliers will attend when requested by the owner. D. Architect may attend meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings: Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Record documents: Section 01720, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS. C Operation and maintenance data: Section 01730, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA. APRIL 1995 01250-1 PROJECT MEETINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION G. Perform surveys: Laying out the work and verifying locations during low construction. H. Submit and post list of emergency telephone numbers and addresses for individuals to be contacted in case of emergency for 24-hour per day, 7- day per week availability. I. Radio Contact: Project Manager will carry radio or beeper so as to be able to be reached by the College at all times. J. Contractor will be responsible for notification of local Fire Department of telephone alert status and for notifying same reqarding normal status at end of day. Requirements will be clarified at pre-construction conference. See Section 15000, Temporary Facilities. K. The Contractor shall notify the Owner of all building system shutdowns according to the following advance notice schedule: 24 Hours when Building is not in operation. 48 Hours when Building is in operation. PART 2 NOT USED PART 3 NOT USED END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01100-2 PROJECT PROCEDURES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01100 PROJECT PROCEDURES Amftk PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide coordination of work and administration as follows. 1. SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL: Provide a full-time Project Manager totally dedicated to this project. The designated individual will remain on the job from start to finish. Also provide a full-time superintendent for each shift for the life of the project. Superintendent(s) will not be changed during the duration of the job without Owner approval. A Resume of Experience for the individuals you intend to utilize on the project will be attached to "bid package." 2. Attend preconstruction conference, weekly work meetings and distribute minutes. 3. Attend other meetings as necessary. B. Submit daily and special reports. C. Submit progress schedule, bar-chart type, updated weekly. 1. Submit initial construction progress schedule within 5 days of signing contract. No payments will be approved unless an approved schedule is in place. 2. See Section 01000 - Special Condition, Paragraph 1.05 for accelerated schedule provisions. D. Within 5 days of signing Contract prepare submittal schedule; coordinate with progress schedule. 1. Submittal schedule will list all submittals, samples, mock-ups and other items required by the Specifications, indicating when Contractor will submit these items and what action is required by others. Schedule will include all trades and sub-contractors. 2. If the Contractor fails to prepare a submittal schedule, the Architect will prepare this schedule and the Contractor will be back-charged by the Owner. E. Submit schedule of values; no payments will be made to Contractor until a schedule of Values in a form approved by the College has been recieved and accepted. F. Submit schedule of required tests including payment and responsibility. APRIL 1995 01100-1 PROJECT PROCEDURES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION FM Factory Mutual System FS Federal Specifications GA Gypsum Association lEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IMIAC International Masonry Industry-All Weather Council ISA International Society of Arboriculture MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association MIL Military Specifications ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NSWMA National Solid Waste Management Association NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PS Product Standard SCPI Structural Clay Products Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association SJI Steel Joint Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TAS Technical Aid Series TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. MCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01090-2 REFERENCE STANDARDS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Abbreviations and acronyms used in Contract Documents to identify reference standards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes established stricter standards. B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND NAMES OF ORGANIZATIONS A. Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ADC Air Diffusion Council AGC Associated General Contractors of America AI Asphalt Institute AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASPA American Sod Producers Associates ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood-Presery ers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association r FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association Awk APRIL 1995 01090-1 REFERENCE STANDARDS LE9415 CA-PEN HOUSE RENOVATION 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which prevent damage to other work, and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. 1. In general, where mechanical cutting is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete work. 2. Comply with the requirements of applicable Sections of Division 2 - SITE WORK where cutting-and-patching requires excavating and backfilling. B. Employ excavating and backfilling methods that prevent settlement or damage to other work. C. Employ original installer or fabricator to cut and patch for: 1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces. D. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. E. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide complete work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. H. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; extend finish restoration to retained work to eliminate evidence of patching. 1. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. I. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01045-4 CUTTING AND PATCHING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. C Should conditions of work or the schedule indicate a change of products from original installation, submit request for substitution as specified in Section 01600, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT. D. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time the work will be uncovered. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated or authorized by the Architect, provide materials for cutting and patching shall be selected to produce equal-or- better work than the work being cut and patched. In terms of performance characteristics and visual effect. Use materials identical to original materials where feasible and satisfactory. B. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 EXECUTION Awk, 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of Products, or performance of work. C Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from water. APRIL 1995 01045-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch exposed work in exterior and occupied spaces so that visual qualities are reduced or cut and patch work is visible, as judged by the Architect. Remove and replace unsatisfactory work as directed by Architect. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of the Owner or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. B. Request shall include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of affected work. 3. The necessity for cutting, alteration, or excavation. 4. Effect on work of Owner or any separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of project. 5. Description of proposed work: a. Description of why cutting and patching cannot (reasonably) be avoided. b. Scope of cutting, patching, or alteration. c. Methods. d. How structural elements (if any) will be reinforced. e. Trades who will execute the work. f. Products proposed to be used. g. Extent of refinishing to- be done. h . Approximate dates of the work, and anticipated results in terms of variations from the work as originally completed (structural, operational, visual, and other qualities of significance). APRIL 1995 01045-2 CUTTING AND PATCHING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, and patching. 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installations of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. B. NOTE: It is the intention of this specification that all cutting and patching be covered by the contract in its entirety and that the work of finishing interior and weather exposed surfaces be done by trades responsible for that work under the contract. The General '"' Contractor shall be responcible for the coordination of this work and for the completion of any work not covered by the contracts of the trades. The trades shall be required to meet the specifications under this section as well as requirements under individual sections regarding their work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Substitutions and product options: Section 01600, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Permission to patch any items of work does not imply a waiver of the Architect's right to require complete removal and replacement in said areas and of said items if, in Architect's opinion, said patching does not satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the work. B. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not reduce load-carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio. C Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in the manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. APRIL 1995 01045-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Allowance amounts below are for all materials and labor for items as indicated. Include all other costs including installation and all required blocking, supports and attachments in base bid price. B. Coordinate allowances with requirements for related and adjacent work. C Notify Owner of date when final decision on allowance items is required to avoid delays in the work. D. Furnish certification that quantities of products purchased are the actual quantities needed with reasonable allowance for cutting or installation losses, tolerances, mixing waste and similar margins. E. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual quantities of materials delivered and costs. Indicate amounts of applicable trade discounts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 -EXECUTION Ank 3.01 SCHEDULE A. Lump sum allowances: 1. LANDSCAPE MATERIAL: Allowance: $10,000. END OF SECTION Aw APRIL 1995 01020-1 ALLOWANCES LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION A. Contractor will install the following items supplied by the Owner: 1. Carpet 3.03 ITEMS TO BE SALVAGED FOR OWNER A. When the Owner turns the project over to the Contractor it shall be understood that the Owner has completed his salvage work with the exception of tagged mechanical equipment. The General Contractor shall remove and turn over to the Owner at a place designated by the Owner on Campus all tagged equipment. END OF SECTION APRIL 1995 01010-3 SUMMARY OF WORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION 1.03 CONTRACT DOCUMIIM A. Intent: Drawings and specifications are intended to provide the basis for proper completion of the work suitable for the intended use of the Owner. anything not expressly set forth but which is reasonably implied or necessary for proper performance of the project shall be included. B. Writing style: Specifications are written in the imperative mode. Except where specifically intended otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the Contractor. For example, 'Provide tile' means 'Contractor shall provide tile.' C- Dimensions: Verify dimensions indicated on drawings with field dimensions before fabrication or ordering of materials. Do not scale drawings. Drawings are based on Existing Condition Documents for Capen House and supplemnented with field dimensions take during the time of document preparation. D. Existing Conditions: Notify Owner of existing conditions differing significantly from those indicated on the drawings. Do not remove or alter structural components without prior written approval. E. Definitions for terms used in the specifications: 1. Provide Furnish and install, complete with all necessary accessories, ready for intended use. Pay for all related costs. 2. Approved: Acceptance of item submitted for approval. Not a limitation or release for compliance with the Contract Documents or regulatory requirements. Refer to limitations of 'Approved' in General and Supplementary Conditions. 3. Match Existing: Match existing as acceptable to the Owner and Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 OWNER PURCHASED-OWNER INSTALLED ITEMS A. The following items will be purchased and installed by the Owner. Provide access to the site as required. This list is not intended to be comprehensive. The Contractor shall protect all Owner installed items until project completion. 1. Furnishings. 2. Window treatment. 3.02 OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS APRIL 1995 01010-2 SUMMARY OF WORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Project identification: Capen House Renovation Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts. B. Project summary: 1. Includes the interior demolition of all walls , mechanical, electrical, plumbing systems, as indicated on the drawings on the basement, first, second and third floors. Structural work will consist of the stabilization of the existing structure, remedial repair work and all new work as indicated on the drawings. All mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and fire protection will be new. Exterior work will consist of roof shingle replacement, complete window replacement, union site work as indicated on drawings, and exterior painting and siding repair. 2. Major systems: Architectural, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Fire Protection. 3. Performance requirements for completed work: Aw Work is to be completed during the college summer break. Work is to commence May 23, 1995 in such a way as not to disrupt scheduled school function. Full project Documents will be available on April 24, 1995. Construction will be complete by August 1995. The project includes work as shown on the construction documents and specifications, reference general conditions for list of drawings. 1.02 PARTICULAR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Existing site conditions and restrictions: Site access and parking will be strictly controlled by Smith College. Parking will be limited to designated areas. B. Requirements for sequencing or scheduling: Contractor will be responsible for sequencing of trades so that work can proceed to completion on orderly schedule. C Owner's early or partial occupancy: College will retain right of access to all floors of this building. D. Codes: Comply with applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of inspection reports, notices and similar communications to Owner. Awk APRIL 1995 01010-1 SUMMARY OF WORK LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATON 4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted: None. If the General Liability policy includes a General Aggregate, such AW General Aggregate shall be not less than $10,000,000. Policy shall be endorsed to have General Aggregate apply to this policy only. 5. Business Auto Liability ( including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles): a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Person. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence. b. Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence. 6. Umbrella Excess Liability: $1,00,000 over primary. d. Add, 11.1.4. (1) "Submit three (3) copies of AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance, properly executed, including the title and signature of the authorized representative and the following statement: A copy of this certificate is on file in the office of the insurance company which underwrites the ploicies." (.2) Certificates shall be in the name of the Trustees of Smith College, Northampton, MA. (3) Submit three (3) copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amendeding coverage or limits. e. 11.3.7, add the following sentence: "In waiving rights of recovery under terms of this sub-paragraph, the term "Owner" shall be deemed to include the Smith College, and its appointed officials, agents and representatives, Trustees of the College, and the Architect and his employees as the Owner's representative, as provided in the Contract Documents." Article 12- Uncovering and Correction of Work a. Add 12.1.3, "(.1) A 'reasonable allowance for overhead and profit' for work solely performed by the Contractor as indicated above and utilized in the completion of cost and credit figures in Article 12.1.3, shall not exceed twelve (10%) percent of the net cost of the work. (.2) For work performed by subcontractors, cost to Owner may include an allowance for subcontractor's overhead and profit not to exceed ten (7%) percent of subcontractor's net cost, plus an allownnce for General Contractor's overhead and profit not to exceed ten (7%) percent of the subcontractor's net cost." END OF SECTION ARPIL 1995 01000-3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATON a. Add new Sub-Paragraph: 9.3.1.3. Beginning with the first progress payment the Owner shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amounts approved for payment, until fifty percent (50%) of the billing of the total contract amount, after which no additional retainage shall be withheld. Article 11- Insurance a. 11.1.1.8. Liability Insurance shall include major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: 1. Premises Operations (including X, C, and U coverage as applicable. 2. Independent Contractors' Protective. 3. Products and Completed Operations. 4. Personal injury with Employment Exclusion deleted. 5. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under paragraph 3.18. 6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles. 7, Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations. b. 11.1.1.9. If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Comercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date of Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2 C. Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2. 1. Workers' Compensation: a. State: Statutory. b. Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 per accident. $1,000,000 Disease, Policy Limit. $1,000,000 Disease, Each Employee. 2. Comprehensive or Commercial Liability (including Premises- Operations; Indenpendent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence. b. Property Damage; $50,000 Each Occurrence. c. Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for 10 years after final payment. d. Property Damage Liability insurance shall provide X, C, and U coverage. e. Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations. 3. Contractual Liability: a. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 each Occurrence. b. Property Damage: $1,000,000 each Occurrence. ARPIL 1995 01000-2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATON Suoolementary General Conditions PART 1 General General Conditions a. The General Conditions of the Contract shall be the American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" fourteenth edition, August 1987, herein referred to as the General Conditions. Supplementary_ Conditions a. The following items consist of changes and additions to the General Conditions as is bound therein. Where any part of an article of the General Conditions is modified or deleted, the remaining unaltered portion shall remain in effect. PART 2: Amendments to the General Conditions Article 1- General Provisions a. 1.2.6. add, "in the event of discrepancies within the Contract Documents: 1. Addenda shall modify Contract Documents. 2. Stated dimensions shall take precedence over implied dimensions (DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS). 3. Large scale drawings take precedence over smaller scale drawings. 4. The Architect shall clarify inconsistencies in the Contract Documents. In event of inconsistencies in the specifications the best quality (usually most expensive) is intended. 5. Notice of any discrepancy shall be forwarded in writing to the Architect within twenty-four hours, who shall issue a revision to the Contract Documents. 6. The Contractor is responsible for measuring the work. Dimensions on the drawings are offered as a guide only. Article 2- Owner a. 2.1.1. Change to read "The Owner (The Trustees of Smith College) is the person", etc. Article 3- Contractor a. 3.6 Delete (TAXES) b. 3.8 Delete (ALLOWANCES) Article 9- Payment and completion ARPIL 1995 01000-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS /such action, may without prcqudice to any other rights or Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contactor or Owner,as emedics of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon 2ppG- Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termin2- n2te employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any tion of the Contract. prior rights Of the surety: 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equip- FOR CONVENIENCE ment,tools,and construction equipment and rn2chin- 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in M thereon owned by the Contractor; writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Pan- pan for such period of time as the Owner may determine. graph 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of Owner may deem expedient. performance of the Contra,including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by suspension, dei2y or intcrnrp- 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the Lion. NO adjustment sh2ll be made to the extent: reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not .1 that performance is,was or would h2ve been so sus- be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is frrtished. en pded, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract 5um exceeds costs .2 that an equitable 2djustment is trade or denied under of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi- another provision of this Contract. tea's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. 1 i AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION 24 A201-1987 AIA• •®1967 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W.WASHINGTON.O.C.20006 3/87 The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- ARTICLE 14 paragraph 13.5.3. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval OF THE CONTRACT under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the expenses. Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions 13.5.4 Required certificates of tcsang, inspection or approval of the Work under contract with the Contractor,for any of the 'shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be following reasons: scLwcd by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author- Architect• ity having jurisdiction; 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or •2 an act ofgoyem a meni,such s a declaration of national approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect emergency, making material unavailable; 3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable made payment on a Certificate for Payment within delay in the Work. the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions by the 13.6 INTEREST Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ber of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in merits shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such any 365-d2y period, whichever is less; or rate as the panics may agree upon in writing or, in the absence .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable where the Project is located. evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and LIMITATION PERIOD Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner AOW 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment .1 Before Substantial Completion.As to acts or failures and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan- damages. tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through shall conunence to run and :uiy -alleged cause of action no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their shall tie deemed to have accrued in any and all events agents or employees or any other persons performing portions not la:rl than such date of Substantial Completion; of the Work under contract with the Contractor bce-awc the .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi- Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations rate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occur- under the Contract Documentb with respect to mutters impor- ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial tint to the progress of the Work, Elie Contractor may, upon Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certifi- seven additional days' wriucn notice to the Owner and the cute for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner shall commence to run and any alleged cause of as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. action shall be dccmcd to have accrued in any and all 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE events not later than the date of issuance of the final 14 2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Certificate for Payment; ;and Contractor. .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to ass or .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply failures to act occurring-after the relevant date of issu- enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; ance of the final Certificate for Payment, any uppli- .2 fliis to nuke payment to Subcontractors for materials cable statute of limitations skull commence to run and or labor in accordwice with the respective agreements anv alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; :accrued in any and all events not later than the date of .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules, reg- any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to ul-ations or orders of a public authority having juris- any warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5,the date diction; or elf any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2,or the .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision date of aLtual commission of in),other act or failure of the Contras Documents. I.o Ixrform any dot} or obligation by the Contractor 14.2.2 When any of the ahovc rc:LSOns exist,the Owner,upon .�+a. or Owner, whichever occurs last. certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to jus- AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENL•'RAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH TUITION AIA° •©I90 TIII:AMERICAN INSTII'UI'L•'OF ARC111TECTS,1735 NL'W YORK AVL'NUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2VXK, A201-1987 23 g� _ for commencement Of warrantics established under Sub- ARTICLE 13 !w* paragraph 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after 13.1 GOVERNING LAW receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the V Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep place where the Project is"located. Lance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them- tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal reprcxenta- obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect Contract.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Con- eovery of the condition. tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove.from the site portions of either party attempts to make such an assignment without such the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the for all obligations under the Contract. Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor- 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it able time fixed by written notice from the Architect,the Owner was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at mail to the last business address known to the party giving the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs notice. of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof,after deducting 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- .. costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con- merits and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in tractor,including compensation for the Arcnitect's services and addition to and not a limitation Of duties,obligations,rights and expenses madc necessary thereby. If-such proceeds of sale do remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contract Sum shall be reduced by-the deficiency. If payments Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, Owner. except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- tract Documents. nances,rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unlc%s other- 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- R'isc provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for strued to establish a period Of limitation with respect to other such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent test- obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the tract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year appropriate'public authority, and shall bear all related costs of as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce- wirh the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced approvals which do not become requirements until after bids to'establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- are received or negotiations concluded. tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub- 12.3.1 if the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in paragraph 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections whether or not final payment has been made. are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. ALA DOCUMENT A201 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDMON 22 A201-1987 AIA6 •©1987 THE AML•RICANINSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,NV.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20O(16 3.5 If during the Project construction penod the Owner 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall havc power to adjust and 5ures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or 2dj2- settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest -ens to the site by property insurance under politics separate shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment prop- to the Owner's exercise of this power, if such objection be erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project made,arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5. through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Proj- The Owner as fiduciary shall,in that cue,snake settlement with ca during the construction period, the Owner shall waive 211 insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. If rights in accordance with the terns of Subparagraph 11.3.7 for distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate the arbitrators will direct such distribution. property insurance. All separate politics shall provide this 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- 11.3.6 Before an exposure to-loss may occur,the Owner shall panics Providing property insurance have consented to such Me with the Contractor z copy of each policy that includes partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain policy shall contain ell generally 2ppEc2ble conditions, defini- consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, tions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or cancelled or allowed to cxpirc'until 21]cast 30 d2vs' prior writ- reduction of insurance. ten notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Conimc- 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogatlon. The Owner and Contractor for to famish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con- waive ell rights against(1)each other and any of their subcon- tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu- tnctors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the 12ted in bidding requirements or specifically required in the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate Contact Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. contractors described in Article 6, if any,and any of their sub- contractors, sub-subcontmaors, agents and employees, for 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by be 2 potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of oblig2- property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or tions arising under the Contraa,the Contractor shall promptly other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit 2 copy to be made. rights 25 they have to proceeds Of such insurance held by the caner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,25 appropriate, rill require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate ARTICLE 12 contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tors,sub-subcontr2ctors,agents and employees of any of them, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum- erated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the g2tion by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in shall be effective 25 to 2 person or entity even though that per- the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the son or entity would otherwise havc 2 duty of indemnification. Architect. be uncovered for the Architects observaclon and be contractual or otherwise, did not p2v the insurance premium replaced 2t the Contractor's expense without change in the directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity Contract Time. had an insurable interest in the property d2m2ged. 12.1.2 if 2 portion of the Work has been covered which the 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its be 2djusted by the Owner as'frduci2ry and made payable t0 the bang covered,the Architect m2y request to see such Work and Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. if such Work is in appear, subject to requirements of any 2pplic2ble mortgagee accordance with the Contact Documents, costs of uncover- clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay ing and replacement shall, by 2ppropri2te Change Order, be Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received charged to the Owner. if such Work is not in accordance with by the Contractor, and by appropriate 2greements, written the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors unless the condition was caused by the Owner or 2 sepantc to make p2yments to their Sub-subcontractors in Similar contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for manner. payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 11.3.9 If required in writing by 2 party in interest, the Owner 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give by the Architect Or failing to conform to the requirements of bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost the Contract Documents, whether observed before or 2fter of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated.installed fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a sep2ntc account pro or completed. The Contactor shall bear costs of correcting cecds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in 2ccor- such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspec- 'ance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, tions and compensation for the Architect's services and r in 2ccord2nce with an arbitration 2w2rd in which cue the expenses m2de necessary thereby. + procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. if after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam- 12.2.2 If,within one yeir after the d2tc of Substantial Complc- 2ged property shall be covered by 2ppropri2tc Change Order. tion of the Work or designated portion thereof,or after the d1tc AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITEC-rs,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W.WASHINGTON.D.C.2006 A201-1987 21 2 claims for damages because of bodily injury. occupa- other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property tional sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is employees; earlier.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,Sickness Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the or disease,or death of any person other than the Con- Work. tractor's employCCS; 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage liability coverage which are sustained(1)by a person and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false. employment of such person by the Contractor,or(2) work, temporary buildings and debris removal including by another person; demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop- Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom; insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. a person or property damage arising out of owner- 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of 3.18. the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- 11.1.2 The insurance required by-Subparagraph 1 1.1.1 shall be subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order written for not less than limits of Liability specified in the Con- the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. if the Contr2c- tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is for is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- grater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption notifying the Contractor,then the Owner shall bar all reason- from date of commencement of the Work until date of final able costs properly attributable thereto. payment and termination of an}-coverage required to be main- tained after final payment. 11.3.1.3 if the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- 1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of ' filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. such deductibles.If the Owner or insurer increases the required -.ICSC Certificate and the insurance policies required by this minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Paragraph 11.1 shall contain' a provision `that coverages Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to tibic amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given the additional costs not covered becausC of such increased or to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are voluntary deductibles. If deductibles arc not identified in the required to remain in force after final payment and are reason- Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered ably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation because of deductibles. of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application 11,3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Cun(ract Docu- for Pavment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information meats,this property insurance Shall cover portions of the Work concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the value established in the approval,and also portions of the Work Contractor-s information and belief. in transit 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11,3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. Optionally, required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self- specifically cover such insured objects during installation and protection against claims which may arise from Operations until final accCptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible interests of the Owner, Contactor, Subcontractors and Sub- (or purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor insurance unless specific2l1v required by the Contract shall be named insureds. Documents. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner Shall purchase insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property and maintain, in a company or companies IawfUlly authorized due to fire or other. hazards, however caused. The Owner to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is waives all rights Of action against the Contractor for loss of use located. property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to trrct Sum as well as Subsequent modifications thereto for the fire or other ha-rArds however caused. noire Work at the site on a repl-rcement cost basis without vol- 11.3.4 if the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for 'an• deductibles. Such property insurance shall be main- risks other than those described herein or for other special haz _.ncd. unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents ards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof are hctncticiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been shall be charged to the Contactor by appropriate Change mudc as provided in Paragerph t) 1 o or until no person or entity Order. AU1 DocumENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION 20 A201-1987 AIA" •ID 19147 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W.WASHINGTON.D C.2oxxo6 ARTICLE 10 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws.ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, main- existing conditions and performance of the Contract,2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required b reason- y i [aining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in g able safeguards for safety and protection, including p05cir1 g connection with the performance of the Contract. danger signs and other warnings against hazards,promulgating 10.1.2 In the event the Contnaor encounters on the site safety regulations and notifying owners and users Of adjacent material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated sites and utilities. biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected materials or equipment or unusual mechods are necessary for and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing, execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in qualified personnel. fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance natcd biphcny!(PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in pan by the accordance with final determination by the Architect on which Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone Article 4. for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article damage or TOSS attributable to acs or omissions of the Owner 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by polvchlorinated biphenyl (PCB). either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect. Archi- addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragnph 3.18. tect's consultants and agents and cmployccs of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ- 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of ing but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting the Contractor's organization al the site whose duty shall be the 1 from performance of the Work in the sffected area if in fact the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)and has superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage, in writing to the Owner and Architect. loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the or death. or to injury to or destruction of tangible property construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting 10.3 EMERGENCIES therefrom, but only to[he extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anvone directly or 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or propertv, indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acs the Contractor shall ace, at the Contractor's discretion, to pre- the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensa- claun, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed Of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of 4.3 and Article 7. indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10.1.4. ARTICLE 11 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY INSURANCE AND BONDS 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as be affected therebv; will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations rated therein. ;%•hcthcr in storage on or off the site, under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally under rare, custody or control of the Contractor or liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontrac- Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by tors; and any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as liable: trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, structures and utilities not designated for removal, re'lo- disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts cation or replacement in the course of construction. which are applicable to the Work to be performed; AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •®1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 19 r, portion thereof is substantially complete. If the such inspection and,when the Architect finds chc Work 2ccept- .ett s inspection discloses any item, whether or not able under the Contract DoauncnLs and chc Contract fully per- j ded on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance formed, the Architect will promptly issue 2 final Ceruficzte for the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contmc- Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, for shall. before issuance of the Ccrtific2tc of Substantial Com- information and belief, and on the basis Of the Architect's pletion.complete or correct such item upon nodfic2don by the observations and inspections,the Work has been completed in Architect. The Contractor shall then submit z request for accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantizl menu and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is for and noted in said final Certificate is due and p2y2ble. The substantially complete, the Architect will prepare 2 Certificate Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- rcpresent2tion that conditions listed in Subparagaph 9.10.2 as stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utdides, have been fulfilled. damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining rct2incd 2ccomp2nving the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- perccntzgc shall become due until the Contractor submits to tract Documents shall commence on the date of Subs=Li2l the Architect(1)an 2ffid2vit that payrolls,bills for materials and Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work otherwise provided in the Cerdficzee of Substantial Comple- for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be tion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shill be sub- responsible or encumbered(less 2mounts withheld by Owner) mitred to the Owner and Contractor for their written 2cccp- have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2)z certificate evidenc- =cc of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated not be cancelled or allowed to expire until 21 least 30 days' portion thereof and upon application by the Contactor and prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)2 written certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason reflecting adjustment in rctainage,if any,for such Work Or poi- that the insurance will not be renewable t0 cover the period lion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. required by the Contract Documents, (4)consent of surety, if 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE any, to final payment and(5), if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as e^ 1 The Owner m2v Occupy or use any completed or par- receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims,security interests completed portion of the Work at any stage when such or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and -I is designated by sep2mic agreement with the Contrac- in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If 2 Subcon- ovided such occupancy or use is consented to by the tractor refuses to famish 2 release or waiver required by the insurer u required under Subparagraph 1 1.3.1 1 and authorized Owner, chc Contractor may furnish 2 bond satisfactory to the by public authorities having jurisdiction over.the Work. Such Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the remains unsatisfied after payments arc made, the Contractor portion is substantially complete. provided the Owner and shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be Contractor have 2ccepted in wnting the responsibilities compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs assigned to etch of them for payments, retainagc If any, sccu- and reasonable 2ttorneys' fees. rity,m2lntenance,hat,utilities.damage to the Work and insur- ance.and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- 9,10.3 if, 2ftcr Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties pletion thereof is materially dd2yed through no fault of (he required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final considers 2 portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, prepare and submit 2 list to the Architect as provided under upon 2pplic2tion by the Contractor and certification by the Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- Architect,and without termin2ting the Contract,make payment panty or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree- and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- ment between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is pitted or corrected is less than ret2in2ge stipulated in the Con- reached, by decision of the Architect. tract Documents,and if bonds h2ve been furnished,the written consent of surety to p2yment of the b2lancc due for that por- 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such p2rti2J occupancy or use, the tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shell be submit- Owner. Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the ern ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certiftc2tion of to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to such p2yment. Such payment shill be made under terms and determine and record the condition of the Work. conditions governing final p2yment, except that it shall not COftSti(UIC 2 waiver of claims.The making of fin.21 p2yment shall 9.9.3 Unless otherwise 2greed upon, partial occupancy or use constitute a waiver Of c12im5 by the Owner as provided in Sub- of 2 portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- paragraph 4.3.5. tance of Work not complying with the requirements of (he Contract Documents. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final p2yment by the Contactor, 2 Sub- ' r FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT contractor or 171712te621 supplier shall Constitute 2 waiver of 0"` claims by th2t p2yee except those previously made in writing Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready and identified by that p2yee as unsettled at the time of final for fcn21 inspection and acceptance and upon receipt Of 2 final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to Application for P2ymcnt, the Architect will promptly m2ke the waiver described in Subp2agr2ph 4.3.5• AIA DOCUMENT A201 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- FOURTEENTH EDITION 18 A201-1987 AIA• -©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W W.WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 Owner a Certificate for Paymcnt, with a copy to the Contnc- 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding cenification arc tor, for such amount u the Architect determines is properly removed, certification will be made for amounts previously due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of [he withheld. Architect's rc2som for withholding certification in whole or in 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Ccrtificatc for Paymcnt, 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the time provided in the Contract Documents, and Shall so notify Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the the Architect. Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, point indicated and that, to the best of[he Architect's knowl- upon receipt of payment from the Owner, Out Of the amount edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in actor- paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontraaor's por. dance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing represents- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor i; tons are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance entided,reflecting percentages actually retained from paymenLs with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion results of subsequent tests and inspections.to minor deviations of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agrcrment from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. issuance of a Certificate for P2Yment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontac- amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- ment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- qu2hty or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction lions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) 9,6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors to pay or to see to the payment Of money to a Subcontractor and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner except as may otherwise be required by law, to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or(4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contnc- 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner for has used money previously paid on account of the Contract similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. Sum. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment,or panial 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and Contract Documents. may withhold a CenifiCale for Pavment in whole or in part, to 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Pavment, by Subpangnph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application.the receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or If the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Owner does not pay the Contractor within Seven days after the Subpangnph 9.4.1. If the Contactor and Architect cannot date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer- agrec on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a tificd by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Con- Certificate for Pavment for the amount for which the Architect [rector mav, upon seven additional days wnt[en notice to the is able to make such representations [o the Owner. The Archi- Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the sect mav also decide not to certify payment or, because of amount owing has been received. The Con[nct Timc shall be subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be may nullify the whole Or a pan Of a CertifiCate for Payment increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the shut-down,delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: Provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION .1 defective Work not remedied; 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ing probable filing of such claims: ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or use, equipment. 4 equipmble evidence chat the Fork cannot be tom- 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a por- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contnc[ Sum: son thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially compicte,the Contractor shall prepare and submit 5 damage [O the Owner or another contractor, to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed t .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- pleted within the Coning Time.and that the unpaid plete and correct items on the list.Failure to include an item on balance would not be adequate to cover actual or such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to liquidated damages for the anticipated deby; or complete all Work in accordance with the Contact Docu- -J .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance menu. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will with the Contract Documents. make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- ALA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N W.WASHINGTON.D.C.2(xx)6 A201-1987 17 f 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK ARTICLE 9 w►, 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes n the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION . extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the 9.1 CONTRACT SUM intent of the Concha Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,includ. and Contractor. The Contractor shall any out such written ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the orders promptly. Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 9-2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor TIME shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- 8.1 DEFINrMNS ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect, of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- shall be used 2S 2 basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applia- tr2a Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. bons for Payment. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for whom the Contractor is responsible. an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed 8.1.3 The dace of Substantial Completion is the dace certified to accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. Substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner 8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. Subcontractors and material suppliers,and reflecting reminagc 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- account of changes in the Work which have been properly #oWiractor confirms that the Contract Time is 2 reasonable period authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet r performing the Work. included in Change Orders. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- 9.3.1.2 Such 2ppliacion5 may not include requests for pay- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely com- ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay ro 2 menee operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other dace of insurance required by Anicle I 1 to be fumished by the reason. Contractor.The date of commencement of the Work shall not 9,3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment date of commencement is established by 2 notice to proceed delivered and suitably scored at the site for subsequent incor- given by the Owner, the Contactor shall notify the Owner in poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, writing not less than five days or other agreed period before payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, suitably stored off the site at 2 location agreed upon in writing. mechanic's liens and other security interests. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with 2de- shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's the Contract Time. title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owncr's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME storage and transportation to the site for such materials and 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the equipment stored off the site. Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an 9,3.3 The Contactor warrants that title to 211 Work covered by employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for or other causes beyond the Contractor's mntrol,.or by delay which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued authorized b} the Owner pending arbitration, or by other and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such clear of liens; claims, security interests or encumbrances in reasonable time as the Architect may determine. favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors, material suppliers, or 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having + provided labor, materials and equipment relatin to the Work. ^�IiClblc provisitlni u(Paragraph 4.3. P g o.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of dam- 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ages for delay by either party under other provisions of the 9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contract Documents. Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the ALA DOCUMENT A201 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- j(.GURTfFNTH EDITION 6 A201-1987 AIA• -©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 ARTICLE 7 .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and 2 mutually acccpubic fixed or perccnt- CHANGES IN THE WORK age fee;or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.1 CHANGES 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Dircctivc, the 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- Contractor shall prompdy proceed with the change in the (ion of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract, by Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for 2 agreement Or disagreement with the method, if any, provided minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in in the Construction Change Directive for dctcrmining the pro- this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change for indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,includ- Dircctivc requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the may Or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. alone. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under 2ppli- with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac- method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the tect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for 2 those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- minor change in the Work. ing, in rase of an increase in the Contract Sum, 2 reasonable 7.1.4 If unit prices arc stated in the Contract Documents or allowance for overhead and profit.In such cue,and also under subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such 11emp12ted are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting struction Change Directive that application Of such unit prices together with appropriate supporting data. Unless Otherwise to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: equitably 2djusted. .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreement Or custom, and workers' or workmen's 7.2.1 A Change Order is 2 written instrument prepared by the compensation insurance, Architect and sinned by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, 2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- stating their agreement upon all of the following: ing cost of transportation, whether incorporated or .1 2 change in the Work; ._.. consumed; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of anv; and hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if others; any. .4 costs Of premiums for 211 bonds and insurance.permit 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES net directly attributable to the change. 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is 2 written order pre- 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for directing 2 change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for Pavment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contnc• adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or for to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con- without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits within the general scope of the Contract consisting Of 2ddi• covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a tracttra deletions or other revisions, the Contact Sum and Con- change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured tract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the on the basis of net increase, if any,with respect to that change. 7 3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, 7.3.3 if the Construction Change Directive provides for an the 2djustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect adjustment to the Contact Sum, the adjustment shall be based for determination. on one of(he following methods: 7.3.9 When the Owner :end COI1IMCLOr 2gree with the deter- .1 mutual :accept2nce of a lump sum properly itemized mination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per- the Contrlct Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agree- mit evaluation; ment upon the 2djustments, such agreement shall be effective '' -� .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub- immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and cxccu- sequcnd}• agreed upon; (ion of::n appropriate Change Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •9,1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW'YORK AVENUE.N.W.,WASHINGTON.n C.2(X)06 A201-1987 15 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the ,Ctivi. 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required tics of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to with the `work of the Contractor, who shall coopertc with the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, then.The Contractor shall participate with other Separate con- to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- tnaors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ments.and to assume toward the Contractor all the Obligations tiles when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu- revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum menu,assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcon- deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules Owner and Architect under the Contra Documents with to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so Owner until subsequently revised. that suecontneting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all when the Owner performs construction or operations related rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the deemed to be subject to the Same obligations and to have the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Condi- Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-sub- tions of the Contra, including, without excluding others, contractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro- those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 posed SUbcontraC[Or,prior to the execution of the subcontract and I2. agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con. tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of variance with the Contract Documents. Subconrracrors shall their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Documents. 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: execution or results upon construction or operations by the Awl', .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Owner or a Separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Pari- proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to graph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcon- construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper tractor in writing; and execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, shall constitute an acknowledgment than the Owner's or sepa- if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. rate contractors'completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, defects not then reasonably discoverable. the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. 6.2.3 Costs caused by dclays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be bome by the party responsi- ARTICLE 6 ble therefor. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedv damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS pleted construction or to propeny of the Owner or separate 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the Separate and to award separate contacts in connection with other por- contractor has reciprocal obligations. lions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the similar to these including those portions related to insurance same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. Of additional cost is involved because of Such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else- 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP cohere in the Contract Documents. 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate con- i _ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different por- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- site.the term "Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in case shall mean the Contractor who executes each Separate Paragraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and 2IIOC21C the cost y Owner-Contractor Agreement. among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 14 A201-1987 AIA• -©I99'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4.4 shall, files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5.1, be decided demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbam. by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry tion is permitted to be demanded.When a party fails to include Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur- a Chim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, rcndy in effect, unless the parties mutually agree Otherwise. or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently, Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. the other parry to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- 4.5.7 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the tractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a arbitrator,or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be copy shall be filed with the Architect. entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in anv court 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration. During arbi. having jurisdiction thereof tndon proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4.3.4: ARTICLE 5 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded.Demand for arbi- tation of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of(1)the SUBCONTRACTORS date on which the Architect has rendered a final written dcci- 5.1 DEFINITIONS sion on the Claim, (2)the tenth day aher the parties have pre- sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final contract with the Contactor to perform a portion of the Work written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events aE the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout described in Subparagraph 4.3.2. the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1) Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- the decision is final but subject to arbitration and(2)a demand tractor.The term "Subcontraaor"does not include a separate for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. made within 30 days after the date on which the party making 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in portion of the Work at the site.The term "Sub-subcontractor" the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the is referred to throughout the Contna Documents as if singular Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after in number and mear>_s a Sub-subcontractor or an authorizcd arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may representative of the Sub-subcontractor. be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration pro- ceedings unless_ the decision is acceptable to all parties 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER concerned. CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall'be made within the time 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as prac- limits specified in le. and i noth 4. as and 4.n and Clause citable after award of the Contract, shall famish in writing to time I u applicable. and in other cases within a reasonable the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enci- timc after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made tier(including those who are to famish materials or equipment after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings fabricated to a special design)proposed for each principal por- based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute ti on of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. tractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the 4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or include, by,consolidauon or joinder or in any other manner, Architect to reply promptly shail constitute notice of no reason- the Architect, the Architects employees or consultants, except able objection. by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree- 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per- ment and signed by the Architect, Owner,Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rca- include, by consolidation Or joinder or in any ocher manner, sonatilc and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contrac- required to contact with anyone to whom the Contactor has made reasonable objection. for as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or Iasi third party or additional third parry to an arbitation whose decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.However,no involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change consent to arbitation of a dispute not described therein or with unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in a person or entity not named or described therein. The fore- submitting names as required. going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by panics 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person �. to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under appli- or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes cable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. reasonable objection to-such change. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUC`nON•FOURTEENTH EDITION U C AIA• • 151H7 THE AMER AMERAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N m.,WASHINGTON.D.C.2OU06 A201-1987 13 j ,.4 Continuing Contract Perfonnance. Pending finsl reso- substantiating that weather Conditions were abnormal for the Lion of a Claim including arbitration,unless otherwise agreed period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, ,n writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make Scheduled construction. payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either patty 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner because of an act or omission of the other party,of any of the except those arising from: other patty's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts .1 liens,Claims,security interests or cncumbrarices aris- such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or ing out of the Contract and unsettled: damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements pay Within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first of the Contract Documents; or observance.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other parry to investigate the matter. If a Claim for 2ddi- .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted,it shall Documents. be filed as provided in Subp=gnphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. if con- 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ditions are encountered at the site which are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif- Claim:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant, fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally (2)submit a Schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- recognized as inherent in construction activities of the ICCt expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice pan. stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of by the observing party shall be given to the other party the Claim by the other party or(5)suggest a compromise. The promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if rhan 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Archi- any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. test will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved,the Architect will prepare or cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the obtain appropriate documentation. pork,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract 4.4.3 if a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the -um or Contract Time,or both. If the Architect determines that Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary ,e conditions at the site are not muetially different from those response,take one or more of the following actions:(1)submit indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) terms of the Contnct is justified, the Architect shall so notify modify the initial Claim or(3)notify the Architect that the initial the Owner and Contractor in wnting, -stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination Claim stands. must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the notice of the decision. if the Owner and Contactor cannot foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the panics the adjustment Shall be referred to the Architect for initial deter- in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within minadon,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the 4.4. panics but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. if the Contractor wishes to period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Contnct Sum or Contnct Time or both. If there is a surety the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims rehting to an and there appears to be a possibility Of a Contractor's default, emergency endangering life or property arising under Pan- the Architect may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and graph 10.3• If the Contractor believes additional cost is request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. involved for reasons including but not limited to (1)a written 4.5 ARBITRATION from the Architect.(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,(3)a writ- 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- controversy or Claire arising out of or related to the Contract', tact,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5)termination of the or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or M other dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the procedure established herein. award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies 4.3.8,1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be provided for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. Such controversies or given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered nd Of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4 shall be Subject to case of a continuing elay only one Claim is necessary. arbitration upon written demand of either party. Arbitration g may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4.3 for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data and no decision has been rendered. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRAST FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION 12 A201-1987 AIA• •kJ 1997 THE AMERI AN INSTITL.?E OF ARCHITECTS,1755 NEW YORK wFNL'E.N W.WASHINGTON.D C.2(XX)6 tractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or of any out the Architect's responstbilidcs at the site. The duties, other persons performing portions of the Work. responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administta- representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- �, tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents rated in the Contract Documents. or when direct communications have been specially autho- 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- rizcd, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi- ing performance under and requirements of the Contract cate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac. Architect's consultants shall be through the Architea. Comrnu- tor. The Architect's resporse to such requests will be made nic2dons by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed shall be through the Concnctor. Communications by and with upon. If no agreement is made conceming the time within separate contractors shall be through the Owner. which interpretations required of the'Architect shall be fur. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur. review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will nish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. madc for them. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the consistent with the intent of and reasonabiv inferable from the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implements- Contact Documents and will be in writing or in the form of tion of the intent of the Contract Documents,the Architect will drawings.When making such interpretations and decisions,the have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, Owner and Contactor, will not show partiality to either and whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or completed. will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision tendered in good faith. madc in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi• 8 tect to the Contractor,Subcontractori,material and equipment effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the suppliers, their agents or employees,or ogler persons perform- Contract Documents. ing portions of the Work. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assenion by one of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpre- limited purpose of checking for conformance with information cation of Contract terms,pavment of money,extension of time given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu• or ocher relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The merits. The Architect's action will be taken with such reason- term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques- able promptness u to cause no delay in the Work or in the tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- activines of the Owner. Contractor or separate contractors, ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such Submittals party making the Claim. is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred ini(Wh, performance of equipment or systerns,all of which remain the to the Architect for acuon as provided in Paragraph 4.4.A deci- responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4,shall Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit- be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Archi(ect's review shall not matters arising prior to the date final payment is due,regardless constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise of(])whether such matters relate to execution and progress of specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, the Work or(2)the extent to which the Work has been com- methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in assembly of which the item is a component. the event(1)the position of Architect is vacant,(2)the Architect has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc- within agreed time limits. (3) the Architect has failed to take tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. the Claim is made,(4)45 days have passed after the Claim has 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final mechanic's lien. completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be Owner's review and records written warranties and related madc within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Pavment upon such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. the condition giving rat to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims must be madc by written notice. An additional Claim madc .� 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will pro- after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• .©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1711 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W.WASHINGTON.D.C.201X16 A201-1987 11 Jwncr or 2 scp2mte contractor except with written consent of tcct's consultams, and agents and employees of any of them ,he Owner and of such separate contractor:such consent shall arising out of(1)the preparation or approval Of maps,drawings, not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unrca- opinions,reports,Surveys,Change Orders,designs or specifica- son2bly withhold from the Owner or 2 separate contractor the tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or Contraaor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. instructions by the Architect, the Architea's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or 3.15 CLEANING UP failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 3.18.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the ARTICLE 4 Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's roofs, construction ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT equipment,machinery and surplus materials. 4.1 ARCHITECT 3.15.2 It the Contractor fails to clean up 25 provided in the 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice Contraa Documents, the Owner may do so and the Cost architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden thereof shall lx charged to the Contractor. dried as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK the Contraa Documents as if singular in number. The term 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect "Architect" means the Architect or the Arehitea's authorized access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever rcpresent2tivc. located. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Architect as set forth in the Contna Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay 211 royalties and license fees. Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be uare2- The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of sonably withheld. patent rights and Shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but sh2ll not be responsible for 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, such defense or loss when 2 particular design,process or prod- the Owner shall 2ppoint an architect against whom the Con- uct of 2 particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has rea- the Contract Documents shall be that of the former 2rchitect. son to believe that the required design,process or product is an 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 infringement of 2 patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for shall be subject to 2rbimtion. such loss unless such information is promptly fumishcd to the Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION j OF THE CONTRACT 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Archi- Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final sect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from from and against claims, damages, IOSSCS and expenses, includ- time to time during the correction period described in Paw- ing but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,dam- Owner.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the 2gc, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. disease or dnth,or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance erty(other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting with other provisions of the Contract. therefrom,but only to the extent caused in whole or in pan by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in pan by 2 party in general if the Work is being performed in a manna indicat- indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed ing that the Work,when completed,will be in accordance with to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be indemnity which would otherwise exist 25 to a party or person required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections described in this P2ngnph 3.18. to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an 2rchitect, the Architect will keep the 3.18.2 In claims.against any person or entity indemnified Owner informed of progress of the Work,and will endeavor to under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,2 guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifica- 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and tion obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by will not be responsible for construction means, methods, 2 limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or techniques,sequences or procedures,or for safety precautions benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor and programs in connection with the Work, since these are under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph benefit 2cts or other employee benefit acts. 3.3. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Archi• of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 10 A201-1987 AIA• •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 .3 Contractor's costs for unioading and handling at the which submittals arc required the way the Contractor proposes site, labor, installation costs. overhead, profit and to conform to the information given and the design concept - other expenses contemplated for stated allowance expressed in the Contra Documents. Review by the Architect amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. not in the allowances. .4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review,approve and submit to the the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data. Samples and similar Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- Contnctor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3. tractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT action. 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance a the requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- dent shall represent the Contnaor,and communications given W has bccn approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- accordance with approved submittals. tractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writ- ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product written request in each case. Data, Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Con- will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information tract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's contained within such submittals with the requirements of the information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. Work and of the Contract Documents. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and pneti- Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has cable execution of the Work. specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submital and the Architect has given written 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the approval to the specific deviation. The Contnaor shall not be Architect's approval, a schedule Of submittals which is coordi- relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- nested with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows ings, product Data. Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. sect's approval thereof. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing schedules. or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SiTE similar submittals, to rc%'isions other than those requested by 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner the Architect on previous submittals. one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda. 3.12.10 informational submittals upon which the Archirect is Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in marked currently to record changes and selections made during the Contract Documents. construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria uct Data. Samples and similar required submittals. These shall Of materials,systems or equipment is required by the Contact be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the test for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifi- 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES cations. 3.12.1 Shop Drawings arc drawings, diagrams, schedules and 3.13 USE OF SiTE other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to a Subcontractor. Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with 3.12.2 Product Data arc illustrations, standard schedules, per- materials or equipment. formance charts, instructions. brochures, diagrams and other 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING information fumished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts 3.12.3 Samples •rare physical examples which illustrate fit together properly. materulb, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially compieted construction of the 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples and similar sub- Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or tither- mittals are not Contract Documents,The purpose of their sub- wise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contrac- mittal is to demonstrate for those purions of the Work fur for shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRALT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •4,1997 TIfE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N W W.WASHINGTON.D.C.20Uu)6 A201-1987 9 2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND 3.5 WARRANTY HELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that j.2.1 The Concnctor shall Carefully study and compare the materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be Contract Doauncnts with rich other and with infomlation of good quality and new unless otherwise required-or permit. fumished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and ted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be fret shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or from defects not inherent in the qualiry required or perrrttted, omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- Contract Documents. Work not conforming to nccsc require- tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the menu, including substitutions not properly approved and Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Con- warranty excludes remedy for damage or defea caused by tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac- wear and tear under normal usage.If required by the Architect, for shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor- the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind mance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable and quality of materials and equipment. costs for correction. 3.6 TAXES 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field mcasuremenu and verify 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer, use and similar field conditions and shall carefully compare such field mca- taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- suremencs and conditions and other information known to the tractor which are legally enacted when bids arc received or Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely activities. Errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall scheduled to go into effect. be reported to the Architect at once. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- suant to Paragraph 3.12. the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and govemmental fees, licenses and inspections 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, which arc customarily secured after execution of the Contract •.sing the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor and which arc legally required when bids arc received or nego- all be solely responsible for and have control over construe- ..on menu, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices and for coordinating all portions of the'Work under the Con- required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful erect, unless Contract Documents give other specific inscruc- orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the tiors concerning these matters. Work. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acs 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that and omissions of the Contractor's employees. Subcontractors the Contract Documents arc in accordance with applicable and their agents and employees.and other persons performing laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regula- portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. tions- However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per- shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and form the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate either by activities or duties of the Architect in the ."architect's Modification. adrtvnistranon of the Contract, or by tats, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con- Contractor. trary to laws,statutes,ordinances,building coda,and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecuon of por- the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work tioas of Work already performed under this Contract to deter- and shall bear the attributable costs. mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, allowances stared in the Contract Documents. Items covered the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,materials.equip- by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor heat, utilities, transportation. and other facilities and services shall not be required to employ persons or entities against necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: rated or to be incorpontcd in the Work. .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be Oft, 1.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the ,rder among the Contractor's employees and other persons Work; carrying out the Contract. The Concnctor shall not permit 2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks materials and equipment delivered at the site and all aasigncd to them. required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION 8 A201-1987 AIA• •®1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and ments and charges required for construction,use or occupancv Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors of permanent structures or for permanent changes in cxstin* and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited facilities. license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their be fumished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet the Contractor will be Furnished,free of charge,such copies of official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con- Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon. rights. sibiliiics of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those 1.4 CAPITALIZATION in respect to Article 6(Construction by Owner or by Separate 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include Contractors), Article 9(Payments and Completion)and Article those which are (I)specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- I 1 (Insurance and Bonds). bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs,Subpara- 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK graphs and Clauses in the document or(3) the titles of other 2,3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in documents published by the American Institute of Architects. accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents 1.5 INTERPRETATION as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre- Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner, quently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and ani- by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so des such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an empowered by the Owner in writing,may order the Contrac. article is absent from one statement and appears in another is for to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. such order has been eliminated: however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the pan of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- ARTICLE 2 tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. OWNER 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.1 DEFINITION 2.4.1 If the Contactor defaults or neglects ro carry out the 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract within a seven-dav period after receipt of written notice from Documents as if singular in number.The term .'Owner"means the Owner to commence and continue correction of such the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish written notice to corrcct Such deficiencies within a second to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and seven-day period. If the Contractor within such sccond Seven- relevant for the Contractor to evaluate. give notice of or day period after receipt of such second notice fails to com- enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a mence and continue to correct anv deficiencies. the Owner correct statement of the record legal title to the property on mav, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and have, correct Such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or Agreement and, within five days after any change, information thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded. ciencies, including compensation for the Architects additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to REQUIRED OF THE OWNER the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi- tect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time difference to the Owner. thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract./Note: Unless sucb reasonable ARTICLE 3 evidence «-ere furnished on request prior to the execution of The Agreement. the prospective contractor would not be CONTRACTOR required to erectile the Agreement or to commence the Work.1 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical 3.1 DEFINITION characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such of the Project, and a legal description of the site. in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized shall Secure and pay for necessary approvals,casements,assess- representative. AU1 DOCUMENT A201 a GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1755 NEW YORK AVENUE.N W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.Zo(xX) A201-1987 7 i GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 meet, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usu2lly assembled for the 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS The which may include the bidding requirements, sample 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between 1.2 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT Owner and Contractor(hercia2fter the Agreement),Conditions of theCOntract(General,Supplementsryand other Conditions), 1.21 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner Drawings, Specific2doms,addenda issued prior to execution of and Contr2ctor as provided in the Agreement. If either the the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Owner or Contractor or both do not sign 211 the Contract Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modifi- Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by menu upon request. both parties, (2) 2 Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for 2 minor change in the Work 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the 5ent2tion that the Contractor has visited the site,become famil- Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other i2r with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or formed and correlated personal observations with require- invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the menu of the Contract Documents. Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include 211 items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are comple- The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. mentary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement required by 211: performance by the Contractor shall be etween the parties hereto and supersedes prior ncgoti2cioris, required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- rcpresentatiotZs or•2greements.either written•or oral.The Con- menns and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary f tract may be amended or modified only by 2 Modification.The to produce the intended results. Contract Documents shall not be construed to create 2 conimc- 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections tual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Con- and 2rticle5,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the tractor. (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub subcontractor or(3)between any persons or entities other than Contactor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors ra e. the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the words which have well-known technical or construction indus- Architect's duties. try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in 2ccord- 1.1.3 THE WORK 2nce with such recognized meanings. The term "Work" means the construction and services 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER partially completed, and includes 211 other labor, materials, DOCUMENTS equipment and services provided or to be provided by the 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- 1.1.4 THE PROJECT tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract The Project is the total construction of which the Work per- record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor,5ub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other pan and which may include construction by the Owner or by documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise separate contractor. indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS will retain 211 common 12w,statutory and other reserved rights, The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- in 2ddition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the rnct Documents, wherever located and whenever issued. Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of the Work. +_ generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared iles and diagrams. by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS tor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub- The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- consisting of the written requirements for m2teri2ls, equip- - ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope Of the AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 6 A201-1987 AIA• •©1"7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORX AVENUE.N W..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 Rules and Notices for Arbitration ..................... 4.5.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience ............. 14.3 Safety of Persons and Property ... .................... 10.2 Suspension of the Work ............. 4.3.7,5.4.2,14.1.1.4.14.3 Safety Precautions and Programs ........... 4.2.3.4.2.7,10.1 Suspension or Terminution of the Contract ...... 4.3.7,5.4.1.1,14 Samples.Definition of .............................. 3.12.3 Taxes ...................................... 3.6,7.3.6.4 Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and ... 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Termination by the Contractor................... 14.1 Samples at the Site,Documents and ................ 3.11 Termination by the Owner for Cause............. 5.4.1.1.14.2 Schedule of Values ...... ....................... 9.2,9.3.1 Termination of the Architect ...................................... 4.1.3 Schedules,Construction .. . . . ......................... 3.10 Termination of the Contractor ........................ 14.2.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors . ......... 1.1.4,3.14.2,4.2.4, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT ...... 14 4.5.5,6, 11.3.7. 12.1.2, 12.2.5 Tests and Inspections ..... 3.3.3.4.2.6.4.2.9.9.4.2,12.2.1,13.5 Shop Drawings,Definition of. ..... ................... 3.12.1 TIME ........... Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples .. .. 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Time,Delays and Extensions of .............. 4.3-8,7.2.1.8-3 Site,Use of.... ....... . . . ...... .......... 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Time Limits,Specific ......... 2.1.2.2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11,3.15.1. Site Inspections . ..1.2.2,3.3.4,4.2.2,4.2-9.4.3.6.9.8.2.9.10.1. 13.5 4.2.1, 4.2.11.4.3,4.4,4.5,5.3. 5.4,7.3.5.7.3.9,8.2,9.2,9.3.1, Site visits,Architect's ... . . . . . .. ..... .. 4.2.2,4.2.5.4.2.9,4.3.6, 9.3.3.9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3. 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 9.4.2.9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.2.9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.11, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Special Inspections and Testing ....... ....... 4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5 Time Umtts on Claims......... 4.3.2.4.3.3,4.3.6,4.3.9,4.4,4.5 Speeffleatlons,Definition of the....................... 1.1.6 Title to Work .......... ....................... 9.3.2.9.3.3 Specifications,The ... .. ... .. 1.1.1,1.1.6,1.1.7, 1.2.4,1.3,3.11 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK ......... 12 Statutes of Limitations... .. .. ............. 4.5.42.12.2.6. 13.7 Uncovering of Work ...................... . 12.1 Stopping the Work. . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.3,4.3.7,9.7, 10.1.2, 10.3,14.1 Unforeseen Conditions ..................... 4.3.6,8.3.1,10.1 Stored Materials . ..... ... .. 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1.4,12.2.4 Unit Prices.................. 7.1.4,7.3,32 Subcontractor,Definition of. . . ........................ 5.1.1 Use of Documents ................. 1.1.1,1.3.2-2.5.3.12.7.5.3 SUBCONTRACTORS ... . .. . . ... ....................... 5 Use of Site .............................. 3.13,6.1.1.62.1 Subcontractors,Work by. . . . . . .. .. . ....... 1.2.4.3.3.2.3.12.1, Values Schedule of ....... 9.2,9.3.1 4.2.3. 5.3, 5.4 Waiver of Claims:Final Payment........... 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.10.3 Subeontraetual Relations . . . . ..... ..... 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2.9.6.2, Waiver of Claims by the Architect...................... 13.4.2 9.6.3,9.6.4, 10.2.1, 11.3.7, 11.3.8. 14.1.1. 14.2.1.2. 14.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor... ... ... 9.10.4, 11-3.7,13.4.2 �Irsr Submittals .., ....... 1.3,3.2.3,3.10,3.11.3-L2.4.2.7,5.2.1.5.2.3, Waiver of Claims by the Owner .... .......... .i.3.5.4.5.1.9.9.3, 7.3.6,9.2.9.3.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1,9.10.2.9.10.3, 10.1.2. 11.1.3 9.10.3. 11.3.3, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 13.4.2 Subrogation,Waivers of. . . . . .. . ... . ..... 6.1.1, 1 1.3.5.11.3.7 Waiver of Liens.. .. ...... . .... ...... ... . .. ......... 9.10.2 Substantial Completion. . . . . . .. . . .. 4.2.9,4.3.5.2.8.1.1,8.1.3, WaiVCrS of Subrog2tion....... ............ 6.1.1, 11.3-5.11-3.7 8.2.3.9.8, 9.9.1. 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 Warranty and Warranties... .. ......... ........... 3.5,4.2.9. Substantial Completion,Definition of. . . .. . ...:... .. • 9.8.1 4.3.5.3.93.3.9.8.2,9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7.1.3 Substitution of Subcontractors . . . . . . .. . ... . . . .. ... 5.2.3,5.2.4 Weather Delays .... .. ..... .. ..... .. ...... .... .... . 4.3.8.2 Substitution of the Architect. . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . . . . . . .. . 4.1.3 When Arbitration May Be Demanded . .. . . . . . . . . . . ... . . 4.5.4 Substitutions of Materials . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. ... ... .... . 3.5.1 Work,Definition of . ..... .. .. .. .. . .. . 1.1.3 . ....... ....... Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 5.1.2 Written Consent ......... . . . .. 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2.4.1.2.4.3.4, Subsurface Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... .. . . . .. .... . . 4.3.6 4.5.5.9.3.2.9.8.2.9.9.1.9.10.2,9.10.3. 10.1.2, 10.1.3, Successors and Assigns 13.2 1 1.3.1, 11.3-1.4. 1 1.3.1 1. 13.2. 13.4.2 Superintendent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ..... ..... .. 3.9, 10.2.6 Written Interpretations .. ... . . . . .. .. . ..... 4.2.11,4.2.12.4.3.7 Supervision and Construction Procedures . . . . .. 1.2.4.3.3,3.4, Written Notice . 2.3.2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9.4.3,4.4.4, 4.;.3,4.3.4, 6.1.3.6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4,8.2,8.3.1, 10. 12, 14 4.5. 5.2.1, 5.3, S.q.1.t,8.2.2,9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,9.10, 10.1.2, Surety ... . Surety,Consent of. .. . . . ... ...... .. ...... 9.9-1-9.10-2.9-10.3 Written Orden.............................. 2.3,3.9,4.3.7, Surveys.. ... .. .. . .. . . . .. .. . . ................ 2.2.2.3.18.3 7.8.2.2. 11.3.9. 12.1. 12.2, 13.5.2. 14.3.1 J 't AU DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •019R7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1745 NEW YORK AVENUE,NW,WAJHINGTON.D.C.20OU6 A201-1987 5 Limitations of Ll2biliry ..... 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.11, Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 3.17,3.18,4.2.6, 4.2.7,42.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.10.4, Award Separate Contracts ......................... 6.1 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 1 1.2.1. 11.3.7, 13.4.2, 13.5.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work................... 2-3,4.3.7 LImiutioru of Tune,Gener2l ........... 2.2.1,2.2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3, Owner's Right to Suspend the Work ........:............ 14.3 3.8.2, 3.10.3.12.5,3.15.1,42.1,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.3.2, Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ................. 14.2 4.3.3,4.3.4.4.3.6,4.3.9,4.5.4.2, 5.2.1,5.2.3,6.2.4,7.3.4,7.4, Ownership and Use of ArchhecVs Drawings,Specfflcatlons 8.2,9.5,9.6.2,9.8, 9.9,9.10, 11.1.3. 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.5, and Other Documents................ 1.1.1,1.3,2.2-5.5.3 11.3.6, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.5, 13.7 Partial Occupancy or Use ................. 9.6-6,9.9,11.3.11 Patching,Cutting and .......................... 3.14,6.2.6 Limitations of Time,Specific ......... 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.11, Patents,Royalties and .............................. 3.17 3.15.1,4.2.1,4.2.11,4.3, 4.4,4.5, 5.3, 5.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.9,8.2, Payment,Applications for ................ 4-2.5.9.2.9.3,9.4, 9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3.9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 9.5.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 14.2.4 11.3.10, 11.3.11, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Pent,Certificates for........... 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3.9.4,9.5, Loss of Use Insurance............................. 11.3.3 9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3.9.10.1,9.10.3. 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Material Suppliers .............. 1.3.1,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1, Payment,Failure of.......................... 4.3.7,9.5.1-3, 9.3.1,9.3-1-2.9.3.3,9.4.2,9.6.5.9.10.4 9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Materials,Hazardous ........................... 10.1, 10.2.4 Payment,Final ............ 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,4.3.5,9.10.I1.1.2. Materials,Labor,Equipment and ..... 1.1.3.1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2, 11-1.3. 11.3.5. 12.3.1 3.12.2, 3.12.3,3.12.7,3.12.11,3.13.3.15.1,4.2.7,62.1, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and .............. 7.3.6.4, 7.3.6,9.3.2, 9.3.3. 12.2.4, 14 9.10.3, 1 1.3.9,11.4 Mears,Methods.Techniques, Sequences and Payments.Progress ................ 4.3.4,9.3,9.6, Procedures of Construction........ 3.3.1,4.2.3,4.2.7,9.4.2 9.8.3,9.10.3. 13.6, 14.2.3 Minor Changes in the Work.......... 1.1.1,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.1,7.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ...................... 9, 14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ........................ 13 Payments to Subcontractors .................... 5.4.2.9-5.1-3. Modifications,Definition of ........................... 1.1.1 9.6.2,9.6.3.9.6.4, 11,3.8, 14.2.1.2 Modifications to the Contract ........... 1.1.1,1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11, PCB.............................................. 10.1 41.2,4.2:1, 5.2.3,7,8.3.1,9.7 Performance Bond and Payment Bond................. 7.3.6.4, Mutual Responsibility . .......................... ........... ..... 6.2 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 _ Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of ........... ....... 12.3 Permits,Fees and Notices....... 22.3,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF ....... ..... 10 4.3.5,9.5.2,9.8.2, 12, 13.7.1.3 Polyehlorin2ted Biphenyl ............................. 10.1 Notice.. .... ....... 2.3,2.4.3.2.1,3.2.2;'3.7.3,3.7.4,3.9,3.12.8, Product Data,Definition of............... ........ .. .. 3.12.2 3.12.9, 3.17.4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3. 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2,9.4.1, Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings .... 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 9.5.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.13. 1 1.3, 12.2.2, Progress and Completion ................... 4.2.2,4.3.4,8.2 12.2.4, 13.3. 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14 Progress Payments ............................ 4.3.4.9.3, Notice,Written 2.3.2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9.4-3, 9.6, 9.8.3.9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 4.4.4, 4.5. 5.2.1,5.3, 5.4.1.1,8.2.2,9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,9.10, Project,Definition of the....... .................. .... 1.1.4 10.1.2, 10.2.6, I1.1-3. 1 1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Project Manual,Definition of the ...................... 1.1.7 Notice of Testing and Inspections.. .. ..... ....... 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Project M2nu21s ................................. ... 2.2.5 Notice to Proceed. . .... ....... .............. . .. .. . .. 8.2.2 Project Representatives ............................. 4.2.10 Notices,Permits,Fees and . . .... 2.2.3,3.7,3.13.7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Property Insurance ........................... 10.2.5,11.3 Observations,Architect's On-Site 4.2.2,4.2.5, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY.. ........... 10 4.3.6, 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Regulations and Laws ............ 1.3.3.6.3.7,3.13,4.1.1,4.5.5, Observations,Contractor's..........•.. . 1.2.2,3.2.2 4.5.7, 10.2.2, 11-1. 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.52, 13.6, 14 ............ Occupancy............. 9.6.6, 9.8.1,9.9. 11.3.11 Rejection of Work ......................... 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.2 On-Site Inspections by the Architect .......... 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6, Rde2.ses of Waivers and Liens......................... 9.10.2 9.4.2,9.8.2. 9.9.2, 9.10.1 Representations . ........................ 1.2-2,3.5.1,3.12.7, On-Site Observations by the Architect ...... ... 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6, 6.2.2.8.2.1,9.3.3.9.4.2,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.10.'1 9.4.2.9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Representatives............................ 2.1.1.3-1.1,3.9. Orders,Written ............ 2.3.3.9,4.3.7,7,8.2.2, 11.3-9. 12.1, 4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 13.2.1 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes .................. 4.4,4.5 Work Responsibility for Those Performing the ............ 3.3.2, OWNER............................................. 2 Owner,Definition of . .................... 4.2.3.6.1.3,62. to 2.1 ... 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Review Owner,Information and Services Required of the......... 2.1.2. Revie w g .Contra.....of of Contract Documents and Field 2.2, 4.3.4,6,9. 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 1-1.1.1.5, 14.1.3 Conditions by Contractor............ 1.22,3.2,3.7.3.3.12.7 Owner's Authority ......... 3.8.1,4.1.3,4.2.9,5.2.1.5.2.4,5.4.1, Review of Contractor's Submittals by 7.3.1.8.2.2. 9.3.1, 9.3.2. 11.4.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2.X4.2, 14.3.1 Owner and Architect ............. 3.10.1,3.10.2.3.11,3.12. Owner's Financi2l Capability ................... 2.2.1,14.1.1.5 2 2'9.5.2.1,5.2.3.9.2.9.8.2 Owner's Liability Insurance .........,. 11.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data ............... Owner's Loss of Use Insurance...................... ... 11.3.3 and Samples by Contractor........................ 3.12.5 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ............... 1.1.2, Rights and Remedies ............. 1.12.2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2, 5.2.1, 5.4.1,9.6.4 4.2.6,4.3.6, 4.5,5.3,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 102.5. Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work........ 2.4, 12.2.4, 14.2.2.2 10.3, 12.22, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 Owner's Right to Clean Up ............................ 6.3 Royalties and Patents............................... 3.17 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 4 A201-1987 AIA• •O 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 CONTRACTOR . . ..................... ................ 3 Emergencies ....................... .......... 4.*3.7,10.3 Contractor.Definition of .... ..................... 3.1,6.1.2 Employees,Contractor's .......... 3.3.2.3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.1, Contractor's Bid. ................................... 1.1.1 3.18.2,4.2-3.4.2-6,8.1.2, 10.2. 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractors Construction Schedules ............. 3.10,6.1.3 Equipment.Labor.Materials and.......... 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1, Contractor's Employees ....... 3.3-2.3.4.2,3.8-1,3.9,3.18,4 1.3, 3.8.2,3.12-3.3.12.7, 3.12.11,3.13.3.15-1,4.2.7, 4.2.6.8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3. 14.2.1.1 6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2, 9.3-3. 11-3, 12-2.4, 14 Contractors LlaNllty Insurance. ... ................... 11.1 Execution and Progress of the Work . ...... 1.1.3, 1.2-3,3.2,3.4.1, Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 3.5-1, 4.2.2, 4.2-3, 4.3.4,4.3.8,6.2.2.7.1.3. and Owner's Forces ... ... 2.2.6,3.12.5.3.14.2,4.2.4,6,12.2.5 7.3-9, 8.2,8.3.9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 14.2, 14.3 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors ....... 1.2.4,3.3.2, Execution,Correlation and Intent of the 3.18.1,3.18.2, 5.2, 5.3. 5.4. 9.6.2, 11.3-7, 11.3-8, 14.2.1.2 Contract Documents ........ . .... .. ........... 1.2,3.7.1 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect .... 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, Extensions of Time ........... .. 4.3.1,4.3.8,7.2.1.3,8.3,10-3.1 3.3-3.3.5-1, 3.7.3,3.11. 3.12.8 3.16. 3.18, 4.2-3, 4.2.4,4.2.6. Failure of Payment by Contractor. . .. .......... 9.5-1-3. 14.2.1.2 4.2.12, 5.2.6,2.2,7.3.4,9.8.2. 11-3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Failure Of Payment by Owner . ... .. ... . . .. ... 4.3.7,9.7,14.1.3 Contr2cior'sRepresem2dons.. 1.2.2,3.5-1.3-12.7,6.2.2,8.2.1.9-3.3 Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Contractor's Responsibility for Those Final Completion and Final Payment ........ 4.2.1,4.2.9.4.3.2, Performing the Work ...... .. ...... .. .. 3.3-2.3.18.4.2-3,10 4.3.5,9.10, 11.1.2. 11-1.3, 11.3-5, 12-3.1, 13.7 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents...... 1.2.2,3.2.3.7.3 Financial Arrangements,Owner's. . ..................... 2.2.1 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work .... .................. 9.7 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance .. . . ............... 11.3 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract ....... ....... 14.1 Contractor's 5ubmitE21s ..... .. 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2-1,5.2-3, GENERAL PROVISIONS. ...... . ........................ 1 7.3.6,9.2,9.3-1,9.8.2, 9.9.1,9.10.2, Governing Law ............ . . ..... ................. 13.1 9.10-3, 10.1.2, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Guarantees(See Warranty and Warranties) Contractor's Superintendent .. . .. . .. ..... ......... 3.9,10.2.6 H-rdous Materials........ .. ....... .. ......... 10.1,10.2.4 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures.. .... 1.2.4, Identification of Contract Documents . .................. 1.2.1 3.3, 3.4, 4.2-3, 8.2.2, 8.2-3, 10 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers . ........ .... 5.2.1 Contractual Liability Insurance. . . . . . . . .... . .... 11.1.1.7, 11.2-1 Indemnification ....... 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.1.4, 11.3-1.2, 11-3.7 Coordination and Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 1.2.2, 1.2.4,3.3-1, Information and Services Required of the Owner..... 2.1.2,2-2, 3;10, 3.12.7,6.1-3,6.2.1 4.3.4,6.1-3,6.1.4,6.2.6, 9,3.2, 9.6.1,9.6.4,9.8-3,9.9.2, Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ... I-3,2.2.5.3'.11 9.10.3, 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13-5.1, 13.5.2 Correction of Work . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 2.3,2.4,4.2.1.9.8.2, Injury or Damage to Person or Property . . . ............. 4.3.9 12.1.2. 12.2, 13.7.1.3 Inspections............... . .. .. . . . .. 3.3-3.3.3.4,3.7.1,4.2.2, Cost.Definition of . . .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . ... ... .... 7.3.6. 14-3.5 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 4.3.6,9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2,9,10.1, 13.5 Costs . . . . 2.4.3.2.1.3-7 y 8.2.3.15.2,4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3-8.1,5.2-3, Instructions to Bidders........ . .. .. . .... ............. 1.1.1 6.1-1.6.2-3,6.3.7.3.3.3.7.3.6,7.3.7,9.77,9,8.2.9.10.2, 11.3-1.2. Instructions to the Contractor.. . . 3,8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12-1, 13.5.2 11.3-1.3, 11-3.4, 1 1.3 9, 12.1. 12.2.1. 12.2-4, 12.2.5, 13.5. 14 Insurance.... ... 4.3.9.6.1.1.7.3.6.4.9 3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2. 11 Cutting and Patching. . . . . . . . - . . . . . . ... ... . . 3.14,6.2.6 Insurance,Boller and Machinery . . . . . . . . . .... .. . . . . . 11.3.2 Damage to Construction of Owncr or Scp2r2ic Contractors 3.14.2, Insurance,Contractor's Liability . . . . . . . . . .... . .... . . . 11.1 6.2.4, 9.5.1.5. 10.2.1.2. 10-2.5. 10.3, 11-1. 11.3, 12.2.5 Insurance,Effective Date of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Damage to the Work . . . .. 3.14.2.9.9-1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5. 10-3. 11.3 Insurance,Loss of Use. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . ... 11-3.3 Damages,Claims for .. 3.18,4.3-9.6.1.1,6.2-5,8.3.2.9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Insurance,Owner's Uability. . . . . . . . . . . ... .. ... .. .. 11.2 Damages for Delay. . . .. . ... . . . ... ... . . 6.1.1.8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7 Insurance,Property.... ... . . . .. . . . . . . . . ...... 10.2.5.11.3 Date of Commencement of the Work.Definition of.. ....... 8.1.2 Insur2ncc,Scored Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 9.3.2, 11.3-1.4 Date of Substinti21 Completion.Definition of.. . ........... 8.1.3 INSURANCE AND BONDS .. . .. . . . . . . .................. 11 Day.Definition of. . . .. . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . .............. 8.1.4 Insurance Companies,Consent EO Partial Occupancy .-9.9-1, 11-3.11 Decisions of the Architect .. . . . . 4.2.6,4.2.7.4.2.11.4.2.12,4.2.13. Insurance Companies,Settlement with..... ............ 11.3-10 4.3.2, 4.3-6, 4.4.1, 4.4.4. 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3-9, 8.1-3,8.3-1.9.2. . Intent of the Contract Documents . . . . ... . . . . ..... 1.2-3.3.12.4. 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.2.9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13-5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 4.2.6. 4.2.7.4.2.12. 4.2.13,7.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification . . .. . . .. 9.5,9.7, 14.1-1.3 Interest...... ............ . . . . . .. . . . . .............. 13.6 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Interpretation. ....... 1.2.5. 1.4.1.5, 4.3-1,5.1,6.1.2.8.1.4 Rejection and Correction of ... . ... .. . . . 2.3.2.4.3.5-1.4.2.1. 4.2.6, 4.3.5.9.5.2. 9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.2.5. 12, 137.1.3 Interpretations,Written ..... . . .. ... . . .. .. 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 Defective Work,Definition of . . . . . .. . ....... . . ... 3.5.1 Joinder and Consolidation Of Claims Required . ............ 4.5.6 Definitions.. .. .. 1.1.2.1.I-3.1.3.5.1.3.12.1.3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, Judgment on Final Award . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 4.5.1.4.5.4.1,4.S.7 4.3-1, 5.1,6.1.2, 7.2.1,7.3-1. 7.3.6.8.1,9.1,9.8.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment .. . . 1.1.3,1.1.6.3.4,3.5-1,3.8-2. Delays and Extensions of Time . . . ... ... . 4.3-1.4.3.8-1.4.3.8.2, 3.12.2,3.12-3. 3.12.7, 3.12.11,3.13.3.15.1. 6.1.1.6 23, 7.2.1, 7.3-1, 7.3.4, 7.3.5,7.3.8, 4.2.7,6.2.1. 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3-3, 12.2.4, 14 7.3.9.8.1.1.8.3, 1`03.1. 14.1.1.4 Labor Disputes .............. . . . . .. . . . .............. 8.3.1 Disputes . . ... . . . . . .. 4.1.4,4.3,4.4.4 5.6.2.5,6.3,7.3-8,9.3.1.2 Laws and Regulations .. . .. . . 1.3.3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,4.5.5,4.5-7. Documents and Samples at the Site ... . . . . ........... .... 3.11 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11-1. 11.3, 13 1, 13.4, 13.5-1, 13-5.2, 13.6 Drawings.Definition of ... .. . . . .. .. ... .. ......... .... 1.1.5 Liens... ............... 2.1.2.4.3.2.4.3.5.1.8.2.2,9.3.3.9.10.2 Drawings and Specifications.Use and Ownership of..... 1-1-1,13, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder .. .............. 4.5.5 2.2.5,3.11, 5.3 Limitations.Statutes of . ... . .. .. ...... . . .. 4.5.4.2. 12.2.6, 13.7 Aw** Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions. .. .. 3.2 Limitations of Authority....... ..... . .. .. ... 3.3-1,4.1.2,4.2.1, Effective Date of Insurance . . . . .. . . . . . . .. ........ 8.2.2,11.1.2 4.2-3, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 5.2.2, 5.2.4, 7.4, 11-3.10 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA• •01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N W..WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 3 INDEX Acceptance of Nonconforming Work ......... 9.6-6.9.9.3,12.3 Building Permit .................................... 3.7.1 Acceptance of Work ........... 9.6.6.9.8.2.9.9-3.9.10-1.9.10.3 Capltallzatlon:...................................... 1.4 Access to Work........................... 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Cersiftcate of Substantial Completion .................... 9.8.2 Accident Prevention.............................. 4.2.3.10 Certificates for Payment....... 4.2.5,4.2.9,9:33,9.4,9.5,9.6.1, Acts and Omissions ... 3.2.1,3.2.2,33.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3.4.3.2, 9.6.6,9.7.1,9.8.3.9.10.1,9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 4.3.9.8.3.1, 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 13.41, 13.7, 14.1 Certifiates of Inspection,Testing or Approval ..... 3.12.11,13.5.4 Addenda ..................................... 1.1.1,3.11 Certificates of Insurance ................... 9.3.2.9.10.2,11.1.3 Additional Cost,Claims for......... 4.3.6.4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1, 10.3 Change Orders...... 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.8.2.4,3.11,41.8,4.3.3.5.2.3, Additional Inspections and Testing....... 4.2.6,9.8.2,12-2.1,13.5 7.1,7.2, 7.3.2,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 11.3.1.2, Additional Time,Claims for............. 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ....... 3.3.3.4,9.4,9.5 Change Orders,Definition of.......................... 7.2.1 Advertisement or lnvitation to Bid .. .................... 1.1.1 Changes........................................... 7.1 Aesthetic Effect........... .. .................. 4.2.13.4.5.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK .... 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,93.1.1, 10.1.3 Allowances ................. . .. .................... 3.8 Claim,Definition of................................. 4.3.1 All-risk Insurance................................. 11.3.1.1 Claims and Disputes................ 4.3,4.4,4.5,6.2.5,8.3.2, Applications for Payment .. 4.2.5.7.3.7.9.2.9-3,9.4.9.5.1,9.6-3, 9.3.1.2,9.3.3.9.10.4, 10.1.4 9.8.3.9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.1.3, 14.2.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims ................ 4.5.6 Approvals .... 2.4,3.3.3,3.5.3.10.2.3.12.4 through 3.12.8,3.18.3. Claims for Additional Cost........ 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1,10.3 4.2.7,9.3.2. 11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13.5 Claims for Additional Time............ 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 Arbitration ..................... 4.1.4,4.3.2,4.3.4,4.4.4,4.5, Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions........... 4.3.6 8.3.1, 10.1.2, 11.3.9, 11-3.10 Chirps for Damages...3.18,4.3.9,6.1.1,6.2.5,8.3-2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Architect .......................................... 4.1 Claims Subject to Arbitration................. 4.3.2,4.4.4.4.5.I Architect.Definition of.............. ................. 4.1.1 Cleaning Up ................................... 3.15,6.3 Architect.Extent of Authority...... .. 2.4,3.12.6,4.2,4.3.2,4.3.6, Commencement of Statutory Umitatlon Period .......... 13.7 4.4, 51,6.3. 7.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.6,7.4,9.2,9.3.1, Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to....... 2.1.2, 9.4,9.5.9.6.3,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3. 12.1, 12.2.1, 22.1, 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.7.1,3.10.1, 3.12.6,4.3.7, 5.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2. 14.2.2, 14.2.4 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.22,9.2, 11.1.3. 11.3.6, 11.4.1 j .rchitcct.Urnimoons of Authority and Responsibility . 33.3.3.12.8, Commencement of the Work,Definition of............... 8.1.2 l 3.12.11.4.11,4.2.1,4.2.2.4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7,42.10,4.2.12, Communications Facilitating Contract 4.2.13.a-3.2, 5.2.1,7.3,9.4.2.9.6.4.9.6.6 Administration ........................ 3.9.1,4.2.4,5.2.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses .......... 2.4,9.8.2, Completion,Conditions Relating to ....... 3.I 1,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4;-13.5:2, 13-5.3, 14.2.4 4.31,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 Architect's Administration of the Contract. .. ....... 4.2,4.3.6, COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND..... ................... . 9 4.3:7;-4.4,9.4,9.5 Completion,Substantial......... 4.2.9,4.3.5.2,8.1.1,8.1.3.8.2.3. Architect's Appro%-als 2.4,3.5.1.3-10.2,3.12.6.3-12.8.3-18.3,4.2.7 9.8.9.9.1, 12.2.2. 13.7 Architects Authority-to Reject Fork . .. . 3.5.1.1?.6, 12.1.2. 12 2.1 Compliance with Laws...... 1.3,3.6,3.7.3.13,4.1.1, 10.2.2, l 1.1, Architect s Copyright .. ......... . .................. ... 1.3 1 1.3, 13.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Architect's Decisions.......... 4.2.6.4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12.4.2.13. Concealed or Unknown Conditions..................... 4.3.6 -t.3.2,4.3.6. 4.4.1. 4.4.4. i.5.6.3. 7.3.6. 7.3.8.8.1.3,8.3.1, Conditions of the Contract .................. 1.1.7,6.1.1 9.2.9.a.9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2. 14.2.2. 13.2.3 Consent,Written . ............... .. 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2. Architect's Inspections .. ...... . . . 4.2.2.4.2.9,4.3.6.9.4.2,9.8.2. 4.3.4,4.5.5.9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,.9.10.3.10.1.2, 10.1.3, 9.9.2,9.10.1. 13.5 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3-11. 13.2, 13.4.2 Architect's Instructions.. 4.2.6,4.2.-.4.2.8,4.3.7,7.4.1.12.1,13-5.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE Architect's Interpretations................. 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 CONTRACTORS .............................. 1.1.4.6 Architect's On-Site Obsemtions ........ 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6,9.4.2, Construction Change Directive,Definition of.............. 7.3.1 9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Construction Change Directives .... 1.1.1,4.2.8,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 Architect's Project Represent2tive . .. .... .............. 4.2.10 Construction Schedules,Contnctor's ............... 3,10,6.1.3 Architect's Relationship with Contactor ....... 1.12,3.2.1,3.2.2, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ................ 5.4 3.3.3, 3.5.1,3.7.3,3.11.3.12.8.3.12.11,3.16,3.18,4.2.3.4.2.4, Continuing Contract Performance .................... 4.3.4 4.2.6,4.2.12, 5.2.6.2.2. 7.3.4,9.8.2, 11-3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Contract,Definition of............................... 1.1.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors.... 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4. CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 4.2.6,9.6.3.9.6.4, 11-3.7 SUSPENSION OF THE .................. 4.3.7,5.4-1-1.14 Architect's Representations................. 9.4.2.9.5.1,9.10.1 Contract Administration ..................... 3.3.3.4.9.4.9.5 Architect's Site Visits........ 4.21.4.2.5.4.2.9.4.3.6,9.4.2.9.5.1. Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating to...... 3.7.1, 9.8.2.9.9.2.9.10.1, 13.5 3.10, 5.2,9.2, 11-1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Asbestos .. .................. ................. ..... 10.1 Contract Documents,The ....................... 1.1, 1.2.7 Aitorncvs Fees ................ ... ..... 3.18-1.9.10.2. 10.1.4 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of... 1.3.2.2.5.5.3 Award of Scparatc Contract.........................:. 6.1.1 Contrxt Documents,Definition of ..................... l.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Contract Performance During Arbitration............ 4.3.-1.4.5.3 Portions of the Worst .............................. 5.2 Contract Sum................... 3.8.4.3.6,4.3.7.4.4.4.5.2.3. Basic Definitions..................:................. 1.1 6.1.3,7.2.7.3.9.1,9.7, 11.3.1, 12.2.4, 12.3. 14.2.4 .idding Requirements.......... . ... .. 1.1.1,1:1.7 ,5.2.1, 11.4.1 Contract Sum,Definition of............................ 9.1 tiler and Machinery Insurance .. .. ... 11.3.2 Contract Time ................. 4.3.6,4.3.8.4.4.4,7.2.1.3.7.3. .,onds.Licn ....................................:. 9.10.2 8.2.1.8.3.1,9.7. 12.1.1 Bonds,Performance and Payment. .... 7.3.6.4,9.10.3.11-3.9.11.4 Contract Time,Definition of.......................... AlA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 2 A201-1 987 AIA• •01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2000G T H E A M E R I C A N I N S T I T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S AIA Document.4201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES;CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO as MODIFICATION 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK CONTRACT This document has been approved-and endorsed by the Associated General Con=aors of America. Copyright 191 1, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951,1958.1961, 1963,1966,1967,19'70.1976,®1987 by The American Institute of Architccu, 1735 New York Avenue,N.W.,Washington,D.C.,20006.Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the ALA violates the copyright laws of the United Sums and will be subject to Icgal prosecutions. AMIN AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION ALA* •O 1967 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.2WO6 A201-1987 I e ' 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming pan of the Contra Documents arc as follows: (Liu ben any addtrronat donanmis mbrcb me uuended to form parr of ibe Contnaa Do niments.The Generat Condrrimu provide rbw bidding rrquw nrerravn, a as advertisement or invrtatton to bi4 tnsnvclrons to Bidders,sample forms and the Coniraaor't bid an not parr of the Contraa Docvmena unless in tbts dgrseme racy sbmW be Need here oWy y rounded to be parr of the Connect Doaonentt.) t This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in u least ffi=original copies of which one is to be delivered to the Contnctor,one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract,and the remainder to the Owner. OWNER CONTRACTOR. (S re) (Signature) i (Printed name and title) (Printed nan m and Ude) ALA DOCULENT Alai • OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT•TWELFTH EDMON•AEA* • M967 THE AMERICAN INST111M OF ARCHrTECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHWGTON.D.C.20006 A101-1987 8 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a diffcrcnc dace is shown below: (Eitber list the Drawings bere or n/sr to an esbibit attacbed to ibis Agreement.) Number I1tte Date Oak 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any, arc as follows: Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda refacing to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Docvmrnts unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. AIA DOCUMENT A101 - OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT- TWELFTH EDITION-ALA* • 01987 THE AMERICAN LNS ITTVM OF ARCHrrECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.C.20006 A101-1987 7 ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 The Contact Documents, ac c for Modific2tions issued after execution of this cP Agreement,arc cnumcrucd u follows: 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Conu=or,AIA Document A101, 1987 Edition. 9.1.2 The General Conditions arc the Geneal Conditions of the Contra for Construction,AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition. 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contra arc those contained in the Project Manual deed and are as follows. Document .Title Pages 9.1.4 The Specific2dons arc those cont2ined in the Project Manual dated u in Subpaagaph 9.1.3,and arc 2s follows: (Veber list The Specifications bore or rrfer to an exhibit attacbed to ibis Agreement.) Section Title Pages i AIA DOCUMENT Al 01 • OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT•TWEiFTM FDMON•AW • 01987 THE AMERICAN INSTnWE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASMINGTON,D.C.20006 A101-1987 6 ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT Find payment,constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contra Sum,shall be made by the Owner to the Contactor when(1, AmK the ConEma h2s been fully performed by the Contaaor except for the Contraor's re'sponsiblliry to correct nonconforming Work u provided in Subpar^.grph 12.2.2 of the Gencrl Conditions and to satisfy other requirements,if any,which necessarily survive final payment and(2)a fumal Ccrdfic=for Payment h2s been issued by the Architect;such firmal payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or 2s Wows: ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contra Document,the ref erence iefas to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contra Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contra shall bar interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below,or in the absence thereof, at the legal ntc prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rata of interest agreed upon, if anv.j (Usury/airs and requirements under the federal Trutb in Lending Act,similar state and local consumer credit laws and otber regulations W the Uu'ner's and Contractor's principal places of business.the location o/tbe Project and Hseu•bere may affect the validlty of Ibis provision.Legal advice sbould be obtained tri(b respect to deittions or modifications,and aLso regarding requirements sucb as a mien disclosures or ttnivtrs.) 7.3 Other provisions: ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION _. 8.1 The Contra may be terminated by the Owner or the Contaaaor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. M*u 8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner w provided in Amick 14 of the General Conditions. AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT• TWELFTH EDTITON • ALA* • 01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHir M.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W.,WASHINGTON.D.0 20006 A101-1987 5 ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS S.1 Based upon A lications for po pp Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Cu,lficatcs for Payment issued by the act Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided blow and elsewhere in the Contr Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Applicc2don for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month,or as foi:ows: 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,the Owner shag make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the month.If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above,payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the Application for Pavmcn[. 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This Schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by [he Application for Payment. 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents,the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 5.6.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Conti-ac, Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retain'gc of percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work,amounts not in dispute may be included as provided in Subparsgnpti 7.3.7 of the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order; 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Concnct Sum property allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitabiV stored at the size for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction(or,if approved in advance by the Owner,swtably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing),less retainage of percent 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Para- graph 9.5 of the General Conditions. 5.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shad be further modified under the following circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon 5ubsund2l Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to percent( %)of the Contract Sum,less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of reuinagc,if any,shall be as follow3: (if it is intrndtd.prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work.to reduce or limit the rrrainagt rrsullinA frrtm the pementagts inserted in Subpara- Krapbs 5.6.1 and 5.6.2 abort, and this is not tsptained elsewhere in the Contract Documents. insert beer protisiom for such reduction or limitation.] AA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT• TWELFTH EDITION • AIA• • 01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHrTECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W..WASHINGTON.D.C-20006 Al of 1987 4 ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contactor in current funds for the Contractor's perforttlance of the Contraa the Contaa Sum of Dollars (s ), subjca to additions and deductions as provided in the Con- tra Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following altertntes,if any,which are described In the Contact Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identifltation of accepted alternates.if decisions on other aiternares art to be made by the Owner subsequent to the ecmution of tbit Agreement,attach a schedule of sucb other aiternatet showing the amount for eacb and the date until wbicb that amount is aalidJ 4.3 Unit prices. if any, are as follows: r ALA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT•TWELFTH EDITION•AIAa • 01987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE Of ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.0 20006 A101-1987 3 ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Concha Documents consist of this cement,Conditions of the Contras General,Su lemcn � ( PP tuy and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement;these form the Contract,and arc as fully a part of the Contraa as if aaach d to this Agreement or mpcued herein.The Contact represents the entire and integrated agreement between the patties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agtranents,either written or or2L An enumcncion of the Concha DocLi mcnts, other than Modifications,apprus in Article 9• ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Concracr Documents,except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contra Documents to be the responsibility of others,or as follows: ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured,and shall be the date of this Agreement,as first written above,unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert(be date of commencement, if it di/Jars from the dare of this Agreement or. if applicable.state(bar the date will be fired in a notice to proceed.) Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contnaor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,mechanic's!ferns and ocher security interests. 3.2 The Contraor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work nor later char (Insert the calendar date or number of calendar days after the dare of commencemem Also insert arty requirements fore HierS&t&tantial Completion of cer- tain portions of the Work, if not stated e{sewberr in the Contract Documents.) subject to adjustments of this Contra Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert prorisions. if any,for liquidated damages refacing to failure to complete on time.) t ALA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT• TWELFTH EDITION a AIA0 a 01987 THE AMERICAN iNSTIM-E OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE.N.W..WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 Al of-1987 2 t� Dy PORTANT MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO THIS ' DOCUMENT ARE CONTAINED IN THE HARVARD UNIVERSITY MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA Document A 10 1 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM 1987 EDITION THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSUL TAT101v WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. The 1987 Edition of AIA Document 4201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do nor use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. This document hzs been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors Of Arncrica. AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the Year o. Nineteen Hundred and BETWEEN the Owner: (,`ame and address) and the Contractor: (game and address) The Project is: (,\ame and location) The Architect is: (,Vanre and addresr) The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below. Copvright 1915. 1918. 1925. 1937. 1951. 1958. 1961, 1963. 1967-1974. 1 977, ©1987 by The American InsU(U(e of Atchi- , tccs. 1735 New York Avcnuc.N.W..W25hington. D.C.'_0006.Rcoroducuon of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without wrictcn permission of the AIA violates the copyright Ianz of the Unitcd States and will be subject to Icgal prosecuuon. ALA DOCUMENT A101 - OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREE>tE.ST • TWELFTH EDMO.14 • AIA-b - C1987 THE AMER1CA•`4 1N5TLTLTE Of ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YO"AVENGE. W..WASHINGTO;t,D.C.20006 Al of-1987 � LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION El-2 ELECTRICAL PLAN-2ND LEVEL , . El-3 ELECTRICAL PLAN-3RD LEVEL E2-1 LIGHTING PLAN-1 ST LEVEL E2-2 LIGHTING PLAN-2ND LEVEL E2-3 LIGHTING PLAN-3RD LEVEL FP 1-1 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN-BASEMENT LEVEL FP 1-2 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN-1ST LEVEL FP 1 -3 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN-2ND LEVEL FP 1-4 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN-3RD LEVEL PI -1 PLUMBING PLAN-BASEMENT LEVEL PI -2 PLUMBING PLAN-1ST LEVEL P1-3 PLUMBING PLAN-2ND LEVEL P 1 -4 PLUMBING PLAN-3RD LEVEL P2- 1 LEGEND,SCHEDULE&DETAILS APRIL 1995 THE INDEX OF DRAWINGS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Index of Drawings C-1 SITE PLAN AO-1 DEMOLITION PLAN-BASEMENT LEVEL AO-2 DEMOLITION PLAN-1 ST LEVEL AO-3 DEMOLITION PLAN-2ND LEVEL AO-4 DEMOLITION PLAN-3RD LEVEL AO-5 DEMOLITION PLAN-ROOF LEVEL Al -1 FLOOR PLAN-BASEMENT PLAN Al -2 FLOOR PLAN-1ST LEVEL AI -3 FLOOR PLAN-2ND LEVEL Al -4 FLOOR PLAN-3RD LEVEL Al -5 ROOF PLAN A2-1 ELEVATIONS-DEMOLITION A2-2 ELEVATIONS-DEMOLITION A2-3 ELEVATIONS-PROPOSED A2-4 ELEVATIONS-PROPOSED A2-5 BUILDING SECTIONS A5-1 ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS A6-1 ENLARGED STAIR PLANS A6- 1 STAIR DETAILS A7-2 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN-1 ST LEVEL A7-3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN-2ND LEVEL A8-1 SCHEDULES &DETAILS A9-1 DETAILS A9-2 DETAILS S 1 FOUNDATION PLAN-BASEMENT LEVEL S2 FIRST FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S3 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S4 THIRD FLOOR FRAMING PLAN S5 ROOF FRAMING PLAN M1-1 HEATING & VENTILATION PLAN-BASEMENT LEVEL M1 -2 HEATING & VENTILATION PLAN-1 ST LEVEL Ml -3 HEATING & VENTILATION PLAN-2ND LEVEL M1 -4 HEATING & VENTILATION PLAN-3RD LEVEL M2-0 DETAILS & SCHEDULES El-0 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN-BASEMENT LEVEL El -1 ELECTRICAL PLAN-1 ST LEVEL APRIL 1995 THE INDEX OF DRAWINGS 5. Any combination of Comprehensive General Liability and Excess Liability Umbrella insurance with limits totalling at least$2,000,000.00 will be acceptable. 6. Watercraft Hull and Protection and Indemnity Liability- (if applicable) a. Including coverage for owned,non-owned and fired crafts; including the loading or unloading thereof. b. Policy limits: (1) Value of hull and N/A(protection and indemnity)bodily injury and property damage. 7. Aircraft Hull and Liability- (if applicable) a. Including coverage for owned,non-owned and hired crafts; including loading and unloading thereof. b. Policy limits: (1) Combined single limit bodily injury and property damage= N/A to include passenger liability without any seat limitations. Capen House Renovations 4 Insurance Requirements NOW C. Policy Limits: (1) Coverage A. (Workers compensation) =statutory (2) Coverage B. (Employer's liability) =$100,000 minimum limit per accident or disease 2. Comprehensive General Liability a. Endorsements required: (1) Premises -operations liability (2) Independent contractor's liability (3) Completed operations and products liability (4) Broad form contractual liability (5) Personal injury insurance for all coverage (6) Broad form property damage liability including completed operations (7) Blanket"XCU" coverage, (if applicable) (8) Employees as additional insureds b. Policy limits: (1) Bodily injury-per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 Aggregate=$1,000,000.00 (2) Property damage-per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 Aggregate=$1,000,000.00 (3) Contractual bodily injury-per occurrence= $1,000,000.00 Aggregate=$1,000,000.00 (4) Contractual property damage-per occurrence= $1,000,000.00 -Aggregate=$1,000,000.00 (5) Personal injury-Aggregate=$1,000,000.00 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability a. Including coverage for owned, non-owned and hired vehicles; including the loading or unloading thereof. b. Policy limits: (1) Bodily injury-per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 (2) Property damage-per occurrence=$1,000,000.00 4. Excess Liability Umbrella Coverage a. The umbrella policy(s)shall contain a minimum total occurrence and aggregate limit of$1,000,000.00. The policy(s)shall contain coverage no less restrictive than that required under paragraph III.B.2a and b and III. B.3a and b above. ""'` Capen House Renovations 3 Insurance Requirements hereunder until true copies or certificates evidencing such insurance have been submitted to and approved by the General Contractor. Subcontractor shall not allow any Sub-Subcontractor to commence work until such Subcontractor has obtained the same insurance coverage. The Subcontractor shall maintain completed operations liability for not less than one (1) year after final completion of the work. If the Subcontractor shall fail to certify required insurance coverage to the General Contractor as set forth in this agreement, before commencing work hereunder, the General Contractor may, at its option,place insurance of the character, nature and limits described in this agreement to cover the operations of the Subcontractor, paying the premiums for the same and charging same to the Subcontractor. Each policy shall provide that it will not be cancelled or materially altered except after thirty(30)days' advance written notice to the General Contractor mailed to the address indicated in the subcontract, and the certificates of insurance shall so state. Upon receipt of any notice of cancellation or alteration, Subcontractor shall within ten(10)days procure other policies, about to be cancelled or altered, and if Subcontractor fails to provide,procure and deliver acceptable policies of insurance, or satisfactory evidence thereof, in accordance with the terms hereof then at the General Contractor's option,the General Contractor may obtain such insurance at the cost and expense of Subcontractor, without the need of any notice to Subcontractor. The General Contractor may, at its option, require the Subcontractor to furnish "* originals or certified copies of the policy of policies including all endorsements required to provide stated coverages. The General Contractor may, at its option,terminate the subcontract if in the event the Subcontractor fails to meet the insurance coverage and limits described in this agreement upon thirty (30)days written notice to the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor shall be entitled to payment for all work executed prior to said termina- tion and for any loss sustained by the Subcontractor who furnishes satisfactory proof of such loss, and including an allowance for profit on the work executed prior to termination, all as determined by the Architect,but without claim or payment for loss or profit on that portion of the work not executed. B. The insurance required under this paragraph shall include the following coverage and limits, or such greater coverage or larger limits as may be required by law, in the following categories, amounts and detail: 1. Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage a. If applicable,coverage required for United States Longshoremen and Harbor Worker, and the Jones Act b. Endorsements required: (1) Broad form all states endorsement (2) Voluntary compensation endorsement Capen House Renovations 2 Insurance Requirements Exhibit "A" Insurance Requirements I. Subcontractor's Liability Insurance A. The subcontractor shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies licensed to do business in the state in which the project is located, insurance as will protect itself, the Owner, Owner's Representative and Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Subcontractor's operations under the subcontract, whether such operation be by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. Claims under Workers' Compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease or death of employees; 3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease or death of any person other than employees; 4. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1)by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly `' related to the employment of such person by the Subcontractor, or(ii)by any other person; and 5. Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom. 6. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person;personal injury or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any vehicle. H. The insurance required by subparagraph(1)above, shall be written for liability specified herein or required by law, whichever is greater and shall include contractual liability insurance as applicable to the Subcontractor's obligations under the subcontract. III. Certificates of insurance acceptable to the General Contractor shall be filed with the General Contractor, containing the following requirements: A. Subcontractor and, unless otherwise specified, each of Subcontractor's Sub-Subcon- tractors, shall obtain and maintain insurance and shall be carried in companies satisfactory to Owner and shall name Owner, Contractor and their employees and agents, and such other parties as the General Contractor may identify by notice to the Subcontractor as additional insureds. Subcontractor shall not commence work -o► Capen House Renovations 1 Insurance Requirements 8. CLARIFICATIONS low A separate sheet may be attached to state any clarifications you feel are necessary. Date: (Name of Bidder) By: (Tide) (Business Address) 9. ALTERNATES Quote any alternates as specified in your sections here: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 10. UNIT PRICES Quote any unit prices as specified in your sections here: 1. 2. 3. END OF SUBCONTRACT PROPOSAL Capen House 3 Subcontract Proposal 2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK covered in the Proposal is as follows: Bid Package: 3. PAYMENT, PERFORMANCE AND LIEN BONDS If required by the Construction Manager, the undersigned shall provide to the Construction Manager, prior to signing the Subcontract, performance and labor and materials payment bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder, on standard, print AIA forms, each in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract Sum, and with such sureties as may be agreeable to the Proposed Contract Sum, as set forth above. The undersigned agrees to deliver the required bonds to the General Contractor not later than the date of, or prior to, execution of the Subcontract. 4. CONTRACT AGREEMENT The undersigned agrees that if selected as Subcontractor for the Project, he will execute a Subcontract Agreement after presentation of same within the same time period stated in the Invitation for Bid, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the terms of this Proposal. 5. LABOR The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed, or to be employed on the work. 6. TIME OF COMPLETION The undersigned agrees to commence work on the Project within seven (7) calendar days after the execution of the Contract Agreement, and to substantially complete the work on or before the dates stated in the Invitation to Bid. 7. INSURANCE The Insurance Requirements state the minimum insurance requirements for this project. If you are unable to met these levels, tell us what it will cost to have your limits raised: Capen House 2 Subcontract Proposal SUBCONTRACT PROPOSAL 1. Proposal of herein called the "Bidder". To: Mr. Mark Feeney Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street Holyoke, Massachusetts 01041-0267 Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of: Capen House Renovations Smith College Northampton, MA 01063 having examined the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents, and having visited and examined the site of the proposed Project, and being familiar with the conditions relating to the construction, including the availability of materials and labor, ~ hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, plant, and supplies required and to construct the Project in accordance with Contract Documents within the time set forth herein for the Proposed Subcontract Sum stated below, such sum to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required by the Contract Documents, subject to additions and deductions in accordance with the terms of said Contract Documents. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addendum: A. The proposed Sub-Contract sum (without Performance Bond l is: Dollars ($ ). B. Payment, Performance and Lien Bonds may be required of Subcontractors. The additional cost is: Dollars ($ ), C. The Total (including Bonds) is Dollars ($ J. Capen House 1 Subcontract Proposal _ y a m N .C. a La U c I < ti G c ti c m c 0 v o o ti c m m Z = U 7 2 L p.r--c• m m e H w ra on U- ° A ti L O ¢ o rn � � � � > C a L ..ci a .ci C •.y -rpi O Q L 2 m m ti •'� '�'� cu L m x m m D1 U ti d m � OL E W E U ..Cr Q m O o m L U L Z 3 O m w J n m O L L ti m O a 7 m V 7 O L O C m O ti y �• U .Y \ m 7 L G 7 1J ; -rL1 L m -rc•1 = r•1 m LG C m L J-+ U O U m r-y L O W j m 0) m r-1 d L m •�- J.+ 'r m m U m E ."� m > a+ O m m a m y ti m m \ S m O U ♦.1 L m M G m •.Oi L-•� f ti O 7 C L O. m ti c �" + > m l H L m d 7 7 L E Lj .r1 m L m U) L W d LL ¢ �Ci I 3: r+ G m m > a m m m c o u z '+ x ID m N ..o. 2 o 0i Z c .0 o B �r U N +� m E m C- 4) ,..�C3 M OL o c ^ L 7 CD w Q) O w .mi ..Ui U C- E L " Z L U7 U O m m y U UJ C,j 7 +l a U) U aUi L 1D y r1 a+ L Y W Ib N d m O Ln - U ^ 7 O > m x a m W G n cn o U N Z } m N N cc f Q O U7 Ifl N O O N O I17 N O O O O N� C) In m N O O O O 0 O O O to Co. m m W N N N N fill } cn m m m m m m m Ill m m 0 m In m 117 m 0 0 m 0 m m m m m m m m U7 m m 0 J m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m cr H Y Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z J Z Z Z Z J J J J J U J C1 O O (9 [A CD C9 C.7 C7 (A > > _ > _ > > > > > > > > > > X 7 7 -7 n n 7 mn 7 7 7 7 -� -� - n 7 Q Q Q Q < a Q Q Q W LL LD 1� N m m m t0 O m O n O O O O ti Q .•� m Q m to m in Ln co Y m UI N N m CU m m m m m N N N — N N !U N N Y- F- U7 U7 U-1 In Lo W U7 Ln Lo U7 m Lo m 0 m U7 ul to in Ln U7 U7 U7 Ln U7 U1 in U7 Ln U7 117 U7 J Q m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m Q Q Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z J J J J J J J J J J J W 0 M W 0 .< < Q Q Q d Q < > = = = > = _ = = = Z Z O = = = > = = = O = = = > W In 2 S S S S m S n n n 7 '7 7 n 7 -J 7 7 to m m m m m m 117 N N m m m m LO m m m m n n O n n n .+ + N N N N N N N .+ N m m m m m .+ N } O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O fO .. N m v !O n LD to m m O cu m m < Ln n 0 N m m Q Ln m ti n m O N LO 'i ■ ` F,,,� .-L � � N �+ .•L .-� .+ C\, N N .� N N N m N N m m N y^ "a i U a■iv a daFk 27. CUTTING AND PATCHING Subcontractors must include all cutting, drilling, punching, patching and reinforcing of holes required for the coordination of his work, and must coordinate the above with the Construction Manager. 28. WORK INSPECTION Subcontractors shall perform any necessary inspecting of their work by their own usual methods. 29. INTENT OF DRAWINGS It is understood that the contract drawings delineate the general intent of the work and that each subcontractor will provide whatever incidental material and labor necessary to translate the intent of the documents into a finished and usable structure, notwithstanding the same may have been inferred and/or omitted from the plans and specifications. 30. SMOKING No smoking will be allowed within Capen House. - END OF INVITATION TO BID - Capen House Renovations 6 Invitation to Bid 19. USE OF PREMISES Subcontractors are to coordinate with the Construction Manager for space within the contract limits. The storage material, equipment and apparatus at the construction site shall be permitted only to the extent approved by the Construction Manager. 20. CLEANUP Cleanup to a dumpster by the Construction Manager will be done by the subcontractors on a daily basis. If necessary, the Construction Manager will do the cleanup at the expense of the subcontractor responsible. 21. TEMPORARY POWER A. The electrical subcontractor will provide temporary lights and power. B. Smith College will pay for the cost of power consumed, provided that it is not wasted. 22. TEMPORARY HEAT The Construction manager will provide temporary heat and enclosures as necessary. 23. PHONE SERVICE The Construction Manager will provide a pay phone. Subcontractors requiring phone service shall do so at their expense. 24. ENGINEERING AND FIELD DIMENSIONING Subcontractors shall coordinate their work with the work of other trades and will be responsible for their own layout and field dimensions from control lines established by the Construction Manager. 25. SUPERVISION AND LABOR Subcontractors agree to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work. Subcontractors are required to employ competent supervisory and field personnel. The Foreman in charge of the work shall be on site at all times during the performance of their work. 26. HOISTING AND SCAFFOLDING The Construction Manager will stage the exterior for the use of all trades. Subcontractors shall provide all their own additional ladders, scaffolding, staging, hoisting equipment, planking, services and equipment necessary for the completion of their contract. Capen House Renovations 5 Invitation to Bid on or before August 31, 1995. Working hours will be 7:00 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. A second shift will be scheduled as required. (Review attached Construction Schedule) 11. PARKING AND DELIVERIES Delivery of materials will be coordinated and scheduled weekly through the Construction Manager. Limited parking is available on site. No deliveries will be accepted unless scheduled. 12. CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS There will be weekly construction meetings at the site. Subcontractor attendance will be required, especially when the subcontractor is an active part of the project. 13. RECORD DRAWINGS AND 0 & M MANUALS The Architect and Engineers will supply updated Mylar copies of the contract drawings on which the subcontractors will show all coordination revisions. In addition, three copies of the O & M Manuals will be required and will be submitted when the Project is approximately 90 percent complete. They must be approved prior to final payment. 14. JOINT OCCUPANCY Smith College will continue to use adjacent buildings and grounds throughout the construction. Subcontractors will use extreme care not to disrupt Smith College operations. 15. INSURANCE The Construction Manager's Insurance Requirements are attached. All subcontractors must comply with the limits stated or tell us what the cost is to comply. 16. PERMITS AND FEES The Owner will apply and pay for the basic Building Permit. All subcontractors are to apply and pay for their required permits. The work of the subcontractors will be in accordance with all State and Local Codes and regulations as interpreted by the Agency or Authority having such jurisdiction. 17. REQUISITION All applications for payment are to be received by the twenty-fifth of each month so the requisition may be completed and submitted to the Owner on or about the first of the month. No application for payment will be accepted or processed unless the schedule of values and the insurance certificate have been received. 18. RETAINAGE A 10 percent retainage will be held until the subcontractor is complete and all work has been accepted by the Architect. Capen House Renovations 4 Invitation to Bid If proposal is mailed, or hand delivered the address is: Aw Attn: Mr. Mark Feeney Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street P. 0. Box 267 Holyoke, MA 01041-0267 Telephone or FAX Quotations will be accepted if followed up with a written quotation in same day's mail. For your information, the FAX numbers are 413-536-6915 or 413-534-2902. Note: Late bids will be returned. 5. BONDS The Owner reserves the right to request Payment, Performance and Lien Bonds in the amount of 100 percent of the Bid Amount. The cost of these Bonds is to be quoted as an ADD on the Bid Form. 6. SALES TAX This Project is exempt from Massachusetts State Sales Tax and must not be included in your Proposal. 7. INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS Interpretation of meaning of the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents must be made in writing to the Holyoke office of the Construction Manager, Attention: Mark Feeney. Addenda, as issued, will be mailed to all subbidders of record. 8. INFORMAL BIDS The Owner may reject as informal those sub-bids which are incomplete, conditional or obscure or which contain additions not called for, unclear erasure, improperly initialed alterations or irregularities of any kind. 9. OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all sub-bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding, should it be deemed in his (the Owner's) opinion to be in any way in his interest to do so. 10. COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION WORK Work at the project site shall begin June 1, 1995, after signing of the Subcontract Agreement and progress with a proper and sufficient force or workmen and ample supply of materials ' the satisfaction of the Construction Manager, to assure issuance of a Certificate of Occupanc; Capen House Renovations 3 Invitation to Bid Bids will be privately opened by Smith College, and the selected subbidders notified. OW Copies of the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents may be obtained by Select subcontractors at the Holyoke office of the Construction Manager: Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street Holyoke, MA 01040-0267 One (1) set of the documents will be available to each subcontractor. A Plan Deposit is not required. Call Mark Feeney at 413-534-5667 to reserve a set for pickup. Mail costs are at Bidder's expense. During the bidding period, the Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents may be examined during regular office hours at: Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street Holyoke, MA 01041-0267 Proposals shall remain in effect for sixty (60) calendar days after time and date of receiving bids, may be accepted by Owner anytime within that period, and may be withdrawn after that time by the bidder without notice. The selected sub-bidder shall execute the Contract Agreement within seven (7) calendar days after receiving written notification of award of contract or presentation of the contract agreement, whichever is later. 2. PREBID MEETING/SITE VISIT The only site visit will be May 5, 1995 at 10:00 a.m. Attendance of subcontractors is required. 3. SUBMISSION OF BIDS The Subbid Proposal Form attached shall be properly executed and enclosed in a sealed envelope plainly marked on the outside with the following information: Capen House Renovations Smith College SUBMITTED BY: Name of Bidder Address of Bidder Capen House Renovations 2 Invitation to Bid . • Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street Construction Managers and Holyoke, MA 01040 c General Contractors (413) 534-5667 FAX(413) 534-2902 Awk ESTABLISHED 1879 INVITATION TO BID Re: Capen House Renovations Smith College Northampton, MA 01063 Selected Bidders: Daniel O'Connell's Sons is the Construction Manager for the above project; a 28,000 sf dormitory renovation, and invites bids on behalf of Smith College for all Divisions of the work from Select Invited subcontractors. 1. BIDS WILL BE TAKEN ON THE FOLLOWING: Masonry New Wood Floors Carpet and Resilient Miscellaneous Metals Doors & Frames Paint & Wall Covering Roofing Veneer Plaster Building Specials Millwork Gypsum Wallboard Plumbing Finish Hardware Acoustical Ceilings Fire Protection HVAC Electrical in accordance with the Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents prepared by: Livermore, Edwards and Associates 260 Bear Hill Road Waltham, MA 02154 Tel. 617-890-8874 Fax 617-890-2429 hereinafter called the Architect and will be received by the Owner at the office of the Construction Manager. Attn: Mr. Mark Feeney Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street P. 0. Box 267 Holyoke, Massachusetts 01041-0267 Tel: 413-534-5667 Fax: 413-536-6915 low%. until 2:00 p.m. local, legal time May 16, 1995. Capen House Renovations 1 Invitation to Bid LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION tOpk DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16000 Electrical General Requirements 16000-1 thru 12 Section 16100 Wiring Materials and Methods 16100-1 thru 8 Section 16101 Panelboards 16101-1 thru 2 Section 16102 Switching and Protective Equipment 16102-1 thru 5 Section 16103 Wiring Devices 16103-1 thru 3 Section 16104 Electrical Service & Distribution System 16104-1 thru 2 Section 16105 Wiring to Equipment Furnished by Others 16105-1 thru 1 Section 16200 Lighting Fixtures 16200-1 thru 4 Section 16300 Fire Alarm System 16300-1 thru 8 Section 16500 Commercial Telephone Service 16500-1 thru 2 Section 16501 Provisions for Cable Television Service 16501-1 thru 2 Section 16700 Computer Cabling System 16700-1 thru 1 END OFTABLE OF CONTENT'S OOW LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09200 Plastering Work 09200-1 thru 2 Section 09215 Veneer Plaster 09215-1 thru 1 Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09250-1 thru 11 Section 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 09510-1 thru 2 Section 09550 Woodstrip Flooring 09550-1 thru 3 Section 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring 09660-1 thru 2 Section 09678 Resilient Base and Accessories 09678-1 thru 3 Section 09680 Carpeting 09680-1 thru 4 Section 09900 Painting 09900-1 thru 6 Section 09950 Wall Coverings 09950-1 thru I Section 09980 P.V.C. Wall Finish 09980-1 thru 2 DIVISTON 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10160 Toilet Partitions 10160-1 thru 2 Section 10200 Metal Vents 10200-1 thru 3 Section 10426 Signage 10426-1 thru 5 Section 10500 Lockers 10500-1 thru 1 Section 10522 Fire Extinguishers 10522-1 thru 2 Section 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10800-1 thru 3 DIVISION 11 - EOUIPMENT Not Used. DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used. DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used. DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15010-1 thru 10 Section 15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equip 15030-1 thru 2 Section 15050 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods 15050-1 thru 8 Section 15125 Noise and Vibration Control 15100-1 thru 1 Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation 15200-1 thru 3 Section 15300 Fire Protection 15300-1 thru 9 Section 15400 Plumbing Systems 15400-1 thru 11 Section 15500 Steam and Hydronic Systems 15500-1 thru 5 Section 15800 Air Distribution Systens 15800-1 thru 5 Section 15850 Air Handling Equipment 15600-1 thru 3 Section 15950 Testing Adjusting and Balancing 15950-1 thru 5 APRIL 1995 TC-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-1 thru 8 Section 03550 Concrete Floor Topping 03400-1 thru 1 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry 04200-1 thru 6 DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 15500-1 thru 6 Section 05520 Handrails and Railings 05520-1 thru 5 DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 thru 5 Section 06200 Finish Carpentry 06200-1 thru 6 Section 06400 Cabinets and Counters 06400-1 thru 3 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07150 Damproofing & Waterproofing 07150-1 thru 4 Section 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 thru 3 Section 07250 Fireproofing 07250-1 thru 2 Section 07310 Asphalt Shingles 07310-1 thru 2 Section 07530 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing 07530-1 thru 7 Section 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing 07610-1 thru 1 Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-1 thru 4 Section 07900 Sealants 07900-1 thru 6 DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 thru 6 Section 08210 Wood Doors 08210-1 thru 5 Section 08305 Access Doors 08305-1 thru 2 Section 08610 Wood Windows 08610-1 thru 2 Section 08710 Finish Hardware 08710-1 thru 10 Section 08800 Glass and Glazing 08800-1 thru 2 APRIL 1995 TC-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS LE9415 CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL DOCUMENTS Section 00300 Invitation to Bid 1 thru 6 Subcontract Proposal 1 thru 3 Index of Drawings 1 thru 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (AIA Document A-101, 1987 Ed.) 1 thru 8 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA Document A-201, 1987 Ed.) 1 thru 24 Supplementary Conditions 1 thru 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVTSTON 1 - GENERAL REOUTREMENTS Section 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 thru 3 Section 01020 Allowances 01020-1 thru 1 Section 01045 Cutting and Patching 01045-1 thru 4 Section 01090 Reference Standards 11090-1 thru 2 Section 01100 Project Procedures 01100-1 thru 2 Section 01250 Project Meetings 01250-1 thru 4 Section 01300 Submittals 01300-1 thru 3 Section 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 01340-1 thru 6 Section 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01410-1 thru 4 Section 01500 Temporary Facilities 01500-1 thru 3 Section 01560 Temporary Controls 01560-1 thru 3 Section 01600 Material and Equipment 01600-1 thru 3 Section 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-1 thru 1 Section 01710 Cleaning 01710-1 thru 2 Section 01720 Project Record Documents 01720-1 thru 3 Section 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data 01730-1 thru 7 Section 01740 Warranties and Bonds 01740-1 thru 2 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK Section 02072 Selective Demolition and Cleaning 02072-1 thru 4 Section 02200 Earthwork 02200-1 thru 12 Section 02510 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 02510-1 thru 2 Section 02515 Site Concrete 02515-1 thru 5 Section 02900 Landscaping 02900-1 thru 2 APRIL 1995 TC-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CAPEN HOUSE RENOVATION Smith College Northampton, MA Project Manual April 1995 CLIENT Smith College Dining Services 126 West Street Northampton, Massachusetts Paul Garvey, Director STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Brennan & Partners, Inc. 214 Charles Lane Road New Braintree, MA 01531 MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING ENGINEERS Luchini Milfort Goodell & Associates 137 Billerica Road Chelmsford, MA 01824 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street Holyoke, MA 01040 ARCHITECT Livermore, Edwards & Associates 260 Bear Hill Road Waltham, MA 02154 "* (617) 890-8873 8. CLARIFICATIONS A separate sheet may be attached to state any clarifications you feel are necessary. Date: (Name of Bidder) By: (Title) (Business Address) 9. ALTERNATES Quote any alternates as specified in your sections here: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 10. UNIT PRICES Quote any unit prices as specified in your sections here: L 2. 3. - END OF SUBCONTRACT PROPOSAL Capen House 3 Subcontract Proposal °"t' a 4 gutneu P� u �9q�O �l'NI `umdu quoK abljo:) 4lipS suoitenouag asnoH uadE:) :3o uo,�anjlsuoa acp io3 pig of uoiteninul .moA pm aau�tidcuco ut `iappig aqy momapuaO L9Z0-it,0t0 SUasngaess W 'axofijoH 101RuS uapdun'H 08t suoS s.ttauuoD.O IOMIU Aauaa3 31-mw •.rye :oy wlapPtHN alp patina uplaq ;o Iesodoid ,Ivsodolid `aaa�ya Conditions relating 4ay hereby proposes toe construction,✓ainclud a SuPPl1eS required s all labor, materials mg the availability of flj� e � and to construct e , equipment, ap li materials and the Pro; ct in P ances labor, tlmB Set forth herein for the Pro o accordance C ' Pant, and Proposed Subcontract with ontract I) 1 ex �llSes 111C1111'ed is performing tract Sum stated ocuments sum to Codel' p g the work required below, such by the Contract Documents, subject t0 c?dd1tI011S S1'Id dedllctionS in accordance with the terms of a Contract Documents. id The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addendum: A. The proposed Sub-Contract sum (without Performance Bondi is: Dollars ($ 1, B. Payment, Performance and Lien Bonds may be required of Subcontractors. The additional cost is: Dollars ($ C. The Total (including Bonds) is Dollars 1 Subcontract Proposal Capen House ' o'��'m�cabo'�St�t�CStC��W�11c�t1 In cut n ` gpptOV�of tie ArcWitect. notbe pe m,v Xtoutp r10L 3.05 ERECTION Place shall be surveys to ascertain A. Prior to the ert*n of stru dance with the Contract Documents and W,a allow the a laben adjacent work is�oordance ecial attention shall be 1 steel in its corr(position within the required tolerances.5p Plates- support on steel wedges,shim levelling plates,!bearing p lambed.The entire B. Set base plates acearing Plates to correct elevations and aced and p devices,until the mber supporter thereon is correctly evening device s shall be remove( shall then be packevith non-shrink grout.Protruding attained its seven day strength . to the plate after ti grout has bl or fitting of parts shall be reported immediate C. Situations that prent the proper assem Y possible thereafter.Col by the Contractor as soon as Corrective measureshall be proposed ossm b1e after approval of the corrective measures is given by be implemented asoon as P r. r to final fastening.Fasten compression me. D. Align,level and adjutnembers accurately p after the bearing suriaes have been brought into full contact or bracing sh E. Temporary bracing stall be the responsibility t t ° �tics capable of supporting t installed, and removrd in such erection. equipment,live,dead,wind,and other loads to which it may be subjected during F. Tolerances shall conform d,the AISC"Code of Standard practice for Steel Buildings and 1 that frame tolerances shall be modified as follows: 1, Displacementof the centerline of exterior columns from the established column locat more than 1/2"wward or 1/2"away from the building line.This out of line tolerance tolerance for individual members shall not be additive. 2. Levelling and plumbing be done shall be made for mean differences in temperatureoat ere degrees Fahrenheit). Allo mean temperature.Measurements relating to this shall be based on the centerline of c END OF SECTION 05!00-3 CP�erd�coptractors (4)3j53�Mq pr 1040 FAX(413)34 29p2 A.DI)I-rjON TO PRO JECT MANUAL �Vlslox SECTION 05100 STRU CTU-RAL STEEL RT io . ' oo � BS N/ UST ArrEnD MUM fps wr « dE oo � y tsar q � low � D M. t=eE ., Ey ��) / L,) -- / f 1 )USE RENO VATIQN MA Project Manual April 1995 Dining Services eet MAY 0 2 1995 L, Massachusetts > Director RAI,ENGINEERS Partners, Inc. s Lane Road tree, MA 01531 (ICAL ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING ENG ulfort Goodell & Associates 1NEEkS Yca Road ,rd, MA 01824 RUCTION MANAGER __.�..•w---~"' YConnell's Sons ,mpden Street Mo 3 :e, MA 01040 � NSPEfi"ti4NS F� ARCHITECT Livermore,Edwards & Associates 260 Bear Hill Road Waltham,MA 02154 (617) 890-8873 8. CLARIFICATIONS A separate sheet may be attached to state any clarifications you feel are necessary. Date: (Name of Bidder) By: (Title) (Business Address) 9. ALTERNATES Quote any alternates as specified in your sections here: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 10. UNIT PRICES Quote any unit prices as specified in your sections here: 1. 2. 3. END OF SUBCONTRACT PROPOSAL Capen House 3 Subcontract Proposal 2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK covered in the Proposal is as follows: Bid Package: 3. PAYMENT, PERFORMANCE AND LIEN BONDS If required by the Construction Manager, the undersigned shall provide to the Construction Manager, prior to signing the Subcontract, performance and labor and materials payment bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder, on standard, print AIA forms, each in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract Sum, and with such sureties as may be agreeable to the Proposed Contract Sum, as set forth above. The undersigned agrees to deliver the required bonds to the General Contractor not later than the date of, or prior to, execution of the Subcontract. 4. CONTRACT AGREEMENT The undersigned agrees that if selected as Subcontractor for the Project, he will execute a Subcontract Agreement after presentation of same within the same time period stated in the Invitation for Bid, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the terms of this Proposal. 5. LABOR The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor employed, or to be employed on the work. 6. TIME OF COMPLETION The undersigned agrees to commence work on the Project within seven (7) calendar days after the execution of the Contract Agreement, and to substantially complete the work on or before the dates stated in the Invitation to Bid. 7. INSURANCE The Insurance Requirements state the minimum insurance requirements for this project. If you are unable to met these levels, tell us what it will cost to have your limits raised: Capen House 2 Subcontract Proposal SUBCONTRACT PROPOSAL 1. Proposal of herein called the "Bidder". To: Mr. Mark Feeney Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street Holyoke, Massachusetts 01041-0267 Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of: Capen House Renovations Smith College Northampton, MA 01063 having examined the Bidding Requirements and the Contract Documents, and having visited and examined the site of the proposed Project, and being familiar with the conditions relating to the construction, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appliances, plant, and supplies required and to construct the Project in accordance with Contract Documents within the time set forth herein for the Proposed Subcontract Sum stated below, such sum to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required by the Contract Documents, subject to additions and deductions in accordance with the terms of said Contract Documents. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addendum: A. The proposed Sub-Contract sum (without Performance Bond) is: Dollars ($ ). B. Payment, Performance and Lien Bonds may be required of Subcontractors. The additional cost is: Dollars ($ )• C. The Total (including Bonds) is Dollars ($ ) Capen House 1 Subcontract Proposal D. Openings shall be located as indicated on the drawings and otherwise specified. Openings shall be reinforced as required. Holes for mechanical, plumbing, electrical and other trades are generally not shown on the structural drawings.Refer to HVAC,PLUMBING,ELECTRICAL,and other drawings for that information. E. Cutting of openings and other modifications to the steel which have not been shown on the shop drawings will not be permitted without prior approval of the Architect. 3.05 ERECTION A. Prior to the erection of structural steel the work in place shall be surveyed to ascertain that supporting and adjacent work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and will allow the placement of the structural steel in its correct position within the required tolerances. Special attention shall be paid to anchor bolts, levelling plates,and bearing plates. B. Set base plates and bearing plates to correct elevations and support on steel wedges,shims,or other levelling devices,until the member supported thereon is correctly placed and plumbed. The entire area under the plate shall then be packed with non-shrink grout.Protruding levelling devices shall be removed or trimmed neatly to the plate after the grout has attained its seven day strength. C. Situations that prevent the proper assembly or fitting of parts shall be reported immediately to the Architect. Corrective measures shall be proposed by the Contractor as soon as possible thereafter. Corrective work shall be implemented as soon as possible after approval of the corrective measures is given by the Architect. D. Align,level and adjust members accurately prior to final fastening.Fasten compression member splices only after the bearing surfaces have been brought into full contact. E. Temporary bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Temporary bracing shall be designed, installed, and removed in such a manner that the structure is capable of supporting the construction, equipment,live,dead,wind,and other loads to which it may be subjected during erection. F. Tolerances shall conform to the AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"except that frame tolerances shall be modified as follows: 1. Displacement of the centerline of exterior columns from the established column location shall be no more than 1/2"toward or 1/2"away from the building line. This out of line tolerance and the 1:500 tolerance for individual members shall not be additive. 2. Levelling and plumbing shall be done based on mean operating temperature of the structure (70 degrees Fahrenheit). Allowance shall be made for differences in temperature at erection and the mean temperature.Measurements relating to this shall be based on the centerline of columns. END OF SECTION 05100-3 f 9. Certificate of mill test reports of structural steel. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 01600, Material and Equipment, for general provisions covering material storage, installation and substitutions. B. The Contractor shall perform the quality control inspection and testing of shop and field work using his own personnel or hired independent agency.Quality control inspection shall consist of the minimum testing described below and complete timely recording of the results of such tests or inspections. The records of quality control work shall be copied and submitted to the Architect for his/her records at the conclusion of the structural work. Work that does not pass the quality control inspection shall be corrected and retested.The records shall show both the original failure and subsequent retest results. C. Non-destructive Weld Testing:Magnetic particle,radiographic,or ultrasonic testing.Test 100%of partial or full penetration groove welds.Test a minimum of one test per 50 linear feet of all welds by each welder. D. Torque Controlled Bolts: Visually check all bolts for lug shear-off. E. Cleaning and painting: Check for cleanliness of steel,adhesion of paint,and dry film thickness of paint. F. Shape,size,location,and Mark:shall be checked for each piece. G. The Owner may engage an independent testing agency to inspect the structural steel work and the effectiveness of the Contractor's quality control procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Structural Steel Shapes,plates,bars,and rods:ASTM A36"Structural Steel" B. Structural Steel Tubing:ASTM A500,Grade B C. Anchor Bolts:ASTM A307 D. High Strength Bolts:ASTM A325,Torque Controlled. E. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC)Paint-13. F. Grout:Non-metallic,non-shrink G. Galvanizing:Hot Dip,ASTM A123,ASTM A153,ASTM A386. H. Filler Metal for Welding: E70XX for general use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANDLING AND STORAGE: A. Handle and store materials to prevent deformation or damage. Store structural steel stacked carefully on substantial timbers and blocking so all pieces are above the earth and can drain. Protect materials from spattered dirt,water,and other foreign matter.Protect in a way that the paint will not be damaged. 3.02 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTING: A. Fit up joints and snug all bolts in each connection before final tightening. B. Correct misaligned holes by drilling or reaming to the next larger size bolt if necessary. If this procedure cannot be followed,submit alternative corrective procedures to the Architect for approval before proceeding with any work affected. 3.03 WELDING A. Welding and welding procedure shall conform to"Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification"by the AWS and as specified herein. B. Welders shall be certified for the type of work they perform. C. Welding Processes shall be shielded metal-arc,submerged-arc,gas-metal arc,and flux core-arc. D. Groove welds shall be complete penetration welds unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. 3.04 FABRICATION A. Connections(unless noted otherwise)shall be shop welded and field bolted.Beams shall have symmetrical framed connections with 3/4" high strength field bolts in accordance with AISC "Manual of Steel Construction"and the contract documents. B. Oxygen Cutting shall be performed using a mechanically guided torch for manual cutting wherever the cut is within 1/4"of the finish cut line.Oxygen cut holes for bolted connections are not permitted. 05100-2 M1 + SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Provide labor,materials,equipment,transportation,and services to furnish and erect the structural steel work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Furnish and erect base plates,columns,connections,beams,girders,temporary and permanent bracing,angles, struts,stiffeners,rods,and cap plates. C. Furnish anchor bolts,setting plates,bearing plates,and other items to be built into the work by others for the attachment of structural work. D. Furnish erection drawings,templates,details,and instructions for the installation of all work. E. Furnish and install any item of structural steel work indicated on the drawings,specified,or required to make the work of this section complete. F. Quality control. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A. Section 03300--Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Section 06100--Rough Carpentry C. Section 05500--Metal Fabrications 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC)-Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. B. AISC-Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges does not apply. C. American National Standards Institute /American Welding Society (ANSI/AWS) D1.1-84 - Structural Welding Code. D. Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation- Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. E. ASTM A36- Structural Steel F. ASTM A500-Structural Steel Tubing G. ASTM A307-Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners H. ASTM A325-High-strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints I. ASTM A 123 -Zinc(Hot-Galvanized)Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,Pressed,and Forged Steel Shapes,Plates,Bars,and Strip J. ASTM A 153 -Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under the provisions of Section 01300. B. Weld Testing:Prior to start of fabrication,submit a program of weld testing for shop quality control. C. Erection Methods:Prior to erection submit a plan of the erection process including sequence,equipment, bracing,and guying.This submission shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for providing proper, methods,equipment,workmanship,and safety precautions. D. Shop Drawings: Shall be prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer and shall include complete details and schedules for the fabrication and assembly of structural steel. Design of all connections as included herein. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Grade(s)of steel 2. Identification mark of members. 3. Dimensions. 4. Member size and arrangement. 5. Anchor bolt setting plan and details. 6. Bearing plate setting plan and details. 7. Joint fabrication including weld and bolt identification. 8. Cleaning and painting. 05100- 1 e • Daniel O'Connell's Sons 480 Hampden Street Construction Managers and Holyoke, MA 01040 General Contractors (413)534-5667 FAX(413) 534-2902 ESTABLISHED 1879 ADDITION TO PROJECT MANUAL DIVISION 5 SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL DANIEL O'CONNELL'S SONS, INC. JOB Estimating Dept. SHEET ND. OF 480 Hampden Street CALCULATED BY DATE HOLYOKE, MASSACHUSETTS 01040 (413) 534-5667 CHECKED BY DATE FAX (413) 536-6915 SCALE j Vo, TL 0 /7 . � E t4 PRODUCT 204.1 Single Sheet(205.1(PaOdea(®®Inc..Groton,Mass.01471 To OMer PHONE TOLL ME:1-800-225-M CAPEN MOUSE RENOVATION Smith College Northampton, MA Project Manual April 1995 CLIENT FnM'AV'Smith College Dining Services 0 2 1995 -1,1 i i 126 West Street -- Northampton, Massachusetts Paul Garvey, Director STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS Brennan& Partners, Inc. 214 Charles Lane Road New Braintree, MA 01531 MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING ENGINEERS Luchini Milfort Goodell & Associates 137 Billerica Road Chelmsford, MA 01824 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER Daniel O'Connell's Sons D _ 480 Hampden Street 3 Holyoke, MA 01040 .0� �, E�,j�or►s AMF ARCHITECT Livermore, Edwards & Associates 260 Bear Hill Road Waltham, MA 02154 (617) 890-8873